RTN 950 IDU Hardware Description PDF

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System
V100R003C00
IDU Hardware Description
Issue 03
Date 2011-04-10
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2011. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com
Issue 03 (2011-04-10) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
i
About This Document
Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.
Product Name Version
OptiX RTN 950 V100R003C00
iManager U2000 V100R003C00

Intended Audience
This document is intended for:
l Network planning engineer
l Hardware installation engineer
l Installation and commissioning engineer
l Field maintenance engineer
l Data configuration engineer
l System maintenance engineer
Before reading this document, you need to be familiar with the following:
l Basics of digital microwave communication
l Basics of the OptiX RTN 950
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk,
which if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury.
IDU Hardware Description About This Document
iii
Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level
of risk, which if not avoided, could result in
minor or moderate injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation,
which if not avoided, could result in
equipment damage, data loss, performance
degradation, or unexpected results.

Indicates a tip that may help you solve a
problem or save time.

Provides additional information to emphasize
or supplement important points of the main
text.

General Conventions
The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention Description
Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.
Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in
boldface. For example, log in as user root.
Italic Book titles are in italics.
Courier New Examples of information displayed on the screen are in
Courier New.

Command Conventions
The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.
Italic Command arguments are in italics.
[ ] Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.
{ x | y | ... } Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by
vertical bars. One item is selected.
About This Document
iv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
[ x | y | ... ] Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by
vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.
{ x | y | ... }
*
Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by
vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all
items can be selected.
[ x | y | ... ]
*
Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by
vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles
are in boldface. For example, click OK.
> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"
signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Update History
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Thus, the latest document issue contains all
updates made in previous issues.
Updates in Issue 03 (2011-04-10) Based on Product Version V100R003C00
This document is the third issue for the V100R003C00 product version.
Compared with the second issue, the content updates are as follows.
Section Description
Entire document Unified the expression structure of
dimensions.
Entire document Modified the description of the PROG
indicator.

This document is the second issue for the V100R003C00 product version.
IDU Hardware Description About This Document
v
Compared with the first issue, the content updates are as follows.
Section Description
D Weight and Power Consumption of Each
Board
Updated power consumption values of
specific boards.
Entire document Optimized the descriptions of working
principles for IF boards.
Entire document Fixed known bugs.

This document is the first issue for the V100R003C00 version.
About This Document
vi Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Contents
About This Document...................................................................................................................iii
1 Introduction.................................................................................................................................1-1
1.1 Network Application.......................................................................................................................................1-2
1.2 Components.....................................................................................................................................................1-3
1.3 Radio Link Forms............................................................................................................................................1-6
2 Chassis..........................................................................................................................................2-1
2.1 Chassis Structure.............................................................................................................................................2-2
2.2 Installation Mode.............................................................................................................................................2-2
2.3 Air Flow..........................................................................................................................................................2-2
2.4 IDU Labels......................................................................................................................................................2-3
3 Boards...........................................................................................................................................3-1
3.1 Board Appearance...........................................................................................................................................3-3
3.2 Board List........................................................................................................................................................3-4
3.3 CST..................................................................................................................................................................3-7
3.3.1 Version Description................................................................................................................................3-7
3.3.2 Functions and Features...........................................................................................................................3-8
3.3.3 Working Principle..................................................................................................................................3-9
3.3.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-12
3.3.5 DIP Switches and CF Card...................................................................................................................3-19
3.3.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-21
3.3.7 Board Parameter Settings.....................................................................................................................3-22
3.3.8 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................3-22
3.4 CSH...............................................................................................................................................................3-23
3.4.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-24
3.4.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-24
3.4.3 Working Principle................................................................................................................................3-27
3.4.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-30
3.4.5 DIP Switches and CF Card...................................................................................................................3-37
3.4.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-39
3.5 IF1.................................................................................................................................................................3-41
IDU Hardware Description Contents
vii
3.5.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................3-43
3.5.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-48
3.5.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-50
3.6 IFU2..............................................................................................................................................................3-53
3.6.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-60
3.6.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-62
3.7 IFX2..............................................................................................................................................................3-65
3.7.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-72
3.7.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-74
3.8 ISU2..............................................................................................................................................................3-78
3.8.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-85
3.8.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-87
3.9 ISX2..............................................................................................................................................................3-92
3.9.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-99
3.9.5 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................3-102
3.9.6 Board Parameter Settings...................................................................................................................3-103
3.9.7 Technical Specifications....................................................................................................................3-103
3.10 EM6T/EM6F.............................................................................................................................................3-107
3.10.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................3-107
3.10.2 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................3-107
Contents
viii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3.10.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................3-111
3.10.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-113
3.10.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-118
3.10.6 Board Feature Code..........................................................................................................................3-118
3.10.7 Board Parameter Settings.................................................................................................................3-119
3.10.8 Technical Specifications..................................................................................................................3-119
3.11 EFP8..........................................................................................................................................................3-121
3.11.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-128
3.11.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-131
3.12 SL1D.........................................................................................................................................................3-133
3.12.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-137
3.12.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-139
3.13 ML1/MD1.................................................................................................................................................3-141
3.13.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-146
3.13.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-150
3.14 SP3S/SP3D................................................................................................................................................3-152
3.14.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-156
3.14.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-160
3.15 AUX..........................................................................................................................................................3-162
ix
3.15.3 Working Principle............................................................................................................................3-163
3.15.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-164
3.15.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-167
3.16 PIU............................................................................................................................................................3-169
3.16.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-171
3.16.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-172
3.17 FAN...........................................................................................................................................................3-173
3.17.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-175
3.17.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-177
4 Accessories...................................................................................................................................4-1
4.1 E1 Panel...........................................................................................................................................................4-2
4.2 PDU.................................................................................................................................................................4-4
4.2.1 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................4-4
4.2.2 Functions and Working Principle...........................................................................................................4-5
4.2.3 Power Distribution Mode.......................................................................................................................4-6
5 Cables...........................................................................................................................................5-1
5.1 Power Cable....................................................................................................................................................5-3
5.2 PGND Cable....................................................................................................................................................5-3
5.2.1 IDU PGND Cable...................................................................................................................................5-4
5.2.2 E1 Panel PGND Cable...........................................................................................................................5-4
5.3 IF Jumper.........................................................................................................................................................5-5
5.4 XPIC Cable.....................................................................................................................................................5-6
5.5 Fiber Jumper....................................................................................................................................................5-7
5.6 E1 Cables.........................................................................................................................................................5-9
5.6.1 E1 Cable Connected to the External Equipment..................................................................................5-10
5.6.2 E1 Cable Connected to the E1 Panel....................................................................................................5-13
5.7 Orderwire Cable............................................................................................................................................5-15
5.8 Network Cable...............................................................................................................................................5-16
A Parameters Description...........................................................................................................A-1
A.1 Parameters for Network Management...........................................................................................................A-2
Contents
x Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A.1.1 Parameters for NE Management...........................................................................................................A-2
A.1.1.1 Parameter Description: NE Searching...............................................................................................A-2
A.1.1.2 Parameter Description: NE Creation.................................................................................................A-7
A.1.1.3 Parameter Description: Attribute_Changing NE IDs........................................................................A-9
A.1.1.4 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization.........................................................................A-10
A.1.1.5 Parameter Description: Localization Management of the NE Time...............................................A-13
A.1.1.6 Parameter Description: Standard NTP Key Management...............................................................A-14
A.1.1.7 Parameter Description: License Management.................................................................................A-15
A.1.1.8 Parameter Description: Automatic Disabling of the Functions of NEs...........................................A-16
A.1.2 Parameters for Communications Management...................................................................................A-17
A.1.2.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting......................................................A-18
A.1.2.2 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Rate Configuration...........................................A-19
A.1.2.3 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Transparent Transmission Management..........A-20
A.1.2.4 Parameter Description: ECC Management_Ethernet Port Extended ECC.....................................A-22
A.1.2.5 Parameter Description: NE ECC Link Management.......................................................................A-23
A.1.2.6 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management...........................A-24
A.1.2.7 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management Creation.............A-26
A.1.2.8 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_OSPF Parameter Settings.......................A-27
A.1.2.9 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack_Proxy ARP...................................................................A-31
A.1.2.10 Parameter Description: Port OSPF Setting....................................................................................A-32
A.1.2.11 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Network Layer Parameter.........................................A-32
A.1.2.12 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Routing Table............................................................A-33
A.1.2.13 Parameter Description: OSI Management_OSI Tunnel................................................................A-34
A.1.2.14 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Bandwidth Management.........................................A-38
A.1.2.15 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Port Setting..............................................................A-39
A.1.2.16 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Protocol Setting.......................................................A-40
A.1.2.17 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Access Control........................................................A-40
A.1.2.18 Parameter Description: Access Control.........................................................................................A-41
A.1.3 Parameters for Network Security Management..................................................................................A-42
A.1.3.1 Parameter Description: NE User Management...............................................................................A-42
A.1.3.2 Parameter Description: NE User Management_Creation................................................................A-43
A.1.3.3 Parameter Description: LCT Access Control..................................................................................A-45
A.2 Radio Link Parameters................................................................................................................................A-46
A.2.1 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC Workgroup_Creation.........................................A-47
A.2.2 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC............................................................................A-51
A.2.3 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection_Create.................................................................................A-58
A.2.4 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection..............................................................................................A-59
A.2.5 Parameter: IF 1+1 Protection_Create.................................................................................................A-61
A.2.6 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection..........................................................................................A-63
A.2.7 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration....................................................................A-66
A.3 Multiplex Section Protection Parameters....................................................................................................A-76
A.3.1 Parameter Description: Linear MSP_Creation...................................................................................A-76
xi
A.3.2 Parameter Description: Linear MSP...................................................................................................A-80
A.4 SDH/PDH Service Parameters....................................................................................................................A-84
A.4.1 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Creation..........................................................A-84
A.4.2 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_SNCP Service Creation..................................A-87
A.4.3 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Converting Normal Services Into SNCP Services
......................................................................................................................................................................A-90
A.4.4 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration..........................................................................A-94
A.4.5 Parameter Description: SNCP Service Control..................................................................................A-96
A.4.6 Parameter Description: TU_AIS Insertion.........................................................................................A-99
A.5 Parameters for Board Interfaces................................................................................................................A-100
A.5.1 PDH Port Parameters........................................................................................................................A-101
A.5.1.1 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Basic Attributes....................................................................A-101
A.5.1.2 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Advanced Attributes.............................................................A-102
A.5.2 Parameters for the Ports on Ethernet Boards....................................................................................A-106
A.5.2.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Basic Attributes.........................................................A-106
A.5.2.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow Control.............................................................A-110
A.5.2.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 Attributes.....................................................A-112
A.5.2.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Layer 3 Attributes.............................................................A-115
A.5.2.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced Attributes.................................................A-116
A.5.3 Serial Port Parameters......................................................................................................................A-118
A.5.3.1 Parameter Description: Serial Port_Basic Attributes....................................................................A-119
A.5.3.2 Parameter Description: Serial Port_Creation of Serial Ports.........................................................A-120
A.5.4 Microwave Interface Parameters......................................................................................................A-121
A.5.4.1 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes....................................................A-121
A.5.4.2 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes................................................A-122
A.5.4.3 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 3 Attributes................................................A-125
A.5.4.4 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes.............................................A-126
A.5.5 IF Board Parameters.........................................................................................................................A-130
A.5.5.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute.........................................................................A-130
A.5.5.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute...................................................................A-138
A.5.5.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid_AM Configuration_Advanced Attributes...................................A-139
A.5.5.4 Parameter Description: ATPC Adjustment Records.....................................................................A-140
A.5.5.5 Parameter Description: PRBS Test...............................................................................................A-141
A.5.6 ODU Parameters...............................................................................................................................A-142
A.5.6.1 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Radio Frequency Attribute............................................A-142
A.5.6.2 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Power Attributes............................................................A-144
A.5.6.3 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Equipment Information..................................................A-147
A.5.6.4 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Advanced Attributes......................................................A-148
A.5.7 Parameters for SDH Interface Boards..............................................................................................A-149
A.5.7.1 Parameter Description: SDH Interfaces........................................................................................A-150
A.5.7.2 Parameter Description: Automatic Laser Shutdown.....................................................................A-151
A.5.8 Parameters for PDH Interface Boards..............................................................................................A-152
A.5.8.1 Parameter Description: PDH Interfaces........................................................................................A-152
Contents
xii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A.5.8.2 Parameter Description: PRBS Test...............................................................................................A-154
A.5.9 Parameters for Overhead..................................................................................................................A-155
A.5.9.1 Parameter Description: Regenerator Section Overhead................................................................A-156
A.5.9.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs..............................................................................................A-157
A.5.9.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs............................................................................................A-158
A.6 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet Features on the Packet Plane..........................................A-159
A.6.1 Parameters for Ethernet Services......................................................................................................A-160
A.6.1.1 Parameter Description: E-Line Service_Creation.........................................................................A-160
A.6.1.2 Parameter Description: E-Line Service.........................................................................................A-180
A.6.1.3 Parameter Description: VLAN Forwarding Table Item_Creation................................................A-191
A.6.1.4 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service_Creation........................................................................A-192
A.6.1.5 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service........................................................................................A-198
A.6.1.6 Parameter Description: QinQ Link_Creation................................................................................A-209
A.6.2 Parameters for Ethernet Protocols....................................................................................................A-209
A.6.2.1 Parameter Description: ERPS Management_Creation..................................................................A-210
A.6.2.2 Parameter Description: ERPS Management..................................................................................A-212
A.6.2.3 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Creation.............................................A-218
A.6.2.4 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Configuration....................................A-220
A.6.2.5 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_ Bridge Parameters...............................................A-220
A.6.2.6 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_CIST Parameters..................................................A-226
A.6.2.7 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Running Information About the CIST.................A-228
A.6.2.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation Management_LAG Creation.......................A-236
A.6.2.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Link Aggregation........................................A-244
A.6.2.10 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Point-to-Point LPT.................................................A-245
A.6.2.11 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creating Point-to-Point LPT...................................A-247
A.6.2.12 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Point-to-Multipoint LPT.........................................A-247
A.6.2.13 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creating Point-to-Multipoint LPT..........................A-250
A.6.3 Parameters for the Ethernet OAM....................................................................................................A-254
A.6.3.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Domain Creation...A-255
A.6.3.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Association Creation
....................................................................................................................................................................A-256
A.6.3.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MEP Creation.............................A-256
A.6.3.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Remote MEP Creation................A-258
A.6.3.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MIP Creation...............................A-259
A.6.3.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LB Enabling................................A-259
A.6.3.7 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LT Enabling................................A-261
A.6.3.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Parameter...............................A-263
A.6.3.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Error Frame Monitoring.........A-265
A.6.4 QoS Parameters................................................................................................................................A-266
A.6.4.1 Parameter Description: Diffserv Domain Management................................................................A-267
A.6.4.2 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Management_Create...................................................A-273
A.6.4.3 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Applied Port_Modification.........................................A-280
A.6.4.4 Parameter Description: Policy Management.................................................................................A-282
xiii
A.6.4.5 Parameter Description: Port Policy...............................................................................................A-287
A.6.4.6 Parameter Description: Port Policy_Traffic Classification Configuration....................................A-292
A.6.4.7 Parameter Description: Port Shaping Management_Creation.......................................................A-303
A.7 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet Features on the EoPDH Plane.........................................A-305
A.7.1 Parameters for Ethernet Services......................................................................................................A-305
A.7.1.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Line Service_Creation...............................................................A-306
A.7.1.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Line Service_Creating QinQ-Based Ethernet Line Services....A-309
A.7.1.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Line Service..............................................................................A-313
A.7.1.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet LAN Service_Creation of Ethernet LAN Services Based on IEEE
802.1d/802.1q Bridge.................................................................................................................................A-316
A.7.1.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet LAN Service_Creating IEEE 802.1ad Bridge-Based Ethernet LAN
Service........................................................................................................................................................A-319
A.7.1.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet LAN Service.............................................................................A-324
A.7.1.7 Parameter Description: VLAN Filtering Table_Creation.............................................................A-329
A.7.1.8 Parameter Description: Aging Time of MAC Address Table Entries...........................................A-330
A.7.2 Parameters for Ethernet Protocols....................................................................................................A-331
A.7.2.1 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Protocol Enabling...........................................................A-332
A.7.2.2 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Bridge Parameters..........................................................A-333
A.7.2.3 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Port Parameters..............................................................A-334
A.7.2.4 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Bridge Running Information..........................................A-336
A.7.2.5 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Port Running Information..............................................A-337
A.7.2.6 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Point-to-Point Attribute..................................................A-338
A.7.2.7 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Protocol_Enabling........................................................A-339
A.7.2.8 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Protocol_Creation of Static Multicast Table Entries....A-340
A.7.2.9 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Protocol_Aging Time of Multicast Table Entries........A-341
A.7.2.10 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Creation of LAGs.....................................A-342
A.7.2.11 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Link Aggregation......................................A-344
A.7.2.12 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creation of Point-to-Point Service LPT.................A-345
A.7.2.13 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creation of Point-to-Multipoint Service LPT.........A-346
A.7.2.14 Parameter Description: Port Mirroring_Creation........................................................................A-347
A.7.3 Parameters for the Ethernet OAM....................................................................................................A-348
A.7.3.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MDs...............................................A-349
A.7.3.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MAs...............................................A-349
A.7.3.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MPs................................................A-350
A.7.3.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Enabling LB......................................................A-352
A.7.3.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Enabling LT......................................................A-353
A.7.3.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM_OAM Parameter.....................................................A-354
A.7.3.7 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM_OAM Error Frame Monitoring..............................A-355
A.7.3.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM_Remote OAM Parameter........................................A-356
A.7.4 QoS Parameters................................................................................................................................A-357
A.7.4.1 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of Flows.....................................................A-358
A.7.4.2 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of CAR.......................................................A-360
A.7.4.3 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of CoS........................................................A-362
Contents
xiv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A.7.4.4 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of CAR/CoS...............................................A-363
A.7.4.5 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Shaping Management of Egress Queues..................A-364
A.7.5 Parameters for the Ports on Ethernet Boards....................................................................................A-365
A.7.5.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_External Port.....................................................................A-365
A.7.5.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Internal Port......................................................................A-372
A.7.5.3 Parameter Description: Type Field of QinQ Frames.....................................................................A-378
A.8 RMON Parameters....................................................................................................................................A-378
A.8.1 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_Statistics Group.......................................................A-378
A.8.2 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Group..........................................................A-379
A.8.3 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Control Group............................................A-380
A.8.4 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_RMON Setting........................................................A-381
A.9 Parameters for MPLS/PWE3 Services......................................................................................................A-383
A.9.1 MPLS Tunnel Parameters.................................................................................................................A-383
A.9.1.1 Parameter Description: Basic Configurations of MPLS Tunnels..................................................A-384
A.9.1.2 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Static Tunnel...........................................A-385
A.9.1.3 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Creation of Unidirectional Tunnels.........A-390
A.9.1.4 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Creation of Bidirectional Tunnels...........A-395
A.9.1.5 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_OAM Parameters.....................................A-400
A.9.1.6 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_FDI..........................................................A-405
A.9.1.7 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_LSP Ping..................................................A-406
A.9.1.8 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_LSP Traceroute........................................A-409
A.9.1.9 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW Management.......................................................A-412
A.9.1.10 Parameter Description: PW Management_MS-PW Creation.....................................................A-417
A.9.1.11 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW OAM.................................................................A-428
A.9.1.12 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW Ping...................................................................A-432
A.9.1.13 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW Traceroute.........................................................A-435
A.9.1.14 Parameter Description: MPLS APS Protection Management.....................................................A-437
A.9.1.15 Parameter Description: Tunnel Protection Group_Creation.......................................................A-440
A.9.1.16 Parameter Description: PW APS Protection Group_Creation....................................................A-445
A.9.1.17 Parameter Description: Slave Protection Pair of a PW APS Protection Group_Creation...........A-456
A.9.2 CES Parameters................................................................................................................................A-462
A.9.2.1 Parameter Description: CES Service Management.......................................................................A-462
A.9.2.2 Parameter Description: CES Service Management_Creation.......................................................A-472
A.9.3 ATM Parameters..............................................................................................................................A-485
A.9.3.1 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Group Management...............................A-486
A.9.3.2 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_Bound Path Configuration.............................A-491
A.9.3.3 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Group Status..........................................A-493
A.9.3.4 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Link Status.............................................A-494
A.9.3.5 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_ATM Interface Management..........................A-494
A.9.3.6 Parameter Description: Configuration of ATM Service Class Mapping Table............................A-496
A.9.3.7 Parameter Description: Configuration of ATM Service Class Mapping Table_Creation.............A-498
A.9.3.8 Parameter Description: ATM Policy Management.......................................................................A-500
xv
A.9.3.9 Parameter Description: ATM Policy Management_Creation.......................................................A-504
A.9.3.10 Parameter Description: ATM Service Management...................................................................A-509
A.9.3.11 Parameter Description: ATM Service Management_Creation....................................................A-518
A.9.3.12 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_Segment and End Attributes.......................A-530
A.9.3.13 Parameter Description: ATM OMA Management_CC Activation Status..................................A-534
A.9.3.14 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_Remote End Loopback Status....................A-537
A.9.3.15 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_LLID...........................................................A-540
A.10 Clock Parameters.....................................................................................................................................A-541
A.10.1 Physical Clock Parameters.............................................................................................................A-541
A.10.1.1 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table..................................................................A-542
A.10.1.2 Parameter Description: Priority Table for the PLL Clock Source of the External Clock Port....A-544
A.10.1.3 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Subnet.....................................................A-546
A.10.1.4 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Quality.....................................................A-549
A.10.1.5 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_SSM Output Control..........................................A-552
A.10.1.6 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_Clock ID Enabling Status...................................A-553
A.10.1.7 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Restoration Parameters..........A-554
A.10.1.8 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Switching...............................A-556
A.10.1.9 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Switching Conditions.............A-557
A.10.1.10 Parameter Description: Output Phase-Locked Source of the External Clock Source...............A-558
A.10.1.11 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Status..............................................................A-561
A.10.2 CES ACR Clock Parameters..........................................................................................................A-562
A.10.2.1 Parameter Description: ACR Clock Source................................................................................A-563
A.10.2.2 Parameter Description: Clock Domain........................................................................................A-563
A.10.2.3 Parameter Description: Clock Domain_Creation........................................................................A-564
A.10.3 Parameter Description: Auxiliary Ports..........................................................................................A-565
A.11 Parameters for the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces...........................................................................A-565
A.11.1 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General...................................................................................A-566
A.11.2 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Advanced................................................................................A-567
A.11.3 Parameter Description: Orderwire_F1 Data Port...........................................................................A-568
A.11.4 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Broadcast Data Port................................................................A-569
A.11.5 Parameter Description: Environment Monitoring Interface...........................................................A-570
B Board Loopback Types............................................................................................................B-1
C Indicators of Boards.................................................................................................................C-1
D Weight and Power Consumption of Each Board...............................................................D-1
E Glossary.......................................................................................................................................E-1
E.1 0-9...................................................................................................................................................................E-2
E.2 A-E.................................................................................................................................................................E-2
E.3 F-J................................................................................................................................................................. E-11
E.4 K-O............................................................................................................................................................... E-16
E.5 P-T................................................................................................................................................................ E-22
Contents
xvi Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
E.6 U-Z............................................................................................................................................................... E-31
xvii
Figures
Figure 1-1 Microwave transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 950..................................................1-2
Figure 1-2 Appearance of the IDU 950................................................................................................................1-4
Figure 1-3 Direct mounting..................................................................................................................................1-6
Figure 1-4 Separate mounting..............................................................................................................................1-6
Figure 2-1 Chassis structure of the IDU 950........................................................................................................2-2
Figure 2-2 Air flow in an IDU 950 chassis..........................................................................................................2-3
Figure 2-3 Positions of the IDU 950 labels..........................................................................................................2-5
Figure 3-1 Appearance of an ISU2 board.............................................................................................................3-3
Figure 3-2 Bar code..............................................................................................................................................3-3
Figure 3-3 IDU slot layout...................................................................................................................................3-4
Figure 3-4 Functional block diagram of the CST...............................................................................................3-10
Figure 3-5 Functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit.........................................................................3-11
Figure 3-6 Front panel of the CST..................................................................................................................... 3-12
Figure 3-7 Front view of the RJ45 connector.....................................................................................................3-14
Figure 3-8 Incorrect connections between the NMS/COM port and the EXT port........................................... 3-16
Figure 3-9 Positions of the DIP switches and CF card.......................................................................................3-20
Figure 3-10 Slot for the CST in the IDU chassis............................................................................................... 3-21
Figure 3-11 Logical slot of the CST on the NMS..............................................................................................3-21
Figure 3-12 Functional block diagram of the CSH............................................................................................3-28
Figure 3-13 Functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit.......................................................................3-30
Figure 3-14 Front panel of the CSH...................................................................................................................3-31
Figure 3-15 Front view of the RJ45 connector...................................................................................................3-33
Figure 3-16 Incorrect connections between the NMS/COM port and the EXT port......................................... 3-34
Figure 3-17 Positions of the DIP switches and CF card.....................................................................................3-38
Figure 3-18 Slot for the CSH in the IDU chassis...............................................................................................3-39
Figure 3-19 Logical slot of the CSH on the NMS..............................................................................................3-39
Figure 3-20 Functional block diagram of the IF1.............................................................................................. 3-44
Figure 3-21 Front panel of the IF1.....................................................................................................................3-48
Figure 3-22 Slots for the IF1 in the IDU chassis................................................................................................3-50
Figure 3-23 Logical slots of the IF1 on the NMS.............................................................................................. 3-50
Figure 3-24 Functional block diagram of the IFU2........................................................................................... 3-57
Figure 3-25 Front panel of the IFU2..................................................................................................................3-60
Figure 3-26 Slots for the IFU2 in the IDU chassis.............................................................................................3-62
IDU Hardware Description Figures
xix
Figure 3-27 Logical slots of the IFU2 on the NMS........................................................................................... 3-62
Figure 3-28 Functional block diagram of the IFX2...........................................................................................3-69
Figure 3-29 Front panel of the IFX2..................................................................................................................3-72
Figure 3-30 Slots for the IFX2 in the IDU chassis.............................................................................................3-75
Figure 3-31 Logical slots for the logical boards of the IFX2.............................................................................3-75
Figure 3-32 Functional block diagram of the ISU2...........................................................................................3-82
Figure 3-33 Front panel of the ISU2..................................................................................................................3-85
Figure 3-34 Slots for the ISU2 in the IDU chassis.............................................................................................3-87
Figure 3-35 Logical slots of the ISU2 on the NMS...........................................................................................3-88
Figure 3-36 Functional block diagram of the ISX2...........................................................................................3-96
Figure 3-37 Front panel of the ISX2..................................................................................................................3-99
Figure 3-38 Slots for the ISX2 in the IDU chassis...........................................................................................3-102
Figure 3-39 Logical slots of the ISX2 on the NMS.........................................................................................3-102
Figure 3-40 Functional block diagram.............................................................................................................3-111
Figure 3-41 Front panel of the EM6T..............................................................................................................3-113
Figure 3-42 Front panel of the EM6F..............................................................................................................3-113
Figure 3-43 Front view of the RJ45 connector.................................................................................................3-116
Figure 3-44 Ports of the SFP optical module...................................................................................................3-117
Figure 3-45 Slots for the EM6T/EM6F in the IDU chassis.............................................................................3-118
Figure 3-46 Logical slots of the EM6T/EM6F on the NMS............................................................................3-118
Figure 3-47 Functional block diagram of the EFP8.........................................................................................3-126
Figure 3-48 Front panel of the EFP8................................................................................................................3-128
Figure 3-50 Slots for the EFP8 in the IDU chassis..........................................................................................3-131
Figure 3-51 Logical slots of the EFP8 on the NMS.........................................................................................3-131
Figure 3-52 Functional block diagram of the SL1D........................................................................................3-135
Figure 3-53 Front panel of the SL1D...............................................................................................................3-137
Figure 3-54 Slots for the SL1D in the IDU chassis..........................................................................................3-139
Figure 3-55 Logical slots of the SL1D on the NMS........................................................................................3-139
Figure 3-56 Functional block diagram of the ML1/MD1................................................................................3-144
Figure 3-57 Front panel of the ML1.................................................................................................................3-146
Figure 3-58 Front panel of the MD1................................................................................................................3-146
Figure 3-59 Front view of an Anea 96 connector.............................................................................................3-148
Figure 3-60 Slots for the ML1/MD1 in the IDU chassis..................................................................................3-150
Figure 3-61 Logical slots of the ML1/MD1 on the NMS................................................................................3-150
Figure 3-62 Functional block diagram of the SP3S/SP3D...............................................................................3-154
Figure 3-63 Front panel of the SP3S................................................................................................................3-156
Figure 3-64 Front panel of the SP3D...............................................................................................................3-156
Figure 3-65 Front view of an Anea 96 connector.............................................................................................3-158
Figure 3-66 Slots for the SP3S/SP3D in the IDU chassis................................................................................3-160
Figure 3-67 Logical slots of the SP3S/SP3D on the NMS...............................................................................3-160
Figure 3-68 Functional block diagram of the AUX.........................................................................................3-163
Figures
xx Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Figure 3-69 Front panel of the AUX................................................................................................................3-164
Figure 3-71 Slots for the AUX in the IDU chassis...........................................................................................3-167
Figure 3-72 Logical slots of the AUX on the NMS.........................................................................................3-167
Figure 3-73 Functional block diagram of the PIU...........................................................................................3-170
Figure 3-74 Front panel of the PIU..................................................................................................................3-171
Figure 3-75 Slots for the PIU in the IDU chassis.............................................................................................3-172
Figure 3-76 Logical slots of the PIU on the NMS...........................................................................................3-173
Figure 3-77 Functional block diagram of the FAN..........................................................................................3-174
Figure 3-78 Front panel of the FAN.................................................................................................................3-176
Figure 3-79 Slot for the FAN in the IDU chassis.............................................................................................3-177
Figure 3-80 Logical slot of the FAN on the NMS...........................................................................................3-177
Figure 4-1 Front panel of an E1 panel..................................................................................................................4-2
Figure 4-2 Front view of an E1 port (E1 panel)...................................................................................................4-3
Figure 4-3 Front panel of the PDU.......................................................................................................................4-4
Figure 4-4 Functional block diagram of the PDU................................................................................................4-6
Figure 4-5 Interior of the PDU in DC-C mode ...................................................................................................4-7
Figure 4-6 Interior of the PDU in DC-I mode .....................................................................................................4-7
Figure 5-1 Power cable.........................................................................................................................................5-3
Figure 5-2 IDU PGND cable................................................................................................................................5-4
Figure 5-3 E1 panel PGND cable.........................................................................................................................5-5
Figure 5-4 IF jumper............................................................................................................................................5-6
Figure 5-5 XPIC cable..........................................................................................................................................5-7
Figure 5-6 LC/PC connector................................................................................................................................5-8
Figure 5-7 SC/PC connector.................................................................................................................................5-9
Figure 5-8 FC/PC connector.................................................................................................................................5-9
Figure 5-9 E1 cable connected to the external equipment................................................................................. 5-10
Figure 5-10 E1 cable connected to the E1 panel................................................................................................5-14
Figure 5-11 Orderwire cable.............................................................................................................................. 5-16
Figure 5-12 Network cable.................................................................................................................................5-18
IDU Hardware Description Figures
xxi
Tables
Table 1-1 Features of the IDU 950.......................................................................................................................1-3
Table 1-2 RTN 600 ODUs supported by the OptiX RTN 950.............................................................................1-4
Table 1-3 RTN XMC ODUs supported by the OptiX RTN 950..........................................................................1-5
Table 1-4 Radio link forms supported by the OptiX RTN 950............................................................................1-7
Table 2-1 Description of the IDU labels..............................................................................................................2-3
Table 3-1 List of IDU boards...............................................................................................................................3-4
Table 3-2 Functions and features that the CST supports......................................................................................3-8
Table 3-3 Status explanation for indicators on the CST.....................................................................................3-12
Table 3-4 Description of the clock ports and management ports.......................................................................3-14
Table 3-5 Pin assignments for the NMS/COM port...........................................................................................3-14
Table 3-6 Pin assignments for the EXT port......................................................................................................3-15
Table 3-7 Status explanation for the indicators of the RJ45 connector..............................................................3-15
Table 3-8 Pin assignments for the CLK/TOD1 port...........................................................................................3-16
Table 3-9 Pin assignments for the TOD2 port....................................................................................................3-17
Table 3-10 Buttons.............................................................................................................................................3-19
Table 3-11 Setting DIP switches........................................................................................................................3-20
Table 3-12 Slot allocation ..................................................................................................................................3-22
Table 3-13 Clock timing and synchronization performance..............................................................................3-22
Table 3-14 Wayside service interface performance...........................................................................................3-23
Table 3-15 Mechanical behavior........................................................................................................................3-23
Table 3-16 Functions and features that the CSH supports.................................................................................3-24
Table 3-17 MPLS/PWE3 functions....................................................................................................................3-26
Table 3-18 QoS functions...................................................................................................................................3-27
Table 3-19 Status explanation for indicators on the CSH..................................................................................3-31
Table 3-20 Description of the clock ports and management ports.....................................................................3-32
Table 3-21 Pin assignments for the NMS/COM port.........................................................................................3-33
Table 3-22 Pin assignments for the EXT port....................................................................................................3-33
Table 3-23 Status explanation for the indicators of the RJ45 connector............................................................3-34
Table 3-24 Pin assignments for the CLK/TOD1 port.........................................................................................3-35
Table 3-25 Pin assignments for the TOD2 port..................................................................................................3-36
Table 3-26 Buttons.............................................................................................................................................3-37
Table 3-27 Setting DIP switches........................................................................................................................3-38
IDU Hardware Description Tables
xxiii
Table 3-29 Clock timing and synchronization performance..............................................................................3-40
Table 3-30 Wayside service interface performance...........................................................................................3-41
Table 3-32 Functions and features that the IF1 supports....................................................................................3-42
Table 3-33 Signal processing in the receive direction of the IF1.......................................................................3-44
Table 3-34 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the IF1.....................................................................3-46
Table 3-35 Status explanation for indicators on the IF1....................................................................................3-48
Table 3-36 Description of the Ports ...................................................................................................................3-49
Table 3-38 SDH/PDH microwave work modes (IF1 board)..............................................................................3-51
Table 3-39 IF performance.................................................................................................................................3-52
Table 3-40 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem.................................................................3-52
Table 3-42 Functions and features that the IFU2 supports.................................................................................3-54
Table 3-43 Ethernet service functions that the IFU2 supports...........................................................................3-55
Table 3-44 Signal processing in the receive direction of the IFU2....................................................................3-57
Table 3-45 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the IFU2..................................................................3-59
Table 3-46 Status explanation for indicators on the IFU2..................................................................................3-60
Table 3-49 Integrated IP microwave work modes (IFU2 board).......................................................................3-63
Table 3-53 Functions and features that the IFX2 supports.................................................................................3-66
Table 3-54 Ethernet service functions that the IFX2 supports...........................................................................3-68
Table 3-55 Signal processing in the receive direction of the IFX2....................................................................3-69
Table 3-56 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the IFX2..................................................................3-71
Table 3-57 Status explanation for indicators on the IFX2..................................................................................3-72
Table 3-58 Description of the ports....................................................................................................................3-74
Table 3-60 Integrated IP microwave work modes (IFX2 board).......................................................................3-76
Table 3-64 Functions and features that the ISU2 supports.................................................................................3-79
Table 3-65 Ethernet service functions that the ISU2 supports...........................................................................3-80
Table 3-66 Signal processing in the receive direction of the ISU2....................................................................3-82
Table 3-67 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the ISU2..................................................................3-84
Table 3-68 Status explanation for indicators on the ISU2..................................................................................3-85
Tables
xxiv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Table 3-71 SDH/PDH microwave work modes (ISU2/ISX2 board).................................................................3-89
Table 3-72 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISU2/ISX2 board, Native E1 + Ethernet service)..............3-89
Table 3-73 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISU2 board, Native STM-1 + Ethernet service)................3-90
Table 3-77 Functions and features that the ISX2 supports.................................................................................3-93
Table 3-78 Ethernet service functions that the ISX2 supports...........................................................................3-95
Table 3-79 Signal processing in the receive direction of the ISX2....................................................................3-96
Table 3-80 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the ISX2..................................................................3-98
Table 3-81 Status explanation for indicators on the ISX2................................................................................3-100
Table 3-82 Description of the ports..................................................................................................................3-101
Table 3-83 Slot allocation ................................................................................................................................3-102
Table 3-84 SDH/PDH microwave work modes (ISU2/ISX2 board)...............................................................3-103
Table 3-85 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISU2/ISX2 board, Native E1 + Ethernet service)............3-103
Table 3-86 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISX2 board, Native STM-1 + Ethernet service)..............3-105
Table 3-87 IF performance...............................................................................................................................3-106
Table 3-88 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem...............................................................3-106
Table 3-89 Mechanical behavior......................................................................................................................3-106
Table 3-90 Functions and features that the EM6T/EM6F supports.................................................................3-108
Table 3-91 Signal processing in the receive direction......................................................................................3-111
Table 3-92 Signal processing in the transmit direction....................................................................................3-112
Table 3-93 Status explanation for indicators on the EM6T/EM6F..................................................................3-113
Table 3-94 Description of the ports on the EM6T............................................................................................3-115
Table 3-95 Description of the ports on the EM6F............................................................................................3-115
Table 3-96 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI mode..................................................................3-116
Table 3-97 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI-X mode.............................................................3-117
Table 3-98 Status explanation for the indicators of the RJ45 connector..........................................................3-117
Table 3-99 Slot configuration for the EM6T/EM6F........................................................................................3-118
Table 3-100 Board feature code of the EM6F..................................................................................................3-119
Table 3-101 Performance of the GE optical interface .....................................................................................3-119
Table 3-102 GE electric interface performance................................................................................................3-120
Table 3-103 FE electric interface performance................................................................................................3-120
Table 3-104 Mechanical behavior ...................................................................................................................3-121
Table 3-105 Functions and features that the EFP8 supports............................................................................3-122
Table 3-106 Signal processing in the receive direction of the EFP8................................................................3-126
Table 3-107 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the EFP8..............................................................3-127
Table 3-108 Status explanation for indicators on the EFP8.............................................................................3-128
Table 3-109 Description of the ports on the EFP8...........................................................................................3-129
Table 3-110 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI mode................................................................3-130
Table 3-111 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI-X mode...........................................................3-130
Table 3-112 Status explanation for the indicators of the RJ45 connector........................................................3-131
xxv
Table 3-113 Slot allocation...............................................................................................................................3-132
Table 3-114 FE electric interface performance................................................................................................3-132
Table 3-115 Mechanical behavior....................................................................................................................3-132
Table 3-116 Functions and features that the SL1D supports............................................................................3-134
Table 3-117 Signal processing in the receive direction of the SL1D...............................................................3-135
Table 3-118 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the SL1D............................................................. 3-136
Table 3-119 Status explanation for indicators on the SL1D............................................................................ 3-137
Table 3-120 Description of the ports ...............................................................................................................3-138
Table 3-122 Board feature code of the SL1D...................................................................................................3-140
Table 3-123 STM-1 optical interface performance..........................................................................................3-140
Table 3-125 Functions and features that the ML1/MD1 supports....................................................................3-142
Table 3-126 Signal processing in the receive direction of the ML1/MD1.......................................................3-145
Table 3-127 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the ML1/MD1..................................................... 3-145
Table 3-128 Status explanation for indicators on the ML1/MD1.................................................................... 3-147
Table 3-129 Description of the ports on the ML1............................................................................................3-147
Table 3-130 Description of the ports on the MD1............................................................................................3-147
Table 3-131 Pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector.................................................................................3-148
Table 3-133 Board feature code of the ML1/MD1...........................................................................................3-151
Table 3-134 E1 interface performance.............................................................................................................3-151
Table 3-136 Functions and features that the SP3S/SP3D supports..................................................................3-153
Table 3-137 Signal processing in the receive direction of the SP3S/SP3D..................................................... 3-154
Table 3-138 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the SP3S/SP3D....................................................3-155
Table 3-139 Status explanation for indicators on the SP3S/SP3D...................................................................3-156
Table 3-140 Description of the ports on the SP3S........................................................................................... 3-157
Table 3-141 Description of the ports on the SP3D...........................................................................................3-157
Table 3-142 Pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector.................................................................................3-158
Table 3-144 Board feature code of the SP3S/SP3D.........................................................................................3-161
Table 3-145 E1 interface performance.............................................................................................................3-161
Table 3-147 Functions and features that the AUX supports............................................................................ 3-162
Table 3-148 Status explanation for indicators on the AUX............................................................................. 3-164
Table 3-149 Description of the auxiliary ports and management ports............................................................3-165
Table 3-150 Pin assignments for the F1/S1 port.............................................................................................. 3-166
Table 3-151 Pin assignments for the ALMI port..............................................................................................3-166
Table 3-152 Pin assignments for the ALMO port............................................................................................3-166
Table 3-154 Orderwire interface performance.................................................................................................3-168
Tables
xxvi Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Table 3-155 Synchronous data interface performance.....................................................................................3-168
Table 3-156 Asynchronous data interface performance...................................................................................3-168
Table 3-158 Functions and features that the PIU supports...............................................................................3-170
Table 3-159 Status explanation for indicators on the PIU................................................................................3-171
Table 3-160 Description of the ports on the PIU..............................................................................................3-172
Table 3-161 Technical specifications for the PIU............................................................................................3-173
Table 3-162 Functions and features that the FAN supports.............................................................................3-174
Table 3-163 Adjustment of the fan rotating speed...........................................................................................3-175
Table 3-164 Status explanation for indicators on the FAN..............................................................................3-176
Table 3-165 Technical specifications for the FAN...........................................................................................3-177
Table 4-1 Port description of an E1 panel............................................................................................................4-2
Table 4-2 Pin assignments for an E1 port (E1 panel)...........................................................................................4-3
Table 4-3 Ports on the PDU..................................................................................................................................4-5
Table 5-1 Power cable specifications...................................................................................................................5-3
Table 5-2 Types of fiber jumpers.........................................................................................................................5-7
Table 5-3 Pin assignments for a 75-ohm E1 cable.............................................................................................5-11
Table 5-4 Pin assignments for a 120-ohm E1 cable...........................................................................................5-12
Table 5-5 Pin assignments for the E1 cable terminated with an Anea 96 connector and a DB37 connector
.............................................................................................................................................................................5-14
Table 5-6 Pin assignments for the orderwire cable............................................................................................5-16
Table 5-7 Pin assignments for MDIs..................................................................................................................5-16
Table 5-8 Pin assignments for MDI-Xs..............................................................................................................5-17
Table 5-9 Pin assignments for the straight-through cable..................................................................................5-18
Table 5-10 Pin assignments for the crossover cable...........................................................................................5-18
Table A-1 Parameters on the main interface...................................................................................................A-100
Table A-2 Methods used by Ethernet interfaces to process data frames.........................................................A-114
Table A-3 Data frame processing....................................................................................................................A-124
Table A-4 Service direction of UNI-UNI........................................................................................................A-160
Table A-5 Service direction of UNI-NNI (carried by PWs)............................................................................A-165
Table A-6 Service direction of UNI-NNI (carried by QinQ links)..................................................................A-168
Table A-7 Service direction of NNI-NNI........................................................................................................A-170
Table A-8 Parameters on the main interface...................................................................................................A-306
Table A-9 Parameters for port attributes.........................................................................................................A-308
Table A-10 Parameters for bound paths..........................................................................................................A-308
Table A-11 Parameters on the main interface.................................................................................................A-309
Table A-12 Parameters of port attributes.........................................................................................................A-312
Table A-14 Parameters on the main interface (Display QinQ Shared Service is not selected)....................A-314
Table A-15 Parameters on the main interface (Display QinQ Shared Service is selected)..........................A-314
Table A-16 Parameters for port attributes.......................................................................................................A-315
xxvii
Table A-19 Parameters for mounting services................................................................................................A-317
Table A-20 Parameters for mounting configuration........................................................................................A-318
Table A-23 Parameters of service mounting...................................................................................................A-320
Table A-24 Parameters of service mounting...................................................................................................A-322
Table A-27 Parameters for mounting services................................................................................................A-324
Table A-28 Parameters for VLAN filtering table............................................................................................A-326
Table A-29 Parameters for VLAN unicast......................................................................................................A-327
Table A-30 Parameters for disabling MAC addresses....................................................................................A-328
Table A-32 Parameters for self-learned MAC addresses................................................................................A-328
Table A-33 Parameters for VLAN MAC address table capacity....................................................................A-329
Table A-34 Parameters for VB port MAC address table capacity..................................................................A-329
Table A-46 Parameters for advanced attributes...............................................................................................A-352
Table A-57 Parameters for the basic attributes................................................................................................A-366
Table A-58 Parameters for flow control..........................................................................................................A-367
Table A-59 Parameters for the tag attributes...................................................................................................A-369
Table A-60 Parameters for the network attributes...........................................................................................A-369
Tables
xxviii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Table A-61 Parameters for the advanced attributes.........................................................................................A-370
Table A-62 Methods used by ports to process data frames.............................................................................A-371
Table A-63 Parameters for the tag attributes...................................................................................................A-372
Table A-64 Parameters for encapsulation or mapping....................................................................................A-373
Table A-65 Parameters for the network attributes...........................................................................................A-374
Table A-66 Parameters for the LCAS.............................................................................................................A-374
Table A-68 Methods used by ports to process data frames.............................................................................A-377
Table A-70 CES services.................................................................................................................................A-413
Table A-71 E-Line services.............................................................................................................................A-414
Table A-72 ATM services...............................................................................................................................A-415
Table A-89 Mapping relationship between ATM service types, traffic types, and traffic parameters...........A-503
Table A-90 Mapping relationship between ATM service types, ATM traffic types, and traffic parameters
..........................................................................................................................................................................A-508
Table B-1 Loopback types that service interface boards support........................................................................B-1
Table C-1 Status explanation for indicators on the CST.....................................................................................C-1
Table C-2 Status explanation for indicators on the CSH.....................................................................................C-2
Table C-3 Status explanation for indicators on the IF1.......................................................................................C-4
Table C-4 Status explanation for indicators on the IFU2....................................................................................C-5
Table C-5 Status explanation for indicators on the ISU2....................................................................................C-6
Table C-6 Status explanation for indicators on the IFX2....................................................................................C-7
Table C-7 Status explanation for indicators on the ISX2....................................................................................C-8
Table C-8 Status explanation for indicators on the EM6T/EM6F.....................................................................C-10
Table C-9 Status explanation for indicators on the EFP8..................................................................................C-11
Table C-10 Status explanation for indicators on the SL1D...............................................................................C-12
xxix
Table C-11 Status explanation for indicators on the SP3S/SP3D.....................................................................C-13
Table C-12 Status explanation for indicators on the ML1/MD1.......................................................................C-13
Table C-13 Status explanation for indicators on the AUX................................................................................C-14
Table C-14 Status explanation for indicators on the PIU..................................................................................C-14
Table C-15 Status explanation for indicators on the FAN................................................................................C-14
Table D-1 Weight and power consumption of each board..................................................................................D-1
Tables
xxx Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
1 Introduction
About This Chapter
The OptiX RTN 950 is a product in the OptiX RTN 900 radio transmission system series.
1.1 Network Application
The OptiX RTN 900 is a new generation TDM/Hybrid/Packet integrate microwave transmission
system developed by Huawei. It provides a seamless microwave transmission solution for a
mobile communication network or private network.
1.2 Components
The OptiX RTN 950 adopts a split structure. The system consists of the IDU 950 and the ODU.
Each ODU is connected to the IDU through an IF cable.
1.3 Radio Link Forms
The OptiX RTN 950 provides the radio links of different forms in which different IF boards and
ODUs are configured for different microwave application scenarios.
IDU Hardware Description 1 Introduction
1-1
1.1 Network Application
The OptiX RTN 900 is a new generation TDM/Hybrid/Packet integrate microwave transmission
system developed by Huawei. It provides a seamless microwave transmission solution for a
mobile communication network or private network.
OptiX RTN 900 Product Family
The OptiX RTN 900 products are available in three types: OptiX RTN 910, OptiX RTN 950,
and OptiX RTN 980. Users can choose an appropriate type based on the actual requirements.
l The IDU of the OptiX RTN 910 is 1U high and supports one or two IF boards.
l The IDU of the OptiX RTN 950 is 2U high and supports one to six IF boards.
l The IDU of the OptiX RTN 980 is 5U high and supports one to fourteen IF boards.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 900 product series uses the same types of IF boards and service interface boards.
The OptiX RTN 900 products provide a variety of service interfaces and can be installed easily
and configured flexibly. It provides a solution that is integrated with the TDM microwave,
Hybrid microwave, and Packet microwave based on the network requirements. It supports the
smooth upgrade from the TDM microwave to the Hybrid microwave, and from the Hybrid
microwave to the Packet microwave. The solution is able to adapt to changing service scenarios
due to evolutions in radio mobile networks. Therefore, this solution meets the transmission
requirements of not only 2G and 3G networks, but also future LTE and 4G networks.
OptiX RTN 950
The OptiX RTN 950 is microwave equipment deployed at the access and convergence layers.
Figure 1-1 shows the microwave transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 950.
Figure 1-1 Microwave transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 950
OptiX RTN 950 BTS NodeB BSC RNC
FE
E1
FE
E1
E1
E1
FE
E1
E1
FE
FE/GE
E1/
STM-1
Regional TDM
Network
E1/
STM-1
FE/GE
FE/GE
Regional Packet
Network
MSTP
1 Introduction
1-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

NOTE
l In the solution, the OptiX RTN 950 is connected to an RNC and BSC directly or through a regional backhaul
network.
l The OptiX RTN 950 provides a wide range of interfaces and service bearer technologies to adapt to the
regional backhaul network. The regional backhaul network can be a time-division multiplexing (TDM)
network or packet switching network (PSN).
l The OptiX RTN 950 supports the Ethernet over PDH (EoPDH) function, and therefore packet services
can be backhauled through a TDM network.
l The OptiX RTN 950 supports the pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) technology, and
therefore TDM, ATM, and Ethernet services can be backhauled through a PSN.
1.2 Components
The OptiX RTN 950 adopts a split structure. The system consists of the IDU 950 and the ODU.
Each ODU is connected to the IDU through an IF cable.
IDU 950
The IDU 950 is the indoor unit for an OptiX RTN 950 system. It receives and multiplexes
services, performs service processing and IF processing, and provides the system control and
communications function.
Table 1-1 lists the basic features of the IDU 950.
Table 1-1 Features of the IDU 950
Item Description
Chassis height 2U
Pluggable Supported
Number of microwave
directions
1 to 6
RF configuration mode 1+0 non-protection configuration
N+0 non-protection configuration (N 5)
1+1 protection configuration
N+1 protection configuration (N 4)
XPIC configuration

1-3
Figure 1-2 Appearance of the IDU 950

ODU
The ODU is the outdoor unit for the OptiX RTN 900. It converts frequencies and amplifies
signals.
The OptiX RTN 900 product series can use the RTN 600 ODU and RTN XMC ODU, covering
6 GHz to 38 GHz entire frequency band.
NOTE
Unlike the other frequency bands that use 14 MHz, 28 MHz, or 56 MHz channel spacing, the 18 GHz
frequency band uses 13.75 MHz, 27.5 MHz, or 55 MHz channel spacing correspondingly.
Table 1-2 RTN 600 ODUs supported by the OptiX RTN 950
Item Description
Standard Power
ODU
High Power ODU Low Capacity for
PDH ODU
ODU type SP, SPA HP LP
Frequency band 7/8/11/13/15/18/23/
26/38 GHz (SP
ODU)
6/7/8/11/13/15/18/2
3 GHz (SPA ODU)
6/7/8/10/10.5/11/13/
15/18/23/26/28/32/3
8 GHz
7/8/11/13/15/18/23
GHz
1 Introduction
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Item Description
Standard Power
ODU
High Power ODU Low Capacity for
PDH ODU
Microwave
modulation mode
QPSK/16QAM/
32QAM/64QAM/
128QAM/256QAM
(SP)
QPSK/16QAM/
32QAM/64QAM/
128QAM (SPA)
QPSK/16QAM/
32QAM/64QAM/
128QAM/256QAM
QPSK/16QAM
Channel spacing 3.5/7/14/28 MHz 7/14/28/40/56 MHz
(6/7/8/10/11/13/15/1
8/23/26/28/32/38
GHz)
7/14/28 MHz (10.5
GHz)
3.5/7/14/28 MHz

Table 1-3 RTN XMC ODUs supported by the OptiX RTN 950
Item Description
High Power ODU Low Capacity for PDH
ODU
ODU type XMC-2 XMC-1
Frequency band 7/8/13/15/18/23/26/38 GHz 7/8/13/15/18/23 GHz
Microwave modulation
mode
QPSK/16QAM/32QAM/
64QAM/128QAM/256QAM
QPSK/16QAM
Channel spacing 7/14/28/40/56 MHz 3.5/7/14/28 MHz

There are two methods for mounting the ODU and the antenna: direct mounting and separate
mounting.
l The direct mounting method is usually used when a small-diameter and single-polarized
antenna is used. In this situation, if one ODU is configured for one antenna, the ODU is
directly mounted at the back of the antenna. If two ODUs are configured for one antenna,
an RF signal combiner/splitter (hereinafter referred to as a hybrid coupler) must be mounted
to connect the ODUs to the antenna. Figure 1-3 illustrates the direct mounting method.
1-5
Figure 1-3 Direct mounting
l The separate mounting method is used when a double-polarized antenna or big-diameter
and single-polarized antenna is used. Figure 1-4 shows the separate method. In this
situation, a hybrid coupler can be mounted. That is, two ODUs share one feed boom.
Figure 1-4 Separate mounting
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950 provides an entire frequency band antenna solution, and supports the single-polarized
antenna and dual-polarized antenna with a diameter of 0.3 m to 3.7 m and the corresponding feeder system.
1.3 Radio Link Forms
The OptiX RTN 950 provides the radio links of different forms in which different IF boards and
ODUs are configured for different microwave application scenarios.
1 Introduction
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Table 1-4 Radio link forms supported by the OptiX RTN 950
Radio Link Form Control,
Switching, and
Timing Board
IF Board ODU
Low-capacity PDH
microwave
CST/CSH IF1 Low capacity for
PDH ODU
SDH/PDH
microwave
CST/CSH IF1 Standard power
ODU or high power
ODU
High-capacity SDH
microwave
CST/CSH ISU2 Standard power
ODU or high power
ODU
High-capacity SDH
microwave
supporting XPIC
CST/CSH ISX2 Standard power
ODU or high power
ODU
Hybrid/Packet
microwave
CSH IFU2/ISU2 Standard power
ODU or high power
ODU
Hybrid/Packet
microwave
supporting XPIC
CSH IFX2/ISX2 Standard power
ODU or high power
ODU

1-7
2 Chassis
About This Chapter
The IDU of the OptiX RTN 950 is a 2U chassis. It can be deployed in a variety of scenarios and
on several different types of racks, cabinets, and surfaces.
2.1 Chassis Structure
The dimensions (H x W x D) of the IDU 950 chassis are 88 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm. The IDU
950 chassis has a four-layered structure that is air cooled.
2.2 Installation Mode
The IDU 950 can be deployed in a variety of scenarios and on several different types of racks,
cabinets, and surfaces.
2.3 Air Flow
An IDU 950 chassis is air-cooled with air in on the left side and air out on the right side.
2.4 IDU Labels
Product nameplate labels, qualification card labels, ESD protection labels, grounding labels,
laser safety class labels, high temperature warning labels, and operation warning labels, and
other types of labels are affixed in their respective positions on the IDU chassis or boards. Adhere
to the warnings and instructions on the labels when performing various types of tasks in order
to avoid bodily injury or damage to the equipment.
IDU Hardware Description 2 Chassis
2-1
2.1 Chassis Structure
The dimensions (H x W x D) of the IDU 950 chassis are 88 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm. The IDU
950 chassis has a four-layered structure that is air cooled.
Figure 2-1 shows the chassis structure of the IDU 950.
Figure 2-1 Chassis structure of the IDU 950
2.2 Installation Mode
The IDU 950 can be deployed in a variety of scenarios and on several different types of racks,
cabinets, and surfaces.
The IDU 950 can be installed:
l In a 300 mm European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI) cabinet
l In a 600 mm ETSI cabinet
l In a 450 mm 19-inch cabinet
l In a 600 mm 19-inch cabinet
l In a 19-inch open rack
l In an outdoor cabinet for wireless equipment
l On a wall
l On a table
2.3 Air Flow
An IDU 950 chassis is air-cooled with air in on the left side and air out on the right side.
Figure 2-2 shows the air flow in an IDU 950 chassis.
2 Chassis
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Figure 2-2 Air flow in an IDU 950 chassis
2.4 IDU Labels
Product nameplate labels, qualification card labels, ESD protection labels, grounding labels,
laser safety class labels, high temperature warning labels, and operation warning labels, and
other types of labels are affixed in their respective positions on the IDU chassis or boards. Adhere
to the warnings and instructions on the labels when performing various types of tasks in order
to avoid bodily injury or damage to the equipment.
Label Description
Table 2-1 provides the description of the labels on the IDU chassis and boards. Actual labels
may vary depending on the configurations of the chassis and boards.
Table 2-1 Description of the IDU labels
Label Label Name Description
ESD protection
label
Indicates that the
equipment is
sensitive to static
electricity.
Grounding label Indicates the
grounding position
of the IDU chassis.
Fan warning label Warns you not to
touch fan leaves
when the fan is
rotating.
2-3
Label Label Name Description
High temperature
warning label
Indicates that the
board surface
temperature may
exceed 70C when
the ambient
temperature is
higher than 55C.
Wear protective
gloves to handle
the board.
Power caution label Instructs you to
read related
instructions before
performing any
power-related
tasks.
For details, see
Labels in 3.16.4
Front Panel.
/QUALIFICATION CARD

MADE IN CHINA HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD.
HUAWEI
Qualification card
label
Indicates that the
equipment has
been quality
checked.
RoHS label Indicates that the
equipment
complies with the
related
requirements
specified in the
RoHS directive.
Product nameplate
label
Indicates the
product name and
certification.
PULL
Operation guidance
label
Instructs you to
slightly pull the
switch lever
outwards before
setting the switch
to the "I" or "O"
position.
2 Chassis
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Label Position
Figure 2-3 shows the positions of the labels on the chassis of the IDU 950.
Figure 2-3 Positions of the IDU 950 labels
/QUALIFICATION CARD

MADE IN CHINA HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD.
HUAWEI
WARNING
-48V OUTPUT
TURNOFF POWER BEFORE
DISCONNECTINGIF CABLE
!
!
OptiX RTN 950

HUAWEI TECHNOLGIES CO MADE IN CHINA
14036
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful
interference, and(2) this device must accept any interference received ,
including interference that may cause undesired operation .
POWER RATING: -48-60V;14.3A
. , LTD .
N
Class 1 Laser Product

2-5
3 Boards
About This Chapter
The IDU 950 supports the following types of boards: system control, switching, and timing
boards, IF boards, Ethernet boards, SDH boards, PDH boards, power supply boards, and fan
boards.
3.1 Board Appearance
The dimensions (H x W x D) of the board in the extended slot of the IDU 950 chassis are 19.82
mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm. The dimensions (H x W x D) of the system control, switching,
and timing board in the IDU 950 chassis are 22.36 mm x 193.80 mm x 269.73 mm.
3.2 Board List
The IDU 950 provides various functions with different boards inserted.
3.3 CST
The CST is the integrated TDM system control, switching, and timing board.
3.4 CSH
The CSH is the integrated Hybrid system control, switching, and timing board.
3.5 IF1
The IF1 is a medium-capacity SDH IF board. The IF1 uses the DC-I power distribution mode.
3.6 IFU2
The IFU2 is a universal IF board that supports the Integrated IP radio mode. The IFU2 uses the
DC-I power distribution mode.
3.7 IFX2
The IFX2 is a universal IF board that supports the XPIC function in Integrated IP radio mode.
The IFX2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode.
3.8 ISU2
The ISU2 is a universal IF board that supports the Integrated IP radio mode and SDH radio mode
at the same time. The ISU2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode.
3.9 ISX2
The ISX2 is a universal XPIC IF board and provides the XPIC function for signals transmitted/
received in Integrated IP radio mode and SDH radio mode. The ISX2 uses the DC-I power
distribution mode.
IDU Hardware Description 3 Boards
3-1
3.10 EM6T/EM6F
The EM6T/EM6F is an FE/GE interface board, which provides four FE electrical ports and two
GE ports. The EM6T has similar functions to the EM6F. The only difference is as follows: The
GE ports on the EM6T use fixed electrical ports whereas the GE ports on the EM6F use the SFP
modules and therefore can function as two optical or electrical ports. The GE electrical ports on
the EM6F and the EM6T are compatible with the FE electrical ports.
3.11 EFP8
The EFP8 is an 8-port FE EoPDH processing board. The EFP board is connected to the packet
plane through its bridging GE port.
3.12 SL1D
The SL1D is a 2xSTM-1 optical interface board.
3.13 ML1/MD1
The ML1 is a 16xSmart E1 service processing board. The MD1 is a 32xSmart E1 service
processing board.
3.14 SP3S/SP3D
The SP3S is a 16xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm tributary board. The SP3D is a 32xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm
tributary board.
3.15 AUX
The AUX is an auxiliary management interface board of the OptiX RTN 950. One NE can house
only one AUX.
3.16 PIU
The PIU is the power interface board. The OptiX RTN 950 supports two PIUs, each of which
accesses one -48 V/-60 V DC power supply.
3.17 FAN
The FAN is a fan board that dissipates heat generated in the chassis through air cooling.
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3.1 Board Appearance
The dimensions (H x W x D) of the board in the extended slot of the IDU 950 chassis are 19.82
mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm. The dimensions (H x W x D) of the system control, switching,
and timing board in the IDU 950 chassis are 22.36 mm x 193.80 mm x 269.73 mm.
NOTE
The depth of the board refers to the distance between the front panel and the end of the PCB.
Board Appearance
Figure 3-1 shows the appearance of an ISU2 board in an IDU 950 chassis.
Figure 3-1 Appearance of an ISU2 board

Bar Code
The front panel of a board has two ejector levers and two captive screws. The ejector levers help
you remove or insert a board. The captive screws fasten a board to the chassis. A board bar code
(as shown in Figure 3-2) is attached to one of the ejector levers.
Figure 3-2 Bar code
Bar code
Internal code
Board version
Board name
Board feature code
0514721055000015-SL91EM6F01

3-3
NOTE
Only the bar codes of some boards contain board feature codes, which further classify boards. For example,
the feature codes of some boards using SFP modules (such as EM6F) indicate the type of SFP module
being used, and the feature codes of some other boards providing E1 ports (such as SP3S) indicate the
impedance of E1 ports.
3.2 Board List
The IDU 950 provides various functions with different boards inserted.
Figure 3-3 IDU slot layout
Slot
9
(PIU)
Slot 7 (CST/CSH)
Slot 1 (EXT)
Slot 5 (EXT)
Slot 3 (EXT)
Slot 2 (EXT)
Slot 4 (EXT)
Slot 6 (EXT)
Slot 8 (CST/CSH)
Slot
10
(PIU)
Slot
11
(FAN)
NOTE
EXT represents an extended slot, which can house any type of IF board or interface board.

Table 3-1 List of IDU boards
Board
Acronym
Board
Name Valid Slot Description
CST TDM
control,
switching,
and timing
board
Slot 7 or slot
8
l Provides full time division cross-
connections for VC-12/VC-3/VC-4
services equivalent to 32x32 VC-4s.
l Performs system communications and
control.
l Provides the clock processing function
and supports one external clock input/
output function.
l Provides one Ethernet NM interface, one
NM serial interface, and one NE
cascading interface.
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Board
Acronym
Board
CSH Hybrid
control,
switching,
and timing
board
Slot 7 or slot
8
l Provides full time division cross-
connections for VC-12/VC-3/VC-4
services equivalent to 32x32 VC-4s.
l Provides the 10 Gbit/s packet switching
capability.
l Performs system communications and
control.
l Provides the clock processing function
and supports one external clock input/
output function.
l Provides one Ethernet NM interface, one
NM serial interface, and one NE
cascading interface.
ISU2 Universal IF
board
Slot 1 to slot
6
l Provides one IF interface
l Supports integrated IP microwave and
SDH microwave. The supported service
modes can be Native E1+Ethernet, Native
STM-1+Ethernet or SDH (1xSTM-1 or
2xSTM-1).
l Supports the AM function.
l Supports highly efficient encapsulation
technology
ISX2 Universal
XPIC IF
board
Slot 1 to slot
6
l Provides one IF interface
l Supports integrated IP microwave and
SDH microwave. The supported service
modes can be Native E1+Ethernet, Native
STM-1+Ethernet or SDH (1xSTM-1 or
2xSTM-1).
l Supports the XPIC function.
l Supports highly efficient encapsulation
technology
IF1 SDH IF
board
Slot 1 to slot
6
l Provides one IF interface.
l Supports the TU-based PDH microwave
solution and the STM-1-based SDH
microwave solution.
IFU2 Universal IF
board
Slot 1 to slot
6
l Supports the integrated IP microwave.
3-5
Board
Acronym
Board
IFX2 Universal
XPIC IF
board
Slot 1 to slot
6
l Supports the integrated IP microwave.
l Supports the XPIC function.
SL1D 2xSTM-1
interface
board
Slot 1 to slot
6
Uses the SFP module to provide two STM-1
optical interfaces.
EM6T 6 Port RJ45
Ethernet/
Gigabit
Ethernet
Interface
Board
Slot 1 to slot
6
l Provides four FE electrical interfaces.
l Provides two GE electrical interfaces that
are compatible with the FE electrical
interface.
EM6F 4 Port RJ45 +
2 Port SFP
Fast
Ethernet/
Gigabit
Ethernet
Interface
Board
Slot 1 to slot
6
l Provides four FE electrical interfaces.
l Uses the SFP module to provide two GE
optical or electrical interfaces. The GE
electrical interfaces are compatible with
the FE electrical interfaces.
EFP8 8-port RJ45
FE EoPDH
processing
board with
the switching
function
Slot 1 to slot
6
l Provides eight FE electrical interfaces.
l Bridges to the packet plane through one
internal GE interface.
l Supports the processing of EoPDH
services. The total bandwidth of the VCG
is 63xE1.
l Supports Ethernet transparent
transmission services and Layer 2
switching services.
ML1 16xE1
(smart)
tributary
board
Slot 1 to slot
6
l Provides sixteen 75-ohm or 120-ohm
smart E1 interfaces.
l Supports CES E1, ATM/IMA E1, and
fractional E1.
MD1 32xE1
(smart)
tributary
board
Slot 1 to slot
6
l Provides thirty-two 75-ohm or 120-ohm
smart E1 interfaces.
l Supports CES E1, ATM/IMA E1, and
fractional E1.
SP3S 16xE1
tributary
board
Slot 1 to slot
6
Provides sixteen 75-ohm or 120-ohm TDM
E1 interfaces.
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Board
Acronym
Board
SP3D 32xE1
tributary
board
Slot 1 to slot
6
Provides thirty-two 75-ohm or TDM 120-
ohm E1 interfaces.
AUX Auxiliary
interface
board
Slot 1 to slot
6
Provides one orderwire interface, one
asynchronous data interface, one
synchronous data interface, and four-input
and two-output external alarm interfaces.
TND1PIU Power board Slot 9 or slot
10
Provides one -48 V/-60 V DC power input.
TND1FAN Fan board Slot 11 Cools and ventilates the IDU.

3.3 CST
The CST is the integrated TDM system control, switching, and timing board.
3.3.1 Version Description
The functional version of the CST is SL91.
3.3.2 Functions and Features
The CST provides full time division cross-connection, system control and communication, and
clock processing functions. The CST provides auxiliary ports and management ports.
3.3.3 Working Principle
The CST consists of the system control and communication unit, cross-connect unit, clock unit,
and power supply unit.
3.3.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, buttons, management ports, clock ports, and latches on the front panel.
3.3.5 DIP Switches and CF Card
This board has a set of DIP switches and a pluggable CF (compact flash) card.
3.3.6 Valid Slots
The CST can be inserted in slot 7 or slot 8 of the IDU chassis. The logical slot of the CST on
the NMS is the same as its physical slot.
3.3.7 Board Parameter Settings
This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the CST.
3.3.8 Technical Specifications
This section describes the board specifications, including the cross-connection capability, clock
performance, wayside service port performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power
consumption.
The functional version of the CST is SL91.
3-7
The CST provides full time division cross-connection, system control and communication, and
clock processing functions. The CST provides auxiliary ports and management ports.
Table 3-2 lists the functions and features that the CST supports.
Table 3-2 Functions and features that the CST supports
Function and Feature CST
Basic functions Cross-connect
capacity
Supports full time division cross-connections
(equivalent to 32x32 VC-4s) at the VC-12, VC-3, or
VC-4 level.
System control
and
communication
Manages, monitors, and controls the running status of
the IDU, and works as a communication service unit
between the NMS and boards to help the NMS to
control and manage the NE.
Clock Clock source Provides the system clock and frame headers for
service signals and overhead signals for the other
boards when tracing an appropriate clock source.
The traced clock source can be any of the following:
l External clock
l SDH line clock
l PDH tributary clock
l Clock at the air interface
Clock
protection
Supports the following clock protection schemes:
l Protection based on clock source priorities
l Protection by running the SSM protocol
l Protection by running the extended SSM protocol
DCN Outband DCN Supports a maximum of 13 DCCs.
Protection 1+1 hot standby Supported
Auxiliary ports
and
management
ports
Ethernet NM
port
1
NM serial port 1
NE cascading
port
1
Port for
monitoring an
outdoor cabinet
1
The specifications of port comply with RS-485.
OM Warm reset and
cold reset
Supported
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Function and Feature CST
In-service
FPGA loading
Supported
Board
manufacturing
information
query
Supported
Board
temperature
detection
Supported
Board voltage
detection
Supported
Detection of
indicators on the
other boards
Supported
Hot swapping
function
Supported
Pluggable CF
card
Supported

The CST consists of the system control and communication unit, cross-connect unit, clock unit,
and power supply unit.
3-9
Functional Block Diagram
Figure 3-4 Functional block diagram of the CST
NE cascading port
Port for monitoring an
outdoor cabinet
/Time port 2
Backplane
System control and
communication unit
Cross-connect unit
Power
supply
unit
Clock signal required by
other boards
External clock signal Time port 1
Clock port
Control bus
TDM service
Clock signal
provided to the
other units on the
board
Ethernet NM port
NM serial port
FE signal System control and
communication unit
of the paired board
Clock unit of the
paired board
Service board
Monitoring
signal
-48 V1
-48 V2
+3.3 V power supplied
to other boards
+12 V power supplied
to fans
Power supplied to the other
units on the board
Clock unit

System Control and Communication Unit
The system control and communication unit consists of the CPU unit and logic control unit. The
system control and communication unit performs the following functions:
l The CPU unit controls and manages the other units on the board and collects alarms and
performance events using the control bus.
l The CPU unit controls and manages the other boards in the IDU and collects alarms and
l The CPU unit controls and manages the ODU by transmitting the ODU control signal to
the SMODEM unit in the IF board over the control bus in the backplane.
l The CPU unit processes network management messages in DCCs using the logic control
unit.
l The CPU unit communicates with the NMS by its Ethernet NM port and NE cascading
port.
l The CPU unit implements software loading by reading information from the CF card with
the bus.
l The CPU unit monitors and manages an outdoor cabinet by reading the outdoor cabinet
monitoring signal with the bus.
l The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit and enables
FPGA loading.
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
l The logic control unit cross-connects the overheads between the auxiliary interface unit,
the CPU unit, and other boards. This helps to achieve the following purposes:
Adding or dropping DCC information processed by the CPU unit
Adding or dropping orderwire and asynchronous data services
Exchanging the orderwire bytes, DCC bytes, and K bytes between different lines
l The system control and communication unit on a CST board communicates with the system
control and communication unit on the paired CST board by carrying FE signals over the
communication bus in the backplane. In this manner, 1+1 hot backup between paired boards
is achieved.
Cross-Connect Unit
The cross-connect unit grooms services over the entire system using the higher order cross-
connect module and the lower order cross-connect module. Figure 3-5 shows the functional
block diagram of the cross-connect unit.
Figure 3-5 Functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit
Source TDM
servi ce uni t
Hi gher order
cross-connect
modul e
HOXC
Lower order
cross-connect
modul e
LOXC
Si nk TDM
servi ce uni t

The source TDM service unit transmits VC-4 signals to the higher order cross-connect module
over VC-4 buses. If the VC-4 signals carry only VC-4 services, the higher order cross-connect
module processes the VC-4 signals and then transmits the signals to the sink TDM service unit.
If the VC-4 signals include VC-12 or VC-3 services, the higher order cross-connect module
grooms the VC-12 or VC-3 services to the lower order cross-connect module. The lower order
cross-connect module processes the VC-12 or VC-3 services and then transmits the services
back to the higher order cross-connect module. The higher order cross-connect module processes
the services and then transmits the services to the sink TDM service unit.
Clock Unit
l The clock unit selects an appropriate clock source from external clock sources or service
clock sources at service ports based on clock priorities. Locking the clock source by means
of the phase-locked loop, the clock unit provides the system clock.
l The clock units on the main and standby boards transmit clock signals to each other.
3-11
Power Supply Unit
The power supply unit performs the following functions:
l Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the power supply required by
the chips of the other units on the local board.
l Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the +3.3 V power supply
required by the other boards in the IDU.
l Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the +12 V power supply
required by the fan.
3.3.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, buttons, management ports, clock ports, and latches on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-6 Front panel of the CST
C
S
T
S
T
A
T
P
R
O
G
S
Y
N
C
A
C
T
NMS/COM EXT CLK/TOD1 TOD2 CF RCV RST
S
R
V

Indicators
Table 3-3 Status explanation for indicators on the CST
Indicator State Meaning
STAT On (green) The board is working properly.
On (red) The board hardware is faulty.
Off l The board is not working.
l The board is not created.
l There is no power supplied to the
board.
PROG Blinks on (green) and off at
100 ms intervals
Software is being loaded to the board
during the power-on or resetting process
of the board.
Blinks on (green) and off at
300 ms intervals
The board software is in BIOS boot state
of the board.
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
On (green) l When the board is being powered on
or being reset, the upper layer
software is being initialized.
l When the board is running, the
software is running normally.
Blinks on (red) and off at
100 ms intervals
The BOOTROM self-check fails during
the power-on or resetting process of the
board.
On (red) l The memory self-check fails or
loading upper layer software fails
during the power-on or resetting
process of the board.
l The logic file or upper layer software
is lost during the running process of
the board.
l The pluggable storage card is faulty.
SYNC On (green) The clock is working properly.
On (red) The clock source is lost or a clock
switchover occurs.
SRV On (green) The system is working properly.
On (red) A critical or major alarm occurs in the
system.
On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm occurs in the
system.
Off In an unprotected system, there is no
power supplied to the system.
In a 1+1 protected system, the board
works as the standby one.
ACT On (green) In a 1+1 protected system, the board
works as the active one.
In an unprotected system, the board has
been activated.
Off In a 1+1 protected system, the board
In an unprotected system, the board is not
activated.

3-13
Clock Ports and Management Ports
Table 3-4 Description of the clock ports and management ports
Port Description Connector Type
NMS/COM Ethernet NM port/NM serial port
RJ45
EXT NE cascade port
CLK/TOD1 External clock port (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz),
external time port 1, or wayside E1 port
TOD2 External time port 2 or port for monitoring an
outdoor cabinet

NOTE
l The external clock port and wayside E1 port share one port physically. This port can also transparently
transmit DCC bytes, orderwire overhead bytes, and synchronous/asynchronous data overhead bytes.
This port, however, can implement only one of the preceding functions at one time.
l The external time port 2 and the outdoor cabinet monitoring port share one port physically. On the
OptiX RTN 900 V100R003, the physical port can be used as the outdoor cabinet monitoring port only.
Auxiliary ports and management ports use RJ45 connectors. The pin assignments for the ports,
however, are different. Figure 3-7 shows the front view of the RJ45 connector.
Figure 3-7 Front view of the RJ45 connector
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Table 3-5 Pin assignments for the NMS/COM port
Port Pin Signal
NMS/COM
1 Transmitting data (+)
2 Transmitting data (-)
3 Receiving data (+)
4 Grounding end of the NM serial port
5 Receive end of the NM serial port
6 Receiving data (-)
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Port Pin Signal
7 Not defined
8 Transmit end of the NM serial port

Table 3-6 Pin assignments for the EXT port
Port Pin Signal
EXT
4, 5, 7, 8 Not defined

NOTE
The EXT port supports the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes; that is, the EXT port can transmit
data through pins 3 and 6 and receive data through pins 1 and 2.
The RJ45 connector has two indicators. Table 3-7 provides status explanation for these
indicators.
Table 3-7 Status explanation for the indicators of the RJ45 connector
LINK (green) On The link is working properly.
Off The link is interrupted.
ACT (yellow) On or blinking The port is transmitting or receiving
data.
Off The port is not transmitting or
receiving data.

NOTE
The NMS/COM port and the EXT port are equivalent to two ports on a hub. This means that no external
Ethernet link should be configured between the two ports during the networking process; otherwise, an
Ethernet loop will be formed. As a result, a broadcast storm is generated on the network, leading to repeated
resetting of NEs.
Figure 3-8 shows the two common incorrect connections.
3-15
Figure 3-8 Incorrect connections between the NMS/COM port and the EXT port
C
S
T
S
T
A
T
P
R
O
G
S
Y
N
C
S
R
V
C
S
T
S
T
A
T
P
R
O
G
S
Y
N
C
S
R
V
LAN
A
C
T
A
C
T

NOTE
When the OptiX RTN 950 is configured with two CST boards, their Ethernet NM ports and NE cascading
ports are equivalent to four ports on a hub. To avoid network storms, use only the Ethernet NM port and
NE cascading port of the working CST board, if possible.
The clock port (CLK) and high-precision time port (TOD1) share the CLK/TOD1 port physically
but use different pins of the CLK/TOD1 port. Table 3-8 provides details about the pin
assignments for the CLK/TOD1 port.
Table 3-8 Pin assignments for the CLK/TOD1 port
Pin Working Mode
External
Clock
External
Time Input
(1PPS +
Time
Information
)
External
Time
Output
(1PPS +
Time
Information
)
External
Time Input
(DCLS)
External
Time Output
(DCLS)
1 CLK
receiving
(-)
Not defined Not defined Not defined Not defined
2 CLK
receiving
(+)
3 Not defined 1PPS signal
input (-)
(RS-422
level)
1PPS signal
output (-)
(RS-422
level)
DCLS time
signal input (-)
(RS-422 level)
DCLS time
signal output
(-)
(RS-422 level)
4 CLK
transmitting
(-)
Grounding
end
Grounding
end
Grounding end Grounding end
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Pin Working Mode
External
Clock
External
Time Input
(1PPS +
Time
Information
)
External
Time
Output
(1PPS +
Time
Information
)
External
Time Input
(DCLS)
External
Time Output
(DCLS)
5 CLK
transmitting
(+)
Grounding
end
Grounding
end
input (+)
(RS-422
level)
1PPS signal
output (+)
(RS-422
level)
DCLS time
signal input (+)
(RS-422 level)
DCLS time
signal output
(+)
(RS-422 level)
7 Not defined Time
information
input (-)
(RS-422
level)
Time
information
output (-)
(RS-422
level)
Not defined Not defined
8 Not defined Time
information
input (+)
(RS-422
level)
Time
information
output (+)
(RS-422
level)

The external time port 2 and the port for monitoring an outdoor cabinet share the TOD2 port
physically but use different pins of the TOD2 port. Table 3-9 provides details about the pin
assignments for the TOD2 port.
Table 3-9 Pin assignments for the TOD2 port
Pin Working Mode
External
Time
Input
(1PPS +
Time
Informatio
n)
External
Time Output
(1PPS + Time
Information)
External
Time Input
(DCLS)
External
Time Output
(DCLS)
Port for
Monitoring
an Outdoor
Cabinet
1 Not defined Not defined Not defined Not defined Not defined
3-17
Pin Working Mode
External
Time
Input
(1PPS +
Time
Informatio
n)
External
Time Output
(1PPS + Time
Information)
External
Time Input
(DCLS)
External
Time Output
(DCLS)
Port for
Monitoring
an Outdoor
Cabinet
3 1PPS signal
input (-)
(RS-422
level)
1PPS signal
output (-)
(RS-422 level)
DCLS time
signal input (-)
(RS-422
level)
DCLS time
signal output
(-)
(RS-422 level)
Outdoor
cabinet
monitoring
signal input (-)
(RS-422 level)
4 Grounding
end
Grounding end Grounding
end
5 Grounding
end
end
6 1PPS signal
input (+)
(RS-422
level)
1PPS signal
output (+)
(RS-422 level)
DCLS time
signal input
(+)
(RS-422
level)
DCLS time
signal output
(+)
(RS-422 level)
Outdoor
cabinet
monitoring
signal input
(+)
(RS-422 level)
7 Time
information
input (-)
(RS-422
level)
Time
information
output (-)
(RS-422 level)
Not defined Not defined Outdoor
cabinet
monitoring
signal output
(-)
(RS-422 level)
8 Time
information
input (+)
(RS-422
level)
Time
information
output (+)
(RS-422 level)
cabinet
monitoring
signal output
(+)
(RS-422 level)

NOTE
Pins 3 and 6-8 of the CLK/TOD1 and TOD2 ports are reserved for running the high-precision time protocol
(IEEE 1588 protocol) and are not used in this product version.
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Buttons
Table 3-10 Buttons
Button Name Description
CF RCV CF configuration restoration
button
After this button is pressed and held for
eight seconds, the board automatically
restores the NE database from the CF
card.
RST Warm reset button After this button is pressed, a warm
reset is performed on the board.

Latches
There is a latch near each ejector lever on the front panel of the board. When removing a board,
you can rotate the ejector levers only after pushing the latches to the middle positions. In addition,
rotating the ejector levers triggers the tact switch on the board and then triggers working/
protection switching.
NE databases, system parameters (including NE-IP, NE-ID, and subnet mask), software
packages, and NE logs are stored on the CF card. After you press the CRV button on the system
control, switching, and timing board and hold it for eight seconds, the data stored on the CF card
will be loaded to the board. To synchronize the NE databases, system parameters, and NE logs
on the system control, switching, and timing board to the CF card, enable the regular backup
function.
NOTE
The software packages on the CF card are synchronized with those on the system control, switching, and timing
board during package diffusion. Therefore, automatic backup mechanisms or manual operations are not needed
to synchronize software packages on the system control, switching, and timing board and the CF card. If the
system control, switching, and timing board and the CF card have different software packages or data, the
SWDL_PKGVER_MM alarm will be reported.
3-19
Figure 3-9 Positions of the DIP switches and CF card
ON DIP
1 2 3 4
2
1

1. DIP switches 2. CF card
Table 3-11 Setting DIP switches
Setting of DIP Switches
a
Meaning
1 2 3 4
0 0 0 0 Indicates that the board works with the
watchdog enabled.
0 0 0 1 The value is reserved.
0 0 1 0 Indicates that a memory self-check is
running.
0 0 1 1 Indicates that the board is being debugged.
watchdog disabled and a full memory check
is running.
0 1 0 1 Indicates the BIOS holdover state.
0 1 1 0 Indicates the BIOS exhibition state.
0 1 1 1 The value is reserved. (By default, this value
indicates that the board works with the
watchdog enabled.)
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
a
Meaning
1 2 3 4
watchdog enabled.)
1 0 0 1 Restores the data of the CF card.
1 0 1 0 Erases data in the system parameter area.
1 0 1 1 Erases databases.
1 1 0 0 Erases NE software, including patches.
1 1 0 1 Erases databases and NE software, including
patches.
1 1 1 0 Erases all data in the file system.
1 1 1 1 Erases all the data except for the board
manufacturing information.

NOTE
a: When a DIP switch is set to the side with the numbers "1, 2, 3, 4", it represents binary digit 1. When a
DIP switch is set to the side with the letters "ON DIP", it represents binary digit 0.
3.3.6 Valid Slots
The CST can be inserted in slot 7 or slot 8 of the IDU chassis. The logical slot of the CST on
Figure 3-10 Slot for the CST in the IDU chassis
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7 (CST)
Slot 5 (EXT)
Slot 3 (EXT)
Slot 1 (EXT)
Slot 8 (CST)
Slot 6 (EXT)
Slot 4 (EXT)
Slot 2 (EXT)

Figure 3-11 Logical slot of the CST on the NMS
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7 (CST)
Slot 5 (EXT)
Slot 3 (EXT)
Slot 1 (EXT)
Slot 8 (CST)
Slot 6 (EXT)
Slot 4 (EXT)
Slot 2 (EXT)
3-21

Table 3-12 Slot allocation
Item Description
Slot allocation priority Slot 7 > Slot 8

This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the CST.
Related References
A.1.2.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting
A.10.1.1 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table
A.10.1.11 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Status
A.11.1 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General
A.11.3 Parameter Description: Orderwire_F1 Data Port
A.11.4 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Broadcast Data Port
A.11.5 Parameter Description: Environment Monitoring Interface
This section describes the board specifications, including the cross-connection capability, clock
performance, wayside service port performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power
consumption.
Cross-Connection Capability
The CST supports full time division cross-connections (equivalent to 32x32 VC-4s) at the
VC-12, VC-3, or VC-4 level.
Clock Timing and Synchronization Performance
Clock timing and synchronization performance meets related ITU-T Recommendations.
Table 3-13 Clock timing and synchronization performance
Item Performance
External synchronization
source
2048 kbit/s (compliant with ITU-T G.703 9), or 2048 kHz
(compliant with ITU-T G.703 13)
Frequency accuracy Compliant with ITU-T G.813
Pull-in and pull-out ranges
Noise generation
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Item Performance
Noise tolerance
Noise transfer
Transient response and
holdover performance

Wayside Service Interface Performance
Table 3-14 Wayside service interface performance
Item Performance
Transmission path Uses the Huawei-defined bytes in the overhead of the
microwave frame.
Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) 2048
Impedance (ohm) 120
Interface characteristics Meets the ITU-T G.703 standard.

Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-15 Mechanical behavior
Item Performance
Dimensions (H x W x D) 22.36 mm x 193.80 mm x 269.73 mm
Weight 0.72 kg

Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 20.7 W
3.4 CSH
The CSH is the integrated Hybrid system control, switching, and timing board.
The functional version of the CSH is SL91.
3-23
The CSH provides 10 Gbit/s packet switching, full time division cross-connection, system
control and communication, and clock processing functions. The CSH provides auxiliary ports
and management ports.
The CSH consists of the system control and communication unit, packet switching unit, cross-
connect unit, clock unit, and power supply unit.
3.4.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, buttons, management ports, clock/time ports, and latches on the front panel.
3.4.6 Valid Slots
The CSH can be inserted in slot 7 or slot 8 in the IDU chassis. The logical slot of the CSH on
This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the CSH.
This section describes the board specifications, including the packet switching capacity, cross-
connection capability, clock performance, wayside service port performance, board mechanical
behavior, and board power consumption.
The functional version of the CSH is SL91.
The CSH provides 10 Gbit/s packet switching, full time division cross-connection, system
control and communication, and clock processing functions. The CSH provides auxiliary ports
and management ports.
Table 3-16 lists the functions and features that the CSH supports.
Table 3-16 Functions and features that the CSH supports
Function and Feature CSH
Basic functions Switching
capability
Supports 10 Gbit/s packet switching function.
Cross-connect
capacity
Supports full time division cross-connections
(equivalent to 32x32 VC-4s) at the VC-12, VC-3, or
VC-4 level.
System control
and
communication
Manages, monitors, and controls the running status of
the IDU, and works as a communication service unit
between the NMS and boards to help the NMS to
control and manage the NE.
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Clock Clock
synchronization
at the physical
layer
Provides the system clock and frame headers for
service signals and overhead signals for the other
boards when tracing an appropriate clock source.
The traced clock source can be any of the following:
l External clock
l SDH line clock
l PDH tributary clock
l Clock at the air interface
l Synchronous Ethernet clock
Clock
protection
DCN Outband DCN Supports a maximum of 13 DCCs.
Inband DCN The DCN bandwidth is configurable.
MPLS/PWE3 functions Supported
See Table 3-17.
QoS functions Supported
See Table 3-18.
Protection 1+1 hot standby Supported
Auxiliary ports
and
management
ports
Ethernet NM
port
1
NM serial port 1
NE cascading
port
1
Port for
monitoring an
outdoor cabinet
1
The specifications of port comply with RS-485.
OM Warm reset and
cold reset
Supported
In-service
FPGA loading
Supported
Board
manufacturing
information
query
Supported
3-25
Board
temperature
detection
Supported
Board voltage
detection
Supported
Detection of
indicators on the
other boards
Supported
Hot swapping
function
Supported
Pluggable CF
card
Supported

The packet switching unit of the CSH works with a service board to implement MPLS/PWE3
functions. Table 3-17 provides details about these functions.
Table 3-17 MPLS/PWE3 functions
MPLS tunnel Setup mode Static LSPs
Protection 1:1 MPLS tunnel APS
OAM Supports the following OAM functions:
l MPLS OAM that complies with ITU-T Y.1711
l LSP ping and LSP traceroute functions
PWE3 Service
categories
Supports the following service categories:
l CES services
l ATM PWE3 services
l ETH PWE3 services
Setup mode Static PWs
Protection 1:1 PW APS
OAM Supports the following OAM functions:
l VCCV
l PW OAM that complies with ITU-T Y.1711.
l PW ping and PW traceroute functions
MS-PW Supported
Configurable
bandwidth
Supported
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

The packet switching unit of the CSH works with a service board to implement QoS functions.
Table 3-18 provides details about these functions.
Table 3-18 QoS functions
Function and
Feature
CSH
DiffServ Supports simple traffic classification by specifying PHB service
classes for service flows based on their QoS information (C-VLAN
priorities, S-VLAN priorities, DSCP values, or MPLS EXP values)
carried by the packets.
Ethernet complex
traffic classification
Supports traffic classification based on C-VLAN IDs, S-VLAN IDs,
C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN priorities, C-VLAN IDs + C-VLAN
priorities, S-VLAN IDs + S-VLAN priorities, or DSCP values carried
by packets.
CAR Provides the CAR function for traffic flows at ports.
Shaping Provides traffic shaping for a specific port, prioritized queue, or traffic
flow.
Queue scheduling
policies
Supports the following queue scheduling policies:
l SP
l WRR
l SP+WRR

NOTE
The packet switching unit of the CSH works with service boards to implement the Ethernet service function.
For information about the Ethernet service function, refer to descriptions in associated service boards.
The CSH consists of the system control and communication unit, packet switching unit, cross-
connect unit, clock unit, and power supply unit.
3-27
Figure 3-12 Functional block diagram of the CSH
Time port 1
Clock port
Port for monitoring an
outdoor cabinet
/Time port 2
Backplane
System control and
communication unit
Cross-connect unit
Clock signal required by
other boards
External clock signal
Control bus
TDM service
Clock signal
provided to
the other units
on the board
NE cascading port
Packet
switching unit
GE bus
Ethernet NM port
NM serial port
FE signal
System control and
communication unit
of the paired board
Clock unit of the
paired board
Service board
Service board

Monitoring
signal
-48 V1
-48 V2
to other boards
+12 V power supplied
to fans
Power supplied to the other
units on the board
Clock unit
Power supply
unit

System Control and Communication Unit
The system control and communication unit consists of the CPU unit and logic control unit. The
system control and communication unit performs the following functions:
l The CPU unit controls and manages the other units on the board and collects alarms and
l The CPU unit controls and manages the other boards in the IDU and collects alarms and
l The CPU unit controls and manages the ODU by transmitting the ODU control signal to
the SMODEM unit in the IF board over the control bus in the backplane.
l The CPU unit enables the packet switching unit using the control bus to groom Ethernet
service packets.
l The CPU unit processes Ethernet protocol packets from the packet switching unit using the
control bus.
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
l The CPU unit processes network management messages in DCCs using the logic control
unit.
l The CPU unit communicates with the NMS by its Ethernet NM port and NE cascading
port.
l The CPU unit implements software loading by reading information from the CF card with
the bus.
l The CPU unit monitors and manages an outdoor cabinet by reading the outdoor cabinet
monitoring signal with the bus.
l The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit and enables
FPGA loading.
l The logic control unit cross-connects the overheads between the auxiliary interface unit,
the CPU unit, and other boards. This helps to achieve the following purposes:
Adding or dropping DCC information processed by the CPU unit
Adding or dropping orderwire and synchronous/asynchronous data services
Exchanging the orderwire bytes, DCC bytes, and K bytes between different lines
l The system control and communication unit on a CSH board communicates with the system
control and communication unit on the paired CSH board by carrying FE signals over the
communication bus in the backplane. In this manner, 1+1 hot backup between paired boards
is achieved.
Packet Switching Unit
The packet switching unit grooms services and processes protocols for Ethernet services
(including Native Ethernet services and MPLS/PWE3 packets carried over Ethernet).
l After receiving Ethernet services from an Ethernet board, the packet switching unit grooms
the Ethernet services based on the configurations that are delivered by the system control
and communication unit.
l After receiving protocol packets from an Ethernet board, the packet switching unit transmits
the protocol packets to the system control and communication unit for processing. After
processing, the system control and communication unit sends the protocol packets back to
the packet switching unit. The packet switching unit transmits the protocol packets to the
Ethernet board.
Cross-Connect Unit
The cross-connect unit grooms services over the entire system using the higher order cross-
connect module and the lower order cross-connect module. Figure 3-13 shows the functional
block diagram of the cross-connect unit.
3-29
Figure 3-13 Functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit
Source TDM
servi ce uni t
Hi gher order
cross-connect
modul e
HOXC
Lower order
cross-connect
modul e
LOXC
Si nk TDM
servi ce uni t

The source TDM service unit transmits VC-4 signals to the higher order cross-connect module
over VC-4 buses. If the VC-4 signals carry only VC-4 services, the higher order cross-connect
module processes the VC-4 signals and then transmits the signals to the sink TDM service unit.
If the VC-4 signals include VC-12 or VC-3 services, the higher order cross-connect module
grooms the VC-12 or VC-3 services to the lower order cross-connect module. The lower order
cross-connect module processes the VC-12 or VC-3 services and then transmits the services
back to the higher order cross-connect module. The higher order cross-connect module processes
the services and then transmits the services to the sink TDM service unit.
Clock Unit
l The clock unit selects an appropriate clock source from external clock sources or service
clock sources at service ports based on clock priorities. Locking the clock source by means
of the phase-locked loop, the clock unit provides the system clock.
l The clock units on the main and standby boards transmit clock signals to each other.
Power Supply Unit
l Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the power supply required by
the chips of the other units on the local board.
l Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the +3.3 V power supply
required by the other boards in the IDU.
l Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the +12 V power supply
required by the fan.
3.4.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, buttons, management ports, clock/time ports, and latches on the front panel.
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-14 Front panel of the CSH
C
S
H
S
T
A
T
P
R
O
G
S
Y
N
C
S
R
V
A
C
T

Indicators
Table 3-19 Status explanation for indicators on the CSH
board.
100 ms intervals
of the board.
300 ms intervals
of the board.
100 ms intervals
board.
the board.
3-31
switchover occurs.
system.
system.
been activated.
activated.

Clock Ports and Management Ports
Table 3-20 Description of the clock ports and management ports
NMS/COM Ethernet NM port/NM serial port
RJ45
EXT NE cascade port
CLK/TOD1 External clock port (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz),
external time port 1, or wayside E1 port
TOD2 External time port 2 or port for monitoring an
outdoor cabinet

NOTE
l The external clock port and wayside E1 port share one port physically. This port can also transparently
transmit DCC bytes, orderwire overhead bytes, and synchronous/asynchronous data overhead bytes.
This port, however, can implement only one of the preceding functions at one time.
l The external time port 2 and the outdoor cabinet monitoring port share one port physically. On the
OptiX RTN 900 V100R003, the physical port can be used as the outdoor cabinet monitoring port only.
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Auxiliary ports and management ports use RJ45 connectors. The pin assignments for the ports,
however, are different. Figure 3-15 shows the front view of the RJ45 connector.
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Table 3-21 Pin assignments for the NMS/COM port
Port Pin Signal
NMS/COM
4 Grounding end of the NM serial port
5 Receive end of the NM serial port
7 Not defined
8 Transmit end of the NM serial port

Table 3-22 Pin assignments for the EXT port
Port Pin Signal
EXT
4, 5, 7, 8 Not defined

NOTE
The EXT port supports the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes; that is, the EXT port can transmit
data through pins 3 and 6 and receive data through pins 1 and 2.
The RJ45 connector has two indicators. Table 3-23 provides status explanation for these
indicators.
3-33
data.
receiving data.

NOTE
The NMS/COM port and the EXT port are equivalent to two ports on a hub. This means that no external
Ethernet link should be configured between the two ports during the networking process; otherwise, an
Ethernet loop will be formed. As a result, a broadcast storm is generated on the network, leading to repeated
resetting of NEs.
Figure 3-16 shows the two common incorrect connections.
Figure 3-16 Incorrect connections between the NMS/COM port and the EXT port
C
S
H
S
T
A
T
P
R
O
G
S
Y
N
C
S
R
V
C
S
H
S
T
A
T
P
R
O
G
S
Y
N
C
S
R
V
LAN
A
C
T
A
C
T

NOTE
When the OptiX RTN 950 is configured with two CSH boards, their Ethernet NM ports and NE cascading
ports are equivalent to four ports on a hub. To avoid network storms, use only the Ethernet NM port and
NE cascading port of the working CSH board, if possible.
The clock port (CLK) and high-precision time port (TOD1) share the CLK/TOD1 port physically
but use different pins of the CLK/TOD1 port. Table 3-24 provides details about the pin
assignments for the CLK/TOD1 port.
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Table 3-24 Pin assignments for the CLK/TOD1 port
Pin Working Mode
External
Clock
External
Time Input
(1PPS +
Time
Information
)
External
Time
Output
(1PPS +
Time
Information
)
External
Time Input
(DCLS)
External
Time Output
(DCLS)
1 CLK
receiving
(-)
2 CLK
receiving
(+)
input (-)
(RS-422
level)
1PPS signal
output (-)
(RS-422
level)
DCLS time
signal input (-)
(RS-422 level)
DCLS time
signal output
(-)
(RS-422 level)
4 CLK
transmitting
(-)
Grounding
end
Grounding
end
5 CLK
transmitting
(+)
Grounding
end
Grounding
end
input (+)
(RS-422
level)
1PPS signal
output (+)
(RS-422
level)
DCLS time
signal input (+)
(RS-422 level)
DCLS time
signal output
(+)
(RS-422 level)
7 Not defined Time
information
input (-)
(RS-422
level)
Time
information
output (-)
(RS-422
level)
8 Not defined Time
information
input (+)
(RS-422
level)
Time
information
output (+)
(RS-422
level)

Time port 2 and the port for monitoring an outdoor cabinet share the TOD2 port physically but
use different pins of the TOD2 port. Table 3-25 provides details about the pin assignments for
the TOD2 port.
3-35
Table 3-25 Pin assignments for the TOD2 port
Pin Working Mode
External
Time
Input
(1PPS +
Time
Informatio
n)
External
Time Output
(1PPS + Time
Information)
External
Time Input
(DCLS)
External
Time Output
(DCLS)
Port for
Monitoring
an Outdoor
Cabinet
3 1PPS signal
input (-)
(RS-422
level)
1PPS signal
output (-)
(RS-422 level)
DCLS time
signal input (-)
(RS-422
level)
DCLS time
signal output
(-)
(RS-422 level)
Outdoor
cabinet
monitoring
signal input (-)
(RS-422 level)
4 Grounding
end
end
5 Grounding
end
end
6 1PPS signal
input (+)
(RS-422
level)
1PPS signal
output (+)
(RS-422 level)
DCLS time
signal input
(+)
(RS-422
level)
DCLS time
signal output
(+)
(RS-422 level)
Outdoor
cabinet
monitoring
signal input
(+)
(RS-422 level)
7 Time
information
input (-)
(RS-422
level)
Time
information
output (-)
(RS-422 level)
cabinet
monitoring
signal output
(-)
(RS-422 level)
8 Time
information
input (+)
(RS-422
level)
Time
information
output (+)
(RS-422 level)
cabinet
monitoring
signal output
(+)
(RS-422 level)

NOTE
Pins 3 and 6-8 of the CLK/TOD1 and TOD2 ports are reserved for running the high-precision time protocol
(IEEE 1588 protocol) and are not used in this product version.
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Buttons
Table 3-26 Buttons
Button Name Description
CF RCV CF configuration restoration
button
After this button is pressed and held for
eight seconds, the board automatically
restores the NE database from the CF
card.
RST Warm reset button After this button is pressed, a warm
reset is performed on the board.

Latches
There is a latch near each ejector lever on the front panel of the board. When removing a board,
you can rotate the ejector levers only after pushing the latches to the middle positions. In addition,
rotating the ejector levers triggers the tact switch on the board and then triggers working/
NE databases, system parameters (including NE-IP, NE-ID, and subnet mask), software
packages, and NE logs are stored on the CF card. After you press the CRV button on the system
control, switching, and timing board and hold it for eight seconds, the data stored on the CF card
will be loaded to the board. To synchronize the NE databases, system parameters, and NE logs
on the system control, switching, and timing board to the CF card, enable the regular backup
function.
NOTE
The software packages on the CF card are synchronized with those on the system control, switching, and timing
board during package diffusion. Therefore, automatic backup mechanisms or manual operations are not needed
to synchronize software packages on the system control, switching, and timing board and the CF card. If the
system control, switching, and timing board and the CF card have different software packages or data, the
SWDL_PKGVER_MM alarm will be reported.
3-37
Figure 3-17 Positions of the DIP switches and CF card
ON DIP
1 2 3 4
2
1

1. DIP switches 2. CF card
Table 3-27 Setting DIP switches
a
Meaning
1 2 3 4
watchdog enabled.
0 0 0 1 The value is reserved.
0 0 1 0 Indicates that a memory self-check is
running.
0 0 1 1 Indicates that the board is being debugged.
watchdog disabled and a full memory check
is running.
0 1 0 1 Indicates the BIOS holdover state.
0 1 1 0 Indicates the BIOS exhibition state.
watchdog enabled.)
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
a
Meaning
1 2 3 4
watchdog enabled.)
1 0 0 1 Restores the data of the CF card.
1 0 1 0 Erases data in the system parameter area.
1 0 1 1 Erases databases.
1 1 0 0 Erases NE software, including patches.
1 1 0 1 Erases databases and NE software, including
patches.
1 1 1 0 Erases all data in the file system.
1 1 1 1 Erases all the data except for the board
manufacturing information.

NOTE
a: When a DIP switch is set to the side with the numbers "1, 2, 3, 4", it represents binary digit 1. When a
DIP switch is set to the side with the letters "ON DIP", it represents binary digit 0.
3.4.6 Valid Slots
The CSH can be inserted in slot 7 or slot 8 in the IDU chassis. The logical slot of the CSH on
Figure 3-18 Slot for the CSH in the IDU chassis
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7 (CSH)
Slot 5 (EXT)
Slot 3 (EXT)
Slot 1 (EXT)
Slot 8 (CSH)
Slot 6 (EXT)
Slot 4 (EXT)
Slot 2 (EXT)

Figure 3-19 Logical slot of the CSH on the NMS
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7 (CSH)
Slot 5 (EXT)
Slot 3 (EXT)
Slot 1 (EXT)
Slot 8 (CSH)
Slot 6 (EXT)
Slot 4 (EXT)
Slot 2 (EXT)
3-39

Item Description
Slot allocation priority Slot 7 > Slot 8

This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the CSH.
Related References
This section describes the board specifications, including the packet switching capacity, cross-
connection capability, clock performance, wayside service port performance, board mechanical
Packet Switching Capacity
The CSH supports a 10 Gbit/s packet switching capacity.
Cross-Connection Capability
The CSH supports full time division cross-connections (equivalent to 32x32 VC-4s) at the
VC-12, VC-3, or VC-4 level.
Clock Timing and Synchronization Performance
Clock timing and synchronization performance meets related ITU-T Recommendations.
Table 3-29 Clock timing and synchronization performance
Item Performance
External synchronization
source
2048 kbit/s (compliant with ITU-T G.703 9), or 2048 kHz
(compliant with ITU-T G.703 13)
Frequency accuracy Compliant with ITU-T G.813
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Item Performance
Pull-in and pull-out ranges
Noise generation
Noise tolerance
Noise transfer
Transient response and
holdover performance

Wayside Service Interface Performance
Table 3-30 Wayside service interface performance
Item Performance
Transmission path Uses the Huawei-defined bytes in the overhead of the
microwave frame.
Impedance (ohm) 120

Mechanical Behavior
Item Performance
Weight 0.74 kg

Power Consumption
Power Consumption: < 25.3 W
3.5 IF1
The IF1 is a medium-capacity SDH IF board. The IF1 uses the DC-I power distribution mode.
The functional version of the IF1 is SL91.
3-41
The IF1 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and
supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.
3.5.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
This section describes how to process one IF signal, and it serves as an example to describe the
working principle and signal flow of the IF1.
3.5.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, an IF port, an ODU power switch, and labels on the front panel.
3.5.5 Valid Slots
The IF1 can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the IF1 on the NMS are the same as the
physical slots.
This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IF1.
This section describes the board specifications, including radio work modes, IF performance,
modem performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
The functional version of the IF1 is SL91.
The IF1 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and
Table 3-32 lists the functions and features that the IF1 supports.
Table 3-32 Functions and features that the IF1 supports
Function and Feature IF1
Basic functions l Receives and transmits one IF signal.
l Provides management channels to the ODU.
l Supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.
Radio type TU/STM-1-based radio
Radio work mode See Technical Specifications of the IF1.
Protection 1+1 HSB/FD/
SD protection
Supported
N+1 protection Supported
SNCP Supported
License Supports control on the air interface capacity by using
the license file.
Clock Clock source Clock at the air interface
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Function and Feature IF1
Clock
protection
l Protection by running the SSM protocol (supported
only in SDH radio mode)
(supported only in SDH radio mode)
DCN Inband DCN Not supported
Outband DCN l The PDH radio mode supports one DCC that is
composed of one DCC byte if the capacity is less
than 16xE1.
l The PDH radio mode supports one DCC that is
composed of three DCC bytes if the capacity is
equal to or more than 16xE1.
l The SDH radio mode supports one DCC that is
composed of three DCC bytes, nine DCC bytes, or
twelve DCC bytes.
OM Loopback Supports the following loopback types:
l Inloops at IF ports
l Outloops at IF ports
l Inloops at composite ports
l Outloops at composite ports
Warm reset and
cold reset
Supported
In-service
FPGA loading
Supported
Board
manufacturing
information
query
Supported
Board
temperature
detection
Supported
Board power
detection
Supported

This section describes how to process one IF signal, and it serves as an example to describe the
working principle and signal flow of the IF1.
3-43
Figure 3-20 Functional block diagram of the IF1
Backplane
Cross-connect unit
I F
I
F

p
r
o
c
e
s
s
i
n
g

u
n
i
t

System control and
communication unit
System control and
communication unit
MODEM
unit
Power
supply
unit
SMODEM
unit
Clock
unit
Logic
control unit
ODU control signal
Paired board
Microwave
frame signal
HSM signal bus
Service bus
Overhead bus
Control bus
System clock signal
-48 V
+3.3 V
-48 V power supplied to the ODU
+3.3 V power supplied to the other
units on the board
Clock signal provided to the
other units on the board
L
o
g
i
c

p
r
o
c
e
s
s
i
n
g

u
n
i
t
M
U
X
/
D
E
M
U
X

u
n
i
t
C
o
m
b
i
n
e
r
I
n
t
e
r
f
a
c
e
u
n
i
t

Signal Processing in the Receive Direction
Table 3-33 Signal processing in the receive direction of the IF1
Step Function Unit Processing Flow
1 Combiner interface
unit
Divides the received IF signals into ODU control signals
and microwave service signals.
2 SMODEM unit l Demodulates ODU control signals.
l Transmits the ODU control signals to the system
control and communication unit.
3 IF processing unit l Controls the level of service signals through the
automatic gain control (AGC) circuit.
l Filters signals.
l Performs A/D conversion.
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
4 MODEM unit l Performs digital demodulation.
l Performs time domain adaptive equalization.
l Performs FEC decoding and generates specific
alarms.
5 MUX/DEMUX unit
(for SDH microwave
signal processing)
l Synchronizes frames and detects R_LOS and R_LOF
alarms.
l Performs descrambling.
l Checks B1 and B2 bytes and generates specific alarms
and performance events.
l Checks link IDs and generates specific alarms.
l Checks the M1 byte and bits 6-8 of the K2 byte, and
generates specific alarms and performance events.
l Detects the changes in the SSM in the S1 byte and
reports the SSM status to the system control and
communication unit.
l Detects changes in ATPC messages and returned
microwave messages and reports the changes to the
system control and communication unit over the
control bus.
l Extracts orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes
including F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes, and K
bytes, and transmits the overhead signal to the logic
processing unit.
l Extracts wayside service bytes to form another 2 Mbit/
s overhead signal and transmits the 2 Mbit/s overhead
signal to the logic processing unit.
l Adjusts AU pointers and generates specific
performance events.
l Checks higher order path overheads and generates
specific alarms and performance events.
l Transmits pointer indication signals and VC-4 signals
to the logic processing unit.
3-45
MUX/DEMUX unit
(for PDH microwave
signal processing)
l Detects microwave frame headers in PDH radio mode
and generates specific alarms and performance events.
l Verifies parity bits in microwave frames in PDH radio
mode and generates specific alarms and performance
events.
l Checks link IDs in microwave frames in PDH radio
mode and generates specific alarms and performance
events.
microwave messages in PDH radio mode and reports
the changes to the system control and communication
unit over the control bus.
including F1 and SERIAL bytes, and DCC bytes in
microwave frames in PDH radio mode and transmits
the overhead signals to the logic processing unit.
l Adjusts TU pointers.
l Maps TU-12s in microwave frames in PDH radio
mode to the specific positions in VC-4s.
6 Logic processing
unit
l Processes clock signals.
l Transmits overhead signals to the system control and
communication unit.
l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
to the main and standby cross-connect units.

NOTE
In 1+1 FD/SD mode, the MUX/DEMUX unit transmits service signals over the HSM bus to the MUX/DEMUX
unit of the paired board. The main MUX/DEMUX unit selects the higher quality signals for subsequent
processing.
Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction
Table 3-34 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the IF1
1 Logic processing
unit
l Demultiplexes 2 Mbit/s overhead signals from 8 Mbit/
s overhead signals.
l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
from the cross-connect unit.
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
2 MUX/DEMUX unit
(for SDH microwave
signal processing)
l Sets higher order path overheads.
l Sets AU pointers.
l Sets multiplex section overhead bytes.
l Sets regenerator section overhead bytes.
l Performs scrambling.
MUX/DEMUX unit
(for PDH microwave
signal processing)
l Demaps TU-12s from the VC-4 signals.
l Sets the microwave frame overheads in PDH radio
mode.
3 MODEM unit l Performs FEC coding.
l Performs digital modulation.
4 IF processing unit l Performs D/A conversion.
l Performs analog modulation.
5 SMODEM unit Modulates the ODU control signals transmitted from the
system control and communication unit.
unit
Combines the ODU control signals, microwave service
signals, and -48 V power supplies and transmits the
combined signals to the IF cable.

Control Signal Processing
The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit on the system control and communication unit.
The CPU unit issues configuration and query commands to the other units of the board over the
control bus. These units then report command responses, alarms, and performance events to the
CPU unit over the control bus.
The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the system
Power Supply Unit
l Performs soft-start and filtering operations for the -48 V power received from the power
supply bus in the backplane and supplies -48 V power to the ODU after performing DC-
DC conversion.
l Receives the +3.3 V power from the power supply bus in the backplane and supplies the
+3.3 V power to the other units on the board.
Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock
signals to the other units on the board.
3-47
3.5.4 Front Panel
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-21 Front panel of the IF1
PULL
I
F
1
IF
I O
ODU-PWR
S
T
A
T
S
R
V
L
I
N
K
O
D
U
R
M
T
A
C
T
WARNING
-48V OUTPUT
TURN OFF POWER BEFORE
DISCONNECTING IF CABLE
I
F
1

Indicators
Table 3-35 Status explanation for indicators on the IF1
STAT On (green) The board is working
properly.
l There is no power
supplied to the board.
SRV On (green) The services are normal.
On (red) A critical or major alarm
occurs in the services.
On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm
LINK On (green) The radio link is normal.
On (red) The radio link is faulty.
ODU On (green) The ODU is working
properly.
On (red) l The ODU is reporting
critical or major alarms.
l There is no power
supplied to the ODU.
On (yellow) The ODU is reporting minor
alarms.
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Blinks on (yellow) and off at
300 ms intervals
The antennas are not aligned.
RMT On (yellow) The remote equipment is
reporting defects.
Off The remote equipment is free
of defects.
ACT On (green) l In a 1+1 protected system,
the board works as the
active one.
l In an unprotected system,
the board has been
activated.
Off l In a 1+1 protected system,
standby one.
the board is not activated.

Ports
Table 3-36 Description of the Ports
Port Description Connector Type Corresponding
Cable
IF IF port TNC
IF jumper
b
ODU-PWR
a
ODU power switch - -

NOTE
a: The ODU-PWR switch is equipped with a lockup device. To turn on or turn off the switch, you need to
first pull the switch lever slightly outwards. When the switch is set to "O", it indicates that the circuit is
open. When the switch is set to "I", it indicates that the circuit is closed.
b: A 5D IF cable is connected to an IF board; therefore, an IF jumper is not required.
Labels
There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidance
label on the front panel.
The high temperature warning label indicates that the board surface temperature may exceed
70C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55C. If surface temperature reaches this
level, you need to wear protective gloves before handling the board.
3-49
The operation warning label indicates that the ODU-PWR switch must be turned off before the
IF cable is removed.
The operation guidance label indicates that the switch must be pulled slightly outwards before
the switch is set to the "I" or "O" position.
3.5.5 Valid Slots
The IF1 can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the IF1 on the NMS are the same as the
physical slots.
Figure 3-22 Slots for the IF1 in the IDU chassis
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 5 (IF1)
Slot 3 (IF1)
Slot 1 (IF1)
Slot 8
Slot 6 (IF1)
Slot 4 (IF1)
Slot 2 (IF1)

An ODU is not allocated a physical slot but it has a logical slot on the NMS. The logical slot
number of the ODU is equal to the logical slot number of the IF board that is connected to the
ODU plus 20.
Figure 3-23 Logical slots of the IF1 on the NMS
Slot 7
Slot 5 (IF1)
Slot 3 (IF1)
Slot 1 (IF1)
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 8
Slot 6 (IF1)
Slot 4 (IF1)
Slot 2 (IF1)
Slot 25 (ODU)
Slot 23 (ODU)
Slot 21 (ODU)
Slot 26 (ODU)
Slot 24 (ODU)
Slot 22 (ODU)

Item Description
Slot allocation priority Slots 3 and 5 > Slots 4 and 6 > Slots 1 and 2

3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
NOTE
Use two IF boards in paired slots to configure a 1+1 FD/SD IF protection group. Specifically, slots 1 and
2, slots 3 and 5, and slots 4 and 6 are paired slots respectively.
This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IF1.
Related References
A.5.5.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute
A.5.5.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute
A.5.9.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs
Radio Work Modes
Table 3-38 SDH/PDH microwave work modes (IF1 board)
Service Capacity Modulation Mode Channel Spacing (MHz)
4xE1 QPSK 7
4xE1 16QAM 3.5
8xE1 QPSK 14 (13.75)
8xE1 16QAM 7
16xE1 QPSK 28 (27.5)
16xE1 16QAM 14 (13.75)
22xE1 32QAM 14 (13.75)
26xE1 64QAM 14 (13.75)
35xE1 16QAM 28 (27.5)
44xE1 32QAM 28 (27.5)
53xE1 64QAM 28 (27.5)
STM-1 128QAM 28 (27.5)

3-51
NOTE
l The channel spacings 13.75 MHz, 27.5 MHz, and 55 MHz are applied to the 18 GHz frequency band.
l The channel spacings listed in the table are the minimum channel spacings supported by the product. The
channel spacings larger than the values are also supported.
l The SDH/PDH radio link of the OptiX RTN 950 supports all microwave modulation mode. If the SDH/
PDH radio link supports the 4xE1/16QAM microwave modulation mode, it cannot use the high power ODU.
IF Performance
Table 3-39 IF performance
Item Performance
IF signal Transmit frequency
of the IF board
(MHz)
350
Receive frequency of
the IF board (MHz)
140
ODU O&M signal Modulation mode ASK
Transmit frequency
of the IF board
(MHz)
5.5
the IF board (MHz)
10
Interface impedance (ohm) 50

Baseband Signal Processing Performance of the Modem
Table 3-40 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem
Item Performance
Encoding mode l Reed-Solomon (RS) encoding for PDH microwave signals
l Trellis-coded modulation (TCM) and RS two-level encoding for
SDH microwave signals
Adaptive time-
domain equalizer for
baseband signals
Supported

3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Mechanical Behavior
Item Performance
Weight 0.72 kg

Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 12 W
3.6 IFU2
The IFU2 is a universal IF board that supports the Integrated IP radio mode. The IFU2 uses the
DC-I power distribution mode.
The functional version of the IFU2 is SL91.
The IFU2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and
This section describes how to process one IF signal in Integrated IP radio mode, and it serves
as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the IFU2.
3.6.4 Front Panel
3.6.5 Valid Slots
The IFU2 can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the IFU2 on the NMS are the same
as the physical slots.
This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IFU2.
The functional version of the IFU2 is SL91.
The IFU2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and
3-53
Table 3-42 lists the functions and features that the IFU2 supports. The IFU2 needs to work with
the packet switching unit to implement Ethernet service functions.
Table 3-42 Functions and features that the IFU2 supports
Function and Feature IFU2
Radio type Integrated IP radio
NOTE
The Integrated IP radio is compatible with the Hybrid radio
and the Packet radio.
Service categories Native E1 + Ethernet
NOTE
Ethernet services can be native Ethernet services or packet
services that are encapsulated into PWE3 packets.
AM Supported
E1 priority Supported only in Integrated IP radio mode with native
TDM services being E1 services
Radio work mode See Technical Specifications of the IFU2.
SD protection
Supported
SNCP for TDM
services
Supported
License Air interface
capacity license
Supported
AM license Supported
Clock at the
physical layer
Clock source Clock at the air interface
Clock
protection
DCN Inband DCN Supported.
The DCN bandwidth is configurable.
Outband DCN Supports one DCC that is composed of three DCC
bytes.
Ethernet service functions See Table 3-43.
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
MPLS functions See the description of MPLS/PWE3 functions provided
in the section for the system control, switching, and
timing board.
PWE3 functions
l Inloops and outloops at IF ports
l Inloops and outloops at composite ports
l Inloops at the MAC layer of IF_ETH ports
NOTE
An IF_ETH port is an internal Ethernet port on the IF board
operating in Integrated IP radio mode and is used to receive
or transmit Ethernet services transmitted in Integrated IP
radio mode.
Cold reset and
warm reset
Supported
In-service
FPGA loading
Supported
PRBS BER test
at IF ports
Supported
Board
manufacturing
information
query
Supported
Board
temperature
detection
Supported
Board power
detection
Supported

Table 3-43 Ethernet service functions that the IFU2 supports
Ethernet
services
E-Line services Supports the following types of E-Line services:
l E-Line services based on ports
l E-Line services based on port+VLAN
l E-Line services carried by QinQ links
l E-Line services carried by PWs
3-55
E-LAN services Supports the following types of E-LAN services:
l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1d bridges
l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges
l E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges
ERPS Supports the ERPS function that complies with ITU-T
G.8032/Y.1344.
OAM Supports the IEEE 802.1ag OAM and IEEE 802.3ah
OAM.
LAG Supported
Spanning tree protocol Supports the MSTP protocol that generates only the
CIST. The MSTP protocol provides functions
equivalent to that of the RSTP protocol.
QoS See the description of QoS functions provided in the
section for the system control, switching, and timing
board.
RMON Supported

as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the IFU2.
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Figure 3-24 Functional block diagram of the IFU2
M
U
X
/
D
E
M
U
X

u
n
i
t
Backplane
Cross-connect unit
I F

System control and
communication unit
System control and
communication unit
MODEM
unit

Power
supply
unit
SMODEM
unit
Clock
unit
Logic
control unit
ODU control signal
Paired board
Microwave frame
signal
HSM signal bus
Service bus
Overhead bus
GE bus
Packet switching unit
Control bus
Ethernet
processing
unit
+3.3 V power supplied to the other
units on the board
+3.3 V power supplied to the
monitoring circuit
System clock signal
-48 V1
-48 V2
+3.3 V
L
o
g
i
c

p
r
o
c
e
s
s
i
n
g

u
n
i
t
I
F

p
r
o
c
e
s
s
i
n
g

u
n
i
t
C
o
m
b
i
n
e
r

i
n
t
e
r
f
a
c
e

u
n
i
t

Table 3-44 Signal processing in the receive direction of the IFU2
unit
3 IF processing unit l Filters signals.
3-57
alarms.
5 MUX/DEMUX unit l Detects microwave frame headers in Integrated IP
radio mode and generates specific alarms and
performance events.
l Verifies parity bits in microwave frames in Integrated
IP radio mode and generates specific alarms and
performance events.
l Checks link IDs in microwave frames in Integrated IP
performance events.
microwave messages in Integrated IP radio mode and
reports the changes to the system control and
communication unit over the control bus.
l Extracts auxiliary channel bytes including orderwire
bytes, F1 and SERIAL bytes, SSM bytes, and DCC
bytes in microwave frames and transmits the overhead
signals to the logic processing unit.
l Maps E1 service signals in Integrated IP radio mode
to the specific positions in VC-4s and then transmits
the VC-4s to the logic processing unit.
l Extracts the Ethernet service signals from microwave
frams and transmits to the Ethernet processing unit.
6 Ethernet processing
unit
l Processes the GE signals received from the MUX/
DEMUX unit.
l Sends the processed signals to the main and standby
packet switching units.
7 Logic processing
unit
l Transmits the overhead signals to the system control

NOTE
processing.
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Table 3-45 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the IFU2
1 Logic processing
unit
l Processes overhead signals.
unit
l Receives GE signal from the packet switching unit.
l Processes GE signals.
3 MUX/DEMUX unit l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signals.
l Sets the microwave frame overheads in Integrated IP
radio mode.
l Combines the E1 signals, Ethernet signals, and
microwave frame overheads to form microwave
frames.
l Filters signals.
l Amplifies signals.
unit

Power Supply Unit
3-59
DC conversion.
supply bus in the backplane and supplies +3.3 V power to the other units on the IFU2 after
performing DC-DC conversion.
Clock Unit
3.6.4 Front Panel
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-25 Front panel of the IFU2
I
F
U
2
PULL
IF
I O
ODU-PWR
S
T
A
T
S
R
V
L
I
N
K
O
D
U
R
M
T
A
C
T
WARNING
-48V OUTPUT
I
F
U
2

Indicators
Table 3-46 Status explanation for indicators on the IFU2
l There is no power supplied to the board.
services.
services.
ODU On (green) The ODU is working properly.
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
On (red) l The ODU is reporting critical or major
alarms.
l There is no power supplied to the ODU.
On (yellow) The ODU is reporting minor alarms.
Blinks on (yellow)
and off at 300 ms
intervals
RMT On (yellow) The remote equipment is reporting defects.
Off The remote equipment is free of defects.
ACT On (green) l In a 1+1 protected system, the board
l In an unprotected system, the board has
been activated.
Off l In a 1+1 protected system, the board
l In an unprotected system, the board is not
activated.

Ports
Cable
IF IF port TNC
IF jumper
b
ODU-PWR
a

NOTE
Labels
3-61
3.6.5 Valid Slots
The IFU2 can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the IFU2 on the NMS are the same
Figure 3-26 Slots for the IFU2 in the IDU chassis
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 5 (IFU2)
Slot 3 (IFU2)
Slot 1 (IFU2)
Slot 8
Slot 6 (IFU2)
Slot 4 (IFU2)
Slot 2 (IFU2)

ODU plus 20.
Figure 3-27 Logical slots of the IFU2 on the NMS
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 5 (IFU2)
Slot 3 (IFU2)
Slot 1 (IFU2)
Slot 8
Slot 6 (IFU2)
Slot 4 (IFU2)
Slot 2 (IFU2)
Slot 25 (ODU)
Slot 23 (ODU)
Slot 21 (ODU)
Slot 26 (ODU)
Slot 24 (ODU)
Slot 22 (ODU)

Item Description

3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
NOTE
This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IFU2.
Related References
A.5.5.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid_AM Configuration_Advanced Attributes
A.5.4.1 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes
A.5.4.2 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes
A.5.4.4 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes
Radio Work Modes
Table 3-49 Integrated IP microwave work modes (IFU2 board)
Channel Spacing
(MHz) Modulation Mode
Maximum
Number of E1s in
Hybrid
Microwave
Native Ethernet
Throughput
(Mbit/s)
7 QPSK 5 9 to 12
7 16QAM 10 20 to 24
7 32QAM 12 24 to 29
7 64QAM 15 31 to 37
7 128QAM 18 37 to 44
7 256QAM 21 43 to 51
14 (13.75) QPSK 10 20 to 23
14 (13.75) 16QAM 20 41 to 48
14 (13.75) 32QAM 24 50 to 59
14 (13.75) 64QAM 31 65 to 76
3-63
Channel Spacing
Maximum
Number of E1s in
Hybrid
Microwave
Native Ethernet
Throughput
(Mbit/s)
14 (13.75) 128QAM 37 77 to 90
14 (13.75) 256QAM 43 90 to 104
28 (27.5) QPSK 20 41 to 48
28 (27.5) 16QAM 40 82 to 97
28 (27.5) 32QAM 52 108 to 125
28 (27.5) 64QAM 64 130 to 150
28 (27.5) 128QAM 75 160 to 180
28 (27.5) 256QAM 75 180 to 210
56 (55) QPSK 40 82 to 97
56 (55) 16QAM 75 165 to 190
56 (55) 32QAM 75 208 to 240
56 (55) 64QAM 75 260 to 310
56 (55) 128QAM 75 310 to 360
56 (55) 256QAM 75 360 to 420

NOTE
l The throughput specifications in these tables are values for untagged Ethernet frames.
l E1 services need to occupy the corresponding bandwidth of the air interface capacity. The bandwidth
remaining after the E1 service capacity is subtracted from the air interface capacity can be provided for
Ethernet services.
IF Performance
Item Performance
of the IF board
(MHz)
350
the IF board (MHz)
140
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Item Performance
Transmit frequency
of the IF board
(MHz)
5.5
the IF board (MHz)
10

Item Performance
Encoding mode LDPC encoding
Adaptive time-
baseband signals
Supported

Mechanical Behavior
Item Performance
Dimensions (H x W
x D)
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight 0.79 kg

Power Consumption
3.7 IFX2
The IFX2 is a universal IF board that supports the XPIC function in Integrated IP radio mode.
The IFX2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode.
The functional version of the IFX2 is SL91.
3-65
The IFX2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and
supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. The IFX2 supports cross-polarization interference
cancellation (XPIC) processing for IF signals.
as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the IFX2.
3.7.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, an IF port, XPIC signal ports, an ODU power switch, and labels on the
front panel.
3.7.5 Valid Slots
The IFX2 can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the IFX2 on the NMS are the same
This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IFX2.
The functional version of the IFX2 is SL91.
The IFX2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and
supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. The IFX2 supports cross-polarization interference
cancellation (XPIC) processing for IF signals.
Table 3-53 lists the functions and features that the IFX2 supports.
Table 3-53 Functions and features that the IFX2 supports
Function and Feature IFX2
Radio type Integrated IP radio
NOTE
Integrated IP radio is compatible with Hybrid radio and Packet
radio.
Service categories Native E1 + Ethernet
NOTE
Ethernet services can be Native Ethernet services or packet
AM Supported
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
E1 priority Supported only in Integrated IP radio mode, in which
native TDM services are E1 services
XPIC Supported
Radio work mode See Technical Specifications of the IFX2.
SD protection
Supported
SNCP for TDM
services
Supported
capacity license
Supported
Clock at the
physical layer
Clock source Clock at an air interface
Clock
protection
DCN Inband DCN Supported.
The DCN bandwidth is configurable.
Outband DCN Supports one DCC that is composed of three DCC
bytes.
Ethernet service features See Table 3-54.
MPLS functions See the description of the MPLS/PWE3 functions that
the system control, switching, and timing board
supports.
PWE3 functions
l Inloops and outloops at multiplexing ports
l Inloops at the MAC layer of IF_ETH ports
NOTE
An IF_ETH port is an internal Ethernet port on the IF board
operating in Integrated IP radio mode and is used to receive
or transmit Ethernet services transmitted in Integrated IP
radio mode.
Cold reset and
warm reset
Supported
3-67
In-service
FPGA loading
Supported
PRBS BER test
at IF ports
Supported
Board
manufacturing
information
query
Supported
Board
temperature
detection
Supported
Board voltage
detection
Supported

Table 3-54 Ethernet service functions that the IFX2 supports
Ethernet
services
G.8032/Y.1344.
ETH-OAM Supports IEEE 802.1ag OAM and IEEE 802.3ah
OAM.
LAG Supported
QoS See the description of the QoS functions that the system
control, switching, and timing board supports.
RMON Supported

3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the IFX2.
Figure 3-28 Functional block diagram of the IFX2
Backplane
Cross-connect unit
IF

System control and
communication unit

System control and
communication unit
MODEM
unit
Clock
unit
Logic
control unit
ODU control signal
Paired board
Microwave
frame signal
HSM signal bus
Service bus
Overhead
bus
GE bus
Control bus
Ethernet
processing
unit
XPIC signal
SMODEM
unit
+3.3 V power supplied to
the monitoring circuit
System clock signal
-48 V1
-48 V2
+3.3 V
Paired XPIC
board
Power
supply
unit
L
o
g
i
c

p
r
o
c
e
s
s
i
n
g

u
n
i
t
M
U
X
/
D
E
M
U
X

u
n
i
t
I
F

p
r
o
c
e
s
s
i
n
g

u
n
i
t
C
o
m
b
i
n
e
r

i
n
t
e
r
f
a
c
e

u
n
i
t

Table 3-55 Signal processing in the receive direction of the IFX2
unit
3-69
3 IF processing unit l Filters the received signals and splits the signals to two
channels of signals.
Performs A/D conversion for one channel of
filtered signals and transmits the converted signals
to the MODEM unit.
Outputs the other channel of filtered signals as the
XPIC signals.
l Performs A/D conversion for XPIC signals
transmitted from the paired IFX2 and transmits the
converted signals to the MODEM unit.
4 MODEM unit l Performs digital demodulation by using XPIC IF
signals transmitted from the paired IFX2 as reference
signals.
l Performs XPIC operations for IF signals.
alarms.
5 MUX/DEMUX unit l Detects microwave frame headers in Integrated IP
performance events.
l Verifies parity bits in microwave frames in Integrated
IP radio mode and generates specific alarms and
performance events.
l Checks link IDs in microwave frames in Integrated IP
radio mode and generates specific alarms.
microwave messages in Integrated IP radio mode and
reports the changes to the system control and
communication unit over the control bus.
including F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes, and SSM
bytes in microwave frames in Integrated IP radio mode
and transmits the overhead signal to the logic
processing unit.
l Maps E1 service signals in Integrated IP radio mode
to the specific positions in VC-4s and then transmits
the VC-4s to the logic processing unit.
frames in Integrated IP radio mode and transmits to
the Ethernet processing unit.
unit
DEMUX unit.
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
7 Logic processing
unit

NOTE
processing.
Table 3-56 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the IFX2
1 Logic processing
unit
unit
l Receives GE signals from the packet switching unit.
3 MUX/DEMUX unit l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signals.
l Sets the microwave frame overheads in Integrated IP
radio mode.
l Combines the E1 signals, Ethernet signals and
microwave frame overheads to form microwave
frames.
l Filters signals.
unit

3-71
Power Supply Unit
DC conversion.
supply bus in the backplane and supplies +3.3 V power to the other units on the IFX2 after
Clock Unit
3.7.4 Front Panel
front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-29 Front panel of the IFX2
I
F
X
2
IF
I O
ODU-PWR
S
T
A
T
S
R
V
L
I
N
K
O
D
U
R
M
T
A
C
T
WARNING
-48V OUTPUT
I
F
X
2
X-IN X-OUT
PULL X
P
I
C

Indicators
Table 3-57 Status explanation for indicators on the IFX2
XPIC On (green) The XPIC input signal is
normal.
On (red) The XPIC input signal is lost.
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Off The XPIC function is
disabled.
properly.
l There is no power
properly.
l There is no power
alarms.
300 ms intervals
reporting defects.
of defects.
active one.
the board has been
activated.
3-73
standby one.

Ports
Table 3-58 Description of the ports
Cable
IF IF port TNC
IF jumper
b
ODU-PWR
a
X-IN XPIC signal input
port
SMA XPIC cable
X-OUT XPIC signal output
port
SMA

NOTE
Labels
3.7.5 Valid Slots
The IFX2 can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the IFX2 on the NMS are the same
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Figure 3-30 Slots for the IFX2 in the IDU chassis
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 5 (IFX2)
Slot 3 (IFX2)
Slot 1 (IFX2)
Slot 8
Slot 6 (IFX2)
Slot 4 (IFX2)
Slot 2 (IFX2)

ODU plus 20.
Figure 3-31 Logical slots for the logical boards of the IFX2
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 5 (IFX2)
Slot 3 (IFX2)
Slot 1 (IFX2)
Slot 8
Slot 6 (IFX2)
Slot 4 (IFX2)
Slot 2 (IFX2)
Slot 25 (ODU)
Slot 23 (ODU)
Slot 21 (ODU)
Slot 26 (ODU)
Slot 24 (ODU)
Slot 22 (ODU)

Item Description

NOTE
NOTE
One IFX2 pair must be installed on the same row or adjacently in the same column.
This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IFX2.
3-75
Related References
Radio Work Modes
Table 3-60 Integrated IP microwave work modes (IFX2 board)
Channel Spacing
Maximum
Number of E1s in
Hybrid
Microwave
Native Ethernet
Throughput
(Mbit/s)
28 (27.5) QPSK 19 41 to 48
28 (27.5) 16QAM 40 84 to 97
28 (27.5) 32QAM 49 103 to 120
28 (27.5) 64QAM 63 130 to 150
28 (27.5) 128QAM 75 160 to 180
28 (27.5) 256QAM 75 180 to 210
56 (55) QPSK 39 83 to 97
56 (55) 16QAM 75 165 to 190
56 (55) 32QAM 75 210 to 245
56 (55) 64QAM 75 260 to 305
56 (55) 128QAM 75 310 to 360
56 (55) 256QAM 75 360 to 410

3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
NOTE
Ethernet services.
IF Performance
Item Performance
of the IF board
(MHz)
350
the IF board (MHz)
140
Transmit frequency
of the IF board
(MHz)
5.5
the IF board (MHz)
10

Item Performance
Adaptive time-
baseband signals
Supported

3-77
Mechanical Behavior
Item Performance
Dimensions (H x W
x D)
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight 0.80 kg

Power Consumption
3.8 ISU2
The ISU2 is a universal IF board that supports the Integrated IP radio mode and SDH radio mode
at the same time. The ISU2 uses the DC-I power distribution mode.
The functional version of the ISU2 is SL91.
The ISU2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and
as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the ISU2.
3.8.4 Front Panel
3.8.5 Valid Slots
The ISU2 can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the ISU2 on the NMS are the same
This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the ISU2.
The functional version of the ISU2 is SL91.
The ISU2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Table 3-64 lists the functions and features that the ISU2 supports. The ISU2 needs to work with
the packet switching unit to implement Ethernet service functions.
Table 3-64 Functions and features that the ISU2 supports
Function and Feature ISU2
Radio type l Integrated IP radio
l SDH radio
NOTE
The Integrated IP radio is compatible with the Hybrid radio
Service categories in Integrated IP
radio mode
l Native E1 + Ethernet
l Native STM-1 + Ethernet
NOTE
Service categories in SDH radio
mode
l STM-1
l 2xSTM-1
AM Supported only in Integrated IP radio mode
High-efficiency encapsulation Supports high-efficiency encapsulation for L2 Ethernet
packets and L3 IP packets.
E1 priority Supported only in Integrated IP radio mode with native
Radio work mode See Technical Specifications of the ISU2.
Link-level
protection
1+1 HSB/FD/
SD protection
Supported
LAG protection
at air interfaces
Supported
Service protection SNCP
timing board.
PWE3 functions
capacity license
Supported
3-79
Clock at the
physical layer
Clock
protection
DCN Inband DCN Supported
Outband DCN l Supports one DCC that is composed of three DCC
bytes for each channel in Integrated IP radio mode.
l Supports one DCC that is composed of D1-D3
bytes, D4-D12 bytes, or D1-D12 bytes, for each
channel in SDH radio mode.
Cold reset and
warm reset
Supported
In-service
FPGA loading
Supported
PRBS BER test
at IF ports
Supported
Board
manufacturing
information
query
Supported
Board
temperature
detection
Supported
Board power
detection
Supported

Table 3-65 Ethernet service functions that the ISU2 supports
Ethernet
services
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
G.8032/Y.1344.
OAM.
LAG Supported
board.
RMON Supported

as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the ISU2.
NOTE
The ISU2 adopts the same principle to process signals transmitted/received in Integrated IP radio mode
and signals transmitted/received in SDH radio mode. The difference is with regard to the microwave frame
structure and processed service categories.
3-81
Figure 3-32 Functional block diagram of the ISU2
Backplane
Cross-connect unit
IF
I
F

p
r
o
c
e
s
s
i
n
g

u
n
i
t
L
o
g
i
c

p
r
o
c
e
s
s
i
n
g

u
n
i
t
M
U
X
/
D
E
M
U
X

u
n
i
t
M
O
D
E
M

u
n
i
t
C
o
m
b
i
n
e
r

i
n
t
e
r
f
a
c
e

u
n
i
t
Power
supply
unit
SMODEM
unit
Clock
unit
Logic
control unit
ODU control signal
Paired board
Microwave
frame signal
HSM signal bus
Service bus
Overhead bus
GE bus
Control bus
-48 V2
the other units on the board
System clock signal
E
t
h
e
r
n
e
t

p
r
o
c
e
s
s
i
n
g

u
n
i
t
+3.3 V
-48 V1
System control and
communication unit
System control and
communication unit

Table 3-66 Signal processing in the receive direction of the ISU2
unit
3 IF processing unit l Filters signals.
alarms.
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
5 MUX/DEMUX unit l Detects microwave frame headers and generates
l Verifies parity bits in microwave frames and generates
l Checks link IDs in microwave frames and generates
control bus.
including F1 and SERIAL bytes, and DCC bytes in
microwave frames and transmits to the logic
processing unit.
l Maps E1 service signals to the specific positions in
VC-4s and then transmits the VC-4s to the logic
processing unit, if native TDM services in Integrated
IP radio mode are E1 services.
l Demaps VC-4s from STM-1 service signals and then
transmits the VC-4s to the logic processing unit, if
native TDM services in Integrated IP radio mode are
STM-1 services.
unit
DEMUX unit.
7 Logic processing
unit

NOTE
processing.
3-83
Table 3-67 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the ISU2
1 Logic processing
unit
unit
3 MUX/DEMUX unit l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signals that are
from the logic processing unit, if native TDM services
in Integrated IP radio mode are E1 services.
l Adds overheads to the VC-4 signals that are from the
logic processing unit to form STM-1 signals, if native
TDM services in Integrated IP radio mode are STM-1
services.
l Sets microwave frame overheads.
l Combines the E1/STM-1 signals, Ethernet signals,
and microwave frame overheads to form microwave
frames.
l Filters signals.
unit

3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Power Supply Unit
DC conversion.
supply bus in the backplane and supplies +3.3 V power to the other units on the ISU2 after
Clock Unit
3.8.4 Front Panel
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-33 Front panel of the ISU2
I
S
U
2
IF
I O
ODU-PWR
S
T
A
T
S
R
V
L
I
N
K
O
D
U
R
M
T
A
C
T
WARNING
-48V OUTPUT
I
S
U
2
PULL

Indicators
Table 3-68 Status explanation for indicators on the ISU2
properly.
l There is no power
3-85
properly.
l There is no power
alarms.
300 ms intervals
reporting defects.
of defects.
active one.
the board has been
activated.
standby one.

Ports
Cable
IF IF port TNC
IF jumper
b
ODU-PWR
a

3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
NOTE
Labels
3.8.5 Valid Slots
The ISU2 can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the ISU2 on the NMS are the same
Figure 3-34 Slots for the ISU2 in the IDU chassis
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 5 (ISU2)
Slot 3 (ISU2)
Slot 1 (ISU2)
Slot 8
Slot 6 (ISU2)
Slot 4 (ISU2)
Slot 2 (ISU2)

ODU plus 20.
3-87
Figure 3-35 Logical slots of the ISU2 on the NMS
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 5 (ISU2)
Slot 3 (ISU2)
Slot 1 (ISU2)
Slot 8
Slot 6 (ISU2)
Slot 4 (ISU2)
Slot 2 (ISU2)
Slot 25 (ODU)
Slot 23 (ODU)
Slot 21 (ODU)
Slot 26 (ODU)
Slot 24 (ODU)
Slot 22 (ODU)

Item Description

NOTE
This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the ISU2.
Related References
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Radio Work Modes
Table 3-71 SDH/PDH microwave work modes (ISU2/ISX2 board)
STM-1 128QAM 28 (27.5)
2xSTM-1 128QAM 56 (55)

Table 3-72 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISU2/ISX2 board, Native E1 + Ethernet service)
Channel
Spacing
(MHz)
Modulation
Mode
Maximum
Number of
E1s in Hybrid
Microwave
Native Ethernet Throughput (Mbit/s)
Not
Accelerated
With L2
Bandwidth
Accelerated
With L2+L3
Bandwidth
Accelerated
(IPv4)
7 QPSK 5 10 to 13 10 to 15 10 to 22
7 16QAM 10 20 to 26 20 to 30 20 to 44
7 32QAM 12 25 to 32 25 to 36 25 to 54
7 64QAM 15 31 to 40 31 to 47 31 to 67
7 128QAM 18 37 to 47 37 to 56 37 to 80
7 256QAM 20 41 to 53 41 to 62 41 to 90
14 (13.75) QPSK 10 20 to 26 20 to 31 20 to 44
14 (13.75) 16QAM 20 41 to 52 41 to 61 41 to 89
14 (13.75) 32QAM 24 51 to 65 51 to 77 51 to 110
14 (13.75) 64QAM 31 65 to 83 65 to 96 65 to 140
14 (13.75) 128QAM 37 76 to 97 76 to 113 76 to 165
14 (13.75) 256QAM 42 87 to 111 87 to 131 87 to 189
28 (27.5) QPSK 20 41 to 52 41 to 62 41 to 89
28 (27.5) 16QAM 40 82 to 105 82 to 124 82 to 178
28 (27.5) 32QAM 52 107 to 136 107 to 161 107 to 230
28 (27.5) 64QAM 64 131 to 168 131 to 198 131 to 283
28 (27.5) 128QAM 75 155 to 198 155 to 233 155 to 333
28 (27.5) 256QAM 75 181 to 230 181 to 272 181 to 388
40 QPSK 27 56 to 72 56 to 84 56 to 122
3-89
Channel
Spacing
(MHz)
Modulation
Mode
Maximum
Number of
E1s in Hybrid
Microwave
Not
Accelerated
With L2
Bandwidth
Accelerated
With L2+L3
Bandwidth
Accelerated
(IPv4)
40 16QAM 55 114 to 145 114 to 172 114 to 247
40 32QAM 71 147 to 187 147 to 221 147 to 318
40 64QAM 75 181 to 230 181 to 272 181 to 388
40 128QAM 75 215 to 272 215 to 323 215 to 456
40 256QAM 75 249 to 318 249 to 375 249 to 538
56 (55) QPSK 40 82 to 105 82 to 124 82 to 178
56 (55) 16QAM 75 166 to 212 166 to 250 165 to 356
56 (55) 32QAM 75 206 to 262 206 to 308 206 to 437
56 (55) 64QAM 75 262 to 333 262 to 388 262 to 567
56 (55) 128QAM 75 309 to 396 309 to 466 309 to 656
56 (55) 256QAM 75 360 to 456 360 to 538 360 to 777

NOTE
The ISX2 board supports channel spacings of 7 Mbit/s and 14 Mbit/s only when the non-XPIC mode is
adopted.
Table 3-73 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISU2 board, Native STM-1 + Ethernet service)
Channel
Spacing
(MHz)
Modulation
Mode
Number of
STM-1
Services in
Hybrid
Microwave
Not
Accelerated
With L2
Bandwidth
Accelerated
With L2+L3
Bandwidth
Accelerated
(IPv4)
28 (27.5) 128QAM 1 155 to 198 155 to 233 155 to 333
28 (27.5) 256QAM 1 181 to 230 181 to 272 181 to 388
40 64QAM 1 181 to 230 181 to 272 181 to 388
40 128QAM 1 215 to 272 215 to 323 215 to 456
40 256QAM 1 249 to 318 249 to 375 249 to 538
56 (55) 16QAM 1 166 to 212 166 to 250 165 to 356
56 (55) 32QAM 1 206 to 262 206 to 308 206 to 437
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Channel
Spacing
(MHz)
Modulation
Mode
Number of
STM-1
Services in
Hybrid
Microwave
Not
Accelerated
With L2
Bandwidth
Accelerated
With L2+L3
Bandwidth
Accelerated
(IPv4)
56 (55) 64QAM 1 262 to 333 262 to 388 262 to 567
56 (55) 128QAM 1 309 to 396 309 to 466 309 to 656
56 (55) 256QAM 1 360 to 456 360 to 538 360 to 777

NOTE
Ethernet services.
IF Performance
Item Performance
of the IF board
(MHz)
350
the IF board (MHz)
140
Transmit frequency
of the IF board
(MHz)
5.5
the IF board (MHz)
10

3-91
Item Performance
Adaptive time-
baseband signals
Supported

Mechanical Behavior
Item Performance
Dimensions (H x W
x D)
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight 0.60 kg

Power Consumption
3.9 ISX2
The ISX2 is a universal XPIC IF board and provides the XPIC function for signals transmitted/
received in Integrated IP radio mode and SDH radio mode. The ISX2 uses the DC-I power
distribution mode.
The functional version of the ISX2 is SL91.
The ISX2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and
supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. In addition, the ISX2 provides the cross-
polarization interference cancellation (XPIC) function for IF signals by transmitting/receiving
XPIC reference signals.
as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the ISX2.
3.9.4 Front Panel
front panel.
3.9.5 Valid Slots
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
The ISX2 can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the ISX2 on the NMS are the same
This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the ISX2.
The functional version of the ISX2 is SL91.
The ISX2 receives and transmits one IF signal, provides management channels to the ODU, and
supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. In addition, the ISX2 provides the cross-
polarization interference cancellation (XPIC) function for IF signals by transmitting/receiving
XPIC reference signals.
Table 3-77 lists the functions and features that the ISX2 supports. The ISX2 needs to work with
the packet switching unit to implement Ethernet service functions and packet service functions.
Table 3-77 Functions and features that the ISX2 supports
Function and Feature ISX2
Radio type l Integrated IP radio
l SDH radio
NOTE
The integrated IP radio is compatible with the Hybrid radio
Service categories in Integrated IP
radio mode
l Native E1 + Ethernet
l Native STM-1 + Ethernet
NOTE
Service categories in SDH radio
mode
l STM-1
l 2xSTM-1
AM Supported only in integrated IP radio mode
High-efficiency encapsulation Supports high-efficiency encapsulation for L2 Ethernet
packets and L3 IP packets.
E1 priority Supported only in integrated IP radio mode with native
3-93
XPIC Supported
Radio work mode See Technical Specifications of the ISX2.
Link-level
protection
1+1 HSB/FD/
SD protection
Supported
LAG protection
at air interfaces
Supported
Native TDM
services
Service
categories
E1 services and STM-1 services
Service
protection
SNCP
timing board.
PWE3 functions
capacity license
Supported
Clock at the
physical layer
Clock
protection
DCN Inband DCN Supported
Outband DCN l Supports one DCC that is composed of three DCC
bytes for each channel in Integrated IP radio mode.
l Supports one DCC that is composed of D1-D3
bytes, D4-D12 bytes, or D1-D12 bytes, for each
channel in SDH radio mode.
Cold reset and
warm reset
Supported
In-service
FPGA loading
Supported
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
PRBS BER test
at IF ports
Supported
Board
manufacturing
information
query
Supported
Board
temperature
detection
Supported
Board power
detection
Supported

Table 3-78 Ethernet service functions that the ISX2 supports
Ethernet
services
G.8032/Y.1344.
OAM.
LAG Supported
board.
RMON Supported

3-95
as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the ISX2.
NOTE
The ISX2 adopts the same principle to process signals transmitted/received in Integrated IP radio mode
and signals transmitted/received in SDH radio mode. The difference is with regard to the microwave frame
structure and processed service types.
Figure 3-36 Functional block diagram of the ISX2
Backplane
Cross-connect unit
IF

System control and
communication unit

System control and
communication unit
MODEM
unit
Clock
unit
Logic
control unit
ODU control signal
Paired board
Microwave
frame signal
HSM signal bus
Service bus
Overhead
bus
GE bus
Control bus
Ethernet
processing
unit
XPIC signal
SMODEM
unit
System clock signal
-48 V1
-48 V2
+3.3 V
Paired XPIC
board
Power
supply
unit
L
o
g
i
c

p
r
o
c
e
s
s
i
n
g

u
n
i
t
M
U
X
/
D
E
M
U
X

u
n
i
t
I
F

p
r
o
c
e
s
s
i
n
g

u
n
i
t
C
o
m
b
i
n
e
r

i
n
t
e
r
f
a
c
e

u
n
i
t

Table 3-79 Signal processing in the receive direction of the ISX2
unit
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 IF processing unit l Filters the received signals and splits the signals to two
channels of signals.
Performs A/D conversion for one channel of
filtered signals and transmits the converted signals
to the MODEM unit.
Outputs the other channel of filtered signals as the
XPIC signals.
l Performs A/D conversion for XPIC signals
transmitted from the paired ISX2 and transmits the
converted signals to the MODEM unit.
4 MODEM unit l Performs digital demodulation by using XPIC IF
signals transmitted from the paired ISX2 as reference
signals.
l Performs XPIC operations for IF signals.
alarms.
5 MUX/DEMUX unit l Detects microwave frame headers and generates
l Verifies parity bits in microwave frames and generates
l Checks link IDs in microwave frames and generates
control bus.
l Extracts auxiliary channel bytes including orderwire
bytes, F1 and SERIAL bytes, and DCC bytes in
microwave frames and transmits to the logic
processing unit.
l Maps E1 service signals to the specific positions in
VC-4s and then transmits the VC-4s to the logic
processing unit, if native TDM services in Integrated
IP radio mode are E1 services.
l Demaps VC-4s from STM-1 service signals and then
transmits the VC-4s to the logic processing unit, if
native TDM services in Integrated IP radio mode are
STM-1 services.
3-97
unit
DEMUX unit.
7 Logic processing
unit

NOTE
processing.
Table 3-80 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the ISX2
1 Logic processing
unit
unit
3 MUX/DEMUX unit l Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signals that are
from the logic processing unit, if native TDM services
in Integrated IP radio mode are E1 services.
l Adds overheads to the VC-4 signals that are from the
logic processing unit to form STM-1 signals, if native
TDM services in Integrated IP radio mode are STM-1
services.
l Sets microwave frame overheads.
l Combines the E1/STM-1 signals, Ethernet signals,
and microwave frame overheads to form microwave
frames.
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
l Filters signals.
unit

Power Supply Unit
DC conversion.
supply bus in the backplane and supplies +3.3 V power to the other units on the ISU2 after
Clock Unit
3.9.4 Front Panel
front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-37 Front panel of the ISX2
I
S
X
2
IF
I O
ODU-PWR
S
T
A
T
S
R
V
L
I
N
K
O
D
U
R
M
T
A
C
T
WARNING
-48V OUTPUT
I
S
X
2
X-IN X-OUT
PULL X
P
I
C
3-99

Indicators
Table 3-81 Status explanation for indicators on the ISX2
normal.
disabled.
properly.
l There is no power
properly.
l There is no power
alarms.
300 ms intervals
reporting defects.
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
of defects.
active one.
the board has been
activated.
standby one.

Ports
Cable
IF IF port TNC
IF jumper
b
ODU-PWR
a
X-IN XPIC signal input
port
SMA XPIC cable
X-OUT XPIC signal output
port
SMA

NOTE
Labels
3-101
3.9.5 Valid Slots
The ISX2 can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the ISX2 on the NMS are the same
Figure 3-38 Slots for the ISX2 in the IDU chassis
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 5 (ISX2)
Slot 3 (ISX2)
Slot 1 (ISX2)
Slot 8
Slot 6 (ISX2)
Slot 4 (ISX2)
Slot 2 (ISX2)

ODU plus 20.
Figure 3-39 Logical slots of the ISX2 on the NMS
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 5 (ISX2)
Slot 3 (ISX2)
Slot 1 (ISX2)
Slot 8
Slot 6 (ISX2)
Slot 4 (ISX2)
Slot 2 (ISX2)
Slot 25 (ODU)
Slot 23 (ODU)
Slot 21 (ODU)
Slot 26 (ODU)
Slot 24 (ODU)
Slot 22 (ODU)

Item Description

3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
NOTE
NOTE
One ISX2 pair for implementing the XPIC function must be installed on the same row or adjacently in the
same column.
This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the ISX2.
Related References
Radio Work Modes
Table 3-84 SDH/PDH microwave work modes (ISU2/ISX2 board)
STM-1 128QAM 28 (27.5)
2xSTM-1 128QAM 56 (55)

Table 3-85 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISU2/ISX2 board, Native E1 + Ethernet service)
Channel
Spacing
(MHz)
Modulation
Mode
Maximum
Number of
E1s in Hybrid
Microwave
Not
Accelerated
With L2
Bandwidth
Accelerated
With L2+L3
Bandwidth
Accelerated
(IPv4)
7 QPSK 5 10 to 13 10 to 15 10 to 22
3-103
Channel
Spacing
(MHz)
Modulation
Mode
Maximum
Number of
E1s in Hybrid
Microwave
Not
Accelerated
With L2
Bandwidth
Accelerated
With L2+L3
Bandwidth
Accelerated
(IPv4)
7 16QAM 10 20 to 26 20 to 30 20 to 44
7 32QAM 12 25 to 32 25 to 36 25 to 54
7 64QAM 15 31 to 40 31 to 47 31 to 67
7 128QAM 18 37 to 47 37 to 56 37 to 80
7 256QAM 20 41 to 53 41 to 62 41 to 90
14 (13.75) QPSK 10 20 to 26 20 to 31 20 to 44
14 (13.75) 16QAM 20 41 to 52 41 to 61 41 to 89
14 (13.75) 32QAM 24 51 to 65 51 to 77 51 to 110
14 (13.75) 64QAM 31 65 to 83 65 to 96 65 to 140
14 (13.75) 128QAM 37 76 to 97 76 to 113 76 to 165
14 (13.75) 256QAM 42 87 to 111 87 to 131 87 to 189
28 (27.5) QPSK 20 41 to 52 41 to 62 41 to 89
28 (27.5) 16QAM 40 82 to 105 82 to 124 82 to 178
28 (27.5) 32QAM 52 107 to 136 107 to 161 107 to 230
28 (27.5) 64QAM 64 131 to 168 131 to 198 131 to 283
28 (27.5) 128QAM 75 155 to 198 155 to 233 155 to 333
28 (27.5) 256QAM 75 181 to 230 181 to 272 181 to 388
40 QPSK 27 56 to 72 56 to 84 56 to 122
40 16QAM 55 114 to 145 114 to 172 114 to 247
40 32QAM 71 147 to 187 147 to 221 147 to 318
40 64QAM 75 181 to 230 181 to 272 181 to 388
40 128QAM 75 215 to 272 215 to 323 215 to 456
40 256QAM 75 249 to 318 249 to 375 249 to 538
56 (55) QPSK 40 82 to 105 82 to 124 82 to 178
56 (55) 16QAM 75 166 to 212 166 to 250 165 to 356
56 (55) 32QAM 75 206 to 262 206 to 308 206 to 437
56 (55) 64QAM 75 262 to 333 262 to 388 262 to 567
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Channel
Spacing
(MHz)
Modulation
Mode
Maximum
Number of
E1s in Hybrid
Microwave
Not
Accelerated
With L2
Bandwidth
Accelerated
With L2+L3
Bandwidth
Accelerated
(IPv4)
56 (55) 128QAM 75 309 to 396 309 to 466 309 to 656
56 (55) 256QAM 75 360 to 456 360 to 538 360 to 777

NOTE
The ISX2 board supports channel spacings of 7 Mbit/s and 14 Mbit/s only when the non-XPIC mode is
adopted.
Table 3-86 Integrated IP microwave work modes (ISX2 board, Native STM-1 + Ethernet service)
Channel
Spacing
(MHz)
Modulation
Mode
Number of
STM-1
Services in
Hybrid
Microwave
Not
Accelerated
With L2
Bandwidth
Accelerated
With L2+L3
Bandwidth
Accelerated
(IPv4)
28 (27.5) 128QAM 1 155 to 198 155 to 233 155 to 333
28 (27.5) 256QAM 1 181 to 230 181 to 272 181 to 388
40 64QAM 1 181 to 230 181 to 272 181 to 388
40 128QAM 1 215 to 272 215 to 323 215 to 456
40 256QAM 1 249 to 318 249 to 375 249 to 538
56 (55) 16QAM 1 166 to 212 166 to 250 165 to 356
56 (55) 32QAM 1 206 to 262 206 to 308 206 to 437
56 (55) 64QAM 1 262 to 333 262 to 388 262 to 567
56 (55) 128QAM 1 309 to 396 309 to 466 309 to 656
56 (55) 256QAM 1 360 to 456 360 to 538 360 to 777

NOTE
Ethernet services.
3-105
IF Performance
Item Performance
of the IF board
(MHz)
350
the IF board (MHz)
140
Transmit frequency
of the IF board
(MHz)
5.5
the IF board (MHz)
10

Item Performance
Adaptive time-
baseband signals
Supported

Mechanical Behavior
Item Performance
Dimensions (H x W
x D)
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Weight 0.60 kg

Power Consumption
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3.10 EM6T/EM6F
The EM6T/EM6F is an FE/GE interface board, which provides four FE electrical ports and two
GE ports. The EM6T has similar functions to the EM6F. The only difference is as follows: The
GE ports on the EM6T use fixed electrical ports whereas the GE ports on the EM6F use the SFP
modules and therefore can function as two optical or electrical ports. The GE electrical ports on
the EM6F and the EM6T are compatible with the FE electrical ports.
The functional version of the EM6T/EM6F is SL91.
The EM6T/EM6F receives/transmits, processes, and converges four FE signals and two GE
signals.
This section describes how to process one GE signal on the EM6T, and it serves as an example
to describe the working principle and signal flow of the EM6T/EM6F.
3.10.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, FE service ports, and GE service ports on the front panel.
3.10.5 Valid Slots
The EM6T/EM6F can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the EM6T/EM6F on the NMS
are the same as the physical slots.
3.10.6 Board Feature Code
The board feature code of the EM6F indicates the type of SFP module. The board feature code
refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code. The EM6T does not have a feature
code.
This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the EM6T/EM6F.
This section describes the board specifications, including the GE port performance, FE port
performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
The functional version of the EM6T/EM6F is SL91.
The EM6T/EM6F receives/transmits, processes, and converges four FE signals and two GE
signals.
Table 3-90 lists the functions and features that the EM6T/EM6F supports. The EM6T/EM6F
needs to work with the packet switching unit of the system control, switching, and timing board
to implement Ethernet service functions.
3-107
Table 3-90 Functions and features that the EM6T/EM6F supports
Function and Feature Board
EM6T EM6F
Basic functions Receives/transmits FE/GE service signals and works
with the packet switching unit to process the received
FE/GE service signals.
Port
specifications
FE electrical
port
Provides four
10/100BASE-T(X) ports.
Provides four
10/100BASE-T(X) ports.
GE port Provides two
10/100/1000BASE-T(X)
ports (fixed).
Provides two GE ports by
using SFP modules of any
of the following types:
l 1000BASE-SX
l 1000BASE-LX
l 10/100/1000BASE-T
(X)
Backplane bus bandwidth 1 Gbit/s 1 Gbit/s
Port attributes Working mode l The FE port supports 10M full-duplex, 10M half-
duplex, 100M full-duplex, 100M half-duplex, and
auto-negotiation.
l The GE electrical port supports 10M full-duplex,
10M half-duplex, 100M full-duplex, 100M half-
duplex, 1000M full-duplex, and auto-negotiation.
l The GE optical port supports 1000M full-duplex
and auto-negotiation.
TAG attributes l The TAG attribute can be set to tag aware, access,
or hybrid.
l Sets and queries the TAG attribute of an Ethernet
port.
Jumbo frame Supports jumbo frames with a maximum frame length
of 9600 bytes.
Traffic control
function
Supports the port-based traffic control function that
complies with IEEE 802.3x.
Services E-Line services Supports the following types of E-Line services:
l E-Line services based on port+QinQ
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
EM6T EM6F
LAG Inter-board
LAG
Supported Supported
Intra-board
LAG
Supported Supported
G.8032/Y.1344.
LPT Supported Supported
QoS DiffServ Supports simple traffic classification by specifying
PHB service classes for service flows based on their
QoS information (C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN
priorities, DSCP values, and MPLS EXP values)
carried by the packets.
Complex traffic
classification
Supports traffic classification at Ethernet ports based
on C-VLAN IDs, S-VLAN IDs, C-VLAN priorities, S-
VLAN priorities, C-VLAN IDs + C-VLAN priorities,
S-VLAN IDs + S-VLAN priorities, or DSCP values
carried by packets.
CAR Provides the CAR function for traffic flows at ports.
Shaping Supports traffic shaping for a specific port, prioritized
queue, or traffic flow.
Queue
scheduling
policies
Supports the following queue scheduling policies:
l SP
l WRR
l SP+WRR
ETH OAM IEEE 802.1ag
OAM
Supports the following IEEE 802.1ag OAM functions:
l Management of OAM maintenance points
l Continuity check test
l Loopback test
l Link trace test
3-109
EM6T EM6F
IEEE 802.3ah
OAM
Supports the following IEEE 802.3ah OAM functions:
l OAM automatic discovery
l Link performance monitoring
l Fault detection
l Remote loopback test
l Loopback detection and blocking of a port being
looped back
RMON Supported Supported
Clock Clock source Synchronous Ethernet Synchronous Ethernet
(not supported by the SFP
electrical module)
Clock
protection
DCN Inband DCN Each FE/GE port provides one inband DCN channel.
OAM Loopback Supports the following loopback types:
l Inloops at the PHY layer of Ethernet ports
l Inloops at the MAC layer of Ethernet ports
Warm reset and
cold reset
Supported Supported
Board
manufacturing
information
query
Supported Supported
Board voltage
detection
Supported Supported
Board
temperature
detection
Supported Supported
Query of SFP
module
information
Not supported Supported

3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
This section describes how to process one GE signal on the EM6T, and it serves as an example
to describe the working principle and signal flow of the EM6T/EM6F.
Figure 3-40 Functional block diagram
GE signal
access unit
FE signal
access unit
Ethernet
processing
unit
Logic
processing
unit
Logic
control unit
Clock unit
Backplane
Control bus of the board
System control and
communication unit
GE signal
FE signal
Ethernet
signal
Ethernet
signal
Control bus
Control signal
Control signal
Power
supply unit
System clock signal
-48 V1
-48 V2
+3.3 V
board

+3.3 V backup power
supplied to the board

Table 3-91 Signal processing in the receive direction
1 GE signal access
unit/FE signal access
unit
l Receives/Transmits GE/FE signals.
l Performs restructuring, decoding, and serial/parallel
conversion for GE/FE signals.
l Performs frame delimitation, preamble stripping,
CRC checks, and Ethernet performance measurement
for frame signals.
3-111
unit
l Adds tags identifying ingress ports to Ethernet data
frames.
l Processes VLAN tags in Ethernet data frames.
l Processes labels in MPLS/PWE3 packets.
l Performs QoS processing such as traffic classification
and CAR traffic monitoring for Ethernet data frames.
l Forwards Ethernet data frames to the logic processing
unit.
3 Logic processing
unit
Transmits Ethernet data frames to the main and standby

Table 3-92 Signal processing in the transmit direction
1 Logic processing unit l Selects Ethernet data frames from the packet
switching unit.
l Transmits Ethernet data frames to the Ethernet
processing unit.
unit
l Processes labels in MPLS/PWE3 packets.
l Processes VLAN tags in Ethernet data frames.
l Performs QoS processing such as traffic shaping and
queue scheduling for Ethernet data frames.
l Forwards Ethernet data frames to proper egress ports
based on egress tags contained in the Ethernet data
frames.
3 GE signal access
unit/FE signal access
unit
l Performs frame delimitation, preamble addition, CRC
code computing, and Ethernet performance
measurement.
l Performs parallel/serial conversion and coding for
Ethernet data frames, and sends out the generated GE/
FE signals through Ethernet ports.

The Ethernet processing unit controls the FE/GE signal access unit by using management control
signals.
The logic control unit controls the Ethernet processing unit and logic processing unit over the
control bus on the board.
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
The logic control unit communicates with the main and standby system control and
communication units over the system control bus. The configuration data and query commands
from the system control and communication unit are issued to the various units of the board
through the logic control unit. The command response reported by each unit on the board, and
the alarms and performance events are reported to the system control and communication unit
also through the logic control unit.
Power Supply Unit
l Receives two -48 V power supplies from the backplane, converts the -48 V power supplies
into +3.3 V power, and then supplies the +3.3 V power to the other units on the board.
l Receives one +3.3 V power supply from the backplane, which functions as a +3.3 V power
backup for the other units on the board.
Clock Unit
3.10.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, FE service ports, and GE service ports on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-41 Front panel of the EM6T
E
M
6
T
S
T
A
T
S
R
V
FE1 FE2 FE3 FE4
GE2
E
M
6
T
GE1
P
R
O
G

Figure 3-42 Front panel of the EM6F
E
M
6
F
S
T
A
T
S
R
V
GE2
E
M
6
F
GE1
L
I
N
K
1
L
I
N
K
2
CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT
FE1 FE2 FE3 FE4
P
R
O
G

Indicators
Table 3-93 Status explanation for indicators on the EM6T/EM6F
3-113
system.
On (yellow) A minor alarm occurs in the system.
Off There is no power supplied to the system.
100 ms intervals
Software is being loaded to the board during
board.
300 ms intervals
during the power-on or resetting process of
the board.
On (green) l When the board is being powered on or
being reset, the upper layer software is
being initialized.
l When the board is running, the software
is running normally.
Blinks on (red) and off at 100
ms intervals
The BOOTROM self-check fails during the
power-on or resetting process of the board.
On (red) The memory self-check fails or loading
upper layer software fails during the power-
on or resetting process of the board.
The logic file or upper layer software is lost
during the running process of the board.
The pluggable storage card is faulty.
LINK1
a
On (green) The GE1 port is connected correctly and is
not receiving or transmitting data.
Blinking (yellow) The GE1 port is receiving or transmitting
data.
Off The GE1 port is not connected or is
connected incorrectly.
LINK2
a
data.
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

NOTE
a: The LINK1 and LINK2 indicators are available only on the EM6F and indicate the states of the
corresponding GE ports.
Ports
Table 3-94 Description of the ports on the EM6T
Cable
FE1 FE service port
RJ45 Network cable
FE2
FE3
FE4
GE1 GE service port (fixed
electrical port)
GE2

Table 3-95 Description of the ports on the EM6F
Cable
FE1 FE service port
RJ45 5.8 Network Cable
FE2
FE3
FE4
GE1 GE service port (using SFP
modules)
RJ45 SFP electrical
module or LC SFP
optical module
5.5 Fiber Jumper/5.8
Network Cable
GE2

NOTE
On the NMS, GE1 and GE2 correspond to PORT1 and PORT2 respectively; FE1 to FE4 correspond to
PORT3 to PORT6 respectively.
The performance of the FE service ports on the EM6T/EM6F complies with the 10/100BASE-
T(X) standard; the performance of the GE service ports on the EM6T complies with the
3-115
10/100/1000BASE-T(X) standard; the performance of the GE service ports on the EM6F
complies with the 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) standard if SFP electrical modules are used. All
service ports support the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes. For the pin assignments
for the ports, see Table 3-96 and Table 3-97. For the front view of an RJ45 connector, see
Figure 3-43.
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Table 3-96 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI mode
Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) 1000BASE-T
Signal Function Signal Function
1 TX+ Transmitting data (+) BIDA+ Bidirectional data wire A
(+)
2 TX- Transmitting data (-) BIDA- Bidirectional data wire A
(-)
3 RX+ Receiving data (+) BIDB+ Bidirectional data wire B
(+)
4 Reserved - BIDC+ Bidirectional data wire C
(+)
5 Reserved - BIDC- Bidirectional data wire C
(-)
6 RX- Receiving data (-) BIDB- Bidirectional data wire B
(-)
7 Reserved - BIDD+ Bidirectional data wire D
(+)
8 Reserved - BIDD- Bidirectional data wire D
(-)

3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Table 3-97 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI-X mode
(+)
(-)
(+)
(+)
(-)
(-)
(+)
(-)

The RJ45 connector has two indicators. For status explanation for these indicators, see Table
3-98.
data.
receiving data.

SFP optical modules are used to provide GE service ports on the EM6F; one SFP optical module
provides one TX port and one RX port. For details, see Figure 3-44, in which TX represents the
transmit port and RX represents the receive port.
Figure 3-44 Ports of the SFP optical module
TX
RX
3-117
Labels
There is a laser safety class label on the front panel of the EM6F.
The laser safety class label indicates that the laser safety class of the optical port is CLASS 1.
That is, the maximum launched optical power of the optical port is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW).
3.10.5 Valid Slots
The EM6T/EM6F can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the EM6T/EM6F on the NMS
Figure 3-45 Slots for the EM6T/EM6F in the IDU chassis
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 5 (EM6T/EM6F)
Slot 3 (EM6T/EM6F)
Slot 1 (EM6T/EM6F)
Slot 8
Slot 6 (EM6T/EM6F)
Slot 4 (EM6T/EM6F)
Slot 2 (EM6T/EM6F)

Figure 3-46 Logical slots of the EM6T/EM6F on the NMS
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 5 (EM6T/EM6F)
Slot 3 (EM6T/EM6F)
Slot 1 (EM6T/EM6F)
Slot 8
Slot 6 (EM6T/EM6F)
Slot 4 (EM6T/EM6F)
Slot 2 (EM6T/EM6F)

Table 3-99 Slot configuration for the EM6T/EM6F
Item Description

The board feature code of the EM6F indicates the type of SFP module. The board feature code
refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code. The EM6T does not have a feature
code.
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Table 3-100 Board feature code of the EM6F
Board Feature Code Module Type Part Number of the
Module
01 1000BASE-SX 34060286
02 1000BASE-LX 34060473
03 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) 34100052

This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the EM6T/EM6F.
Related References
A.5.2.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Basic Attributes
A.5.2.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow Control
A.5.2.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 Attributes
A.5.2.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Layer 3 Attributes
A.5.2.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced Attributes
This section describes the board specifications, including the GE port performance, FE port
performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
Performance of GE Optical Ports
The GE optical ports on the EM6T/EM6F comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists
the main specifications for the GE optical ports.
Table 3-101 Performance of the GE optical interface
Item Performance
Classification code 1000BASE-SX 1000BASE-LX
Fiber type Multiple-mode optical
fiber
Single-mode optical
fiber
Transmission distance (km) 0.5 10
Operating wavelength (nm) 770 to 860 1270 to 1355
Mean launched power (dBm) -9 to -3 -9 to -3
Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) -17 -20
3-119
Item Performance
Minimum overload (dBm) 0 -3
Minimum extinction ratio (dB) 9.5 9.5

NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950 uses SFP modules to provide GE optical interfaces. Users can use different types of SFP
modules to provide GE optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.
Performance of GE Electrical Ports
The GE electrical ports on the EM6T/EM6F comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists
the main specifications for the GE electrical ports.
Table 3-102 GE electric interface performance
Item Performance
Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) 10 (10BASE-T)
100 (100BASE-TX)
1000 (1000BASE-T)
Code pattern Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T)
MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX)
4D-PAM5 encoding signal (1000BASE-T)
Interface type RJ45

Performance of FE Electrical Ports
The FE electrical ports on the EM6T/EM6F comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists
the main specifications for the FE electrical ports.
Table 3-103 FE electric interface performance
Item Performance
100 (100BASE-TX)
Interface type RJ45

3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Mechanical Behavior
Item Performance
EM6T EM6F
Weight 0.37 kg 0.40 kg

Power Consumption
Power consumption of the EM6T: < 10.4 W
Power consumption of the EM6F: < 11.3 W
3.11 EFP8
The EFP8 is an 8-port FE EoPDH processing board. The EFP board is connected to the packet
plane through its bridging GE port.
The functional version of the EFP8 is SL91.
The EFP8 receives/transmits 8xFE signals from its front panel and 1xGE packet plane signals
from the backplane, and encapsulates the Ethernet signals into E1 signals, and transmits the
Ethernet signals on the PDH network.
This section describes how to process one FE signal, and it serves as an example to describe the
working principle and signal flow of the EFP8.
3.11.4 Front Panel
There are indicators and eight FE ports on the front panel.
3.11.5 Valid Slots
The EFP8 can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the EFP8 on the NMS are the same
This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the EFP8.
This section describes the board specifications, including the FE port performance, board
mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
The functional version of the EFP8 is SL91.
3-121
The EFP8 receives/transmits 8xFE signals from its front panel and 1xGE packet plane signals
from the backplane, and encapsulates the Ethernet signals into E1 signals, and transmits the
Ethernet signals on the PDH network.
Table 3-105 lists the functions and features that the EFP8 supports.
Table 3-105 Functions and features that the EFP8 supports
Function and Feature EFP8
Basic functions Receives/Transmits 8xFE signals and
1xGE packet plane signals and
performs EoPDH processing.
Port specifications FE electrical port:
10/100BASE-T(X)
8
Port attributes Working mode The FE port supports 10M full-duplex,
100M full-duplex, and auto-
negotiation.
TAG attributes l Sets and queries the TAG attribute
of an Ethernet port.
l The TAG attribute can be set to tag
aware, access, or hybrid.
Jumbo frame Supports jumbo frames with a
maximum frame length of 2000 bytes.
Traffic control function Supports the port-based traffic control
function that complies with IEEE
802.3x.
Services EPL services Supports the EPL services that are
based on port.
EVPL services Supports the following types of EVPL
services:
l EVPL services based on port
+VLAN
l EVPL services based on QinQ
EPLAN services Supports the EPLAN services that are
based on IEEE 802.1d bridges.
EVPLAN services Supports the following types of
EVPLAN services:
l EVPLAN services based on IEEE
802.1q bridges
l EVPLAN services based on IEEE
802.1ad bridges
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Encapsulation and
mapping
Encapsulation format Generic framing procedure (GFP)
Maximum number of
VCTRUNKs supported
by the board
16
Maximum TDM service
capacity supported by
the backplane
1xVC-4 (63xE1)
Maximum number of
E1s that can be bound
with a single
VCTRUNK
16xE1
Link capacity
adjustment scheme
(LCAS)
Supported
LAG Inter-board LAG Not supported
Intra-board LAG Supported
Spanning tree protocol Supports the MSTP protocol that
generates only the CIST. The MSTP
protocol provides functions equivalent
to that of the RSTP protocol.
IGMP snooping function Supported
LPT
a
Supported
QoS Traffic classification l Traffic classification based on
ports
l Traffic classification based on port
+VLAN ID
+VLAN ID+VLAN PRI
+S-VLAN ID
+C-VLAN ID+S-VLAN ID
CoS Grooms packets in traffic flows to
eight egress queues that belong to
different service classes based on the
following conditions:
l Simple
l VLAN priority
l IP TOS value
l DSCP value
3-123
CAR Provides the CAR function for traffic
flows.
Shaping Supports traffic shaping for queues at
ports.
Queue scheduling
policies
Supports SP+WRR.
ETH OAM IEEE 802.1ag OAM Supports the following IEEE 802.1ag
OAM functions:
l Management of OAM
maintenance points
l Continuity check test
l Loopback test
l Link trace test
IEEE 802.3ah OAM Supports the following IEEE 802.3ah
OAM functions:
l OAM automatic discovery
l Link performance monitoring
l Fault detection
l Remote loopback test
NOTE
Port 9 (bridging port) of the EFP8 does not
support the OAM function that complies
with IEEE 802.3ah.
RMON Supported
Port mirroring Supported
Clock Clock source Synchronous Ethernet
Clock protection Supports the following clock
protection schemes:
l Protection based on clock source
priorities
l Protection by running the SSM
protocol
l Protection by running the extended
SSM protocol
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OAM Loopback Supports the following loopback
types:
l Inloops at the PHY layer of
Ethernet ports
l Inloops at the MAC layer of
Ethernet ports
l Inloops on VC-12 paths
NOTE
Bridging ports of the EFP8 do not support
the loopback function at the PHY layer.
Warm reset and cold
reset
Supported
Board manufacturing
information query
Supported
Board temperature
detection
Supported

NOTE
a: The LPT function is used to detect faults that occur at a service access node and in an intermediate
transmission network. If a fault is detected, the LPT notifies the equipment that receives the service of
starting the backup network at the earliest time for communication, ensuring normal transmission of
important data.
This section describes how to process one FE signal, and it serves as an example to describe the
working principle and signal flow of the EFP8.
3-125
Figure 3-47 Functional block diagram of the EFP8
FE
signal
access
unit
Ethernet
processing
unit
Encapsulation
unit
Mapping
unit
Logic
processing
unit
Backplane
Ethernet signal
GE signal
PDH signal
Logic
control
unit
Control bus
Cross-connect
unit
Packet
switching unit
Management
Control signal of the board
Power
supply unit
Clock unit
System control and
communication unit
to the board

+3.3 V backup power
System clock signal
-48 V1
-48 V2
+3.3 V

Table 3-106 Signal processing in the receive direction of the EFP8
1 FE signal access unit l Receives/Transmits FE signals.
l Performs restructuring, decoding, and serial/parallel
conversion for FE signals.
l Performs frame delimitation, preamble stripping,
CRC code checks, and Ethernet performance
measurement for frame signals.
unit
l Receives/Transmits GE signals from the packet
switching unit.
l Performs QoS processing such as traffic classification
and CAR for Ethernet data frames based on service
categories.
l Processes tags based on service categories.
l Forwards data frames based on service categories.
3 Encapsulation unit Performs GFP encapsulation for Ethernet frames.
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
4 Mapping unit l Maps encapsulated data frames based on E1 virtual
concatenation and then encapsulates the data frames
to proper VC-12s.
l Processes pointers to form TU-12s.
l Performs byte interleaving for three TU-12s to form
one TUG-2.
l Performs byte interleaving for seven TUG-2s to form
one TUG-3.
l Performs byte interleaving for three TUG-3s to form
one C-4.
l Adds higher order path overhead bytes to one C-4 to
form one VC-4.
3 Logic processing
unit
Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals to
the main and standby cross-connect units.

Table 3-107 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the EFP8
1 Logic processing unit Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
from the main cross-connect unit.
2 Mapping unit l Demultiplexes three TUG-3s from one VC-4.
l Demultiplexes seven TUG-2s from one TUG-3.
l Demultiplexes three VC-12s from one TUG-2.
l Extracts E1 payload from VC-12s and demaps the E1
payload based on E1 virtual concatenation.
3 Encapsulation unit Decapsulates signals after demapping.
4 Ethernet signal
processing unit
l Processes tags based on service categories.
l Performs QoS processing such as traffic shaping and
queue scheduling for Ethernet data frames.
l Performs frame delimitation, preamble adding, CRC
code computing, and Ethernet performance
measurement for Ethernet data frames.
l Forwards Ethernet data frames to the FE signal access
unit or the GE port that is connected to the packet
switching unit according to the egress flag.
5 FE signal access unit Performs parallel/serial conversion and coding for
Ethernet data frames, and sends the generated FE signals
to an Ethernet port.

3-127
The Ethernet processing unit controls the FE signal access unit by using management control
signals.
The logic control unit controls the Ethernet processing unit, encapsulation unit, mapping unit,
and logic processing unit over the control bus on the board.
The logic control unit communicates with the main and standby system control and
communication units over the system control bus. The configuration data and query commands
from the system control and communication unit are issued to the various units of the board
through the logic control unit. The command response reported by each unit on the board, and
alarms and performance events are reported to the system control and communication unit also
through the logic control unit.
Power Supply Unit
Clock Unit
3.11.4 Front Panel
There are indicators and eight FE ports on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-48 Front panel of the EFP8
E
F
P
8
S
T
A
T
P
R
O
G
S
R
V
2 1 3 4 6 5 7 8
Indicators
Table 3-108 Status explanation for indicators on the EFP8
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
100 ms intervals
board.
300 ms intervals
the board.
being initialized.
ms intervals
On (red) l The memory self-check fails or loading
upper layer software fails during the
power-on or resetting process of the
board.
l The logic file or upper layer software is
lost during the running process of the
board.
system.

Ports
Table 3-109 Description of the ports on the EFP8
Port Description Connector Type Corresponding Cable
FE1 to
FE8
FE port
RJ45 5.8 Network Cable

3-129
The FE electrical ports support the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes. For the pin
assignments for the ports, see Table 3-110 and Table 3-111. For the front view of an RJ45
connector, see Figure 3-49.
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Table 3-110 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI mode
Pin 10/100BASE-T(X)
Signal Function
1 TX+ Transmitting data (+)
2 TX- Transmitting data (-)
3 RX+ Receiving data (+)
4 Reserved -
5 Reserved -
6 RX- Receiving data (-)
7 Reserved -
8 Reserved -

Table 3-111 Pin assignments for the RJ45 connector in MDI-X mode
Pin 10/100BASE-T(X)
Signal Function
1 RX+ Receiving data (+)
2 RX- Receiving data (-)
3 TX+ Transmitting data (+)
4 Reserved -
5 Reserved -
6 TX- Transmitting data (-)
7 Reserved -
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Pin 10/100BASE-T(X)
Signal Function
8 Reserved -

The RJ45 port has two indicators. For status explanation for these indicators, see Table 3-112.
data.
receiving data.

3.11.5 Valid Slots
The EFP8 can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the EFP8 on the NMS are the same
Figure 3-50 Slots for the EFP8 in the IDU chassis
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 5 (EFP8)
Slot 3 (EFP8)
Slot 1 (EFP8)
Slot 8
Slot 6 (EFP8)
Slot 4 (EFP8)
Slot 2 (EFP8)

Figure 3-51 Logical slots of the EFP8 on the NMS
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 5 (EFP8)
Slot 3 (EFP8)
Slot 1 (EFP8)
Slot 8
Slot 6 (EFP8)
Slot 4 (EFP8)
Slot 2 (EFP8)

3-131
Item Description

This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the EFP8.
Related References
A.7.5.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_External Port
A.7.5.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port_Internal Port
A.7.5.3 Parameter Description: Type Field of QinQ Frames
This section describes the board specifications, including the FE port performance, board
Performance of FE Electrical Ports
The FE electrical ports on the EFP8 comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table lists the main
specifications for the FE electrical ports.
Table 3-114 FE electric interface performance
Item Performance
100 (100BASE-TX)
Interface type RJ45

Mechanical Behavior
Item Performance
EFP8
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Item Performance
EFP8
Weight 0.6 kg

Power Consumption
Power consumption of the EFP8: < 13.5 W
3.12 SL1D
The SL1D is a 2xSTM-1 optical interface board.
The functional version of the SL1D is SL91.
The SL1D receives and transmits 2xSTM-1 optical signals.
This section describes how to process one STM-1 signal, and it serves as an example to describe
the working principle and signal flow of the SL1D.
3.12.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, STM-1 optical ports, and a label on the front panel.
3.12.5 Valid Slots
The SL1D can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the SL1D on the NMS are the same
The board feature code of the SL1D indicates the type of SFP optical module. The board feature
code refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code.
This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the SL1D.
This section describes the board specifications, including the STM-1 optical port performance,
board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
The functional version of the SL1D is SL91.
The SL1D receives and transmits 2xSTM-1 optical signals.
Table 3-116 lists the functions and features that the SL1D supports.
3-133
Table 3-116 Functions and features that the SL1D supports
Function and Feature SL1D
Basic functions Receives and transmits 2xSTM-1 optical signals.
Optical port specifications l Adopts the SFP optical module and supports the
optical ports of Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, and L-1.2 types.
l The characteristics of all the optical ports comply
with ITU-T G.957.
Protection Linear MSP Supported
SNCP Supported
Clock Clock source Each line port provides one SDH line clock signal.
Clock
protection
DCN Outband DCN Supported
l Outloops at optical ports
l Inloops at optical ports
l Outloops on VC-4 paths
Warm reset and
cold reset
Supported
Setting of the
on/off state of a
laser
Supported
ALS function
a
Supported
In-service
FPGA loading
Supported
Board
manufacturing
information
query
Supported
Detection and
query of SFP
optical module
information
Supported

3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
NOTE
a: The ALS function is implemented as follows:
l When the optical module detects the R_LOS alarm at the receive port and the alarm persists for 500
ms, the laser at the specific transmit port is automatically shut down.
l The laser starts to launch laser pulses at a specified interval; that is, the laser emits light for two seconds
and stops emission for 60 seconds.
l After the R_LOS alarm is cleared, the laser works properly and emits continuous light.
This section describes how to process one STM-1 signal, and it serves as an example to describe
the working principle and signal flow of the SL1D.
Figure 3-52 Functional block diagram of the SL1D
O
/
E

c
o
n
v
e
r
s
i
o
n

u
n
i
t
O
v
e
r
h
e
a
d

p
r
o
c
e
s
s
i
n
g

u
n
i
t
L
o
g
i
c

p
r
o
c
e
s
s
i
n
g

u
n
i
t
STM-1
STM-1
Service bus
Overhead bus
Control bus
Logic control
unit
Power supplied to the
Backplane
Cross-
connect unit
System control and
communication unit
+3.3 V
System clock signal
System control and
communication unit
Clock unit

Table 3-117 Signal processing in the receive direction of the SL1D
1 O/E conversion unit l Regenerates STM-1 optical signals.
l Detects R_LOS alarms.
l Converts STM-1 optical signals into electrical signals.
3-135
2 Overhead processing
unit
l Restores clock signals.
l Aligns frames and detects R_LOS and R_LOF alarms.
l Performs descrambling.
l Checks B1 and B2 bytes and generates specific alarms
and performance events.
l Checks the M1 byte and bits 6-8 of the K2 byte, and
generates specific alarms and performance events.
l Detects the changes in the SSM in the S1 byte and
reports the SSM status to the system control and
communication unit.
including F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes, and K
bytes and transmits the overhead signal to the logic
processing unit.
l Adjusts AU pointers and generates specific
performance events.
l Checks higher order path overheads and generates
to the logic processing unit.
3 Logic processing
unit
l Ttransmits the overhead signals to the system control

Table 3-118 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the SL1D
1 Logic processing
unit
2 Overhead processing
unit
l Sets higher order path overheads.
l Sets AU pointers.
l Sets multiplex section overhead bytes.
l Sets regenerator section overhead bytes.
l Performs scrambling.
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 O/E conversion unit Converts electrical signals into optical signals.

control and communication unit and enables FPGA loading.
Clock Unit
3.12.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, STM-1 optical ports, and a label on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-53 Front panel of the SL1D
S
L
1
D
TX1/RX1
CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT
S
L
1
D
S
T
A
T
S
R
V
L
O
S
1
L
O
S
2
TX2/RX2

Indicators
Table 3-119 Status explanation for indicators on the SL1D
properly.
l There is no power
3-137
Off The services are not
configured.
LOS1 On (red) The first optical port of the
SL1D is reporting the
R_LOS alarm.
Off The first optical port of the
SL1D is free of R_LOS
alarms.
LOS2 On (red) The second optical port of the
R_LOS alarm.
Off The second optical port of the
alarms.

Ports
Cable
TX1 Transmit port of the
first STM-1 optical
port
LC (SFP) Fiber jumper
RX1 Receive port of the
first STM-1 optical
port
TX2 Transmit port of the
second STM-1
optical port
LC (SFP)
RX2 Receive port of the
second STM-1
optical port

3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Labels
There is a laser safety class label on the front panel.
The laser safety class label indicates that the laser safety class of the optical port is CLASS 1.
That is, the maximum launched optical power of the optical port is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW).
3.12.5 Valid Slots
The SL1D can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the SL1D on the NMS are the same
Figure 3-54 Slots for the SL1D in the IDU chassis
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 5 (SL1D)
Slot 3 (SL1D)
Slot 1 (SL1D)
Slot 8
Slot 6 (SL1D)
Slot 4 (SL1D)
Slot 2 (SL1D)

Figure 3-55 Logical slots of the SL1D on the NMS
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 5 (SL1D)
Slot 3 (SL1D)
Slot 1 (SL1D)
Slot 8
Slot 6 (SL1D)
Slot 4 (SL1D)
Slot 2 (SL1D)

Item Description

The board feature code of the SL1D indicates the type of SFP optical module. The board feature
3-139
Table 3-122 Board feature code of the SL1D
Feature Code Type of Optical Module Part Number of the
Optical Module
01 Ie-1 34060287
02 S-1.1 34060276
03 L-1.1 34060281
04 L-1.2 34060282

This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the SL1D.
Related References
A.5.7.1 Parameter Description: SDH Interfaces
A.5.9.1 Parameter Description: Regenerator Section Overhead
This section describes the board specifications, including the STM-1 optical port performance,
board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
STM-1 Optical Interface Performance
The performance of the STM-1 optical interface is compliant with ITU-T G.957/G.825. The
following table provides the typical performance of the interface.
Table 3-123 STM-1 optical interface performance
Item Performance
Classification code Ie-1 S-1.1 L-1.1 L-1.2
Fiber type Multi-mode
fiber
Single-mode
fiber
Single-mode
fiber
Single-mode
fiber
Transmission distance
(km)
2 15 40 80
Operating wavelength
(nm)
1270 to 1380 1261 to 1360 1263 to 1360 1480 to 1580
Mean launched power
(dBm)
-19 to -14 -15 to -8 -5 to 0 -5 to 0
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Item Performance
Receiver minimum
sensitivity (dBm)
-30 -28 -34 -34
Minimum overload (dBm) -14 -8 -10 -10
Minimum extinction ratio
(dB)
10 8.2 10 10

NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950 uses SFP modules for providing optical interfaces. You can use different types of SFP
modules to provide optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.
Mechanical Behavior
Item Performance
Weight 0.30 kg

Power Consumption
3.13 ML1/MD1
The ML1 is a 16xSmart E1 service processing board. The MD1 is a 32xSmart E1 service
processing board.
The functional version of the ML1 is SL92. The functional version of the MD1 is SL91.
The ML1 receives and transmits 16xE1 signals. The MD1 receives and transmits 32xE1 signals.
This section describes how to process one E1 signal, and it serves as an example to describe the
working principle and signal flow of the ML1/MD1.
3.13.4 Front Panel
There are indicators and E1 ports on the front panel.
3.13.5 Valid Slots
The ML1/MD1 can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the ML1/MD1 on the NMS are
the same as the physical slots.
3-141
The board feature code of the ML1/MD1 indicates the port impedance. The board feature code
refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code.
This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the ML1/MD1.
This section describes the board specifications, including the E1 port performance, board
The functional version of the ML1 is SL92. The functional version of the MD1 is SL91.
The ML1 receives and transmits 16xE1 signals. The MD1 receives and transmits 32xE1 signals.
Table 3-125 lists the functions and features that the ML1/MD1 supports.
Table 3-125 Functions and features that the ML1/MD1 supports
ML1 MD1
Basic functions Receives and transmits E1 signals, and supports
flexible configuration of E1 service categories.
E1 service categories Supports the following E1 service categories:
l CES E1
l ATM/IMA E1
Port
specifications
75-ohm/120-
ohm E1 port
16 32
Fractional E1 Supports transparent service transmission at the 64
kbit/s level.
ATM/IMA Maximum
number of ATM
services
64
Maximum
number of ATM
connections
256
ATM traffic
management
Supported
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
ML1 MD1
ATM
encapsulation
mode
Supports the following ATM encapsulation modes:
l N-to-one VPC
l N-to-one VCC
l One-to-one VPC
l One-to-one VCC
Maximum
number of
concatenated
ATM cells
31
ATM OAM F4 (VP level) and F5 (VC level)
Maximum
number of IMA
groups
16 32
Maximum
number of
members in an
IMA group
16
CES Maximum
number of
services
16 32
Encapsulation
mode
Supports the following encapsulation modes:
l CESoPSN
l SAToP
Service
category
Point-to-point services
Compression of
idle slots
Supported (applicable to CESoPSN only)
Jitter buffering
time (us)
375-16000
Packet loading
time (us)
125-5000
CES ACR Supported
Retiming Supported
Clock protection Supports clock protection based on clock source
priorities.
OM Loopback Supports inloops and outloops at E1 tributary ports.
3-143
ML1 MD1
Cold reset and
warm reset
Supported
PRBS tests at E1
ports
Supported
Board
manufacturing
information
query
Supported

working principle and signal flow of the ML1/MD1.
Figure 3-56 Functional block diagram of the ML1/MD1
Backplane
Logic
control unit
E1
E1
S
i
g
n
a
l

i
n
t
e
r
f
a
c
e

u
n
i
t
System control and
communication unit
Control bus
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

p
r
o
c
e
s
s
i
n
g

u
n
i
t
L
o
g
i
c

p
r
o
c
e
s
s
i
n
g

u
n
i
t
+3.3 V
+3.3 V power
Clock unit
other units of the board
System clock signal
Power
supply unit
-48 V1
-48 V2
+3.3 V backup power
Service
bus
GE bus

3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Table 3-126 Signal processing in the receive direction of the ML1/MD1
1 Signal interface unit l Receives external E1 signals.
l Matches the resistance.
l Equalizes signals.
l Converts the level.
l Recovers clock signals.
l Buffers the received data.
l Performs HDB3/B8ZS/AMI decoding.
2 Service processing
unit
l Frames E1 signals.
l Performs CES emulation or processes ATM/IMA
services.
l Encapsulates PWE3 services and converts the PWE3
services into Ethernet services.
4 Logic processing
unit
l Implements the conversion from the internal service
bus into the GE bus in the backplane.
l Sends service signals to the packet switching unit.

Table 3-127 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the ML1/MD1
1 Logic processing
unit
l Receives service signals from the packet switching
unit.
l Implements the conversion from the GE bus in the
backplane into the internal service bus.
2 Service processing
unit
l Decapsulates service signals.
l Re-forms CES packets or processes ATM/IMA
services.
l Converts signals into E1 signals and sends the E1
signals to the signal interface unit.
3 Signal interface unit l Performs HDB3/B8ZS/AMI coding.
l Performs clock re-timing.
l Performs pulse shaping.
l Drives the line.
l Sends E1 signals to a port.

3-145
Power Supply Unit
Clock Unit
3.13.4 Front Panel
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-57 Front panel of the ML1
M
L
1
S
T
A
T
S
R
V1
E1
16

Figure 3-58 Front panel of the MD1
M
D
1
S
T
A
T
S
R
V
32
17
16
1

3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Indicators
Table 3-128 Status explanation for indicators on the ML1/MD1
properly.
l There is no power
configured.

Ports
Table 3-129 Description of the ports on the ML1
Port Description Connector
Type
Corresponding Cable
1 to 16 The first to sixteenth
E1 ports
Anea 96 5.6.1 E1 Cable Connected to
the External Equipment or
5.6.2 E1 Cable Connected to
the E1 Panel

Table 3-130 Description of the ports on the MD1
Type
Corresponding Cable
1 to 16 The first to sixteenth
E1 ports
the E1 Panel
3-147
Type
Corresponding Cable
17 to 32 The seventeenth to
thirty-second E1
ports
the E1 Panel

The ports on the ML1/MD1 use the Anea 96 connector. Figure 3-59 shows the front view of an
Anea 96 connector and Table 3-131 provides the pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector.
Figure 3-59 Front view of an Anea 96 connector
POS.96
POS.1

Table 3-131 Pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector
Pin Signal Pin Signal
1 The first received E1
differential signal (+)
25 The first transmitted E1 differential
signal (+)
differential signal (-)
signal (-)
3 The second received E1
27 The second transmitted E1 differential
signal (+)
signal (-)
5 The third received E1
29 The third transmitted E1 differential
signal (+)
signal (-)
7 The fourth received E1
31 The fourth transmitted E1 differential
signal (+)
signal (-)
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
9 The fifth received E1
33 The fifth transmitted E1 differential
signal (+)
signal (-)
11 The sixth received E1
35 The sixth transmitted E1 differential
signal (+)
signal (-)
13 The seventh received E1
37 The seventh transmitted E1
15 The eighth received E1
39 The eighth transmitted E1 differential
signal (+)
signal (-)
17 The ninth received E1
41 The ninth transmitted E1 differential
signal (+)
signal (-)
19 The tenth received E1
43 The tenth transmitted E1 differential
signal (+)
signal (-)
21 The eleventh received E1
45 The eleventh transmitted E1
23 The twelfth received E1
47 The twelfth transmitted E1
49 The thirteenth received E1
73 The thirteenth transmitted E1
51 The fourteenth received E1
75 The fourteenth transmitted E1
3-149
53 The fifteenth received E1
77 The fifteenth transmitted E1
55 The sixteenth received E1
79 The sixteenth transmitted E1

3.13.5 Valid Slots
The ML1/MD1 can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the ML1/MD1 on the NMS are
the same as the physical slots.
Figure 3-60 Slots for the ML1/MD1 in the IDU chassis
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 5 (ML1/MD1)
Slot 3 (ML1/MD1)
Slot 1 (ML1/MD1)
Slot 8
Slot 6 (ML1/MD1)
Slot 4 (ML1/MD1)
Slot 2 (ML1/MD1)

Figure 3-61 Logical slots of the ML1/MD1 on the NMS
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 5 (ML1/MD1)
Slot 3 (ML1/MD1)
Slot 1 (ML1/MD1)
Slot 8
Slot 6 (ML1/MD1)
Slot 4 (ML1/MD1)
Slot 2 (ML1/MD1)

Item Description

3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
The board feature code of the ML1/MD1 indicates the port impedance. The board feature code
refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code.
Table 3-133 Board feature code of the ML1/MD1
Board Feature Code Port Impedance (Ohm)
A 75
B 120

This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the ML1/MD1.
Related References
A.5.1.1 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Basic Attributes
A.5.1.2 Parameter Description: PDH Ports_Advanced Attributes
E1 Interface Performance
Table 3-134 E1 interface performance
Item Performance
Code pattern HDB3
Impedance (ohm) 75 120
Wire pair in each
transmission direction
One coaxial wire pair One symmetrical wire pair

3-151
Mechanical Behavior
Item Performance
ML1 MD1
Dimensions (H x W x
D)
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm

Power Consumption
Power consumption of the ML1: < 7.0 W
Power consumption of the MD1: < 12.2 W
3.14 SP3S/SP3D
The SP3S is a 16xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm tributary board. The SP3D is a 32xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm
tributary board.
The functional version of the SP3S is SL91. The functional version of the SP3D is TNH1.
The SP3S receives and transmits 16xE1 signals. The SP3D receives and transmits 32xE1 signals.
working principle and signal flow of the SP3S/SP3D.
3.14.4 Front Panel
3.14.5 Valid Slots
The SP3S/SP3D can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the SP3S/SP3D on the NMS
The board feature code of the SP3S/SP3D indicates the E1 port impedance. The board feature
This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the SP3S/SP3D.
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
The functional version of the SP3S is SL91. The functional version of the SP3D is TNH1.
The SP3S receives and transmits 16xE1 signals. The SP3D receives and transmits 32xE1 signals.
Table 3-136 lists the functions and features that the SP3S/SP3D supports.
Table 3-136 Functions and features that the SP3S/SP3D supports
SP3S SP3D
Basic functions Receives and transmits E1 signals.
Port
specifications
75-ohm/120-
ohm E1 port
16 32
Clock Clock source Supports a tributary clock source extracted from the
first or fifth E1 signal.
Clock
protection
Supports clock protection based on clock source
priorities.
E1 retiming
function
Supported
OM Loopback Supports inloops and outloops at E1 tributary ports.
Cold reset and
warm reset
Supported
PRBS tests at E1
ports
Supported
Board
manufacturing
information
query
Supported

working principle and signal flow of the SP3S/SP3D.
3-153
Figure 3-62 Functional block diagram of the SP3S/SP3D
Backplane
Logic
control unit
Cross-connect unit
E1
I
n
t
e
r
f
a
c
e

u
n
i
t

M
a
p
p
i
n
g
/
D
e
m
a
p
p
i
n
g

u
n
i
t

System control and
communication unit
Service bus
Control bus
E1 signal
C
o
d
e
c

u
n
i
t
L
o
g
i
c

p
r
o
c
e
s
s
i
n
g

u
n
i
t
Power
supply unit
to the board

+3.3 V backup power
System clock signal
-48 V1
-48 V2
+3.3 V
E1
Clock
unit

Table 3-137 Signal processing in the receive direction of the SP3S/SP3D
1 Interface unit External E1 signals are coupled by the transformer and
then transmitted to the board.
2 Codec unit l Equalizes the received signals.
l Recovers clock signals.
l Detects T_ALOS alarms.
l Performs HDB3 decoding.
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3 Mapping/
Demapping unit
l Asynchronously maps signals into C-12s.
l Adds path overhead bytes to C-12s to form VC-12s.
l Processes pointers to form TU-12s.
l Performs byte interleaving for three TU-12s to form
one TUG-2.
l Performs byte interleaving for seven TUG-2s to form
one TUG-3.
l Performs byte interleaving for three TUG-3s to form
one C-4.
l Adds higher order path overhead bytes to one C-4 to
form one VC-4.
4 Logic processing
unit

Table 3-138 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the SP3S/SP3D
1 Logic processing
unit
2 Mapping/
Demapping unit
l Demultiplexes three TUG-3s from one VC-4.
l Demultiplexes seven TUG-2s from one TUG-3.
l Demultiplexes three VC-12s from one TUG-2.
l Processes path overheads and pointers and detects
l Extracts E1 signals.
3 Codec unit Performs HDB3 coding.
4 Interface unit E1 signals are coupled by the transformer and then
transmitted to an external cable.

3-155
Power Supply Unit
Clock Unit
3.14.4 Front Panel
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-63 Front panel of the SP3S
S
P
3
S
S
T
A
T
S
R
V
1-16
S
P
3
S
E1

Figure 3-64 Front panel of the SP3D
S
P
3
D
S
T
A
T
S
R
V
42
22
21
1
S
P
3
D

Indicators
Table 3-139 Status explanation for indicators on the SP3S/SP3D
properly.
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
l There is no power
configured.

Ports
Table 3-140 Description of the ports on the SP3S
Type
Corresponding Cable
1-16 The first to sixteenth
E1 ports
the E1 Panel

Table 3-141 Description of the ports on the SP3D
Type
Corresponding Cable
1-21 The first to sixteenth
E1 ports
the E1 Panel
22-42 The seventeenth to
thirty-second E1
ports
the E1 Panel

NOTE
On the OptiX RTN 950, only ports 1-16 and 22-37 of the SP3D are used. Ports 1-16 correspond to E1
signals 1-16 and ports 22-37 correspond to E1 signals 17-32.
3-157
The ports on the SP3S/SP3D use Anea 96 connectors. Figure 3-65 shows the front view of an
Anea 96 connector and Table 3-142 provides the pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector.
Figure 3-65 Front view of an Anea 96 connector
POS.96
POS.1

Table 3-142 Pin assignments for the Anea 96 connector
signal (+)
signal (-)
signal (+)
signal (-)
signal (+)
signal (-)
signal (+)
signal (-)
signal (+)
signal (-)
signal (+)
signal (-)
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
signal (+)
signal (-)
signal (+)
signal (-)
signal (+)
signal (-)
3-159

3.14.5 Valid Slots
The SP3S/SP3D can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the SP3S/SP3D on the NMS
Figure 3-66 Slots for the SP3S/SP3D in the IDU chassis
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 5 (SP3S/SP3D)
Slot 3 (SP3S/SP3D)
Slot 1 (SP3S/SP3D)
Slot 8
Slot 6 (SP3S/SP3D)
Slot 4 (SP3S/SP3D)
Slot 2 (SP3S/SP3D)

Figure 3-67 Logical slots of the SP3S/SP3D on the NMS
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 5 (SP3S/SP3D)
Slot 3 (SP3S/SP3D)
Slot 1 (SP3S/SP3D)
Slot 8
Slot 6 (SP3S/SP3D)
Slot 4 (SP3S/SP3D)
Slot 2 (SP3S/SP3D)

Item Description

The board feature code of the SP3S/SP3D indicates the E1 port impedance. The board feature
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Table 3-144 Board feature code of the SP3S/SP3D
Board Feature Code Port Impedance (Ohm)
A 120
B 75

This section provides hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the SP3S/SP3D.
Related References
A.5.8.1 Parameter Description: PDH Interfaces
E1 Interface Performance
Table 3-145 E1 interface performance
Item Performance
Code pattern HDB3
Impedance (ohm) 75 120
Wire pair in each
One coaxial wire pair One symmetrical wire pair

Mechanical Behavior
Item Performance
SP3S SP3D
Dimensions (H x W x
D)
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm

3-161
Power Consumption
Power consumption of the SP3S: < 5.7 W
Power consumption of the SP3D: < 9.6 W
3.15 AUX
The AUX is an auxiliary management interface board of the OptiX RTN 950. One NE can house
only one AUX.
The functional version of the AUX is SL91.
The AUX provides the system with one orderwire phone port, one synchronous data port, one
asynchronous data port, and one four-input/two-output external alarm port.
The AUX consists of the orderwire unit, logic control unit, and clock unit.
3.15.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, management ports, and auxiliary ports on the front panel.
3.15.5 Valid Slots
The AUX can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the AUX on the NMS are the same
This section describes the board specifications, including auxiliary port performance, board
The functional version of the AUX is SL91.
The AUX provides the system with one orderwire phone port, one synchronous data port, one
asynchronous data port, and one four-input/two-output external alarm port.
Table 3-147 lists the functions and features that the AUX supports.
Table 3-147 Functions and features that the AUX supports
Function and Feature AUX
Orderwire phone port 1
Synchronous data port 1
The transmission rate of the port is 64 kbit/s and its
specifications comply with ITU-T G.703.
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Function and Feature AUX
Asynchronous data port 1
The transmission rate of the port is equal to or less than 19.2
kbit/s and the interfacing level complies with RS-232.
External alarm port Four inputs and two outputs
Hot swapping function Supported
Power detection Supported

The AUX consists of the orderwire unit, logic control unit, and clock unit.
Figure 3-68 Functional block diagram of the AUX
Orderwire
unit
Power
supply unit
Logic control
unit
Board status
detection unit
Clock unit
Backplane
One orderwire phone port
Power dip
detection signal
System bus
System control and
communication unit
System control and
communication unit
Clock
signal
64 kbit/s
synchronous data port
19.2 kbit/s
asynchronous data port
4-input/2-output alarm port
+3.3 V
Power Supply Unit
l Receives the +3.3 V power supply from the backplane and supplies it to the other units on
the AUX.
l Receives and shuts down control signals.
Orderwire Unit
l Supports the input of four channels of alarms.
l Supports the output of two channels of alarms.
l Provides one orderwire port.
l Provides one 64 kbit/s synchronous transparent data port.
l Provides one 19.2 kbit/s asynchronous transparent data port.
NOTE
The 64 kbit/s synchronous data port can transparently transmit orderwire byte. One port, however, can implement
only one of the two functions: 64 kbit/s synchronous data port and transparent transmission of orderwire byte.
3-163
Logic Control Unit
l Provides an interface with the CPU unit and works with the CPU unit to implement the
board control function.
l Processes orderwire bytes and overhead bytes.
l Provides board status information.
l Checks the status of the main and standby system control, switching, and timing boards.
l Checks the status of the main and standby clocks.
l Supports the switching of system clock reference sources automatically and by running
specific commands.
l Supports the detection and reporting of the key clock status of each board in the system.
Board Status Detection Unit
l Detects board performance data such as board voltage.
l Stores board manufacturing information.
Clock Unit
Provides clock signals to the logic control unit.
3.15.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, management ports, and auxiliary ports on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-69 shows the appearance of the front panel of the AUX.
Figure 3-69 Front panel of the AUX
A
U
X
S
T
A
T
S
R
V
F1/S1 PHONE ALMO ALMI

Indicators
Table 3-148 Status explanation for indicators on the AUX
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
board.
system.
system.

Auxiliary Ports and Management Ports
Table 3-149 Description of the auxiliary ports and management ports
F1/S1 Synchronous/Asynchronous data port RJ45
ALMI Alarm input port
ALMO Alarm output port
PHONE Orderwire phone port

The auxiliary ports and management ports use RJ45 connectors. The pin assignments for the
ports, however, are different. Figure 3-70 shows the front view of the RJ45 connector.
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Table 3-150 provides the pin assignments for the F1/S1 port.
3-165
Table 3-150 Pin assignments for the F1/S1 port
Port Pin Signal
F1/S1 1 Transmitting asynchronous data signals
2 Grounding end
3 Receiving asynchronous data signals
4 Transmitting synchronous data signals (TIP)
5 Transmitting synchronous data signals (RING)
6 Grounding end
7 Receiving synchronous data signals (TIP)
8 Receiving synchronous data signals (RING)

For the pin assignments for the ALMI and ALMO ports, see Table 3-151 and see Table
3-152.
Table 3-151 Pin assignments for the ALMI port
Port Pin Signal
ALMI 1 The first external alarm input signal
2 Grounding end for the first external alarm input signal
3 The second external alarm input signal
4 The third external alarm input signal
5 Grounding end for the third external alarm input signal
6 Grounding end for the second external alarm input
signal
7 The forth external alarm input signal
8 Grounding end for the forth external alarm input signal

Table 3-152 Pin assignments for the ALMO port
Port Pin Signal
ALMO 1 The first external alarm output signal (+)
2 The first external alarm output signal (-)
3 The second external alarm output signal (+)
4 The first external alarm output signal (+)
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Port Pin Signal
5 The first external alarm output signal (-)
6 The second external alarm output signal (-)
7 The second external alarm output signal (+)
8 The second external alarm output signal (-)

3.15.5 Valid Slots
The AUX can be inserted in slots 1-6. The logical slots of the AUX on the NMS are the same
Figure 3-71 Slots for the AUX in the IDU chassis
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 5 (AUX)
Slot 3 (AUX)
Slot 1 (AUX)
Slot 8
Slot 6 (AUX)
Slot 4 (AUX)
Slot 2 (AUX)

Figure 3-72 Logical slots of the AUX on the NMS
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 5 (AUX)
Slot 3 (AUX)
Slot 1 (AUX)
Slot 8
Slot 6 (AUX)
Slot 4 (AUX)
Slot 2 (AUX)

Item Description

This section describes the board specifications, including auxiliary port performance, board
3-167
Orderwire Interface Performance
Table 3-154 Orderwire interface performance
Item Performance
Transmission path Uses the E1 and E2 bytes in the SDH overhead or the Huawei-
defined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.
Orderwire type Addressing call
Wire pair in each
One symmetrical wire pair
Impedance (ohm) 600

NOTE
The OptiX RTN equipment also supports the orderwire group call function. For example, when OptiX RTN
equipment calls 888, the orderwire group call number, all the OptiX RTN equipment orderwire phones in the
orderwire subnet ring until a phone is answered. Then, a point-to-point orderwire phone call is established.
Synchronous Data Interface Performance
Table 3-155 Synchronous data interface performance
Item Performance
Transmission path Uses the F1 byte in the SDH overhead or the Huawei-defined
byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.
Interface type Codirectional

Asynchronous Data Interface
Table 3-156 Asynchronous data interface performance
Item Performance
Transmission path Uses the user-defined byte of the SDH overhead or the
Huawei-defined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.
Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) 19.2
Interface characteristics Meets the RS-232 standard.

3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Mechanical Behavior
Item Performance
Weight 0.27 kg0.594 lbs (0.27 kg)

Power Consumption
3.16 PIU
The PIU is the power interface board. The OptiX RTN 950 supports two PIUs, each of which
accesses one -48 V/-60 V DC power supply.
The functional version of the PIU is TND1.
The PIU supports power access, power protection, surge protection status monitoring, and
information reporting.
The PIU consists of the protection and detection unit, EMI filtering unit, and communication
control unit.
3.16.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, power access ports, and a label on the front panel.
3.16.5 Valid Slots
The PIU can be inserted in slots 9 and 10. The logical slots of the PIU on the NMS are the same
This section describes the board specifications, including input voltage, board mechanical
The functional version of the PIU is TND1.
The PIU supports power access, power protection, surge protection status monitoring, and
information reporting.
Table 3-158 lists the functions and features that the PIU supports.
3-169
Table 3-158 Functions and features that the PIU supports
Function and Feature PIU
Basic functions Power access Two PIUs are provided and each accesses one -48 V
DC or -60 V DC power input.
Power output The PIU provides other boards with -48 V power.
Protection Protection Supports 1+1 HSB protection.
Power
protection
l Protection against overcurrent
l Protection against short circuits
Surge
protection
Supported
Surge protection status monitoring Supported

The PIU consists of the protection and detection unit, EMI filtering unit, and communication
control unit.
Figure 3-73 shows the functional block diagram of the PIU.
Figure 3-73 Functional block diagram of the PIU
Protection and
detection unit
EMI filtering
unit
Communicatio
n control unit
-48 V/-60 V
System control and
communication unit
Backplane
-48 V
+3.3 V
Detection
signal Detection signal
Board operating in distributed
power supply mode

Protection and Detection Unit
The protection and detection unit primarily protects and detects the PIU. It performs the
following functions:
l Provides protection against lightning strike and surge.
l Detects whether the surge-protection circuit fails and reports a surge-protection failure
alarm.
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
l Monitors PIU temperature in real time and reports it to the system control and
communication unit through the communication control unit.
EMI Filtering Unit
The EMI filtering unit performs electro-magnetic interference (EMI) filtering.
Communication Control Unit
The communication control unit achieves communication between the system control and
communication unit and the PIU and reports the following information to the system control
and communication unit:
l PIU manufacturing information
l PCB version information
l Surge-protection failure information
l PIU temperature
3.16.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, power access ports, and a label on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-74 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PIU.
Figure 3-74 Front panel of the PIU
-
4
8
V
-
6
0
V
P
W
R
N
E
G
(
-
)
R
T
N
(
+
)

Indicators
Table 3-159 Status explanation for indicators on the PIU
Indicator Status Description
PWR On (green) The power supply is connected.
3-171
Off There is no power supplied to the PIU or the power
supply is connected incorrectly.

Ports
The PIU accesses one power supply. Table 3-160 lists the types of the ports on the PIU and their
respective usage.
Table 3-160 Description of the ports on the PIU
Port Port Description Connector Type Corresponding Cable
NEG1(-) -48 V power input
port
2 mm HM power
connector
5.1 Power Cable
RTN1(+) BGND power input
port

Labels
Caution label for power operations: prompting you to read the operation guide before any power
operations.
CAUTION
Do not remove or install a PIU while the equipment is powered on. That is, turn off all the power
supplies of the PIU before removing or installing it.
3.16.5 Valid Slots
The PIU can be inserted in slots 9 and 10. The logical slots of the PIU on the NMS are the same
Figure 3-75 Slots for the PIU in the IDU chassis
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
Slot 7
Slot 5
Slot 3
Slot 1
Slot 8
Slot 6
Slot 4
Slot 2

3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Figure 3-76 Logical slots of the PIU on the NMS
Slot 10
(PIU)
Slot 9
(PIU)
Slot 11
Slot 7
Slot 5
Slot 3
Slot 1
Slot 8
Slot 6
Slot 4
Slot 2

This section describes the board specifications, including input voltage, board mechanical
Table 3-161 lists the technical specifications for the PIU.
Table 3-161 Technical specifications for the PIU
Item Performance
Dimensions 21.0 mm x 41.4 mm x 229.9 mm
Weight 0.12 kg
Power consumption < 0.5 W
Input voltage -38.4 V to -72.0 V

3.17 FAN
The FAN is a fan board that dissipates heat generated in the chassis through air cooling.
The functional version of the FAN is TND1.
The FAN adjusts the fan rotating speed, and detects and reports the fan status.
The FAN consists of the fan unit, power unit, and communication monitoring unit.
3.17.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, an ESD wrist strap jack, and labels on the front panel.
3.17.5 Valid Slots
The FAN can be inserted in slot 11 in the IDU chassis. The logical slot of the FAN on the NMS
is the same as the physical slot.
This section describes the board specifications, including board mechanical behavior and board
power consumption.
3-173
The functional version of the FAN is TND1.
The FAN adjusts the fan rotating speed, and detects and reports the fan status.
Table 3-162 lists the functions and features that the FAN supports.
Table 3-162 Functions and features that the FAN supports
Function and Feature FAN
Power input
Accesses one +12 V power input from the active system
control, switching, and timing board and one +12 V power
input from the standby system control, switching, and timing
board to provide 1+1 protection.
Number of fans 6
Intelligent fan speed
adjustment
Supported
Protection Provides soft-start for the power supply of the fans, protects
fans against overcurrent, and filters out high-frequency
signals.
OM l Reports the information about the fan rotating speed,
alarms, version number, and board in-position status.
l Provides alarm indicators.

The FAN consists of the fan unit, power unit, and communication monitoring unit.
Figure 3-77 shows the functional block diagram of the FAN.
Figure 3-77 Functional block diagram of the FAN
Fan unit Power unit
Communication
monitoring unit
System control and
communication unit
Backplane
+12 V
Communication
detection signal
Communication
detection signal
+12 V
+12 V
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Power Unit
l Receives +12 V power from the backplane.
l Provides the fan power with the following functions: soft-start, filtering, supply
combining, and overcurrent protection.
Fan Unit
Six air-cooling fans dissipate the heat generated by the system.
Communication Monitoring Unit
l Detects the manufacturing information, PCB version information, and environmental
temperature of the FAN, and reports the information to the system control and
communication unit.
l Detects the fan rotating speed and adjusts the speed according to the pulse-width
modulation signal from the system control and communication unit.
The system adjusts the fan rotating speed based on the working temperature, as listed in
Table 3-163.
Table 3-163 Adjustment of the fan rotating speed
Working Temperature Rotating Speed
25C 4800 rounds/minute
25C to 60C Linear increase in accordance with the
temperature
60C 16000 rounds/minute

3.17.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, an ESD wrist strap jack, and labels on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 3-78 shows the appearance of the front panel of the FAN.
3-175
Figure 3-78 Front panel of the FAN
FAN
CRIT
MAJ
MIN

Indicators
Table 3-164 Status explanation for indicators on the FAN
FAN On (green) The fan is working properly.
On (red) The fan is faulty.
Off The fan is not powered on or is not installed.

NOTE
The CRIT, MAJ, or MIN indicator on the front panel of the FAN indicates the current alarm severity of the
subrack.
ESD Wrist Strap Jack
An ESD wrist strap needs to be connected to the ESD wrist strap jack to achieve the proper
grounding of the human body.
Labels
The front panel of the FAN has the following labels:
l ESD protection label: indicates that the equipment is static-sensitive.
3 Boards
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
l Fan warning label: warns you not to touch fan leaves when a fan is rotating.
3.17.5 Valid Slots
The FAN can be inserted in slot 11 in the IDU chassis. The logical slot of the FAN on the NMS
is the same as the physical slot.
Figure 3-79 Slot for the FAN in the IDU chassis
Slot 10
Slot 9
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 5
Slot 3
Slot 1
Slot 8
Slot 6
Slot 4
Slot 2

Figure 3-80 Logical slot of the FAN on the NMS
Slot 10
Slot 9
Slot 11
(FAN)
Slot 7
Slot 5
Slot 3
Slot 1
Slot 8
Slot 6
Slot 4
Slot 2

This section describes the board specifications, including board mechanical behavior and board
power consumption.
Table 3-165 lists the technical specifications for the FAN.
Table 3-165 Technical specifications for the FAN
Item Performance
Weight 0.302 kg
Power consumption < 4.1 W (room temperature)
< 29.6 W (high temperature)

3-177
4 Accessories
About This Chapter
The accessories of the OptiX RTN 950 include the E1 panel and the power distribution unit
(PDU). Select appropriate accessories based on the requirements.
4.1 E1 Panel
When an IDU is installed in a 19-inch cabinet, install an E1 panel in the cabinet and this E1
panel functions as a DDF for the IDU.
4.2 PDU
A PDU is installed on the top of a 19-inch cabinet to distribute the input power supply to devices
in the cabinet.
IDU Hardware Description 4 Accessories
4-1
4.1 E1 Panel
When an IDU is installed in a 19-inch cabinet, install an E1 panel in the cabinet and this E1
panel functions as a DDF for the IDU.
The dimensions (H x W x D) of the E1 panel are 42 mm x 483 mm x 33 mm. An E1 panel
provides cable distribution for 16 E1s.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 4-1 Front panel of an E1 panel
R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 R10 R11 R12 R13 R14 R15 R16
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15 T16
1-8
9-16

Ports
Table 4-1 Port description of an E1 panel
T1-T16 Transmit ports for the first to
sixteenth E1 ports (connected
to external equipment)
BNC
R1-R16 Receive ports for the first to
sixteenth E1 ports (connected
to external equipment)
1-8 The first to eighth E1 ports
(connected to an IDU)
DB37
9-16 The ninth to sixteenth E1
ports (connected to an IDU)
Grounding bolt Connecting a PGND cable -

NOTE
The port impedance of each E1 port on an E1 panel is 75 ohms.
Figure 4-2 shows the front view of an E1 port that is connected to an IDU. Table 4-2 provides
the pin assignments for the E1 port.
4 Accessories
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Figure 4-2 Front view of an E1 port (E1 panel)
Pos. 1
Pos. 37

Table 4-2 Pin assignments for an E1 port (E1 panel)
20 The first E1 received differential
signal (+)
21 The first E1 transmitted
2 The first E1 received differential
signal (-)
3 The first E1 transmitted
22 The second E1 received
23 The second E1 transmitted
4 The second E1 received
5 The second E1 transmitted
24 The third E1 received differential
signal (+)
25 The third E1 transmitted
6 The third E1 received differential
signal (-)
7 The third E1 transmitted
26 The fourth E1 received
27 The fourth E1 transmitted
8 The fourth E1 received
9 The fourth E1 transmitted
36 The fifth E1 received differential
signal (+)
35 The fifth E1 transmitted
17 The fifth E1 received differential
signal (-)
16 The fifth E1 transmitted
34 The sixth E1 received differential
signal (+)
33 The sixth E1 transmitted
15 The sixth E1 received differential
signal (-)
14 The sixth E1 transmitted
32 The seventh E1 received
31 The seventh E1 transmitted
13 The seventh E1 received
12 The seventh E1 transmitted
4-3
30 The eighth E1 received
29 The eighth E1 transmitted
11 The eighth E1 received
10 The eighth E1 transmitted
Others Reserved - -

4.2 PDU
A PDU is installed on the top of a 19-inch cabinet to distribute the input power supply to devices
in the cabinet.
4.2.1 Front Panel
There are input power terminals, PGND terminals, output power terminals, and power switches
on the front panel of a PDU.
4.2.2 Functions and Working Principle
After implementing simple power distribution, a PDU feeds power to devices in a cabinet.
4.2.3 Power Distribution Mode
A PDU supports DC-C and DC-I power distribution. The DC-C power distribution is the default
mode.
4.2.1 Front Panel
There are input power terminals, PGND terminals, output power terminals, and power switches
on the front panel of a PDU.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 4-3 Front panel of the PDU
NEG2(-)
INPUT
RTN2(+) RTN1(+) NEG1(-)
3
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4
1 4
1 2 3 4
OUTPUT OUTPUT
A
B
2
20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 20A
5 6
1. Output power terminals (A) 2. PGND terminals
3. Input power terminals 4. Output power terminals (B)
4 Accessories
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
5. Power switches (A) 6. Power switches (B)

Ports
Table 4-3 Ports on the PDU
Position Port Description
Output power
terminals (A)
+ Power output (+)
- Power output (-)
PGND
terminals
Wiring terminal
for a two-hole
OT terminal
For connecting PGND cables
Input power
terminals
RTN1(+) The first power input (+)
RTN2(+) The second power input (+)
NEG1(-) The first power input (-)
NEG2(-) The second power input (-)
Output power
terminals (B)
+ Power output (+)
- Power output (-)
Power
switches (A)
20 A Switches for power outputs
The fuse capacity is 20 A. The switches from the left to
the right correspond to output power terminals 1 to 4 on
side A.
Power
switches (B)
20 A Switches for power outputs
The fuse capacity is 20 A. The switches from the left to
the right correspond to output power terminals 1 to 4 on
side B.

4.2.2 Functions and Working Principle
After implementing simple power distribution, a PDU feeds power to devices in a cabinet.
Functions
l The PDU supports two -48 V/-60 V DC power inputs.
l Each input power supply provides four outputs.
l The fuse capacity of the switch for each power output is 20 A.
l The PDU supports DC-C and DC-I power distribution.
4-5
Working Principle
A PDU consists of input terminals, output terminals, and circuit breakers and it performs simple
distribution operations for the input power.
Figure 4-4 Functional block diagram of the PDU
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4
SW1
SW2
SW4
SW4
INPUT
RTN1(+)
RTN2(+)
NEG1(-)
NEG2(-)
+
1
-
+
2
-
+
3
-
+
4
-
+
1
-
+
2
-
+
3
-
+
4
-
OUTPUT A
OUTPUT B
PGND
BGND
BGND

4.2.3 Power Distribution Mode
A PDU supports DC-C and DC-I power distribution. The DC-C power distribution is the default
mode.
A short-circuit copper bar inside a PDU controls the power distribution mode of the PDU.
DC-C Power Distribution Mode
To use DC-C power distribution, use the short-circuit copper bar to short-circuit terminal RTN1
(+), terminal RTN2(+), and PGND terminals.
4 Accessories
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Figure 4-5 Interior of the PDU in DC-C mode

DC-I Power Distribution Mode
To use DC-I power distribution, remove the short-circuit copper bar.
Figure 4-6 Interior of the PDU in DC-I mode

4-7
5 Cables
About This Chapter
This chapter describes the purpose, appearance, and pin assignments of various cables used on
the IDU 950.
5.1 Power Cable
A power cable connects the PIU board in the IDU to a power supply device (for example, a PDU
on top of the cabinet) for access of the -48 V power to the IDU.
5.2 PGND Cable
PGND cables are available in two categories: IDU PGND cables and E1 panel PGND cables.
5.3 IF Jumper
An IF jumper connects the IDU to an IF cable. The IF jumper works with the IF cable to transmit
IF signals and O&M signals in addition to supplying -48 V power between the ODU and the
IDU.
5.4 XPIC Cable
An XPIC cable transmits reference IF signals between the two XPIC boards in an XPIC
workgroup to implement the XPIC function.
5.5 Fiber Jumper
A fiber jumper transmits optical signals. One end of the fiber jumper has an LC/PC connector
that is connected to an SDH optical port or GE optical port on the OptiX RTN 950. The connector
at the other end of the fiber jumper depends on the type of the optical port on the equipment to
be connected.
5.6 E1 Cables
E1 cables are available in two categories: E1 cable (Anea 96) connected to the external equipment
and E1 cable connected to the E1 panel.
5.7 Orderwire Cable
An orderwire cable connects an orderwire phone to the equipment. Both ends of the orderwire
cable are terminated with an RJ11 connector. One end of the orderwire cable is connected to the
PHONE port on the AUX. The other end of the orderwire cable is connected to the port of the
orderwire phone.
5.8 Network Cable
IDU Hardware Description 5 Cables
5-1
A network cable connects two pieces of Ethernet equipment. Both ends of the network cable are
terminated with an RJ45 connector.
5 Cables
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
5.1 Power Cable
A power cable connects the PIU board in the IDU to a power supply device (for example, a PDU
on top of the cabinet) for access of the -48 V power to the IDU.
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-1 Power cable

Table 5-1 Power cable specifications
Model Cable Terminal
6 mm
2
power
cable and
terminal
Power cable, 450 V/
750 V, H07Z-K-6
mm
2
, blue/black, low
smoke zero halogen
cable
Common terminal, single cord end terminal,
conductor cross section 6 mm
2
, 30 A, insertion
depth 12 mm, blue

NOTE
For the OptiX RTN 950, power cables with a 6 mm
2
cross-sectional area can extend for a maximum distance
of 43 m.
5.2 PGND Cable
PGND cables are available in two categories: IDU PGND cables and E1 panel PGND cables.
5.2.1 IDU PGND Cable
An IDU PGND cable connects the left ground point of the IDU to the ground point of external
equipment (for example, the ground support of a cabinet) so that the IDU and external equipment
share the same ground.
5.2.2 E1 Panel PGND Cable
5-3
An E1 panel PGND cable connects the right ground nut of the E1 panel to the ground point of
external equipment (for example, the ground support of a cabinet) so that the E1 panel and
external equipment share the same ground.
5.2.1 IDU PGND Cable
An IDU PGND cable connects the left ground point of the IDU to the ground point of external
equipment (for example, the ground support of a cabinet) so that the IDU and external equipment
share the same ground.
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-2 IDU PGND cable
2
Main label
H.S.tube Cable tie 1
L
1. Bare crimping terminal, OT 2. Bare crimping terminal, OT

Pin Assignments
None.
5.2.2 E1 Panel PGND Cable
An E1 panel PGND cable connects the right ground nut of the E1 panel to the ground point of
external equipment (for example, the ground support of a cabinet) so that the E1 panel and
external equipment share the same ground.
5 Cables
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-3 E1 panel PGND cable
1
Main label
L
Bare crimping terminal, OT

Pin Assignments
None.
5.3 IF Jumper
An IF jumper connects the IDU to an IF cable. The IF jumper works with the IF cable to transmit
IF signals and O&M signals in addition to supplying -48 V power between the ODU and the
IDU.
An IF jumper is a 2 m RG-223 cable. One end of the IF jumper has a type-N connector that is
connected to the IF cable. The other end of the IF jumper has a TNC connector that is connected
to the IF board.
NOTE
l A 5D IF cable is directly connected to the IF board; therefore, an IF jumper is not required.
l If an RG-8U or 1/2-inch IF cable is used, an IF jumper is required to connect the RG-8U or 1/2-inch
IF cable to the IF board.
5-5
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-4 IF jumper
1
2
H.S.tube 2 PCS
L = 3 cm
2000 mm
1. RF coaxial cable connector, TNC, male 2. RF coaxial cable connector, type-N, female

Pin Assignments
None.
5.4 XPIC Cable
An XPIC cable transmits reference IF signals between the two XPIC boards in an XPIC
workgroup to implement the XPIC function.
An XPIC cable is an RG316 cable that has SMA connectors at both ends. One end of the XPIC
cable is connected to the X-IN port of one XPIC board in an XPIC workgroup, and the other
end of the XPIC cable is connected to the X-OUT port of the other XPIC board in the same
XPIC work group.
XPIC cables are available in the following types:
l XPIC cables with angle connectors: These XPIC cables are long and used to connect two
XPIC boards in the horizontal direction, for example, XPIC boards in slots 3 and 4.
l XPIC cables with straight connectors: These XPIC cables are short and used to connect
two XPIC boards in the vertical direction, for example, IFX2 boards in slots 3 and 5. These
XPIC cables are also used to connect the X-IN port to the X-OUT port on the same XPIC
board to loop back signals.
5 Cables
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-5 XPIC cable
L1
1
1
L2
2
2
1. Coaxial cable connector, SMA, angle, male 2. Coaxial cable connector, SMA, straight, male

Pin Assignments
None.
5.5 Fiber Jumper
A fiber jumper transmits optical signals. One end of the fiber jumper has an LC/PC connector
that is connected to an SDH optical port or GE optical port on the OptiX RTN 950. The connector
at the other end of the fiber jumper depends on the type of the optical port on the equipment to
be connected.
Types of Fiber Jumpers
Table 5-2 Types of fiber jumpers
Connector 1 Connector 2 Cable
LC/PC FC/PC 2 mm single-mode fiber
2 mm multi-mode fiber
LC/PC SC/PC 2 mm single-mode fiber
5-7
Connector 1 Connector 2 Cable
LC/PC LC/PC 2 mm single-mode fiber

NOTE
For the OptiX RTN 950, multi-mode fibers are required to connect to 1000BASE-SX GE optical ports.
Fiber Connectors
The following figures show three common types of fiber connectors, namely, LC/PC connector,
SC/PC connector, and FC/PC connector.
Figure 5-6 LC/PC connector

5 Cables
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Figure 5-7 SC/PC connector

Figure 5-8 FC/PC connector

5.6 E1 Cables
E1 cables are available in two categories: E1 cable (Anea 96) connected to the external equipment
and E1 cable connected to the E1 panel.
5.6.1 E1 Cable Connected to the External Equipment
An E1 cable that is connected to the external equipment is used when the IDU needs to directly
receive E1 signals from or transmits E1 signals to external equipment.
5.6.2 E1 Cable Connected to the E1 Panel
5-9
An E1 cable that is connected to the E1 panel is used when the E1 panel functions as a DDF.
One end of the E1 cable has an Anea 96 connector that is connected to an E1 port on the IDU.
The other end of the E1 cable has a DB37 connector that is connected to the E1 panel.
5.6.1 E1 Cable Connected to the External Equipment
An E1 cable that is connected to the external equipment is used when the IDU needs to directly
receive E1 signals from or transmits E1 signals to external equipment.
Each E1 cable that is connected to the external equipment can transmit a maximum of 16 E1
signals. There are two types of E1 cables that are connected to the external equipment: 75-ohm
coaxial cables and 120-ohm twisted pair cables.
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-9 E1 cable connected to the external equipment
Mai n l abel
1
W
X1
A
Vi ew A
Pos.1
Pos.96
Cabl e connector, Anea,
96-pi n, femal e
1. Cable connector, Anea 96, female
NOTE
l A 120-ohm E1 cable and a 75-ohm E1 cable have the same appearance.
l The core diameter of a 75-ohm E1 cable is 1.6 mm. Therefore, use a crimping tool with an opening of
2.5 mm (0.098-inch) to attach the end of the 75-ohm E1 cable on the DDF frame with a 75-1-1 coaxial
connector.

5 Cables
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Pin Assignments
Table 5-3 Pin assignments for a 75-ohm E1 cable
Pin W Remark
s
Pin W Remark
s
Core Serial
No.
Core Serial
No.
1 Tip 1 R0 25 Tip 2 T0
2 Ring 26 Ring
3 Tip 3 R1 27 Tip 4 T1
4 Ring 28 Ring
5 Tip 5 R2 29 Tip 6 T2
6 Ring 30 Ring
7 Tip 7 R3 31 Tip 8 T3
8 Ring 32 Ring
9 Tip 9 R4 33 Tip 10 T4
10 Ring 34 Ring
11 Tip 11 R5 35 Tip 12 T5
12 Ring 36 Ring
13 Tip 13 R6 37 Tip 14 T6
14 Ring 38 Ring
15 Tip 15 R7 39 Tip 16 T7
16 Ring 40 Ring
18 Ring 17 R8 42 Ring 18 T8
17 Tip 41 Tip
20 Ring 19 R9 44 Ring 20 T9
19 Tip 43 Tip
22 Ring 21 R10 46 Ring 22 T10
21 Tip 45 Tip
24 Ring 23 R11 48 Ring 24 T11
23 Tip 47 Tip
50 Ring 25 R12 74 Ring 26 T12
49 Tip 73 Tip
5-11
Pin W Remark
s
Pin W Remark
s
Core Serial
No.
Core Serial
No.
52 Ring 27 R13 76 Ring 28 T13
51 Tip 75 Tip
54 Ring 29 R14 78 Ring 30 T14
53 Tip 75 Tip
56 Ring 31 R15 80 Ring 32 T15
55 Tip 79 Tip
Shell Braid Shell Braid

Table 5-4 Pin assignments for a 120-ohm E1 cable
Pin W Rema
rks
Tape
Color
Pin W Rema
rks
Tape
Color
Color
of the
Core
Relati
onshi
p
Color
of the
Core
Relati
onshi
p
1 White Twiste
d pair
R0 Blue 25 White Twiste
d pair
T0 Blue
2 Blue 26 Orang
e
3 White Twiste
d pair
R1 27 White Twiste
d pair
T1
4 Green 28 Brown
5 White Twiste
d pair
R2 29 Red Twiste
d pair
T2
6 Grey 30 Blue
7 Red Twiste
d pair
R3 31 Red Twiste
d pair
T3
8 Orang
e
32 Green
9 Red Twiste
d pair
R4 33 Red Twiste
d pair
T4
10 Brown 34 Grey
11 Black Twiste
d pair
R5 35 Black Twiste
d pair
T5
12 Blue 36 Orang
e
13 Black Twiste
d pair
R6 37 Black Twiste
d pair
T6
14 Green 38 Brown
5 Cables
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Pin W Rema
rks
Tape
Color
Pin W Rema
rks
Tape
Color
Color
of the
Core
Relati
onshi
p
Color
of the
Core
Relati
onshi
p
15 Black Twiste
d pair
R7 39 Yello
w
Twiste
d pair
T7
16 Grey 40 Blue
17 White Twiste
d pair
R8 Orang
e
41 White Twiste
d pair
T8 Orang
e
18 Blue 42 Orang
e
19 White Twiste
d pair
R9 43 White Twiste
d pair
T9
20 Green 44 Brown
21 White Twiste
d pair
R10 45 Red Twiste
d pair
T10
22 Grey 46 Blue
23 Red Twiste
d pair
R11 47 Red Twiste
d pair
T11
24 Orang
e
48 Green
49 Red Twiste
d pair
R12 73 Red Twiste
d pair
T12
50 Brown 74 Grey
51 Black Twiste
d pair
R13 75 Black Twiste
d pair
T13
52 Blue 76 Orang
e
53 Black Twiste
d pair
R14 77 Black Twiste
d pair
T14
54 Green 78 Brown
55 Black Twiste
d pair
R15 79 Yello
w
Twiste
d pair
T15
56 Grey 80 Blue

5.6.2 E1 Cable Connected to the E1 Panel
An E1 cable that is connected to the E1 panel is used when the E1 panel functions as a DDF.
One end of the E1 cable has an Anea 96 connector that is connected to an E1 port on the IDU.
The other end of the E1 cable has a DB37 connector that is connected to the E1 panel.
Each E1 cable can transmit 16 E1 signals. The port impedance of the E1 cable is 75 ohms.
5-13
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-10 E1 cable connected to the E1 panel
X1: Cable connector, Anea 96, female X2/X3: Cable connector, type D, 37 male
Label 1: "CHAN 0-7" Label 2: "CHAN 8-15"

Pin Assignments
Table 5-5 Pin assignments for the E1 cable terminated with an Anea 96 connector and a DB37
connector
Wire Connecto
r X1
Connecto
r X2/X3
Remarks Connecto
r X1
Connecto
r X2/X3
Remarks
W1 X1.2 X2.20 R0 X1.10 X2.36 R4
X1.1 X2.2 X1.9 X2.17
X1.26 X2.21 T0 X1.34 X2.35 T4
X1.25 X2.3 X1.33 X2.16
X1.4 X2.22 R1 X1.12 X2.34 R5
X1.3 X2.4 X1.11 X2.15
X1.28 X2.23 T1 X1.36 X2.33 T5
X1.27 X2.5 X1.35 X2.14
X1.6 X2.24 R2 X1.14 X2.32 R6
5 Cables
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Wire Connecto
r X1
Connecto
r X2/X3
Remarks Connecto
r X1
Connecto
r X2/X3
Remarks
X1.5 X2.6 X1.13 X2.13
X1.30 X2.25 T2 X1.38 X2.31 T6
X1.29 X2.7 X1.37 X2.12
X1.8 X2.26 R3 X1.16 X2.30 R7
X1.7 X2.8 X1.15 X2.11
X1.32 X2.27 T3 X1.40 X2.29 T7
X1.31 X2.9 X1.39 X2.10
W2 X1.18 X3.20 R8 X1.50 X3.36 R12
X1.17 X3.2 X1.49 X3.17
X1.42 X3.21 T8 X1.74 X3.35 T12
X1.41 X3.3 X1.73 X3.16
X1.20 X3.22 R9 X1.52 X3.34 R13
X1.19 X3.4 X1.51 X3.15
X1.44 X3.23 T9 X1.76 X3.33 T13
X1.43 X3.5 X1.75 X3.14
X1.22 X3.24 R10 X1.54 X3.32 R14
X1.21 X3.6 X1.53 X3.13
X1.46 X3.25 T10 X1.78 X3.31 T14
X1.45 X3.7 X1.77 X3.12
X1.24 X3.26 R11 X1.56 X3.30 R15
X1.23 X3.8 X1.55 X3.11
X1.48 X3.27 T11 X1.80 X3.29 T15
X1.47 X3.9 X1.79 X3.10

5.7 Orderwire Cable
An orderwire cable connects an orderwire phone to the equipment. Both ends of the orderwire
cable are terminated with an RJ11 connector. One end of the orderwire cable is connected to the
PHONE port on the AUX. The other end of the orderwire cable is connected to the port of the
orderwire phone.
5-15
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-11 Orderwire cable
1
6
1
6
1
Main label
X1 X2
1. Orderwire port, RJ11 connector

Pin Assignments
Table 5-6 Pin assignments for the orderwire cable
Connector X1 Connector X2 Function
X1.3 X2.3 Tip
X1.4 X2.4 Ring

5.8 Network Cable
A network cable connects two pieces of Ethernet equipment. Both ends of the network cable are
terminated with an RJ45 connector.
Two types of interfaces use RJ45 connectors, which are medium dependent interfaces (MDIs)
and MDI-Xs. MDIs are used by terminal equipment, for example, network card. The pin
assignments for MDIs are provided in Table 5-7. MDI-Xs are used by network equipment. The
pin assignments for MDI-Xs are provided in Table 5-8.
Table 5-7 Pin assignments for MDIs
(+)
(-)
(+)
5 Cables
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
(+)
(-)
(-)
(+)
(-)

Table 5-8 Pin assignments for MDI-Xs
(+)
(-)
(+)
(+)
(-)
(-)
(+)
(-)

Straight-through cables are used between MDIs and MDI-Xs, and crossover cables are used
between MDIs or between MDI-Xs. The only difference between straight-through cables and
crossover cables is with regard to the pin assignment.
The NMS/COM port, NE cascading port, and Ethernet electrical service ports of the OptiX RTN
950 support the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes. Straight-through cables and
5-17
crossover cables can be used to connect the NMS/COM port, EXT port, and Ethernet electrical
service ports to MDIs or MDI-Xs.
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-12 Network cable
1
8
1
8
1
Label 1 Label 2 Mai n l abel
1. Network port connector, RJ45

Pin Assignments
Table 5-9 Pin assignments for the straight-through cable
Connector X1 Connector X2 Color Relation
X1.1 X2.1 White/Orange Twisted pair
X1.2 X2.2 Orange
X1.3 X2.3 White/Green Twisted pair
X1.6 X2.6 Green
X1.4 X2.4 Blue Twisted pair
X1.5 X2.5 White/Blue
X1.7 X2.7 White/Brown Twisted pair
X1.8 X2.8 Brown

Table 5-10 Pin assignments for the crossover cable
X1.6 X2.2 Orange Twisted pair
X1.3 X2.1 White/Orange
X1.1 X2.3 White/Green Twisted pair
X1.2 X2.6 Green
X1.4 X2.4 Blue Twisted pair
5 Cables
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
X1.5 X2.5 White/Blue
X1.7 X2.7 White/Brown Twisted pair
X1.8 X2.8 Brown

5-19
A Parameters Description
This chapter describes the parameters used in this document.
A.1 Parameters for Network Management
This topic describes the parameters that are related to network management.
A.2 Radio Link Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to radio links.
A.3 Multiplex Section Protection Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to multiplex section protection (MSP).
A.4 SDH/PDH Service Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to SDH/PDH services.
A.5 Parameters for Board Interfaces
This topic describes the parameters that are related to board interfaces.
A.6 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet Features on the Packet Plane
This section describes the parameters for the Ethernet services and Ethernet features on the
packet plane, including service parameters, protocol parameters, OAM parameters, Ethernet port
parameters, and QoS parameters.
A.7 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet Features on the EoPDH Plane
EoPDH plane, including service parameters, protocol parameters, OAM parameters, Ethernet
port parameters, and QoS parameters.
A.8 RMON Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON performances.
A.9 Parameters for MPLS/PWE3 Services
This topic describes parameters that are related to MPLS/PWE3 services.
A.10 Clock Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to clocks.
A.11 Parameters for the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the orderwire and auxiliary interfaces.
IDU Hardware Description A Parameters Description
A-1
A.1 Parameters for Network Management
This topic describes the parameters that are related to network management.
A.1.1 Parameters for NE Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing network elements (NEs).
A.1.2 Parameters for Communications Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for communications management.
A.1.3 Parameters for Network Security Management
This topic describes the parameters that are related to network security management.
A.1.1 Parameters for NE Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing network elements (NEs).
A.1.1.1 Parameter Description: NE Searching
This topic describes the parameters that are used for searching for NEs.
A.1.1.2 Parameter Description: NE Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are related to NE creation.
A.1.1.3 Parameter Description: Attribute_Changing NE IDs
This topic describes the parameters that are used for changing NE IDs.
A.1.1.4 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization
This topic describes the parameters that are used for synchronizing the time of NEs.
A.1.1.5 Parameter Description: Localization Management of the NE Time
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for localization management of the NE
time.
A.1.1.6 Parameter Description: Standard NTP Key Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing the standard NTP key.
A.1.1.7 Parameter Description: License Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing the license.
A.1.1.8 Parameter Description: Automatic Disabling of the Functions of NEs
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for automatically disabling the functions
of an NE.
A.1.1.1 Parameter Description: NE Searching
This topic describes the parameters that are used for searching for NEs.
Navigation Path
Choose File > Discovery > NE from the Main Menu.
A-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameters for the Search Field
Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
Address Type IP Address of GNE
NSAP Address
IP Address Range of GNE
IP Address Range of GNE l If the OSI protocol is
used on the DCN, you
can search for an NE
based on NSAP
Address only.
l If the IP protocol is
used on the DCN, you
can search for an NE
based on IP Address
of GNE or IP Address
Range of GNE.
l To search for all the
NEs that communicate
with the gateway NE,
select IP Address
Range of GNE.
l To select the gateway
NE only, select IP
Address of GNE.
NOTE
If Address Type is set to IP
Address of GNE or IP
Address Range of GNE,
and if the U2000 (server)
and the gateway NE are
located in different network
segments, ensure that the
U2000 and relevant routers
are configured with the IP
routes for the network
segment in which the
U2000 and gateway NE are
located.
If Address Type is set to
NSAP Address, ensure that
the OSI protocol stack is
installed.
A-3
Search Address - - l If Address Type is set
to IP Address of
GNE, enter the IP
address of the gateway
NE, such as 129.9.x.x.
l If Address Type is set
to IP Address Range
of GNE, enter the
number of the IP
network segment in
which the gateway NE
is located, such as
129.9.255.255.
l If Address Type is set
to NSAP Address,
enter the NSAP
address of the gateway
NE.
User Name - - This parameter specifies
the user name of the
gateway NE.
Password - - This parameter specifies
the password of the
gateway NE.

Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter for Searching for NEs
Create NE after search Selected
Deselected
Deselected l To create NEs in
batches, it is
recommended that you
select Create NE
after search. The NEs
are automatically
created after they are
found.
l After Create NE after
search is selected,
enter NE User and
Password that are
used for creating an
NE.
NOTE
If only Create NE after
search is selected, Search
for NE is selected
automatically.
NE User - - l This parameter
specifies the user name
to be entered when an
NE is created.
l This parameter is valid
only when Create NE
after search is
selected.
Password - - l This parameter
specifies the password
NE is created.
only when Create NE
after search is
selected.
A-5
Upload after create Selected
Deselected
Deselected l This parameter
specifies whether to
automatically upload
the NE data after the
NE is found and
created.
l If only Upload after
create is selected,
Search for NE and
Create NE after
search are selected
automatically.

Parameter for the Found NEs
NE ID - - This parameter indicates
the ID of the found NE,
which consists of
extended ID and NE ID.
For example, in the case of
NE9-25, the value 9
indicates the extended ID,
and the value 25 indicates
the NE ID.
GNE Address - - This parameter indicates
the address of the gateway
NE that is connected to the
found NE.
GNE ID - - This parameter indicates
the ID of the gateway NE
that is connected to the
found NE.
Created As GNE Yes
No
Yes l This parameter
specifies the password
NE is created.
only when Create NE
after search is
selected.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Connection Mode Common
Security SSL
Common The communication
between the client and the
server is encrypted if this
parameter is set to
Security SSL.
Port - 1400 This parameter specifies
the communication port.
NE Status Created
Uncreated
- This parameter indicates
whether the found NE is
created.

A.1.1.2 Parameter Description: NE Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are related to NE creation.
Navigation Path
1. In the Physical ViewPhysical Root, right-click New > NE.
2. Choose RTN Series > OptiX RTN 950 from the Object Tree.
Parameters on the Main Interface
Type - - This parameter indicates
the type of the NE to be
created.
ID 1 to 49135 - l The ID refers to the
basic ID. If the
extended ID is not
used, the basic ID of an
NE must be unique on
the networks that are
managed by the same
NMS.
l This parameter is set
according to the
planning information.
l The NE ID consisting
of the basic ID and
extended ID identifies
an NE on the NMS.
A-7
Extended ID 1 to 254 9 If the number of existing
NEs does not exceed the
range represented by the
basic ID, do not change
Extended ID.
Name - - l This parameter
specifies the name of
the NE.
l After you have
specified the name of
the NE, the name is
displayed under the
icon of the NE.
Remarks - - This parameter specifies
the remarks of the NE.
Gateway Type Non-Gateway
Gateway
Non-Gateway l This parameter is set to
Gateway if the new
NE is a gateway NE.
l This parameter is set to
Non-Gateway if the
new NE is a non-
gateway NE.
according to the DCN
planning if the new NE
can function as a
gateway NE or a non-
gateway NE.
Affiliated Gateway - - This parameter indicates
the gateway NE of the new
NE when Gateway Type
is set to Non-Gateway.
Affiliated Gateway
Protocol
IP
OSI
IP l This parameter needs
to be set when
Gateway Type is set
to Gateway.
l When the OSI over
DCC solution is used,
this parameter is set to
OSI.
l In other cases, this
parameter is set to IP.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
IP Address - - This parameter indicates
the IP address of the new
NE. This parameter needs
to be set when Affiliated
Gateway Protocol is set
to IP.
Connection Mode Common
Security SSL
Common The communication
between the client and the
server is encrypted if this
parameter is set to
Security SSL.
Port - 1400 This parameter specifies
the communication port.
NE User - - This parameter specifies
the user name to be
entered when an NE is
created.
Password - - This parameter specifies
the password to be entered
when an NE is created.
NSAP Address - - This parameter indicates
the NSAP address of the
new NE. This parameter
needs to be set when
Affiliated Gateway
Protocol is set to OSI.
You need to set the area ID
only, and the other parts
are automatically
generated by the NE.

A.1.1.3 Parameter Description: Attribute_Changing NE IDs
This topic describes the parameters that are used for changing NE IDs.
Navigation Path
1. In the Main Topology, right-click the NE whose ID needs to be modified.
2. Choose Object Attributes.
3. Click Modify NE ID.
A-9
Parameters for Changing NE IDs
New ID - - l The new ID refers to
the basic ID. If the
extended ID is not
used, the basic ID of an
NE must be unique on
the networks that are
managed by the same
NMS.
according to the
NOTE
The NE ID consisting of the
basic ID and extended ID
identifies an NE on the
NMS.
New Extended ID 1 to 254 9 If the number of existing
NEs does not exceed the
range represented by the
basic ID, do not change
the extended ID.

A.1.1.4 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization
This topic describes the parameters that are used for synchronizing the time of NEs.
Navigation Path
1. Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from
the Main Menu.
2. Click the NE Time Synchronization tab.
Parameters for NE Time Synchronization
NE Name - - This parameter indicates
the name of the NE.
NE ID - - This parameter indicates
the ID of the NE.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Synchronous Mode Standard NTP
NM
Null
Null l If this parameter is set
to NM, the NE
synchronizes the time
of the NMS server.
l If this parameter is set
to Standard NTP, the
NE synchronizes the
Network Time
Protocol (NTP) server
through the standard
NTP.
Standard NTP
Authentication
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled This parameter is valid
only when Synchronous
Mode is set to Standard
NTP.

Parameters for the Standard NTP Server
Standard NTP Server
Identifier
NE ID
IP
NE ID l If the NE functions as
the gateway NE, this
l If the NE functions as
a non-gateway NE and
communicates with
the gateway NE
through the HWECC
protocol, this
parameter is set to NE
ID.
a non-gateway NE and
communicates with
the gateway NE
through the IP
protocol, this
A-11
Standard NTP Server - - l If the NE functions as
the gateway NE, this
parameter is set to the
IP address of the
external NTP server.
a non-gateway NE,
the ID or IP address of
the gateway NE.
Standard NTP Server
Key
0 to 1024 0 l If the NTP server does
not need to
authenticated, this
parameter is set to the
value "0".
l If the NTP server
needs to be
authenticated, the
authentication is
performed according
to the allocated key of
the NTP server. In this
case, the NE
authenticates the NTP
server based on the key
and the corresponding
password (specified in
the management of the
standard NTP key).

Parameters for Setting Automatic Synchronization
Synchronization
Starting Time
- - l This parameter
specifies the start time
of the synchronization
period. After this
parameter is specified,
the NMS and the NE
synchronize the time
once at the intervals of
Synchronization
Period(days).
l It is recommended that
you use the default
value.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
DST Selected
Deselected
Deselected l This parameter
indicates whether
Synchronization
Starting Time is the
daylight saving time.
according to the actual
situation.
Synchronization Period
(days)
1 to 300 1 l This parameter
indicates the period of
synchronizing the time
of the NE with the time
of the NMS.
you use the default
value.

A.1.1.5 Parameter Description: Localization Management of the NE Time
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for localization management of the NE
time.
Navigation Path
1. Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time Localization
Management from the Main Menu.
2. Select the NE for time localization management from the Object Tree, and then click
.
Parameters for Localization Management of the NE Time
NE - - This parameter indicates the name of the
NE.
TimeZone - - This parameter indicates the time zone.
DST - - This parameter indicates whether DST is
enabled.

A-13
Parameters for Time Zone
Time Zone - - l After the time zone is changed, the
current time of the NE is changed
accordingly.
l This parameter is set according to the
place where the NE is located.
DST Selected
Deselected
Deselected l The parameters related to daylight
saving time can be valid only when this
parameter is selected.
situation whether daylight saving time is
used in the place where the NE is located.
Offset 1 to 120
Unit: minute(s)
- This parameter specifies the offset value of
the daylight saving time.
Start Rule WEEK
DATE
WEEK This parameter specifies the method of
adjusting the daylight saving time.
Start Time - - This parameter specifies the start daylight
saving time.
End Rule WEEK
DATE
WEEK This parameter specifies the method of
adjusting the daylight saving time.
End Time - - This parameter specifies the end daylight
saving time.

A.1.1.6 Parameter Description: Standard NTP Key Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing the standard NTP key.
Navigation Path
1. Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from
the Main Menu.
2. Click the Standard NTP Key Management tab.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Key 1 to 1024 - l This parameter
indicates the key for
NTP authentication.
according to the
requirements of the
Password - - l This parameter
indicates the password
that corresponds to
Key.
according to the
requirements of the
Trusted Yes
No
Yes l When this parameter is
set to No, the key
verification is not
trusted. After
receiving the key, the
NE rejects the clock
synchronization
service.
l When this parameter is
set to Yes, the key
verification is trusted.
After receiving the
key, the NE provides
the clock
synchronization
service.
l After receiving an
unknown or incorrect
key, the NE rejects the
clock synchronization
service. Hence, it is
set a trusted key only.

A.1.1.7 Parameter Description: License Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing the license.
A-15
Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > License
Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the License Management tab.
Parameters for Managing Licenses
Board - - This parameter displays the boards that need
to be supported by licenses.
File Type - - This parameter displays the license type
corresponding to each board.
Capacity - - This parameter displays the capacity of each
board.
Load - - This parameter displays whether the
corresponding license file is loaded to each
board.

A.1.1.8 Parameter Description: Automatic Disabling of the Functions of NEs
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for automatically disabling the functions
of an NE.
Navigation Path
1. On the Main Topology, choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > Automatic
Disabling of NE Function.
2. Select the NE whose functions need to be automatically disabled from the Object Tree, and
then click .
Parameters for Automatically Disabling the Functions of NEs
NE Name - - This parameter indicates the name of the
NE.
NE Type OptiX RTN 950 - This parameter indicates the type of the NE.
Operation Type - - This parameter indicates the type of the
operation, such as loopback, and shutdown
of the laser.
Auto Disabling Disabled
Enabled
Enabled This parameter specifies whether to
automatically disable the operations such as
loopback, and shutdown of the laser.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Auto Disabling
Time(min)
1 to 2880 5 This parameter specifies the time of
automatically disabling the operations such
as loopback, and shutdown of the laser.

A.1.2 Parameters for Communications Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for communications management.
This topic describes the parameters that are used for NE communication setting.
A.1.2.2 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Rate Configuration
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the DCC rate.
A.1.2.3 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Transparent Transmission
Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for DCC transparent transmission management.
A.1.2.4 Parameter Description: ECC Management_Ethernet Port Extended ECC
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the extended ECCs of Ethernet ports.
A.1.2.5 Parameter Description: NE ECC Link Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for NE ECC link management.
A.1.2.6 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for IP route management.
A.1.2.7 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for new static IP routes.
A.1.2.8 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_OSPF Parameter Settings
This topic describes the parameters that are used for OSPF settings.
A.1.2.9 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack_Proxy ARP
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the proxy ARP.
A.1.2.10 Parameter Description: Port OSPF Setting
This section describes the parameters that are used for setting port OSPF parameters.
A.1.2.11 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Network Layer Parameter
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the network layer of the OSI protocol
model.
A.1.2.12 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Routing Table
This topic describes the parameters that are related to OSI routing tables.
A.1.2.13 Parameter Description: OSI Management_OSI Tunnel
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the OSI tunnels.
A.1.2.14 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Bandwidth Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for bandwidth management of the inband DCN.
A.1.2.15 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Port Setting
This topic describes the parameters that are used for setting ports of the inband DCN.
A-17
A.1.2.16 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Protocol Setting
This topic describes the parameters that are used for setting a protocol of the inband DCN.
A.1.2.17 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Access Control
This section describes the parameters for configuring access control.
A.1.2.18 Parameter Description: Access Control
This topic describes the parameters that are used for access control of the NMS.
This topic describes the parameters that are used for NE communication setting.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication >
Communication Parameters from the Function Tree.
Parameters for NE Communication Setting
IP Address - Before delivery, the
IP address of the NE
is set to 129.9.0.x.
The letter x indicates
the basic ID.
In the HWECC solution, an IP address is set
according to the following rules:
l The IP address, subnet mask, and default
gateway of the gateway NE should meet
the planning requirements of the
external DCN.
l If an NE uses the extended ECC, the IP
address must be in the same network
segment.
l The IP address of other NEs should be
set according to the NE ID. In this case,
the IP address of an NE should be set in
the format of 0x81000000+ID. That is,
if the ID is 0x090001, the IP address
should be set to 129.9.0.1.
Gateway IP
Address
- 0.0.0.0
Subnet Mask - 255.255.0.0
Extended ID 1 to 254 9 l Do not change the extended ID when the
number of actual NEs does not exceed
the range permitted by the basic NE ID.
l It is recommended that this parameter
takes the default value.
NSAP Address - - This parameter is valid only when the OSI
over DCC solution is applied. This
parameter is used to set only the area ID of
an NSAP address. The other parts of the
NSAP address are automatically generated
by the NE.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Connection Mode Common + Security
SSL
Common
Security SSL
Common + Security
SSL
l Specifies the connection mode that the
gateway NE allows the NMS to use for
connecting to the gateway NE.
l If the gateway NE has no special
security requirement for connection to
the NMS, Connection Mode can be set
to Common.
l If the gateway NE requests secure
connection to the NMS for preventing
information interception and cracking,
Connection Mode needs to be set to
Security SSL.
l If NE communication security level
needs to be the same as NMS
communication security level,
Connection Mode needs to be set to
Common + Security SSL.
l The default parameter value is
recommended unless the gateway NE
requires that the NMS use the SSL
connection mode.
l The parameter value takes effect only
when it is set for a gateway NE and the
gateway NE is connected to the NMS by
means of the IP protocol.

A.1.2.2 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Rate Configuration
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the DCC rate.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCC
2. Click the DCC Rate Configuration tab.
Parameters for DCC Rate Configuration
Port - - This parameter indicates the port that is
connected to the DCC channel.
A-19
Enabled/Disabled Enabled
Disabled
Enabled It is recommended that you use the default
value, except for the following cases:
l If the port is connected to the other ECC
subnet, Enabled/Disabled is set to
Disabled.
l If the port is connected to a third-party
network and does not exchange the
network management information with
other ports, Enabled/Disabled is set to
Disabled.
Channel D1-D3
D4-D12
D1-D12
D1-D1
D1-D1 (for the PDH
radio whose
transmission
capacity is less than
16xE1)
D1-D3 (for other
cases)
It is recommended that you use the default
l If the IP over DCC or OSI over DCC
solution is adopted, Channel for the
SDH line ports is set to a value that is the
same as the value for third-party
network.
l If the DCC transparent transmission
solution is adopted, the value of
Channel for the SDH line ports should
not conflict with the value that is set for
the third-party network.
DCC Resources - - This parameter indicates the DCC
resources.
Communication
Status
- - This parameter indicates the
communication status.
Protocol Type HWECC
TCP/IP
OSI
HWECC It is recommended that you use the default
l If the IP over DCC solution is adopted,
Protocol Type is set to TCP/IP.
l If the OSI over DCC solution is adopted,
Protocol Type is set to OSI.
LAPD Role User
Network
User l This parameter is valid only when
Protocol Type is set to OSI.
l In the case of a DCC channel, LAPD
Role must be set to User for one end and
must be set to Network for the other end.
LAPD MTU - - Displays the maximum LAPD packet size.

A.1.2.3 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Transparent Transmission
Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for DCC transparent transmission management.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCC
2. Click the DCC Transparent Transmission Management tab.
3. Click Create.
Parameters for DCC Transparent Transmission Management
Source Timeslot/
Port
a
- - This parameter specifies the source timeslot
or port.
Transparent
Transmission of
Overhead Bytes at
Source Port
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
E1
E2
F1
K1
K2
X1
X2
X3
X4
- l Only one overhead byte can be selected
each time.
l X1, X2, X3, and X4 indicate the
customized overhead bytes that are used
for transmitting asynchronous data
services.
l An overhead byte cannot be a byte that
is used. For example, an overhead byte
cannot be a byte in the used DCC
channel.
Sink Timeslot/
Port
a
- - This parameter specifies the sink timeslot or
port.
A-21
Transparent
Transmission of
Overhead Bytes at
Sink Port
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
E1
E2
F1
K1
K2
X1
X2
X3
X4
- l Only one overhead byte can be selected
each time.
l An overhead byte cannot be a byte that
is used. For example, an overhead byte
cannot be a byte in the used DCC
channel.
l Generally, Transparent Transmission
of Overhead Bytes at Sink Port can be
set to a value that is the same as or
different from the value in the case of
Transparent Transmission of
Overhead Bytes at Source Port.

NOTE
a. A bidirectional cross-connection is set up between the source port and the sink port. Hence, a port functions
the same regardless of the source port or sink port.
A.1.2.4 Parameter Description: ECC Management_Ethernet Port Extended ECC
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the extended ECCs of Ethernet ports.
Navigation Path
Click an NE in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > ECC Management from the
Function Tree.
Parameters for the ECC Extended Mode
ECC Extended
Mode
Auto mode
Specified mode
Auto mode It is recommended that you use the default
value.

Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameters for Setting the Server
IP - - This parameter indicates the IP address of
the server.
Port 1601 to 1699 0 l This parameter is valid only when ECC
Extended Mode is set to Specified
mode.
l This parameter can be set only when the
NE functions as the server of the
extended ECC. In normal cases, the NE
that is close to the NMS functions as the
server.
l This parameter can be set to any value
from 1601 to 1699.

Parameters for Setting the Client
Opposite IP - 0.0.0.0 l This parameter is valid only when ECC
Extended Mode is set to Specified
mode.
l This parameter can be set only when the
NE functions as the client of the
extended ECC. Except for the NE that
functions as the server, all other NEs that
use the extended ECC can function as the
client.
l Opposite IP and Port are respectively
set to the IP address of the server NE and
the specified port number.
Port 1601 to 1699 0

A.1.2.5 Parameter Description: NE ECC Link Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for NE ECC link management.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > NE ECC
Link Management from the Function Tree.
A-23
Parameter for NE ECC Link Management
Destination NE - - This parameter specifies the sink NE of the
ECC connection.
Transfer NE - - This parameter specifies the next transfer
NE and the direction of the ECC route.
Distance - - l This parameter specifies the number of
NEs (excluding the source NE and sink
NE) through which the ECC route
passes, namely, the number of ECC
packet forwarding attempts. The value
can be set to a value that is greater than
the number of actual ECC packet
forwarding attempts. If the value is set to
a value that is less than the number of
actual ECC packet forwarding attempts,
however, the destination NE fails to be
accessed.
l If the value is set to 0, it indicates that the
source NE is adjacent to the destination
NE.
Level - - l This parameter indicates that multiple
ECC routes from the source NE to the
destination NE may be available. An
ECC route of a higher priority is selected
to transmit the packets to the destination
NE.
l If the ECC route is generated
automatically, the priority is 4.
l If the ECC route is added manually, the
priority is 5.
Mode - - This parameter indicates the ECC routing
mode.
SCC No. - - This parameter specifies the physical port
through which the ECC route passes. The
value of this parameter is automatically
assigned the NE.

A.1.2.6 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route
Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for IP route management.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > IP
Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the IP Route Management tab.
Parameters for IP Route Management
Destination
Address
- - This parameter indicates the destination
address of the packets. This parameter can
be set to a valid IP address of class A, B, or
C only, but cannot be set to the IP address
of the local host or the loopback address
with the 127 field.
Subnet Mask - - This parameter indicates the subnet mask of
the destination address of the packets.
Gateway - - This parameter indicates the IP address of
the gateway on the subnetwork where the
NE is located, namely, the IP address of the
next hop of the packets.
Protocol - - l DIRECT: indicates the route between
the local NE and an adjacent NE.
l STATIC: indicates the route that is
created manually.
l OSPF: indicates the route between the
local NE and a non-adjacent NE.
l RIP: indicates the route that is
discovered by the routing information
protocol.
l OSPF_ASE: indicates the route whose
Destination Address is beyond the
OSPF domain.
l OSPF_NSSA: indicates the route whose
Destination Address is in a not so
stubby area (NSSA).
l A route can be deleted in the case of
STATIC only, but cannot be edited in
the other cases.
l Compared with a dynamic route, a static
route has a higher priority. If any conflict
occurs, the static route is preferred.
A-25
Interface - - This parameter indicates the interface that is
used on the route. Interface is a concept
specified in the TCP/IP protocol stack. In
the TCP/IP protocol stack, you can create
multiple types of interface, such as a
loopback interface (namely, the interface
whose IP address is 127.0.0.1), an Ethernet
interface, and PPP interface. Each interface
must have a unique interface name.
Metric - - This parameter indicates the maximum
number of routers through which the
packets are transmitted. Metric is used to
indicate the overhead bytes that are
transmitted to the destination address. The
smaller the value, the less the overhead
bytes. If multiple routes can reach the same
destination address, a route whose overhead
is less is preferred to transmit the packets.

A.1.2.7 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route
Management Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for new static IP routes.
Navigation Path
2. Click the IP Route Management tab.
3. Click New.
Parameters for Creating IP Routes
Destination
Address
- - This parameter specifies the destination
address of the packets. This parameter can
be set to a valid IP address of class A, B, or
C only, but cannot be set to the IP address
of the local host or the loopback address
with the 127 field.
Subnet Mask - - This parameter indicates the subnet mask of
the destination address of the packets.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Gateway - - This parameter specifies the IP address of
the gateway on the subnetwork where the
NE is located, namely, the IP address of the
next hop of the packets.

A.1.2.8 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_OSPF Parameter
Settings
This topic describes the parameters that are used for OSPF settings.
Navigation Path
2. Click the OSPF Parameter Settings tab.
OSPF Parameters
Area - 0.0.0.0 l The OSPF protocol supports the division
of NEs into multiple areas. Only the NEs
in the same area can transmit the OSPF
packets to each other to generate the
route.
l When setting the area for the NEs, you
need to set the NEs that run the OSPF
protocol to the same area.
DCC Hello Timer
(s)
1 to 255 10 l DCC Hello Timer(s) specifies the Hello
packet timer at the DCC interface.
l The Hello packets are used for detecting
the neighbor router on the network that
is connected to the router. By
periodically transmitting the hello
packets, you can determine whether the
interface on the neighbor router is still in
the active status.
l DCC Hello Timer(s) determines the
interval for the hello packet timer to
transmit the hello packets.
l In the case of two interconnected NEs,
DCC Hello Timer(s) must be set to the
same value.
A-27
DCC Neighbor
Dead Time(s)
1 to 65535 40 l DCC Neighbor Dead Time(s) specifies
the dead time of a neighbor router at the
DCC interface.
l If the local router fails to receive the
hello packets from the connected
neighbor router within the time specified
in DCC Neighbor Dead Time(s), it
considers that the neighbor router is
unavailable.
l DCC Neighbor Dead Time(s) should
be set to a value that is a minimum of
twice the value of DCC Hello Timer
(s).
l In the case of adjacent NEs, DCC
Neighbor Dead Time(s) must be set to
the same value. Otherwise, the OSPF
protocol fails to operate normally.
DCC
Retransmission
Timer(s)
1 to 65535 5 DCC Retransmission Timer(s) specifies
the interval for transmitting a request
through the DCC interface to retransmit the
link state advertisement (LSA) packets.
DCC Delay(s) 1 to 3600 1 l DCC Delay(s) specifies the delay time
to transmit the LSA packets through the
DCC interface.
l The LSA packets in the LSA database of
the local router are aged as the time
elapses, but are not aged when they are
being transmitted on the network.
Hence, before the LSA packets are
transmitted, you need to increase the age
of the LSA packets based on the value of
DCC Delay(s).
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
LAN Hello Timer
(s)
1 to 255 10 l DCC Hello Timer(s) specifies the hello
packet timer at the LAN interfaces.
l The hello packets are used for detecting
the neighbor router on the network that
is connected to the router. By
periodically transmitting the hello
packets, you can determine whether the
interface on the neighbor router is still in
the active status.
l LAN Hello Timer(s) determines the
interval for the hello packet timer of the
NE to transmit the hello packets.
l In the case of two interconnected NEs,
LAN Hello Timer(s) must be set to the
same value.
LAN Neighbor
Dead Time(s)
1 to 65535 40 l LAN Neighbor Dead Time(s) specifies
the dead time of a neighbor router at the
LAN interface.
l If the local router fails to receive the
hello packets from the connected
neighbor router within the time specified
in LAN Neighbor Dead Time(s), it
considers that the neighbor router is
unavailable.
l LAN Neighbor Dead Time(s) should be
set to a value that is a minimum of two
times the value of LAN Neighbor Dead
Time(s).
l In the case of adjacent NEs, DCC
Neighbor Dead Time(s) must be set to
the same value. Otherwise, the OSPF
protocol fails to operate normally.
LAN
Retransmission
Timer(s)
1 to 65535 5 LAN Retransmission Timer(s) specifies
the time for transmitting a request for
retransmission of the LSA packets through
the LAN interface.
A-29
LAN Delay(s) 1 to 3600 1 l LAN Delay(s) specifies the delay time
to transmit the LSA packets through the
LAN interface.
l The LSA packets in the LSA database of
the local router are aged as the time
elapses, but are not aged when they are
being transmitted on the network.
Hence, before the LSA packets are
transmitted, you need to increase the age
of the LSA packets based on the value of
LAN Delay(s).
OSPF Status Enabled
Disabled
Enabled Specifies whether to enable the OSPF.
STUB Area Enabled
Disabled
Disabled l Specifies whether to enable the STUB
Area.
l Set this parameter as required.
NSSA Area Enabled
Disabled
Disabled l Specifies whether to enable the NSSA
Area.
Direct route Enabled
Disabled
Disabled l Specifies whether to enable the Direct
route.
l Direct route: the route detected by the
link layer protocol.
Static route Enabled
Disabled
Disabled l Specifies whether to enable the Static
route.
l Static route: the route manually
configured by the network
administrator.
RIP route Enabled
Disabled
Disabled l Specifies whether to enable the RIP
route.
l RIP route: the route detected by the
routing protocol.
Opaque LSA of
External Network
Port
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled l Specifies whether to enable the Opaque
LSA of External Network Port.
l If this parameter is set to Enabled, it
indicates that the Ethernet NM interface
is used to transmit NM message.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
LAN Interface Enabled
Disabled
Disabled l Specifies whether to enable the OSPF at
the Ethernet NM interface.
l If this parameter is set to Enabled, it
indicates that the Ethernet NM interface
achieves OSPF communication with
other equipment.

A.1.2.9 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack_Proxy ARP
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the proxy ARP.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Proxy ARP tab.
Parameters for configuring the proxy ARP
Proxy ARP Disabled
Enabled
Disabled l The proxy ARP enables the NEs in the
same network segment but different
domains to communicate with each
other.
l To realize communication between such
NEs, the source NE sends the ARP
broadcast packet to address the route to
the destination NE. The NE with the
proxy ARP function enabled checks the
routing table after sensing the ARP
broadcast packet. If the routing table
contains the destination address that the
ARP broadcast packet looks for, the NE
returns an ARP spoofing packet, which
enables the NE that sends the ARP
broadcast packet to consider that the
MAC address of the NE that returns the
ARP spoofing packet is the MAC
address of the destination NE. In this
manner, the packet that is to be sent to
the destination NE is first sent to the NE
with the proxy ARP function enabled
and then forwarded to the destination
NE.

A-31
A.1.2.10 Parameter Description: Port OSPF Setting
This section describes the parameters that are used for setting port OSPF parameters.
Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the required NE and choose Communication > IP Protocol
Stack Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Port OSPF Parameter Settings tab.
Port OSPF Parameters
Port - - Displays the ports that allow OSPF
parameters to be set.
Path Type - - Displays the current DCC channel type.
OSPF Status Enabled
Disabled
Enabled l Specifies whether to enable the OSPF.
Opaque LSA of
External Network
Port
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled l Specifies whether DCC channels support
Opaque LSAs.

A.1.2.11 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Network Layer Parameter
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the network layer of the OSI protocol
model.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > OSI
2. Click the Network Layer Parameters tab.
Network Layer Parameters
NE.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Configuration Role ES
L1
L2
L1 l An NE whose Configuration Role is set
to L1 cannot function as a neighbor of an
NE in the other area. It uses a route in the
local area only and accesses the other
area by distributing the default route of
the nearest L2 NE.
l An NE whose Configuration Role is set
to L2 can function as a neighbor of an
NE in the other area and can use a route
in the backbone area. The backbone area
is a collection that is formed by
consecutive L2 NEs. That is, the L2 NE
of all the roles must be consecutive
(connected to each other).
NOTE
Configuration Role cannot be set to ES.
Current Role - - This parameter indicates the current role.

A.1.2.12 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Routing Table
This topic describes the parameters that are related to OSI routing tables.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Routing Table tab.
Parameters for Link Adjacency Table
Port - - This parameter indicates the port used for
OSI communication.
Data Link Layer - - This parameter indicates the protocol that is
used at the data link layer.
Adjacency No. - - l This parameter specifies the identifier of
the adjacency that is set up by two NEs
through the OSI protocol. One adjacency
number corresponds to an OSI
adjacency.
l The value is dynamically allocated by
the NE.
Adjacency Type - - This parameter indicates the type of the
adjacency.
A-33
Adjacency State - - This parameter indicates the state of the
adjacency.
Peer End Area ID - - This parameter indicates the area ID that is
contained in the NSAP address of the
opposite NE.
Peer End System
ID
- - This parameter indicates the system ID of
the opposite NE. Generally, the system ID
is the MAC address.

Parameters for L1 and L2 Routing Tables
Destination Area
ID
- - This parameter indicates the area ID of the
destination NE.
Destination SYSID - - This parameter indicates the system ID of
the destination NE. Generally, the system
ID is the MAC address.
Metric - - This parameter indicates the number of hops
that reach the destination NE or destination
area.
Adjacency No.1 - - This parameter indicates the number of the
adjacent link that is connected to the
destination NE.
Adjacency No.2 - - This parameter indicates the number of the
adjacent link that is connected to the
destination NE.

A.1.2.13 Parameter Description: OSI Management_OSI Tunnel
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the OSI tunnels.
Navigation Path
2. Click the OSI Tunnel tab.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameters for OSI Tunnel Attributes
Remote IP Address - - This parameter indicates the IP address of
the opposite end of the OSI tunnel.
LAPD Actor User
Network
User l This parameter specifies the LAPD
actor.
l If the adjacent NEs run the OSI protocol,
they can perform the LAPD negotiation
only when the LAPD actor is set to
User at one end and is set to Network at
the other end.
Efficient LAPD
Enable
- - This parameter indicates whether the
current LAPD is enabled.
Configurable
LAPD Enable
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled This parameter specifies whether the LAPD
is enabled.

LAPD Parameters
Remote IP Address - - This parameter indicates the IP address of
the opposite end of the OSI tunnel.
L2 Wait Time to
Retry(s)
1 to 20 1 l This parameter specifies L2 Wait Time
to Retry(s).
l L2 Wait Time to Retry(s) indicates the
interval for retransmitting packets at the
LAPD link layer.
l L2 Wait Time to Retry(s) needs to be
set according to the network situation. If
the network is in good situation, L2 Wait
Time to Retry(s) can be set to a smaller
value. Otherwise, it is recommended that
you set L2 Wait Time to Retry(s) to a
greater value.
l This parameter needs to be set according
to the planning information. In normal
cases, it is recommended that you use the
default value.
A-35
L2 Retry Times 2 to 6 3 l This parameter specifies L2 Retry
Times.
l L2 Retry Times indicates the maximum
number of packet retransmission
attempts at the LAPD link layer.
l L2 Retry Times needs to be set
according to the network situation. If the
network is in good situation, L2 Retry
Times can be set to a smaller value.
Otherwise, it is recommended that you
set L2 Retry Times to a greater value.
default value.
L3 Hello Timer(s) 1 to 100 3 l This parameter specifies L3 Hello
Timer(s).
l L3 Hello Timer(s) indicates the Hello
packet timer at the LAPD link network
layer. It is used for periodical
transmission of the Hello packets.
l The Hello timer determines the interval
for transmitting the Hello packets once.
L3 Hello Timer(s) needs to be set
network is in good situation, L3 Hello
Timer(s) can be set to a greater value.
set L3 Hello Timer(s) to a smaller value.
default value.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
L3 ES Timer(s) 1 to 200 50 l This parameter specifies L3 ES Timer
(s).
l L3 ES Timer(s) indicates the ES
configuration timer at the LAPD link
network layer. It is used for setting the
time to transmit the configuration
information on the ES route.
l L3 ES Timer(s) needs to be set
network is in good situation, L3 ES
Timer(s) can be set to a greater value.
set L3 Hello Timer(s) to a smaller value.
default value.
L3 IS Timer(s) 1 to 200 10 l This parameter specifies L3 IS Timer
(s).
l L3 IS Timer(s) indicates the IS
configuration timer at the LAPD link
network layer. It is used for setting the
time to transmit the configuration
information through the L1/L2 router.
l L3 IS Timer(s) needs to be set according
to the network situation. If the network
is in good situation, L3 IS Timer(s) can
be set to a greater value. Otherwise, it is
recommended that you set L3 IS Timer
(s) to a smaller value.
default value.
A-37
L3 Hold Timer(s) 2 to 63 5 l This parameter specifies L3 Hold Timer
(s).
l L3 Hold Timer(s) indicates the hold
timer at the LAPD link network layer.
l L3 Hold Timer(s) needs to be set
network is in good situation, L3 Hold
Timer(s) can be set to a smaller value.
set L3 IS Timer(s) to a greater value.
default value.
COST 1 to 63 20 l This parameter specifies COST.
l COST indicates the overhead value of
the virtual LAPD that corresponds to the
OSI tunnel.
l The overhead value determines whether
this link is perverted. If the overhead
value is smaller, this link has a higher
priority to be selected.
l This parameter needs to set according to
the planning information.

A.1.2.14 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Bandwidth Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for bandwidth management of the inband DCN.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCN
2. Click the Bandwidth Management tab.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameters for Bandwidth Management
Ethernet Board
VLAN ID
2 to 4094 4094 l The equipment on the traditional DCN
can be connected to the NMS through the
SCC board, but the OptiX RTN 950 can
also be connected to the NMS through an
Ethernet interface. If an Ethernet port is
used to carry the network management
information, the NE differentiates the
network management information and
Ethernet service information according
to the VLAN ID.
l If the default VLAN ID of the inband
DCN conflicts with the VLAN ID in the
service, the Ethernet Board VLAN ID
of the inband DCN can be changed
manually. The same VLAN ID must be,
however, is used on the network-wide
inband DCN.
Bandwidth(Kbit/s) 64 to 1000 512 Bandwidth(Kbit/s) specifies the bandwidth
for inband DCN messaging on the Ethernet
link.
E1 Port
Bandwidth(Kbit/s)
- - The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this
parameter.
Tunnel Bandwidth
(Kbit/s)
parameter.
IF Port Bandwidth
(Kbit/s)
64 to 1000 512 IF Port Bandwidth(Kbit/s) specifies the
bandwidth for inband DCN messaging on
the radio link.

A.1.2.15 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Port Setting
This topic describes the parameters that are used for setting ports of the inband DCN.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCN
2. Click the Port Settings tab.
Parameters for Setting Ports
Port Name - - This parameter indicates the port name.
A-39
Enabled Status Enabled
Disabled
Enabled l Enabled Status specifies the enabling
status of the port.
l The network management information
can be transmitted over the inband DCN
when the DCN function is enabled for
the ports at both ends of a link.

A.1.2.16 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Protocol Setting
This topic describes the parameters that are used for setting a protocol of the inband DCN.
Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree, and then choose
Communication > DCN Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Protocol Settings tab.
Parameters for Setting a Protocol
Port Name - - Displays the port name.
Protocol Type IP
HWECC
IP l If the values of Protocol Type are
different from each other, the equipment
at both ends cannot be interconnected
with each other. Therefore, Protocol
Type must be set to the same value for
the equipment at both ends of a link.
l Set Protocol Type according to the
network planning information.
Generally, it is recommended that you
set this parameter to IP.

A.1.2.17 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Access Control
This section describes the parameters for configuring access control.
Navigation Path
l In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose
Communication > DCN Management from the Function Tree.
l Click the Access Control tab.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameters
Port Name - - Displays the Ethernet ports that support this
function.
Enabled Status Disabled
Enabled
Disabled l Specifies the enabling status of the port.
l If the Enabled Status is set to
Enabled, this port can be used to support
access of the management information
from the NMS.
l If the Enabled Status is set to
Disabled, this port cannot be used to
support access of the management
information from the NMS.
IP Address - 0.0.0.0 Specifies the IP address of the port.
Subnet Mask - 0.0.0.0 Specifies the submask of the port.

A.1.2.18 Parameter Description: Access Control
This topic describes the parameters that are used for access control of the NMS.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > Access
Control from the Function Tree.
Parameters for Ethernet Access Control
The First Network
Port
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled After The First Network Port is set to
Enabled for Ethernet access, the NE can
access the NMS through the Ethernet port.
PORT - - This parameter displays the NMS port and
the NE cascading port on the system control,
switching, and timing board.
Work Mode adapt
10M Half_Duplex
10M Full_Duplex
100M Half_Duplex
100M Full_Duplex
- This parameter specifies the working modes
of the NMS port and the NE cascading port
on the system control, switching, and timing
board.
A-41
Actual Work Mode - - This parameter displays the working modes
of the NMS port and the NE cascading port
on the system control, switching, and timing
board.

Parameters for Access Control over Serial Ports
Enable Serial Port
Access
Selected
Deselected
Selected After Enable Serial Port Access is
selected, the NE can access the NMS or
command lines through the serial port.
Access Command
Line
Selected
Deselected
Deselected If Access Command Line is selected, the
serial interface can be used to access the
command line terminal.
Access NM Selected
Deselected
Selected If Access NM is selected, the serial interface
can be used to access the NMS.
Baud Rate 1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
38400
57600
115200
9600 l This parameter specifies the data
transmission rate in the communications
through serial ports.
rate of the serial port at the opposite end,
and the rates at both ends must be the
same.

A.1.3 Parameters for Network Security Management
This topic describes the parameters that are related to network security management.
A.1.3.1 Parameter Description: NE User Management
This topic describes the parameters that are related to NE user management.
A.1.3.2 Parameter Description: NE User Management_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an NE user.
A.1.3.3 Parameter Description: LCT Access Control
This topic describes the parameters that are used for LCT access control.
A.1.3.1 Parameter Description: NE User Management
This topic describes the parameters that are related to NE user management.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Navigation Path
1. Select the required NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Security > NE
User Management from the Function Tree.
A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the operation is successful.
2. Close the dialog box.
Parameters for NE user management
NE - - Displays the current NE
name.
NE User - - Displays the registered NE
user name.
User Level - - Displays the registered NE
user level.
NE User Flag - - Displays whether a
registered NE user is
logged in.

A.1.3.2 Parameter Description: NE User Management_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an NE user.
Navigation Path
1. Select the required NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Security > NE
User Management from the Function Tree.A dialog box is displayed, indicating that the
operation is successful.
2. Close the dialog box.
3. Click Add.
NE User - - Specifies the name of a
registered NE user.
NOTE
The name of an NE cannot
contain any space or
Chinese characters.
A-43
User Level Monitor Level
Operation Level
Maintenance Level
System Level
Debug Level
Monitor Level l A Debug Level NE
user has all security
and configuration
authorities, and has the
right to run debugging
commands.
l A System Level NE
user has all security
and configuration
authorities.
l A Maintenance
Level NE user has
some security
authorities, some
configuration
authorities, the
communication setting
authority, and the log
management
authority.
l An Operation Level
NE user has all fault
performance
authorities, some
security authorities,
and some
configuration
authorities.
l A Monitor Level NE
user has the right to use
all query commands, to
log in, to log out, and to
change its own
password.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
NE User Flag LCT NE User
EMS NE User
CMD NE User
General NE User
LCT NE User l Specifies the NE user
flag.
l LCT NE User
indicates NE users for
NE management on
the U2000 Local Craft
Terminal (U2000
LCT).
l EMS NE User
NE management on
the U2000.
l CMD NE User
NE management on
the CMD.
l General NE User
all NMS types.
Detailed Description - - Describes a configured
NE user.
New Password - - l Specifies the password
for a new NE user.
Confirm Password - - Enter the same value as
New Password.
Whether the password is
allowed to be modified
immediately
Yes
No
Yes Specifies whether the
password of a registered
NE user can be changed.

A.1.3.3 Parameter Description: LCT Access Control
This topic describes the parameters that are used for LCT access control.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Security > LCT Access
Parameters for LCT Access Control
NE.
A-45
LCT Access
Control Switch
Access Allowed
Disable Access
Access Allowed l No NMS user logs in to the NE. In this
case, when the LCT requests an LCT
user to log in to the NE, the NE does not
check the status of LCT Access Control
Switch, and directly allows the LCT user
to log in to the NE.
l An NMS user first logs in to the NE. In
this case, when the LCT requests an LCT
user to log in to the NE, the NE
determines whether to allow the LCT
user to log in to the NE through the LCT
according to the status of LCT Access
Control Switch.
l An LCT user first logs in to the NE. In
this case, when the NMS requests an
NMS user to log in to the NE, the NMS
user can directly log in to the NE. After
the NMS user successfully logs in to the
NE, the online LCT user is not affected.
l When both the LCT user and NMS user
log in to the NE, the online LCT user is
not affected after LCT Access Control
Switch is set to Disable Access.

A.2 Radio Link Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to radio links.
A.2.1 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC Workgroup_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the XPIC function.
A.2.2 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC
A.2.3 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection_Create
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF N+1 protection group.
A.2.4 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection
This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF N+1 protection.
A.2.5 Parameter: IF 1+1 Protection_Create
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF 1+1 protection group.
A.2.6 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection
This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF 1+1 protection.
A.2.7 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the IF/ODU.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Workgroup_Creation
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link
Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click the XPIC tab.
3. Click New.
Parameters
IF Channel
Bandwidth
28M
40M
56M
- l This parameter specifies the channel
spacing when the XPIC function is
enabled.
l When this parameter is set to 56M or
40M, the high-power ODU must be
used.
NOTE
The IFX2 board does not support the value
40M.
Polarization
Direction-V
- - l This parameter indicates the polarization
direction of a radio link.
l It is recommended that you install the
two XPIC IF boards that form an XPIC
workgroup in the slots that are at the
same layer or in the same column, and
set the IF port on the XPIC IF board that
has a smaller slot number to Link ID-V
and the IF port on the other XPIC IF
board to Link ID-H.
Polarization
Direction-H
Link ID-V 1 to 4094 1 l Set Link ID-V and Link ID-H.
l A link ID is an identifier of a radio link
and is used to prevent the radio links
between sites from being wrongly
connected.
l When the link ID received by an NE is
different from the link ID set for the NE,
the NE reports an MW_LIM alarm and
inserts the AIS.
l These two parameters are set according
to the planning information. These two
parameters must be set to different
values, but Link ID-V must be set to the
A-47
Link ID-H 2 same value at both ends of a link and
Link ID-H must also be set to the same
value at both ends of a link.
Transmit Power
(dBm)
- - l This parameter specifies the transmit
power of an ODU. The value of this
parameter must not exceed the rated
power range supported by the ODU.
l It is recommended that you set the
transmit power of the ODU to the same
value at both ends of a radio link.
l Consider the receive power of the ODU
at the opposite end when you set this
parameter. Ensure that the receive power
of the ODU at the opposite end can
ensure stable radio services.
Maximum
Transmit Power
(dBm)
- - l This parameter specifies the maximum
transmit power of the ODU. This
parameter cannot be set to a value that
exceeds the nominal power rang of the
ODU in the guaranteed capacity
modulation module.
l This parameter is set to limit the
maximum transmit power of the ODU
within this preset range.
l The maximum transmit power adjusted
by using the ATPC function should not
exceed this value.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Transmission
Frequency(MHz)
- - l This parameter indicates the channel
central frequency.
l The value of this parameter must not be
less than the sum of the lower transmit
frequency limit supported by the ODU
and a half of the channel spacing, and
must not be more than the difference
between the upper transmit frequency
limit supported by the ODU and a half of
the channel spacing.
T/R Spacing(MHz) - - l This parameter specifies the spacing
between the transmit frequency and the
receive frequency of an ODU to prevent
mutual interference between the
transmitter and the receiver.
l If Station Type of the ODU is TX
high, the transmit frequency is one T/R
spacing higher than the receive
frequency. If Station Type of the ODU
is TX low, the transmit frequency is one
T/R spacing lower than the receive
frequency.
l If the ODU supports only one T/R
spacing, set this parameter to 0,
indicating that the T/R spacing
supported by the ODU is used.
l A valid T/R spacing value is determined
by the ODU itself, and the T/R spacing
should be set according to the technical
specifications of the ODU.
l The T/R spacing of the ODU should be
set to the same value at both the ends of
a radio link.
Transmission
Status
unmute
mute
unmute l When this parameter is set to mute, the
ODU does not transmit microwave
signals but can normally receive
microwave signals.
l When this parameter is set to unmute,
the ODU normally transmits and
receives microwave signals.
l In normal cases, Transmission Status is
set to unmute.
A-49
ATPC Enabled Disabled
Enabled
Disabled l This parameter specifies whether the
ATPC function is enabled.
l When this parameter is set to Enabled
and if the RSL at the receive end is 2 dB
higher or lower than the central value
between the ATPC upper threshold and
the ATPC lower threshold at the receive
end, the receiver notifies the transmitter
to decrease or increase the transmit
power until the RSL is within the range
that is 2 dB higher or lower than the
central value between the ATPC upper
threshold and the ATPC lower threshold.
l The settings of the ATPC attributes must
be consistent at both ends of a radio link.
l In the case of areas where fast fading
severely affects the radio transmission, it
is recommended that you set this
parameter to Disabled.
l During the commissioning process, set
this parameter to Disabled to ensure that
the transmit power is not changed. After
the commissioning, re-set the ATPC
attributes.
ATPC Upper
Threshold(dBm)
- -45.0 l The central value between the ATPC
upper threshold and the ATPC lower
threshold is set as the expected receive
power.
l It is recommended that you set ATPC
Upper Threshold(dBm) to the sum of
the planned central value between the
ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC
lower threshold and 10 dB, and ATPC
Lower Threshold(dBm) to the
difference between the planned central
value between the ATPC upper
threshold and the ATPC lower threshold
and 10 dB.
l You can set the ATPC upper threshold
only when ATPC Automatic
Threshold Enable Status is set to
Disabled.
ATPC Lower
Threshold(dBm)
- -70.0
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
ATPC Automatic
Threshold Enable
Status
Disabled
Enabled
automatic threshold function is enabled.
l If this parameter is set to Enabled, the
equipment automatically uses the preset
ATPC upper and lower thresholds
according to the work mode of the radio
link.

Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link
2. Click the XPIC tab.
Group ID - - This parameter indicates the ID of the work
group.
Polarization
Direction-V
- - This parameter indicates the IF port to which
the polarization direction V corresponds.
Link ID-V - - This parameter indicates the link ID to
which the polarization direction V
corresponds.
Polarization
Direction-H
the polarization direction H corresponds.
Link ID-H - - This parameter indicates the link ID to
which the polarization direction H
corresponds.
A-51
IF Channel
Bandwidth
28M
40M
56M
- l IF Channel Bandwidth refers to the
channel spacing of the corresponding
radio links.
l When this parameter is set to 56M or
40M, the high-power ODU must be
used.
NOTE
The IFX2 board does not support the value
40M.
Power to Be
Received -V(dBm)
-90.0 to -20.0 -10.0 l This parameter is used to set the
expected receive power of the ODU and
is mainly used in the antenna alignment
stage. After this parameter is set, the NE
automatically enables the antenna
misalignment indicating function.
l When the antenna misalignment
indicating function is enabled, if the
actual receive power of the ODU is 3 dB
lower than the power expected to be
received, the ODU indicator on the IF
board connected to the ODU blinks
yellow (300 ms on, 300 ms off),
indicating that the antenna is not aligned.
l After the antenna alignment, after the
state that the antenna is aligned lasts for
30 minutes, the NE automatically
disables the antenna misalignment
indicating function.
l When this parameter takes the default
value, the antenna misalignment
indicating function is disabled.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Power to Be
Received -H(dBm)
-90.0 to -20.0 -10.0 l This parameter is used to set the
expected receive power of the ODU and
is mainly used in the antenna alignment
stage. After this parameter is set, the NE
automatically enables the antenna
misalignment indicating function.
l When this parameter takes the default
Maximum
Transmit Power
(dBm)
- - l This parameter specifies the maximum
exceeds the nominal power rang of the
ODU in the guaranteed capacity
modulation module.
exceed this value.
A-53
Transmit Power
(dBm)
- - l This parameter indicates or specifies the
exceeds the nominal power range of the
ODU.
Transmission
Frequency(MHz)
transmit frequency of the ODU, namely,
the channel central frequency.
less than the sum of the lower TX
between the upper TX frequency limit
supported by the ODU and a half of the
channel spacing.
l The difference between the transmit
frequencies of both the ends of a radio
link should be one T/R spacing.
to the planning information.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
T/R Spacing(MHz) - - l This parameter indicates or specifies the
spacing between the transmit frequency
and receive frequency of the ODU to
prevent mutual interference between the
transmitter and receiver.
l If the ODU is a Tx high station, the
transmit frequency is one T/R spacing
higher than the receive frequency. If the
ODU is a Tx low station, the transmit
frequency is one T/R spacing lower than
the receive frequency.
spacing, this parameter is set to 0,
indicating that the T/R spacing
supported by the ODU is used.
set to the same value at both ends of a
radio link.
Transmission
Status
unmute
mute
unmute l This parameter indicates or specifies the
transmit status of the ODU.
l If this parameter is set to mute, the
transmitter of the ODU does not work
but can normally receive microwave
signals.
l If this parameter is set to unmute, the
ODU can normally transmit and receive
microwave signals.
l In normal cases, this parameter is set to
unmute.

Parameters for Hybrid/AM Configuration
Group ID - - This parameter indicates the ID of the work
group.
Polarization
direction
the polarization direction H or the
polarization direction V corresponds.
A-55
AM Enable Status Disabled
Enabled
Disabled l When AM Enable Status is set to
Disabled, the radio link uses only the
specified modulation scheme. In this
case, you need to select Manually
Specified Modulation Mode.
l When AM Enable Status is set to
Enabled, the radio link uses the
corresponding modulation scheme
according to the channel conditions.
Hence, the Hybrid radio can ensure the
reliable transmission of the E1 services and
provide bandwidth adaptively for the
Ethernet services when the AM function is
enabled.
Modulation Mode
of the Guarantee
AM Capacity
QPSK
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
- This parameter specifies the highest-gain
modulation scheme that the AM function
supports. This parameter is set according to
the planning information. Generally, the
value of this parameter is determined by the
bandwidth of the services that need to be
transmitted over the Hybrid radio and the
availability of the radio link that
corresponds to this modulation scheme.
NOTE
Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity
must be higher than Modulation Mode of the
Guarantee AM Capacity.
This parameter is valid only when AM
Enable Status is set to Enabled.
Modulation Mode
of the Full AM
Capacity
QPSK
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
- This parameter specifies the highest-gain
supports. This parameter is set according to
the planning information. Generally, the
value of this parameter is determined by the
bandwidth of the services that need to be
transmitted over the Hybrid radio and the
NOTE
Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity
must be higher than Modulation Mode of the
Guarantee AM Capacity.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Manually Specified
Modulation Mode
QPSK
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
QPSK This parameter specifies the modulation
scheme that the radio link uses for signal
transmission.
Enable Status is set to Disabled.
Transmit-End
Modulation Mode
- - Displays the modulation mode at the
transmit end.
Receive-End
Modulation Mode
- - Displays the modulation mode at the receive
end.

Parameters for ATPC Management
Group ID - - This parameter indicates the object to be set.
ATPC Enable
Status
Disabled
Enabled
- l This parameter specifies whether the
l If this parameter is set to Enabled and if
the RSL at the receive end is 2 dB higher
or lower than the central value between
the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC
lower threshold at the receive end, the
receiver notifies the transmitter to
decrease or increase the transmit power
until the RSL is within the range that is
2 dB higher or lower than the central
value between the ATPC upper threshold
and the ATPC lower threshold.
is recommended that you set this
parameter to Disabled.
attributes.
ATPC Upper
Threshold(dBm)
- - l Set the central value between the ATPC
A-57
ATPC Lower
Threshold(dBm)
threshold to a value for the expected
receive power.
Lower Threshold(dBm) o the
and the ATPC lower threshold and 10
dB.
l You can set this parameter only when
ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable
Status is set to Disabled.
- -
ATPC Automatic
Threshold Enable
Status
Disabled
Enabled
- l This parameter specifies whether the
ATPC automatic threshold function is
enabled.
l If this parameter is set to Enabled, the
ATPC upper and lower thresholds
according to the work mode of the radio
link.
l If this parameter is set to Disabled, you
need to manually set ATPC Upper
Threshold(dBm) and ATPC Lower
Threshold(dBm).

A.2.3 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection_Create
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF N+1 protection group.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > N+1
Protection from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
WTR time(s) 300 to 720 600 l This parameter specifies the wait-to-
restore (WTR) time.
l When the time after the former working
channel is restored to normal reaches the
set WTR time, a revertive switching
occurs.
l It is recommended that you use the
default value.
Enabled Enabled
Disabled
Enabled l This parameter specifies whether the
signal degradation switching function of
N+1 protection is enabled.
l When this parameter is set to Enabled,
the signal degradation condition is
considered as a trigger condition of
l It is recommended that you set this
parameter to Enabled.

Slot Mapping Relation Parameters
Select Mapping
Direction
Work Unit
Protection Unit
Work Unit l This parameter specifies the mapping
direction of N+1 protection.
Select Mapping
Way
- - l In the case of N+1 protection, map N IF
ports as Work Unit and map the
remaining IF port as Protection Unit.
Mapped Board - - This parameter indicates the working unit
and protection unit that have been set.

A.2.4 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection
This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF N+1 protection.
A-59
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > N+1
Protection Group Parameters
Protection Group
ID
- - This parameter indicates the ID of the
protection group.
WTR Time(s) 300 to 720 - l This parameter indicates or specifies the
WTR time.
occurs.
default value.
SD Enable Enabled
Disabled
- l This parameter indicates or specifies
whether the SD switching function of N
+1 protection is enabled.
the SD condition is considered as a
trigger condition of protection
switching.
Protocol Status - - This parameter indicates the status of the
switching control protocol.

Protection Unit Parameters
Protection Unit - - This parameter indicates the protection unit.
Line - - This parameter indicates the information
about the working board or protection
board.
Switching Status - - This parameter indicates the switching state.
Protected Unit - - This parameter indicates the protected unit.
Remote/Local End
Indication
- - This parameter indicates the local end or
remote end.

Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A.2.5 Parameter: IF 1+1 Protection_Create
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF 1+1 protection group.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF 1+1
2. Click Create.
Parameters
Working Mode HSB
FD
SD
HSB l This parameter specifies the working
mode of the IF 1+1 protection.
l When Working Mode is set to HSB, the
equipment provides a 1+1 hot standby
configuration for the IF board and ODU
at both ends of each hop of a radio link
to realize the protection.
l When Working Mode is set to FD, the
system uses two channels that have a
frequency spacing between them, to
transmit and receive the same signal. The
remote end selects signals from the two
received signals. With FD protection, the
impact of the fading on signal
transmission is reduced.
l When Working Mode is set to SD, the
system uses two antennas that have a
space distance between them, to receive
the same signal. The equipment selects
signals from the two received signals.
With SD protection, the impact of the
fading on signal transmission is reduced.
l The FD mode and SD mode are
compatible with the HSB switching
function.
A-61
Revertive Mode Revertive Mode
Non-Revertive
Revertive Mode l This parameter specifies the revertive
mode of the IF 1+1 protection.
l When Revertive Mode is set to
Revertive Mode, the NE that is in the
switching state releases the switching
and enables the former working channel
to return to the normal state some time
after the former working channel is
restored to normal. It is recommended
that you set this parameter to Revertive
Mode.
l When Revertive Mode is set to Non-
Revertive, the NE that is in the
switching state keeps the current state
unchanged unless another switching
occurs even though the former working
channel is restored to normal.
WTR Time(s) 300 to 720 600 l This parameter specifies the wait-to-
restore (WTR) time.
set WTR Time(s), a revertive switching
occurs.
l You can set WTR Time(s) only when
Revertive Mode is set to Revertive
Mode. It is recommended that you use
the default value.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Enable Reverse
Switching
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled l This parameter indicates whether the
reverse switching function is enabled.
l When both the main IF board and the
standby IF board at the sink end report
service alarms, they send the alarms to
the source end by using the MWRDI
overhead in the microwave frame. When
Enable Reverse Switching at the source
end is set to Enabled and the reverse
switching conditions are met, the IF 1+1
protection switching occurs at the source
end.
l Enable Reverse Switching is valid only
when Working Mode is set to HSB or
SD.
l Generally, if Working Mode is set to
HSB, it is recommended that you set
Enable Reverse Switching to
Disabled; if Working Mode is set to
SD, it is recommended that you set
Enable Reverse Switching to
Enabled.
Working Board - - This parameter specifies the working board
of the protection group.
Protection Board - - This parameter specifies the protection
board of the protection group.

NOTE
Each of the parameters Working Mode, Revertive Mode, WTR Time(s), and Enable Reverse
Switching must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio hop.
A.2.6 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection
This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF 1+1 protection.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF 1+1
Protection Group
ID
protection group.
A-63
Working Mode HSB
FD
SD
- l This parameter indicates the working
mode of the created IF 1+1 protection
group.
l In HSB mode, the equipment provides a
1+1 hot standby configuration for the IF
board and ODU at both ends of each hop
of a radio link to realize the protection.
l In FD mode, the system uses two
channels that have a frequency spacing
between them, to transmit and receive
the same signal. The remote end selects
signals from the two received signals.
With FD protection, the impact of the
fading on signal transmission is reduced.
l In SD mode, the system uses two
antennas that have a space distance
between them, to receive the same signal.
The equipment selects signals from the
two received signals. With SD
protection, the impact of the fading on
signal transmission is reduced.
l The FD mode and SD mode are
compatible with the HSB switching
function.
Non-Revertive
Mode
- l This parameter indicates or specifies the
revertive mode of the protection group.
l When this parameter is set to Revertive
Mode, the NE that is in the switching
state releases the switching and enables
the former working channel to return to
the normal state some time after the
former working channel is restored to
normal.
l When this parameter is set to Non-
Revertive Mode, the NE that is in the
parameter to Revertive Mode.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
WTR time.
occurs.
Revertive Mode is set to Revertive
Mode.
default value.
Enable Reverse
Switching
Enabled
Disabled
whether the reverse switching function is
enabled.
l When both the main IF board and the
standby IF board at the sink end report
service alarms, they send the alarms to
the source end by using the MWRDI
overhead in the microwave frame. When
this parameter at the source end is set to
Enabled and the reverse switching
conditions are met, the IF 1+1 protection
switching occurs at the source end.
l This parameter is valid only when
Working Mode is set to HSB or SD.
Switching Status of
Device
- - l This parameter indicates the switching
state on the equipment side.
l Unknown is displayed when the
switching state on the channel side is not
queried or not obtained after a query.
Switching Status of
Channel
- - l This parameter indicates the switching
state on the channel side.
l Unknown is displayed when the
switching state on the channel side is not
queried or not obtained after a query.
Active Board of
Device
- - This parameter indicates the current
working board on the equipment side.
Active Board of
Channel
- - This parameter indicates the current
working board on the channel side.

NOTE
Each of the parameters Working Mode, Revertive Mode, and WTR Time(s) must be set to the same
value at both ends of a radio hop.
A-65
Unit - - This parameter indicates the working board
and protection board.
Slot Mapping
Relation
- - This parameter indicates the names and
ports of the working board and protection
board.
Working Status of
Device
- - This parameter indicates the working state
on the equipment side.
Signal Status of
Channel
- - This parameter indicates the status of the
link signal.

A.2.7 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the IF/ODU.
Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > Link
2. Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameters for Configuring the IF
Work Mode 1,4E1,7MHz,QPSK
2,4E1,3.5MHz,
16QAM
3,8E1,14MHz,QPS
K
4,8E1,7MHz,
16QAM
5,16E1,28MHz,QP
SK
6,16E1,14MHz,
16QAM
7,STM-1,28MHz,
128QAM
8,E3,28MHz,QPSK
9,E3,14MHz,
16QAM
10,22E1,14MHz,
32QAM
11,26E1,14MHz,
64QAM
12,32E1,14MHz,
128QAM
13,35E1,28MHz,
16QAM
14,44E1,28MHz,
32QAM
15,53E1,28MHz,
64QAM
work mode of the radio link in "work
mode number, service capacity, channel
spacing, modulation mode" format.
planning information. The work modes
of the IF boards at the two ends of a radio
link must be the same.
NOTE
The IF1 board supports this parameter.
A-67
Link ID 1 to 4094 1 l Link ID indicates or specifies the ID of
a radio link. As the identifier of a radio
link, this parameter is used to prevent
incorrect connections of radio links
between sites.
l If the value of Received Radio Link
ID does not match the preset value of
Link ID at the local end, the local end
inserts the AIS signal to the downstream
direction of the service. At the same
time, the local end reports MW_LIM
alarm to the NMS, indicating that the
link IDs do not match.
l Link ID is set according to the planning
information. Each radio link of an NE
should have a unique link ID, and the
link IDs at both ends of a radio link
should be the same.
Received Link ID - - l This parameter indicates the received ID
of the radio link.
Radio Link ID at the local end, the local
end inserts the AIS signal to the
downstream direction of the service. At
the same time, the local end reports an
alarm to the NMS, indicating that the
link IDs do not match.
l When the radio link becomes faulty, this
parameter is displayed as an invalid
value.
IF Service Type Hybrid(Native E1
+ETH)
Hybrid(Native
STM-1+ETH)
SDH
Hybrid(Native E1
+ETH)
l Displays or specifies the type of services
carried by the IF board.
l If the Integrated IP radio transmits
Native E1 services, set this parameter to
Hybrid(Native E1+ETH).
Native STM-1 services, set this
parameter to Hybrid(Native STM-1
+ETH).
l If the SDH radio transmits SDH services,
set this parameter to SDH.
NOTE
The ISU2 and ISX2 boards support this
parameter.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
IF Channel
Bandwidth
7M
14M
28M
40M
56M
- IF Channel Bandwidth indicates the
channel spacing of the corresponding radio
link. This parameter is set according to the
NOTE
l This parameter is not applicable to the IF1
board.
l The IFU2 board does not support the value
40M.
l The IFX2 board does not support the values
7M, 14M, and 40M.
l The ISX2 board supports the channel
spacings of 7M and 14M only when the
XPIC function is disabled.
AM Mode - - This parameter is not applicable to the
OptiX RTN 950.
Enabled
l Hence, the Integrated IP radio can ensure
the reliable transmission of the E1
services and provide bandwidth
adaptively for the Ethernet services
when the AM function is enabled.
l The ISX2/ISU2 does not support the AM
function when IF Service Type is
SDH.
NOTE
This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.
Manually Specified
Modulation Mode
QPSK
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
QPSK l This parameter specifies the modulation
transmission.
l This parameter is valid only when AM
NOTE
A-69
Modulation Mode
of the Guarantee
AM Capacity
QPSK
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
QPSK l This parameter is valid only when AM
l Modulation Mode of the Guarantee
AM Capacity specifies the lowest-gain
supports. This parameter is set according
to the planning information. Generally,
the value of this parameter is determined
by the service transmission bandwidth
that the Hybrid radio must ensure and the
NOTE
Modulation Mode
of the Full AM
Capacity
QPSK
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
l Modulation Mode of the Full AM
Capacity specifies the highest-gain
by the bandwidth of the services that
need to be transmitted over the Hybrid
radio and the availability of the radio link
that corresponds to this modulation
scheme.
NOTE
Modulation Mode of the Full AM
Capacity must be higher than Modulation
Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity.
NOTE
STM-1 Capacity - - l Specifies the STM-1 capacity of the IF
board.
l This parameter is available only when
IF Service Type is set to Hybrid(Native
STM-1+ETH) and SDH.
l If IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native
STM-1+ETH), this parameter can be set
to 0 or 1.
l If IF Service Type is SDH, this
parameter can be set to 1 or 2.
NOTE
The IF1, IFU2, and IFX2 boards do not support
this parameter.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Guarantee E1
Capacity
- - l If AM Enable Status is set to
Enabled, this parameter needs to be set
according to IF Channel Bandwidth,
Modulation Mode of the Guarantee
AM Capacity, and the actually
transmitted services.
l If AM Enable Status is set to
Disabled, this parameter needs to be set
Manually Specified Modulation
Mode, and the actually transmitted
services.
l For the ISU2 and ISX2 boards, this
parameter is available when IF Service
Type is Hybrid(Native E1+ETH).
NOTE
Guarantee E1
Capacity Range
- - Displays the E1 capacity range of the IF
board in guarantee capacity modulation
mode.
Data Service
Bandwidth(Mbit/
s)
- - Displays the data service bandwidth of the
IF board.
Enable E1 Priority Disabled
Enabled
Disabled l This parameter specifies whether to
enable the E1 priority function.
NOTE
A-71
Full E1 Capacity - - l This parameter specifies the number of
transmitted E1 services in Modulation
Mode of the Full AM Capacity.
l This parameter is valid if Enable E1
Priority is set to Enabled.
l E1 service bandwidth in full capacity
mode Service bandwidth in full
capacity mode - Service bandwidth in
guarantee capacity mode + E1 service
bandwidth in guarantee capacity mode.
In addition, the number of E1 services in
full capacity modulation mode should be
smaller than or equal to the maximum
number of E1 services in full capacity
modulation mode.
l The Full E1 Capacity must be set to the
same value at both ends of a radio link.
NOTE
Full E1 Capacity
Range
board in full capacity modulation mode.

Parameters for Configuring the RF
TX Frequency
(MHz)
the channel central frequency.
less than the sum of the lower TX
between the upper TX frequency limit
channel spacing.
frequencies of both the ends of a radio
link should be one T/R spacing.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Range of TX
Frequency(MHz)
- - l This parameter indicates the range of the
transmit frequency of the ODU.
l The Range of Frequency(MHz)
depends on the specifications of the
ODU.
Actual TX
Frequency(MHz)
- - This parameter indicates the actual transmit
frequency of the ODU.
Actual RX
Frequency(MHz)
- - This parameter indicates the actual receive
T/R Spacing(MHz) - - l This parameter specifies the spacing
between the transmit frequency and the
receive frequency of an ODU to prevent
interference between them.
l If Station Type of the ODU is TX
high, the TX frequency is one T/R
spacing higher than the receive
frequency. If Station Type of the ODU
is TX low, the TX frequency is one T/R
spacing lower than the receive
frequency.
spacing, set this parameter to 0,
indicating that the T/R spacing supported
by the ODU is used.
set to the same value at both the ends of
a radio link.
Actual T/R
Spacing(MHz)
- - This parameter indicates the actual T/R
spacing of the ODU.

A-73
Parameters for Configuring the Power
TX Power(dBm) - - l This parameter indicates or specifies the
exceeds the nominal power range of the
ODU.
l This parameter cannot take a value
greater than the preset value of
Maximum Transmit Power(dBm).
Range of TX
Power(dBm)
- - This parameter indicates the range of the
transmit power of the ODU.
Actual TX Power
(dBm)
- - l This parameter indicates the actual
l If the ATPC function is enabled, the
queried actual transmit power may be
different from the preset value.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Power to Be
Received(dBm)
-90.0 to -20.0 -10.0 l Power to Be Received(dBm) is used to
set the expected receive power of the
ODU and is mainly used in the antenna
alignment stage. After this parameter is
set, the NE automatically enables the
antenna misalignment indicating
function.
indicating function is enabled, When the
antenna non-alignment indication
function is enabled, if the actual receive
power of the ODU is 3 dB lower than the
power expected to be received, the ODU
indicator on the IF board connected to
the ODU blinks yellow (300 ms on, 300
ms off), indicating that the antenna is not
aligned.
l When Power to Be Received(dBm)
takes the default value, the antenna
misalignment indicating function is
disabled.
Actual RX Power
(dBm)
power of the ODU.
TX Status Unmute
Mute
Unmute l This parameter indicates or specifies the
l When this parameter is set to Mute, the
transmitter of the ODU does not work
but can normally receive microwave
signals.
l When this parameter is set to Unmute,
the ODU can normally transmit and
receive microwave signals.
l In normal cases, it is recommended that
you set TX Status to unmute.
Actual TX Status - - This parameter indicates the actual transmit
status of the ODU.

A-75
Equipment Information
Frequency(GHz) - - This parameter indicates the frequency band
where the ODU operates.
Equip Type - - l This parameter indicates the equipment
type of the ODU.
l PDH and SDH indicate the transmission
capacity only and are irrelevant to the
type of transmitted service.
Station Type - - l This parameter indicates whether the
ODU is a Tx high station or a Tx low
station.
l The transmit frequency of a Tx high
station is one T/R spacing higher than the
transmit frequency of a Tx low station.
Produce SN - - This parameter indicates the manufacturing
serial number and the manufacturer code of
the ODU.
Transmission
Power Type
- - This parameter indicates the level of the
output power of the ODU.

A.3 Multiplex Section Protection Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to multiplex section protection (MSP).
A.3.1 Parameter Description: Linear MSP_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating linear MSP groups.
A.3.2 Parameter Description: Linear MSP
This topic describes the parameters that are related to linear MSP groups.
A.3.1 Parameter Description: Linear MSP_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating linear MSP groups.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Linear
MS from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameter Value Range Default
Value
Description
Protection Type 1+1 Protection
1:N Protection
1+1 Protection l This parameter specifies the
protection type of the linear
MSP group.
l In the case of 1+1 linear MSP,
one working channel and one
protection channel are
required. When the working
channel fails, the service is
switched from the working
channel to the protection
channel.
l In the case of 1:N linear MSP,
N working channels and one
protection channel are
required. Normal services are
transmitted on the working
channels and extra services
are transmitted on the
protection channel. When one
working channel fails, the
services are switched from
this working channel to the
protection channel, and the
extra services are interrupted.
l If extra services need to be
transmitted or several
working channels are
required, select 1:N
Protection.
according to the planning
information.
A-77
Value
Description
Switching Mode Single-Ended
Switching
Dual-Ended
Switching
Single-Ended
Switching (1
+1 Protection)
Dual-Ended
Switching (1:N
Protection)
l This parameter specifies the
switching mode of the linear
MSP.
l In single-ended mode, the
switching occurs only at one
end and the state of the other
end remains unchanged.
l In dual-ended mode, the
switching occurs at both ends
at the same time.
l If the linear MSP type is set to
1:N Protection, Switching
Mode can be set to Dual-
Ended Switching only.
Revertive Mode Non-Revertive
Revertive
Non-Revertive
(1+1
Protection)
Revertive (1:N
Protection)
l This parameter specifies the
revertive mode of the linear
MSP.
l When this parameter is set to
Revertive, the NE that is in
the switching state releases
the switching and enables the
former working channel to
return to the normal state
some time after the former
working channel is restored to
normal.
Non-Revertive, the NE that
is in the switching state keeps
the current state unchanged
unless another switching
occurs even though the
former working channel is
restored to normal.
l It is recommended that you
set this parameter to
Revertive.
l If the linear MSP type is set to
1:N Protection, Revertive
Mode can be set to
Revertive only.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Value
Description
WTR Time(s) 300 to 720 600 l This parameter specifies the
WTR time.
l When the time after the
former working channel is
restored to normal reaches the
preset WTR time, a revertive
switching occurs.
l You can set WTR Time(s)
only when Revertive Mode
is set to Revertive.
use the default value.
SD Enable Enabled
Disabled
Enabled l This parameter indicates or
specifies whether the
switching at the SD alarm of
the linear MSP is enabled.
Enabled, the B2_SD alarm is
considered as a switching
condition.
Enabled.
Protocol Type New Protocol
Restructure
Protocol
New Protocol l The new protocol is
supported at the early stage,
and the mainstream protocol
version is used currently.
l The restructure protocol
optimizes the new protocol
and provides better measures
to protect the new protocol,
thus ensuring that the new
protocol runs in a better
manner.
l The new protocol is more
mature, and the restructure
protocol complies with the
standard. It is recommended
that you use the new protocol.
l You must ensure that the
interconnected NEs run the
protocols of the same type.

A-79
Select Mapping
Direction
West Working Unit
West Protection
Unit
West Working Unit This parameter specifies the mapping
direction of the linear MSP.
Select Mapping
Mode
- - l This parameter specifies the mapping
board and port in the mapping direction.
l If the protection type is set to 1+1
Protection, only one line port can be
mapped as West Working Unit.
l Only one line port can be mapped as
West Protection Unit.
l The line port mapped as West
Protection Unit and the line port
mapped as West Working Unit should
be configured for different boards if
possible.
Mapped Board - - This parameter indicates the preset slot
mapping relations, including the mapping
direction and the corresponding mapping
mode.

A.3.2 Parameter Description: Linear MSP
This topic describes the parameters that are related to linear MSP groups.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Linear MS
from the Function Tree.
Protection Group
ID
protection group.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Protection Type - - l This parameter indicates the protection
type of the linear MSP group.
l In the case of 1+1 linear MSP, one
working channel and one protection
channel are required. When the working
channel fails, the service is switched
from the working channel to the
protection channel.
l In the case of 1:N linear MSP, N working
channels and one protection channel are
required. Normal services are
transmitted on the working channels and
extra services are transmitted on the
protection channel. When one working
channel fails, the services are switched
from this working channel to the
protection channel, and the extra
services are interrupted.
l If extra services need to be transmitted
or several working channels are
required, select 1:N Protection.
Switching
Dual-Ended
Switching
switching mode of the linear MSP.
l In single-ended mode, the switching
occurs only at one end and the state of
the other end remains unchanged.
l In dual-ended mode, the switching
occurs at both ends at the same time.
l If the linear MSP type is set to 1:N
Protection, Switching Mode can be set
to Dual-Ended Switching only.
A-81
Revertive
revertive mode of the linear MSP.
switching state releases the switching
and enables the former working channel
to return to the normal state some time
after the former working channel is
restored to normal.
parameter to Revertive.
l If the linear MSP type is set to 1:N
Protection, Revertive Mode can be set
to Revertive only.
WTR time.
preset WTR time, a revertive switching
occurs.
Revertive Mode is set to Revertive.
default value.
SD Enable Enabled
Disabled
whether the reverse switching function
is enabled.
the B2_SD alarm is considered as a
switching condition.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Protocol Type New Protocol
Restructure Protocol
- l The new protocol is supported at the
early stage, and the mainstream protocol
version is used currently.
l The restructure protocol optimizes the
new protocol and provides better
measures to protect the new protocol,
thus ensuring that the new protocol runs
in a better manner.
l You must ensure that the interconnected
NEs run the protocols of the same type.
l The new protocol is more mature, and
the restructure protocol complies with
the standard. It is recommended that you
use the new protocol.
Protocol Status - - This parameter indicates the protocol status
of the linear MSP.
Protection Subnet - - This parameter displays the protection
subnet where the MS protection is
configured.

Protection Unit - - This parameter indicates that which of the
units, namely, the west protection unit or the
west working unit, is currently in the
protection status.
West Line - - This parameter indicates the west protection
unit and the west working unit of the linear
MSP.
West Switching
Status
- - This parameter indicates the switching
status of the line.
Protected Unit - - This parameter indicates the working
channel protected by the current protection
channel.
Remote/Local End
Indication
- - When Switching Mode is set to Dual-
Ended Switching, the central office end
that issues the switching command is
displayed.

A-83
A.4 SDH/PDH Service Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to SDH/PDH services.
A.4.1 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Creation
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating point-to-point cross-
connections.
A.4.2 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_SNCP Service Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating SNCP services.
A.4.3 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Converting Normal Services Into
SNCP Services
This topic describes the parameters that are used for converting normal services into SNCP
services.
A.4.4 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring SDH services (namely,
configuring cross-connections).
A.4.5 Parameter Description: SNCP Service Control
This topic describes the parameters that are used for controlling SNCP services.
A.4.6 Parameter Description: TU_AIS Insertion
This section describes the parameters for TU_AIS insertion.
A.4.1 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Creation
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating point-to-point cross-
connections.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH
Service Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click Options to change the VC-12 timeslot numbering policy used by the cross-
connection.
3. Click Create.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameters
Level VC12
VC3
VC4
VC12 l This parameter specifies the level of the
service to be created.
l If the service is an E1 service or a data
service that is bound with VC-12
channels, set this parameter to VC12.
l If the service is a data service that is
bound with VC-3 channels, set this
parameter to VC3.
l If all the services on a VC-4 channel pass
through the NE, set this parameter to
VC4.
Direction Bidirectional
Unidirectional
Bidirectional l When this parameter is set to
Unidirectional, create only the cross-
connections from the service source to
the service sink.
Bidirectional, create the cross-
connections from the service source to
the service sink and the cross-
connections from the service sink to the
service source.
you set this parameter to Bidirectional.
Source Slot - - This parameter specifies the slot of the
service source.
Source VC4 - - l This parameter specifies the number of
the VC-4 channel where the service
source is located.
l This parameter cannot be set when
Source Slot is set to the slot of the
tributary board.
Source Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3-6)
- - l This parameter indicates the timeslot
range of the service source.
l This parameter can be set to a number or
several numbers. When setting this
parameter to several numbers, use the
comma (,) to separate the discrete
numbers, or use the endash (-) to
represent a consecutive number. For
example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate
1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
A-85
Sink Slot - - This parameter specifies the slot of the
service sink.
Sink VC4 - - l This parameter specifies the number of
the VC-4 channel where the service sink
is located.
l This parameter cannot be set when Sink
Slot is set to the slot of the tributary
board.
Sink Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3-6)
- - l This parameter specifies the timeslot
range of the service sink.
1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
E1 Priority High
Low
None
- l This parameter specifies the priority of
an E1 service. This parameter is
available only if the E1 priority function
is enabled for the ports configured in the
cross-connections.
l If E1 Priority is set to High,
transmission of the E1 service is ensured
in any modulation scheme.
l If E1 Priority is set to Low, transmission
of the E1 service is ensured only in full-
capacity modulation scheme
l If the service priority is not specified
during service creation, E1 Priority is
None. In this case, the E1 priority of a
service needs to be changed after the
service is created.
Activate
Immediately
Yes
No
Yes l This parameter specifies whether to
immediately activate the configured
service.
l To immediately deliver the configured
SDH service to the NE, set this parameter
to Yes.

Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A.4.2 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_SNCP
Service Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating SNCP services.
Navigation Path
2. Click Options to change the VC-12 timeslot numbering policy used by the cross-
connection.
3. Click Create SNCP Service.
Service Type SNCP SNCP This parameter indicates that the type of the
service to be created is SNCP.
Unidirectional
Unidirectional, create only the cross-
connections from the SNCP service
source to the SNCP service sink.
Bidirectional, create the cross-
connections from the SNCP service
source to the service sink and the cross-
connections from the SNCP service sink
to the service source.
Level VC12
VC3
VC4
VC12 l This parameter specifies the level of the
SCNP service to be created.
channels, set this parameter to VC12.
bound with VC-3 channels, set this
parameter to VC3.
through the NE, set this parameter to
VC4.
A-87
Hold-off Time
(100ms)
0 to 100 0 l This parameter specifies the duration of
the hold-off time.
l When a line is faulty, SNCP switching
can be performed on the NE after a delay
of time to prevent the situation where the
NE performs SNCP switching and other
protection switching at the same time.
l Hold-off Time(100ms) is generally set
to prevent SNCP protection switching,
when SNCP works with N+1 protection.
Hold-off Time(100ms) must be longer
than the switching time of any protection
mode that works with SNCP. Generally,
Hold-off Time(100ms) is set to 200 ms.
l When SNCP works with 1+1 FD/SD,
trigger conditions for HSM switching or
SNCP switching trigger HSM switching
but do not trigger SNCP switching.
Therefore, Hold-off Time(100ms) does
not need to be set in this case.
l The switching time of 1+1 HSB/FD/SD
protection is much longer than that of
SNCP. Therefore, to shorten service
interruptions, it is recommended that you
do not set Hold-off Time(100ms) when
SNCP works with 1+1 HSB/FD/SD
protection.
l If only the SNCP scheme is available, it
is recommended that you set the hold-off
time to 0.
Revertive
Non-Revertive l This parameter specifies whether to
switch the service to the original working
channel after the fault is rectified.
l If this parameter is set to Revertive, the
service is switched from the protection
channel to the original working channel.
If this parameter is set to Non-
Revertive, the service is not switched
from the protection channel to the
original working channel.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
WTR Time(s) 300 to 720 600 l This parameter specifies the WTR time.
occurs.
default value.
service source.
source is located.
tributary board.
Source Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3-6)
1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
service sink.
is located.
board.
A-89
Sink Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3-6)
1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
Configure SNCP
Tangent Ring
Selected
Deselected
Deselected l After the Configure SNCP Tangent
Ring checkbox is selected, you can
quickly configure the SNCP service for
the SNCP ring tangent point.
you do not select this checkbox.
Activate
Immediately
Selected
Deselected
Selected l This parameter specifies whether to
SNCP service.
l After the Activate Immediately
checkbox is selected, you can
immediately activate the created SNCP
service.

A.4.3 Parameter Description: SDH Service
Configuration_Converting Normal Services Into SNCP Services
This topic describes the parameters that are used for converting normal services into SNCP
services.
Navigation Path
2. If a bidirectional SDH service is created, select this service in Cross-Connection. Right-
click the selected service and choose Expand to Unidirectional from the shortcut menu.
3. Select the unidirectional service. Right-click the selected service and choose Convert to
SNCP Service from the shortcut menu.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Service Type SNCP SNCP This parameter indicates that the type of the
service to be created is SNCP.
Direction Unidirectional - This parameter indicates the direction of the
SNCP service.
Level - - l This parameter indicates the level of the
SNCP service.
channels, the parameter value is VC12.
bound with VC-3 channels, the
parameter value is VC3.
through the NE, the parameter value is
VC4.
A-91
Hold-off Time
(100ms)
0 to 100 0 l This parameter specifies the duration of
the hold-off time.
protection.
time to 0.
Revertive
Non-Revertive l This parameter specifies whether to
switch the service to the original working
channel after the fault is rectified. If this
parameter is set to "Revertive", the
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
WTR Time(s) 300 to 720 600 l This parameter specifies the WTR time.
occurs.
default value.
service source.
source is located.
tributary board.
Source Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3-6)
1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
service sink.
is located.
board.
A-93
Sink Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3-6)
1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
Configure SNCP
Tangent Ring
- - After the Configure SNCP Tangent Ring
checkbox is selected, you can quickly
configure the SNCP service for the SNCP
ring tangent point.
Activate
Immediately
- - l This parameter indicates whether to
SNCP service.
l After the Activate Immediately
checkbox is selected, you can
immediately activate the created SNCP
service.

A.4.4 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring SDH services (namely,
configuring cross-connections).
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH Service
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Cross-Connection Parameters
Level VC12
VC3
VC4
- l This parameter indicates the level of the
service.
channels, VC12 is displayed.
bound with VC-3 channels, VC3 is
displayed.
through the NE, VC4 is displayed.
Source Slot - - This parameter indicates the slot of the
service source.
Source Timeslot/
Path
- - This parameter indicates the timeslot or
timeslot range of the service source.
Sink Slot - - This parameter indicates the slot of the
source sink.
Sink Timeslot/
Path
timeslot range of the service sink.
E1 Priority High
Low
None
- l This parameter specifies the priority of
an E1 service. This parameter is
available only if the E1 priority function
is enabled for the ports configured in the
cross-connections.
l If E1 Priority is set to High,
transmission of the E1 service is ensured
in any modulation scheme.
l If E1 Priority is set to Low, transmission
of the E1 service is ensured only in full-
capacity modulation scheme
l If the service priority is not specified
during service creation, E1 Priority is
None. In this case, the E1 priority of a
service needs to be changed after the
service is created.
Activation Status Yes
No
- This parameter indicates whether to activate
the service.
Bound Group
Number
parameter.
Lockout Status - - The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this
parameter.
A-95
Trail Name - - The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this
parameter.
Schedule No. - - The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this
parameter.

Parameters for Automatically Created Cross-Connections
Level VC12
VC3
VC4
service.
displayed.
Source Slot - - This parameter indicates the slot of the
service source.
Source Timeslot/
Path
timeslot range of the service source.
Sink Slot - - This parameter indicates the slot of the
source sink.
Sink Timeslot/
Path
timeslot range of the service sink.
Lockout Status - - The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this
parameter.
Trail Name - - The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this
parameter.
Schedule No. - - The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this
parameter.

A.4.5 Parameter Description: SNCP Service Control
This topic describes the parameters that are used for controlling SNCP services.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SNCP Service
Service Type - - This parameter indicates the service
protection type of the protection group.
Source - - This parameter indicates the timeslots where
the working service source and protection
service source of the protection group are
located.
Sink - - This parameter indicates the timeslots where
the working service sink and protection
service sink of the protection group are
located.
Level VC12
VC3
VC4
service.
displayed.
Current Status - - This parameter indicates the current
switching mode and switching status of the
services of the protection group.
Revertive Mode Revertive
Non-Revertive
revertive mode of the service.
l This parameter determines whether to
switch the service from the protection
channel to the original working channel
after the fault is rectified.
A-97
WTR time.
occurs.
default value.
Hold-off Time
(100ms)
0 to 100 - l This parameter specifies the duration of
the hold-off time.
protection.
time to 0.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
SD Initiation
Condition
- Null l This parameter indicates or specifies the
conditions that trigger the protection
switching of the service.
l After being selected as SD Initiation
Condition, an alarm becomes a
condition for triggering switching of an
SNCP service.
l It is recommended that you set SD
Initiation Condition to the same
condition for Working Service and
Protection Service.
l The protection switching conditions in
SD Initiation Condition are optional
values not included in the default values,
and they are set according to the planning
information.
Trail Status - - This parameter indicates the status of the
working service and protection service of
the protection group.
Service Grouping - - The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this
parameter.
Group Type - - The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this
parameter.
Active Channel - - This parameter indicates whether the
working service or protection service is
currently received by the protection group.
Trail Name - - Displays the trail name.

A.4.6 Parameter Description: TU_AIS Insertion
This section describes the parameters for TU_AIS insertion.
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the IF board from the Object Tree and choose Alarm > Triggered
Alarm Insertion from the Function Tree.
A-99
Table A-1 Parameters on the main interface
Port - - Displays the slot ID of the IF board and the
ID of the IF port.
High Channel - - Displays the higher order path number of the
IF board.
Low Channel - - Displays the lower order path number of the
IF board.
Insert E1_AIS to
TU_AIS
Enable
Disable
Disable If this parameter is set to Enable for an E1
path and the E1 path detects the E1_AIS
alarm, the TU_AIS alarm is inserted into
this path.

A.5 Parameters for Board Interfaces
This topic describes the parameters that are related to board interfaces.
A.5.1 PDH Port Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to PDH ports supported by Smart E1 interface
boards.
A.5.2 Parameters for the Ports on Ethernet Boards
This section describes the parameters for the Ethernet ports on the packet plane.
A.5.3 Serial Port Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to serial ports.
A.5.4 Microwave Interface Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF_ETH interfaces.
A.5.5 IF Board Parameters
This topic describes parameters that are related to IF boards.
A.5.6 ODU Parameters
This topic describes parameters that are related to ODUs.
A.5.7 Parameters for SDH Interface Boards
This topic describes parameters that are related to SDH interface boards.
A.5.8 Parameters for PDH Interface Boards
This topic describes parameters that are related to PDH interface boards.
A.5.9 Parameters for Overhead
This topic describes the parameters that are related to overhead.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A.5.1 PDH Port Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to PDH ports supported by Smart E1 interface
boards.
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of PDH ports.
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the advanced attributes of PDH ports.
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of PDH ports.
Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration >
Interface Management > PDH Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Click the General Attributes tab.
Port - - Displays the ID of a
service port.
Name - - Specifies or displays the
customized port name.
Port Mode Layer 1
Layer 2
Layer 2 l Specifies the working
mode of a PDH port.
set to Layer 1, the port
can transmit TDM
signals. A port can
transmit CES and
serial services only if
Layer 1.
set to Layer 2, the port
can transmit ATM
signals.
A-101
Encapsulation Type - - l Displays
Encapsulation Type
of a PDH port.
l When Port Mode is
Layer 1,
Encapsulation Type
takes its default value
Null.
l When Port Mode is
Layer 2,
Encapsulation Type
ATM.

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the advanced attributes of PDH ports.
Navigation Path
Interface Management > PDH Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Advanced Attributes tab.
Port - - Displays the name of a
service port.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Frame Format Unframe
Double Frame
CRC-4 Multiframe
CRC-4 Multiframe l Specifies the frame
format.
l If a CES service uses
the emulation mode of
CESoPSN, this
parameter can assume
the value CRC-4
Multiframe or
Double Frame. The
value CRC-4
Multiframe is
recommended.
l If a CES service uses
the emulation mode of
SAToP, this parameter
needs to assume the
value Unframe.
l The value of Frame
Format must be the
same at the local and
opposite ends.
Line Encoding Format - - Displays the line encoding
format. The parameter
value is always HDB3.
A-103
Loopback Mode Non-Loopback
Inloop
Outloop
Non-Loopback l Specifies the loopback
status for a port.
l Non-Loopback
indicates that
loopbacks are
cancelled or not
performed.
l Inloop indicates that
the signals that need to
be transmitted to the
opposite end are
looped back.
l Outloop indicates that
the received signals are
looped back.
l This function is used
for fault locating for
the PDH ports. This
function affects
services over related
ports. Therefore,
exercise precaution
before starting this
function.
l Generally, this
parameter is set to
Non-Loopback.
Impedance - - Displays the port
impedance.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Frame Mode 30(ATM)
31(ATM,CES)
- l 30 timeslots: In an E1
frame format,
timeslots 1 to 15 and 17
to 31 are used to
transmit service data,
and timeslot 16 is used
to transmit signaling.
l 31 timeslots: In an E1
frame format,
timeslots 1 to 31 are
used to transmit
service data.
l This parameter is
unavailable if Frame
Format is Unframe.
l The port frame modes
need to be the same at
the local and opposite
ends.
Clock Mode Master Mode
Slave Mode
System Clock Mode
Master Mode l Master Mode: The
system clock is used as
the output clock of
services.
l Slave Mode: The CES
ACR clock is used as
the output clock of
services. The port
inputting E1 clocks on
Slave is set to Slave
Mode.
l System Clock Mode:
The upstream E1 line
clock of the opposite
equipment is used as
the output clock of
services. The port
inputting E1 clocks on
Master is set to System
Clock Mode
Composite Port
Loopback
- - For the OptiX RTN 950,
this parameter cannot be
configured.
Service Load Indication - - For the OptiX RTN 950,
configured.
A-105
Equalize Input Signal - - For the OptiX RTN 950,
configured.
Equalize Outpput Signal - - For the OptiX RTN 950,
configured.

This section describes the parameters for the Ethernet ports on the packet plane.
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of an Ethernet interface.
This topic describes the parameters that are related to flow control.
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 2 attributes.
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 3 attributes of Ethernet ports.
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes.
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of an Ethernet interface.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface
Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
Port - - Displays the port name.
Name - - Specifies the port name.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Enable Port Enabled
Disabled
Enabled l Specifies whether an
Ethernet port is
enabled. An Ethernet
port can receive,
process, and forward
Ethernet services only
if this parameter is set
to Enabled.
l Set this parameter
according to the
NOTE
Port 10 of the EFP8 board
does not support this
parameter.
Port Mode Layer 2
Layer 3
Layer 2 l Port Mode specifies
the mode of the
Ethernet port.
l If Port Mode is Layer
2, Encapsulation
Type can be set to
Null, 802.1Q, or
QinQ.
l If Port Mode is Layer
3, Encapsulation
Type can be set to
802.1Q only and the
port can carry MPLS
tunnels.
NOTE
does not support the value
Layer 3.
A-107
Encapsulation Type Null
802.1Q
QinQ
- l Encapsulation Type
specifies the method of
the port to process the
received packets.
l If you set
Encapsulation Type
to Null, the port
transparently
transmits the received
packets.
l If you set
Encapsulation Type
to 802.1Q, the port
identifies the packets
that comply with the
IEEE 802.1q standard.
l If you set
Encapsulation Type
to QinQ, the port
IEEE 802.1ad QinQ
standard.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Working Mode Auto-Negotiation
10M Half-Duplex
10M Full-Duplex
100M Half-Duplex
100M Full-Duplex
1000M Full-Duplex
Auto-Negotiation l The Ethernet ports of
different types support
different Working
Mode.
l When the equipment
on the opposite side
works in auto-
negotiation mode, set
the Working Mode of
the equipment on the
local side to Auto-
Negotiation.
works in full-duplex
mode, set the
Working Mode of the
equipment on the local
side to 10M Full-
Duplex, 100M Full-
Duplex, or 1000M
Full-Duplex
depending on the port
rate of the equipment
on the opposite side.
works in half-duplex
mode, set the
Working Mode of the
equipment on the local
side to 10M Half-
Duplex, 100M Half-
Duplex, or Auto-
Negotiation
depending on the port
rate of the equipment
on the opposite side.
l FE ports support 10M
full-duplex, 10M half-
duplex, 100M full-
duplex, 100M half-
duplex, and auto-
negotiation.
l GE electrical ports
support 10M full-
duplex, 10M half-
duplex, 100M full-
duplex, 100M half-
A-109
duplex, 1000M full-
duplex, and auto-
negotiation.
l GE optical ports
support 1000M full-
duplex and auto-
negotiation.
NOTE
parameter.
Max Frame Length
(byte)
1518 to 9600 1522 The value of Max Frame
Length(byte) should be
greater than the length of
any frame to be
transported.
Auto-Negotiation
Ability
Auto-Negotiation
10M Half-Duplex
10M Full-Duplex
100M Half-Duplex
100M Full-Duplex
1000M Full-Duplex
FE: 100M Full-Duplex
GE: 1000M Full-Duplex
l Auto-Negotiation
Ability specifies the
auto-negotiation
capability of the
Ethernet port.
l For GE optical ports,
Auto-Negotiation
Ability can be set to
1000M Full-Duplex
only.
l Auto-Negotiation
Ability is valid only
when Working Mode
is set to Auto-
Negotiation.
Logical Port Attribute Optical Port
Electrical Port
- l This parameter
specifies the attribute
of the logical port.
l The SFP on the EM6F
board supports the
optical port and
electrical port.
Physical Port Attribute - - This parameter indicates
the attribute of the
physical port.

This topic describes the parameters that are related to flow control.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Navigation Path
2. Click the Flow Control tab.
Port - - This parameter indicates
the port name.
Non-Autonegotiation
Flow Control Mode
Disabled
Enable Symmetric Flow
Control
Disabled l Non-Autonegotiation
Flow Control Mode is
valid only when
Working Mode is not
set to Auto-
Negotiation.
l Non-Autonegotiation
Flow Control Mode
of the equipment on
the local side must be
consistent with the
non-autonegotiation
flow control mode of
the equipment on the
opposite side
l The OptiX RTN 950
supports only two non-
auto-negotiation flow
control modes,
namely, Disabled
mode and Enable
Symmetric Flow
Control mode.
A-111
Auto-Negotiation Flow
Control Mode
Disabled
Enable Symmetric Flow
Control
Disabled l Auto-Negotiation
Flow Control Mode is
valid only when
Working Mode is set
to Auto-Negotiation.
l Auto-Negotiation
Flow Control Mode
of the equipment on
the local side must be
consistent with the
control mode of the
equipment on the
opposite side
l The OptiX RTN 950
supports only two
control modes,
namely, Disabled
mode and Enable
Symmetric Flow
Control mode.
NOTE
parameter.

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 2 attributes.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Layer 2 Attributes tab.
NOTE
The parameter Layer 2 Attributes is meaningful only when Port Mode is set to Layer 2.
the port name.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
QinQ Type Domain - - l When Encapsulation
Type in the General
Attributes tab page is
set to QinQ, you need
to set QinQ Type
Domain. The default
value is 88A8.
l When Encapsulation
Type in the General
Attributes tab page is
set to Null or 802.1Q,
you cannot set QinQ
Type Domain. In this
case, QinQ Type
Domain is displayed
as FFFF and cannot be
changed.
l QinQ Type Domain
should be set to the
same value for all the
ports on the EM6T/
EM6F board .
TAG Tag Aware
Access
Hybrid
Tag Aware l If all the accessed
services are frames
with the VLAN tag
(tagged frames), set
TAG to Tag Aware.
l If all the accessed
services are frames
without the VLAN tag
(untagged frames), set
TAG to Access.
l If the accessed
services contain
tagged frames and
untagged frames, set
TAG to Hybrid.
NOTE
TAG specifies the TAG
flag of a port. For details
about the TAG flags and
associated frame-
processing methods, see
Table A-2.
A-113
Default VLAN ID 1 to 4094 1 l Default VLAN ID is
valid only when TAG
is set to Access or
Hybrid.
l Default VLAN ID is
set according to the
actual situations.
NOTE
For details about the
functions of Default VLAN
ID, see Table A-2.
VLAN Priority 0 to 7 0 l VLAN Priority is
valid only when TAG
is set to Access or
Hybrid.
l When the VLAN
priority is required to
divide streams or to be
used for other
purposes, VLAN
Priority is set
according to the
In normal cases, it is
NOTE
For details about the
functions of VLAN
Priority, see Table A-2.

Table A-2 Methods used by Ethernet interfaces to process data frames
Port Type of Data
Frame
Processing Method
Tag Aware Access Hybrid
Ingress UNI Tagged frame The port receives the
frame.
The port discards
the frame.
The port receives
the frame.
Untagged frame The port discards the
frame.
The ports add the
VLAN tag, to which
Default VLAN ID
and VLAN
Priority
correspond, to the
frame and receive
the frame.
The ports add the
VLAN tag, to which
Default VLAN ID
and VLAN
Priority
correspond, to the
frame and receive
the frame.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Port Type of Data
Frame
Processing Method
Egress UNI Tagged frame The port transmits
the frame.
The port strips the
VLAN tag from the
frame and then
transmits the frame.
l If the VLAN ID
in the frame is
Default VLAN
ID, the port
strips the VLAN
tag from the
frame and then
transmits the
frame.
l If the VLAN ID
in the frame is
not Default
VLAN ID, the
port directly
transmits the
frame.

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 3 attributes of Ethernet ports.
Navigation Path
Interface Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
NOTE
Layer 3 Attributes is valid only if Port Mode is set to Layer 3.
Enable Tunnel Disabled
Enabled
Enabled l If Enable Tunnel is set
Enabled, a port
identifies and
processes MPLS
labels.
l Enable Tunnel is
available if you set
Port Mode to Layer 3
in the General
Attributes tab.
A-115
Specify IP Address Manually
Unspecified
Unspecified l Specifies the method of
setting the IP address
of a port.
l The value
Unspecified indicates
that the IP addresses do
not need to be
configured.
l The value Manually
indicates that the IP
address of the port can
be manually
configured.
IP Address - 0.0.0.0 l Specifies the IP
address of a port.
l This parameter is
available when Specify
IP Address is
Manually.
l The IP addresses of
different ports on the
NE cannot be in the
same network
segment, but the IP
addresses of the ports
at both ends of the
MPLS tunnel must be
in the same network
segment.
IP Mask - 255.255.255.252 l Specifies the subnet
mask of a port.
l This parameter is
available when Specify
IP Address is
Manually.

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes.
Navigation Path
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
the port name.
Port Physical
Parameters
- - This parameter indicates
the physical parameters of
the port.
MAC Loopback Non-Loopback
Inloop
Non-Loopback l This parameter
specifies the loopback
state at the MAC layer.
When this parameter is
set to Inloop, the
Ethernet signals
transmitted to the
opposite end are
looped back.
l In normal cases, it is
PHY Loopback Non-Loopback
Inloop
Non-Loopback l This parameter
specifies the loopback
state at the PHY layer.
When this parameter is
set to Inloop, the
Ethernet physical
signals transmitted to
the opposite end are
looped back.
l In normal cases, it is
MAC Address - - This parameter indicates
the MAC address of the
port.
Transmitting Rate(kbit/
s)
the rate at which the data
packets are transmitted.
Receiving Rate(kbit/s) - - This parameter indicates
the rate at which the data
packets are received.
Loopback Check Enabled
Disabled
Disabled This parameter specifies
whether to enable loop
detection, which is used to
check whether a loop
exists on the port.
A-117
Loopback Port
Shutdown
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled This parameter indicates
whether to enable the loop
port shutdown function.
Egress PIR Bandwidth
(Kbit/s)
the egress PIR bandwidth.
Enabling Broadcast
Packet Suppression
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled l This parameter
limit the traffic rate of
the broadcast packets
according to the
proportion of the
broadcast packets in
the total packets.
When the equipment at
the opposite end may
encounter a broadcast
storm, this parameter
is set to Enabled.
l If Ethernet services are
E-LAN services, the
recommended value is
Enabled.
l This parameter takes
effect only for E-LAN
services in the ingress
direction.
Broadcast Packet
Suppression Threshold
0 to 100 30 When the proportion of
the broadcast packets in
the total packets exceeds
the value of this
parameter, the received
broadcast packets are
discarded. The value of
this parameter should be
more than the proportion
of the broadcast packets in
the total packets before
the broadcast storm
occurs. In normal cases,
default value.

A.5.3 Serial Port Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to serial ports.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A.5.3.1 Parameter Description: Serial Port_Basic Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of series ports.
A.5.3.2 Parameter Description: Serial Port_Creation of Serial Ports
This topic describes parameters that are used for creating serial ports.
A.5.3.1 Parameter Description: Serial Port_Basic Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of series ports.
Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > Interface Management > Serial Port from the Function Tree.
Port - - Displays the name of the
port where a serial service
is configured.
Level - - l Specifies or displays
the serial port level.
l 64K Timeslot: 64 kbit/
s timeslots of E1
signals can be bound.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950
supports 64K Timeslot
only.
Used Port - - Displays the physical port
that carries a serial
service.
64K Timeslot - - Displays the timeslots that
a serial service occupies.
The timeslots can be
consecutive or not.
A-119
Port Mode Layer 2
Layer 3
Layer 3 l Displays or specifies
the port mode.
l A port supports ATM
encapsulation if its
Port Mode is Layer
2. A port does not
support encapsulation
if its Port Mode is
Layer 3.
Encapsulation Type - - l Displays and specifies
the encapsulation type
of a PW.
l When Port Mode is
Layer 2, this
parameter displays
ATM; when Port
Mode is Layer 3, this
parameter displays
Null.

A.5.3.2 Parameter Description: Serial Port_Creation of Serial Ports
This topic describes parameters that are used for creating serial ports.
Navigation Path
Configuration > Interface Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Click the New tab.
Port Number(e.g:1,3-6) - - Specifies the port where
the serial service is
configured.
Name - - Specifies the customized
port name.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Level 64K Timeslot 64K Timeslot l Specifies the serial
port level.
set to 64K Timeslot ,
E1 timeslots can be
bound.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950
supports only the parameter
value 64K Timeslot .
Used Board - - Specifies the board where
a serial port is located.
Used Port - - Displays the board where
a serial port is located.
High Channel - - The OptiX RTN 950 does
not support this parameter.
Low Channel(e.g:1,3-6) - - The OptiX RTN 950 does
64K Timeslot(e.g:1,3-6) - - Specifies the 64 kbit/s
timeslots to be bound with
the serial port. The
timeslots can be
consecutive or not.

A.5.4 Microwave Interface Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF_ETH interfaces.
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of microwave
interfaces.
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 2 attributes of microwave
interfaces.
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 3 attributes of an IF_ETH port.
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the advanced attributes of microwave
interfaces.
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of microwave
interfaces.
A-121
Navigation Path
Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree.
Parameters
Port - - This parameter indicates the corresponding
IF port.
Name - - This parameter indicates or specifies the
Port Mode Layer 2
Layer 3
Layer 2 l If Port Mode is Layer 2, Encapsulation
Type can be set to Null, 802.1Q, or
QinQ.
l If Port Mode is Layer 3, Encapsulation
Type can be set to 802.1Q only and the
port can carry tunnels.
Encapsulation
Type
Null
802.1Q
QinQ
802.1Q l Encapsulation Type specifies the
method of the port to process the
received packets.
l If Encapsulation Type is set to Null, the
port transparently transmits the received
packets.
l If Encapsulation Type is set to
802.1Q, the port identifies the packets
that comply with the IEEE 802.1Q
standard.
l If Encapsulation Type is set to QinQ,
the port identifies the packets that
comply with the IEEE 802.1ad QinQ
standard.

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 2 attributes of microwave
interfaces.
Navigation Path
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameters for Layer 2 Attributes
NOTE
The parameter Layer 2 Attributes is meaningful only when Port Mode is set to Layer 2.
IF port.
QinQ Type
Domain
- - l When Encapsulation Type in the
General Attributes tab page is set to
QinQ, you need to set QinQ Type
Domain. The default value is 88A8.
l When Encapsulation Type in the
General Attributes tab page is set to
Null or 802.1Q, you cannot set QinQ
Type Domain. In this case, QinQ Type
Domain is displayed as FFFF and
cannot be changed.
Tag Tag Aware
Access
Hybrid
Tag Aware l If all the accessed services are frames
that contain the VLAN tag (tagged
frames), set Tag to "Tag Aware".
l If all the accessed services are frames
that do not contain the VLAN tag
(untagged frames), set Tag to "Access".
l If the accessed services contain tagged
frames and untagged frames, set Tag to
"Hybrid".
NOTE
Tag specifies the TAG flag of a port. For details
about the TAG flags and associated frame-
processing methods, see Table A-3.
Default VLAN ID 1 to 4094 1 l Default VLAN ID is valid only when
TAG is set to Access or Hybrid.
l Default VLAN ID needs to be set
according to the actual situations.
NOTE
For details about the functions of Default VLAN
ID, see Table A-3.
A-123
VLAN Priority 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0 l VLAN Priority is valid only when
l When the VLAN priority is required to
divide streams or to be used for other
purposes, VLAN Priority needs to be set
according to the planning information. In
normal cases, it is recommended that you
NOTE
For details about the functions of VLAN
Priority, see Table A-3.

Table A-3 Data frame processing
Status Type of Data
Frame
Processing Method
Ingress Port Tagged frame The port receives the
frame.
The port discards
the frame.
The port receives
the frame.
Untagged frame The port discards the
frame.
The port receives
the frame after the
VLAN tag that
corresponds to
"Default VLAN ID"
and "VLAN
Priority" is added to
the frame.
The port receives
the frame after the
VLAN tag that
corresponds to
"Default VLAN ID"
and "VLAN
Priority" is added to
the frame.
Egress Port Tagged frame The port transmits
the frame.
The port strips the
VLAN tag from the
frame and then
l If the VLAN ID
in the frame is
"Default VLAN
ID", the port
strips the VLAN
tag from the
frame and then
transmits the
frame.
l If the VLAN ID
in the frame is
not "Default
VLAN ID", the
port directly
transmits the
frame.

Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 3 attributes of an IF_ETH port.
Navigation Path
Configuration > Interface Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree.
Port - - Displays the
corresponding IF port.
Enable Tunnel Disabled
Enabled
Disabled l A port identifies and
processes MPLS
labels, if its Enable
Tunnel is set
Enabled.
l Enable Tunnel is
available if you set
Port Mode to Layer
3 in the General
Attributes tab.
Specify IP Address Manually
Unspecified
Unspecified l Specifies the method
of setting the IP
address of a port.
l The value
Unspecified indicates
that the IP addresses do
not need to be
configured for a port.
l The value Manually
indicates that the IP
address of a port can be
manually configured.
A-125
IP Address - 0.0.0.0 l Specifies the IP
address for a port.
l This parameter is
available when
Specify IP Address is
Manually.
l The IP addresses of
different ports on the
NE cannot be in the
same network
segment, but the IP
addresses of the ports
at both ends of the
MPLS tunnel must be
in the same network
segment.
IP Mask - 255.255.255.252 l Specifies the subnet
mask of a port.
l This parameter is
available when
Specify IP Address is
Manually.

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the advanced attributes of microwave
interfaces.
Navigation Path
Parameters for Advanced Attributes
IF port.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Radio Link ID 1 to 4094 1 l This parameter specifies the ID of the
radio link. As the identifier of a radio
between sites.
l The ID of each radio link of an NE must
be unique, and the link IDs at both ends
of a radio link must be the same.
Received Radio
Link ID
- - l This parameter indicates the received ID
of the radio link.
ID does not match with the preset value
of Radio Link ID at the local end, the
local end inserts the AIS signal to the
alarm to the NMS, indicating that the link
IDs do not match.
IF Port Loopback - - l This parameter indicates the loopback
status of the IF interface.
l Non-Loopback indicates that the
loopback is cancelled or not performed.
l Inloop indicates that the IF signals
transmitted to the opposite end are
looped back.
l Outloop indicates that the received IF
signals are looped back.
l Generally, this parameter is used to
locate the faults that occur at each IF
interface. The IF loopback is used for
diagnosis. If this function is enabled, the
services at the related ports are affected.
In normal cases, this parameter is set to
Non-Loopback.
Composite Port
Loopback
- - l This parameter indicates the loopback
status on the composite interface.
l Inloop indicates that the composite
signals transmitted to the opposite end
are looped back.
l Outloop indicates that the received
composite signals are looped back.
Non-Loopback.
A-127
Error Frame
Discard Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled l This parameter indicates or specifies
whether to discard the Ethernet frame
when a CRC error occurs in an Ethernet
frame.
l If the Ethernet service transmitted on the
IF_ETH port is a voice service or a video
service, you can set this parameter to
Disabled.
MAC Address - - This parameter indicates the MAC address
of the port.
Transmitting Rate
(Kbit/s)
- - This parameter indicates the transmit rate of
the local port.
Receiving Rate
(Kbit/s)
- - This parameter indicates the receive rate of
the local port.
Inloop
Non-Loopback l This parameter specifies the loopback
state at the MAC layer. When this
parameter is set to Inloop, the Ethernet
signals transmitted to the opposite end
are looped back.
you use the default value.
NOTE
The ISU2 and ISX2 boards can not be set to
Inloop.
Speed
Transmission at
L2
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled l If Speed Transmission at L2 is set to
Enabled, the Layer-2 Ethernet packets
transmitted at microwave ports will be
compressed to improve transmission
efficiency.
l If the Layer 2 header compression
function can be enabled for the ISU2 or
ISX2 board, it is recommended that you
set Speed Transmission at L2 to
Enabled.
l The settings of Speed Transmission at
L2 must be the same at both ends of a
radio link.
NOTE
parameter.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Speed
Transmission at
L3
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled l If Speed Transmission at L3 is set to
Enabled, the IP packets transmitted at
microwave ports will be compressed to
improve transmission efficiency.
l If the Layer 3 header compression
function can be enabled for the ISU2 or
ISX2 board, it is recommended that you
set Speed Transmission at L3 to
Enabled.
l The settings of Speed Transmission at
L3 must be the same at both ends of a
radio link.
NOTE
l The ISU2 and ISX2 boards support this
parameter.
l When Speed Transmission at L3 is set to
Enabled, Encapsulation Type of the ISU2
and ISX2 boards cannot be set to Null.
Loopback Check Disabled
Enabled
Disabled This parameter specifies whether to enable
loop detection, which is used to check
whether a loop exists on the port.
Loopback Port
Shutdown
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled This parameter indicates whether to enable
the automatic shut-down of looped ports.
Enabling
Broadcast Packet
Suppression
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled l This parameter specifies whether to limit
the traffic rate of the broadcast packets
according to the proportion of the
broadcast packets in the total packets.
When the equipment at the opposite end
may encounter a broadcast storm, this
parameter is set to Enabled.
l If Ethernet services are E-LAN services,
the recommended value is Enabled.
l This parameter takes effect only for E-
LAN services in the ingress direction.
Enabling
Broadcast Packet
Suppression
Threshold
0 to 100 30 When the proportion of the broadcast
packets in the total packets exceeds the value
of this parameter, the received broadcast
packets are discarded. The value of this
parameter should be more than the
proportion of the broadcast packets in the
total packets before the broadcast storm
occurs. In normal cases, this parameter is set
to default value.

A-129
A.5.5 IF Board Parameters
This topic describes parameters that are related to IF boards.
This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF attributes.
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the ATPC attributes.
This section describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes.
A.5.5.4 Parameter Description: ATPC Adjustment Records
This topic describes the parameters that are related to ATPC adjustment records.
A.5.5.5 Parameter Description: PRBS Test
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the pseudorandom binary sequence (PRBS)
test.
This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF attributes.
Navigation Path
l Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree.
l Click the IF Attributes tab.
Parameters
IF interface.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Radio Link ID 1,4E1,7MHz,QPSK
2,4E1,3.5MHz,
16QAM
3,8E1,14MHz,QPS
K
4,8E1,7MHz,
16QAM
5,16E1,28MHz,QP
SK
6,16E1,14MHz,
16QAM
7,STM-1,28MHz,
128QAM
8,E3,28MHz,QPSK
9,E3,14MHz,
16QAM
10,22E1,14MHz,
32QAM
11,26E1,14MHz,
64QAM
12,32E1,14MHz,
128QAM
13,35E1,28MHz,
16QAM
14,44E1,28MHz,
32QAM
15,53E1,28MHz,
64QAM
work mode of the radio link in "work
mode number, service capacity, channel
spacing, modulation mode" format.
planning information. The work modes
of the IF boards at the two ends of a radio
link must be the same.
NOTE
The IF1 board supports this parameter.
IF Service Type Hybrid(Native E1
+ETH)
Hybrid(Native
STM-1+ETH)
SDH
Hybrid(Native E1
+ETH)
l Displays or specifies the type of services
carried by the IF board.
Native E1 services, set this parameter to
Hybrid(Native E1+ETH).
Native STM-1 services, set this
parameter to Hybrid(Native STM-1
+ETH).
l If the SDH radio transmits SDH services,
set this parameter to SDH.
NOTE
parameter.
A-131
Radio Link ID 1 to 4094 1 l Link ID indicates or specifies the ID of
a radio link. As the identifier of a radio
between sites.
Link ID at the local end, the local end
inserts the AIS signal to the downstream
direction of the service. At the same
time, the local end reports MW_LIM
IDs do not match.
l Link ID is set according to the planning
information. Each radio link of an NE
should have a unique link ID, and the link
IDs at both ends of a radio link should be
the same.
Received Radio
Link ID
- - l This parameter indicates the received ID
of the radio link.
Radio Link ID at the local end, the local
end inserts the AIS signal to the
IDs do not match.
l When the radio link becomes faulty, this
parameter is displayed as an invalid
value.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
IF Port Loopback Non-Loopback
Inloop
Outloop
Non-Loopback l This parameter indicates or specifies the
loopback status of the IF interface.
l Inloop indicates that the IF signals
looped back.
l Outloop indicates that the received IF
l Generally, IF Port Loopback is used to
locate the faults that occur at each IF
interface. The IF loopback is used for
diagnosis. If this function is enabled, the
services at the related ports are affected.
In normal cases, this parameter is set to
Non-Loopback.
2M Wayside
Enable Status
a
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled l This parameter indicates or specifies
whether the radio link transmits the
wayside E1 service.
l The wayside E1 service can be supported
by the IF1 board in the
7,STM-1,28MHz,128QAM,
8,E3,28MHz,QPSK, or 9,E3,14MHz,
16QAM mode.
2M Wayside Input
Board
a
slot in which the 2M wayside service is
accessed.
l This parameter can be set only when 2M
Wayside Enable Status is set to
Enabled.
l The wayside E1 service can be supported
by the IF1 board in the
7,STM-1,28MHz,128QAM,
8,E3,28MHz,QPSK, or 9,E3,14MHz,
16QAM mode.
350 MHz
Consecutive Wave
Status
Stop
Start
Stop l This parameter indicates or specifies the
status of transmitting the 350 MHz
carrier signals at the IF interface.
l 350 MHz Consecutive Wave Status
can be set to Start in the commissioning
process only. In normal cases, this
parameter is set to Stop. Otherwise, the
services are interrupted.
A-133
XPIC Enabled
b
Enabled
Disabled
whether the XPIC function of the XPIC
IF board is enabled.
l If the XPIC IF board does not perform
the XPIC function, XPIC Enabled
should be set to Disabled.
Enable IEEE-1588
Timeslot
c
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled Enable IEEE-1588 Timeslot needs to be
set consistently between two ends of a radio
link.

NOTE
l a. The IFU2 and IFX2 boards do not support way-side services.
l b. The IFU2, ISU2, and IF1 boards do not support the XPIC function.
l c. The IF1 board does not support the IEEE-1588 timeslot function.
Parameters for Hybrid/AM Configuration
NOTE
The IF1 board does not support Hybrid/AM configuration.
IF port.
IF Channel
Bandwidth
7M
14M
28M
40M
56M
- IF Channel Bandwidth indicates the
channel spacing of the corresponding radio
link. This parameter is set according to the
NOTE
l This parameter is not applicable to the IF1
board.
l The IFU2 board does not support the value
40M.
l The IFX2 board does not support the values
7M, 14M, and 40M.
l The ISX2 board supports the channel
spacings of 7M and 14M only when the
XPIC function is disabled.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Enabled
l Hence, the Integrated IP radio can ensure
the reliable transmission of the E1
services and provide bandwidth
adaptively for the Ethernet services
when the AM function is enabled.
l The ISX2/ISU2 does not support the AM
function when IF Service Type is
SDH.
Modulation Mode
of the Guarantee
AM Capacity
QPSK
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
l Modulation Mode of the Guarantee
AM Capacity specifies the lowest-gain
by the service transmission bandwidth
that the Hybrid radio must ensure and the
Modulation Mode
of the Full AM
Capacity
QPSK
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
l Modulation Mode of the Full AM
Capacity specifies the highest-gain
by the bandwidth of the services that
need to be transmitted over the Hybrid
radio and the availability of the radio link
that corresponds to this modulation
scheme.
NOTE
Modulation Mode of the Full AM
Capacity must be higher than Modulation
Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity.
A-135
Manually
Specified
Modulation Mode
QPSK
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
QPSK l This parameter specifies the modulation
transmission.
STM-1 Capacity - - l Specifies the STM-1 capacity of the IF
board.
l This parameter is available only when IF
Service Type is set to Hybrid(Native
STM-1+ETH) and SDH.
l If IF Service Type is Hybrid(Native
STM-1+ETH), this parameter can be set
to 0 or 1.
l If IF Service Type is SDH, this
parameter can be set to 1 or 2.
NOTE
The IFU2 and IFX2 boards do not support this
parameter.
Enable E1 Priority Disabled
Enabled
Disabled l This parameter specifies whether to
enable the E1 priority function.
Guarantee E1
Capacity
- - l If AM Enable Status is set to Enabled,
this parameter needs to be set according
to IF Channel Bandwidth, Modulation
Mode of the Guarantee AM Capacity,
and the actually transmitted services.
l If AM Enable Status is set to
Disabled, this parameter needs to be set
Manually Specified Modulation
Mode, and the actually transmitted
services.
Guarantee E1
Capacity Range
board in guarantee capacity modulation
mode.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Data Service
Bandwidth(Mbit/
s)
- - Displays the data service bandwidth of the
IF board.
Full E1 Capacity - - l This parameter specifies the number of
transmitted E1 services in Modulation
Mode of the Full AM Capacity.
l This parameter is valid if Enable E1
Priority is set to Enabled.
l E1 service bandwidth in full capacity
mode Service bandwidth in full
capacity mode - Service bandwidth in
guarantee capacity mode + E1 service
bandwidth in guarantee capacity mode.
In addition, the number of E1 services in
full capacity modulation mode should be
smaller than or equal to the maximum
number of E1 services in full capacity
modulation mode.
l The Full E1 Capacity must be set to the
same value at both ends of a radio link.
Full E1 Capacity - - Displays the E1 capacity range of the IF
board in full capacity modulation mode.
Transmit-End
Modulation Mode
- - Displays the modulation mode at the
transmit mode.
Receive-End
Modulation Mode
- - Displays the modulation mode at the receive
mode.
Guarantee AM
Service Capacity
(Mbit/s)
- - Displays the guarantee AM service capacity.
Full AM Service
Capacity(Mbit/s)
- - Displays the full AM service capacity.
Transmitted AM
Service Capacity
(Mbit/s)
- - Displays the transmitted AM service
capacity.
Received AM
Service Capacity
(Mbit/s)
- - Displays the received AM service capacity.
E1 Capacity For
High Priority
- - Displays the number of configured high-
priority E1s.

A-137
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the ATPC attributes.
Navigation Path
Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree.
l Click the ATPC Attributes tab.
Parameters
IF interface.
ATPC Enable
Status
Disabled
Enabled
l When this parameter is set to Enabled
and if the RSL at the receive end is 2 dB
higher or lower than the central value
between the ATPC upper threshold and
the ATPC lower threshold at the receive
end, the receiver notifies the transmitter
to decrease or increase the transmit
power until the RSL is within the range
that is 2 dB higher or lower than the
central value between the ATPC upper
threshold and the ATPC lower threshold.
is recommended that you set ATPC
Enable Status to Disabled.
attributes.
ATPC Upper
Threshold(dBm)
- -45.0 l Set the central value between the ATPC
threshold to a value for the expected
receive power.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
ATPC Lower
Threshold(dBm)
- -70.0 Lower Threshold(dBm) to the
and the ATPC lower threshold and 10
dB.
l You can set the ATPC upper threshold
only when ATPC Automatic
Threshold(dBm) is set to Disabled.
ATPC Automatic
Threshold Enable
Status
Enabled
Disabled
ATPC automatic threshold function is
enabled.
l If ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable
Status is set to Enabled, the equipment
automatically uses the preset ATPC
upper and lower thresholds according to
the work mode of the radio link.
l If ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable
Status is set to Disabled, you need to
manually set ATPC Upper Automatic
Threshold(dBm) and ATPC Lower
Automatic Threshold(dBm).
ATPC Upper
Automatic
Threshold(dBm)
- - l This parameter indicates that the
ATPC upper and lower thresholds.
l This parameter is valid only when ATPC
Automatic Threshold Enable Status is
set to Enabled.
ATPC Lower
Automatic
Threshold(dBm)
- -

This section describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes.
Navigation Path
l In the NE Explorer, select the IF board, and then choose Configuration > IF Interface
l Click the AM Advanced Attributes tab.
A-139
Parameters
IF interface.
Modulation Mode - - Displays the modulation schemes.
E1 Capacity - - l You can specify the number of E1s that
can be transmitted in intermediate
modulation scheme, by setting the
advanced attributes correspondingly.
l Generally, it is recommended that this
parameter takes the default value. To
ensure that a specific number of E1s can
be transmitted in intermediate
modulation scheme, adjust the E1
capacity in each modulation scheme
according to the network planning
information.
l If the E1 priority function is enabled, the
maximum number of allowed E1
services in the current mode = Min
{[Bandwidth of the air interface in the
current mode - (Bandwidth for the
assured capacity - Assured E1 number x
2Mbps)]/2Mbps, E1 number in the
highest-gain modulation mode}.
Data Service
Bandwidth(Mbit/
s)
- - Displays the data service bandwidth.

A.5.5.4 Parameter Description: ATPC Adjustment Records
This topic describes the parameters that are related to ATPC adjustment records.
Navigation Path
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > ATPC Adjustment Records from the Function Tree.
Parameters
Port - - This parameter indicates the port for the
ATPC adjustment.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Event NO. - - This parameter indicates the number of the
ATPC adjustment event.
Adjustment Time - - This parameter indicates the time of the
ATPC adjustment.
Adjustment
Direction
- - This parameter indicates the direction of the
adjustment at the port.
Switchover - - This parameter indicates the switching
operation at the port.
Transmitted
Power(dBm)
- - This parameter indicates the transmitted
power of the port to be switched.
Received Power
(dBm)
- - This parameter indicates the received power
of the port to be switched.

test.
Navigation Path
Configuration > PRBS Test from the Function Tree.
Parameters
PRBS test.
Direction Cross
Tributary
Cross l This parameter indicates or specifies the
direction of the PRBS test.
l In the tributary direction, the PRBS test
is performed to check the connectivity of
the cable from the tributary board to the
DDF.
l In the cross-connect direction, the PRBS
test is performed to check the processing
of the service from the tributary board to
the NE at the remote end.
Duration 1 to 255 1 This parameter indicates or specifies the
duration of the PRBS test.
A-141
Measured Time s
10min
h
s This parameter indicates or specifies the
time unit used for the PRBS test.
Start Time - - This parameter indicates the start time of the
PRBS test.
Progress - - This parameter indicates the progress
percentage of the PRBS test.
Total PRBS - - This parameter indicates the number of bit
errors that occur in the PRBS test.
Accumulating
Mode
Selected
Deselected
Deselected This parameter specifies whether to display
the values in accumulative mode. If
Accumulating Mode is selected, it
indicates that the values are displayed in
accumulative mode.

A.5.6 ODU Parameters
This topic describes parameters that are related to ODUs.
A.5.6.1 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Radio Frequency Attribute
This topic describes the parameters that are related to radio frequency attributes of an ODU.
A.5.6.2 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Power Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the power attributes of the
ODU.
A.5.6.3 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Equipment Information
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the equipment information of
the ODU.
A.5.6.4 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Advanced Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes of the
ODU.
A.5.6.1 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Radio Frequency Attribute
This topic describes the parameters that are related to radio frequency attributes of an ODU.
Navigation Path
l Select the ODU from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > ODU
Interface from the Function Tree.
l Click the Radio Frequency Attributes tab.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameters
Board - - This parameter indicates the corresponding
ODU.
Transmit
Frequency(MHz)
the central frequency of the channel.
l The value of Transmit Frequency
(MHz) must not be less than the sum of
the minimum transmit frequency
channel spacing, and must not be more
than the difference between the
maximum transmit frequency supported
by the ODU and a half of the channel
spacing.
frequencies at both ends of a radio link
should be one T/R spacing.
T/R Spacing(MHz) - - l This parameter indicates or specifies the
spacing between the transmit frequency
and receive frequency of the ODU to
prevent mutual interference of the
transmitter and receiver.
l If the ODU is a Tx high station, the
transmit frequency is one T/R spacing
higher than the receive frequency. If the
ODU is a Tx low station, the transmit
frequency is one T/R spacing lower than
the receive frequency.
spacing, T/R Spacing(MHz) is set to 0,
indicating that the T/R spacing supported
by the ODU is used.
by the ODU itself, and T/R Spacing
(MHz) should be set according to the
technical specifications of the ODU.
set to the same value at both ends of a
radio link.
Actual Transmit
Frequency(MHz)
- - This parameter indicates the actual transmit
A-143
Actual Receive
Frequency(MHz)
Actual T/R
Spacing(MHz)
- - This parameter indicates the actual T/R
spacing of the ODU.
The range of
frequency point
(MHz)
- - This parameter indicates the working range
of the frequency of the ODU.

A.5.6.2 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Power Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the power attributes of the
ODU.
Navigation Path
l Click the Power Attributes tab.
Parameters
ODU.
Maximum
Transmit Power
(dBm)
- - l Maximum Transmit Power(dBm) is
set according to the planning
information. This parameter specifies
the maximum transmit power of the
ODU. This parameter cannot be set to a
value that exceeds the nominal power
rang of the ODU in the guaranteed
capacity modulation module.
exceed Maximum Transmit Power
(dBm).
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Transmit Power
(dBm)
- - l Transmit Power(dBm) is set according
to the planning information. This
parameter specifies the transmit power
of the ODU. This parameter cannot be set
to a value that exceeds the nominal
power rang of the ODU or a value that
exceeds Maximum Transmit Power
(dBm).
Power to Be
Received(dBm)
-90.0 to -20.0 -10.0 l Power to Be Received(dBm) is used to
set the expected receive power of the
ODU and is mainly used in the antenna
alignment stage. After this parameter is
set, the NE automatically enables the
antenna misalignment indicating
function.
l Power to Be Received(dBm) is set
according to the planning information.
When this parameter takes the default
TX High
Threshold(dBm)
- - l If the value of the actual transmit power
of the ODU is greater than the preset
value of TX High Threshold(dBm), the
system separately records the duration
when the value of the actual transmit
power of the ODU is greater than the
A-145
TX Low Threshold
(dBm)
- - preset value of TX High Threshold
(dBm) and the duration when the value
of the actual transmit power of the ODU
is greater than the preset value of TX
Low Threshold(dBm) in the
performance events.
l If the value of the actual transmit power
value of TX Low Threshold(dBm) and
is lower than the preset value of TX High
Threshold(dBm), the system records
the duration when the value of the actual
transmit power of the ODU is greater
than the preset value of TX Low
Threshold(dBm) in the performance
events.
l If the value of the actual transmit power
of the ODU is lower than the preset value
of TX Low Threshold(dBm), the
system does not record it.
l TX High Threshold(dBm) and TX
Low Threshold(dBm) are valid only
when the ATPC function is enabled.
RX High
Threshold(dBm)
- - l If the value of the actual receive power
of the ODU is lower than the preset value
of RX Low Threshold(dBm), the
system records the duration when the
value of the actual receive power of the
ODU is lower than the preset value of
RX Low Threshold(dBm) and duration
when the value of the actual transmit
power of the ODU is lower than the
preset value of RX High Threshold
(dBm)in the performance events.
l If the value of the actual receive power
value of RX Low Threshold(dBm) and
is lower than the preset value of RX High
Threshold(dBm), the system records
the duration when the value of the actual
receive power of the ODU is Lower than
the preset value of RX High Threshold
(dBm) in the performance events.
l If the value of the actual receive power
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
RX Low Threshold
(dBm)
- - value of RX High Threshold(dBm), the
system does not record it.
Actual Transmit
Power(dBm)
- - l This parameter indicates the actual
l If the ATPC function is enabled, the
queried actual transmit power may be
different from the preset value.
Actual Receive
Power(dBm)
power of the ODU.
Actual range of
Power(dBm)
- - This parameter indicates the range of the
actual transmit power of the ODU.
Transmission
Power Type

A.5.6.3 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Equipment Information
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the equipment information of
the ODU.
Navigation Path
Configuration > ODU Interface from the Function Tree.
l Click the Equipment Information tab.
A-147
Parameters
ODU.
Frequency(GHz) - - This parameter indicates the frequency band
where the ODU operates.
Equipment Type - - l This parameter indicates the equipment
type of the ODU.
l PDH and SDH indicate the transmission
capacity only and are irrelevant to the
type of transmitted service.
T/R Spacing(MHz) - - This parameter indicates the T/R spacing of
the ODU.
Intermediate
Frequency
Bandwidth (MHz)
- - This parameter indicates the IF frequency
bandwidth of the ODU.
IF Bandwidth
Type
- - Displays the IF bandwidth type.
Station Type - - l This parameter indicates whether the
ODU is a Tx high station or a Tx low
station.
l The transmit frequency of a Tx high
station is one T/R spacing higher than the
transmit frequency of a Tx low station.
Transmission
Power Type
Produce Time - - This parameter indicates the manufacturing
time of the ODU.
Produce SN - - This parameter indicates the manufacturing
serial number and the manufacturer code of
the ODU.

A.5.6.4 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Advanced Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes of the
ODU.
Navigation Path
l Click the Advanced Attributes tab.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameters
ODU.
RF Loopback Non-Loopback
Inloop
loopback status of the RF interface of the
ODU.
loopback is canceled or not performed.
l Inloop indicates that the RF signals
looped back.
l RF Loopback function is used for fault
locating for the RF interfaces. The RF
Loopback function is used for diagnosis
and may affect the services that are
transmitted over the interfaces. Hence,
exercise precaution before starting this
function.
l In normal cases, RF Loopback is set to
Non-Loopback.
Configure
Transmission
Status
unmute
mute
unmute l This parameter indicates or specifies the
l If Configure Transmission Status is set
to mute, the transmitter of the ODU does
not work but can normally receive
microwave signals.
l If Configure Transmission Status is set
to unmute, the ODU can normally
transmit and receive microwave signals.
l In normal cases, Configure
Transmission Status is set to unmute.
Actual
Transmission
Status
- - Displays the ODU manufacturer
information.
Factory
Information
- - This parameter indicates the manufacturer
information about the ODU.
Remarks - - Specifies the remarks of the ODU.

A.5.7 Parameters for SDH Interface Boards
This topic describes parameters that are related to SDH interface boards.
A-149
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the SDH interfaces.
A.5.7.2 Parameter Description: Automatic Laser Shutdown
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the automatic laser shutdown (ALS)
function.
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the SDH interfaces.
Navigation Path
1. Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Select By Board/Port(Channel), and select Port or VC4 Channel from the list box.
Parameters
SDH interface.
Optical Interface
Name
a
- - This parameter indicates or specifies the
name of the optical interface.
Laser Switch
a
On
Off
On l This parameter indicates or specifies the
on/off state of the laser.
l This parameter is set for SDH optical
interfaces only.
On.
Optical(Electrical)
Interface
Loopback
a
Non-Loopback
Inloop
Outloop
loopback status on the SDH interface.
l Inloop indicates that the SDH signals
looped back.
l Outloop indicates that the received SDH
l This function is used for fault locating
for the SDH interfaces. The Optical
(Electrical) Interface Loopback
function is used for diagnosis and may
affect the services that are transmitted
over the interfaces. Hence, exercise
precaution before starting this function.
Non-Loopback.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
VC4 Loopback
b
Non-Loopback
Inloop
Outloop
loopback status in the VC-4 path.
l Inloop indicates that the VC-4 signals
looped back.
l Outloop indicates that the received
VC-4 signals are looped back.
for the VC-4 paths. The VC4
Loopback function is used for diagnosis
and may affect the services that are
transmitted over the interfaces. Hence,
exercise precaution before starting this
function.
Non-Loopback.

NOTE
l a: Indicates the parameters that are supported when Port is selected from the list box.
l b: Indicates the parameters that are supported when VC4 Channel is selected from the list box.
A.5.7.2 Parameter Description: Automatic Laser Shutdown
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the automatic laser shutdown (ALS)
function.
Navigation Path
Configuration > Automatic Laser Shutdown from the Function Tree.
Parameters
Optical Interface - - This parameter indicates the corresponding
optical interface.
A-151
Auto Shutdown Disabled
Enabled
whether the Auto Laser Shutdown
function is enabled or disabled for the
laser.
l The ALS function allows the laser to shut
down automatically when an optical port
does not carry services, an optical fiber
is broken, or no optical signal is received.
l You can set On Period(ms), Off Period
(ms), and Continuously On-test Period
(ms) only when this parameter is set to
Enabled.
On Period(ms) 1000 to 3000 2000 This parameter indicates or specifies the
period when a shutdown laser automatically
starts up and tests whether the optical fiber
is normal.
Off Period(ms) 2000 to 300000 60000 This parameter indicates or specifies the
period when the laser does not work (with
the ALS function being enabled).
Continuously On-
test Period(ms)
2000 to 300000 90000 This parameter indicates or specifies the
period when a shutdown laser is manually
started up and tests whether the optical fiber
is normal.

A.5.8 Parameters for PDH Interface Boards
This topic describes parameters that are related to PDH interface boards.
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the PDH interfaces.
test.
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the PDH interfaces.
Navigation Path
Configuration > PDH Interface from the Function Tree.
2. Select By Board/Port(Channel).
3. Select Port from the list box.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameters
port.
Port Name - - This parameter indicates or specifies the
name of the port.
Tributary
Loopback
Non-Loopback
Inloop
Outloop
loopback status in the associated path of
the tributary unit.
l Inloop indicates that the PDH signals
looped back.
l Outloop indicates that the received PDH
for the paths of the tributary unit. The
Tributary Loopback function is used
for diagnosis and may affect the services
that are transmitted over the interfaces.
Hence, exercise precaution before
starting this function.
Non-Loopback.
Port Impedance - - This parameter indicates the impedance of a
path, which depends on the tributary unit.
Service Load
Indication
Load
Non-Loaded
Load l This parameter indicates or specifies the
service loading status in a specific path.
l When this parameter is set to Load, the
board detects whether alarms exist in the
path.
Loaded, the board does not detect
whether there are alarms in the path.
l If a path does not carry any services, you
can set this parameter to Non-Loaded
for the path to mask all the alarms. If a
path carries services, you need to set this
parameter to Load for the path.
A-153
Retiming Mode Normal
Retiming Mode of
Tributary Clock
Retiming Mode of
Cross-Connect
Clock
Normal l This parameter indicates or specifies the
retiming mode of a specific path.
l By using the retiming function, the
retiming reference signal from the SDH
network and the service data signal are
combined and then sent to the client
equipment, thus decreasing the output
jitter in the signal. In this way, the
retiming function ensures that the service
code flow can normally transfer the
retiming reference signal.
l When this parameter is set to Normal,
the retiming function is not used.
l When this parameter is set to Retiming
Mode of Tributary Clock, the retiming
function is used with the clock of the
upstream tributary unit traced.
l When this parameter is set to Retiming
Mode of Cross-Connect Clock, the
retiming function is used with the clock
of the cross-connect unit traced.
l It is recommended that the external
clock, instead of the retiming function,
should be used to provide reference
clock signals for the equipment.
l If the retiming function is required, it is
recommended that you set this parameter
to Retiming Mode of Cross-connect
Clock.
Port Service Type - - This parameter indicates the type of services
that are processed in a path. It depends on
the services that are transmitted in a path.
Input Signal
Equalization
Unequalized
Equalized
Unequalized l This parameter indicates whether the
input signals are equalized.
parameter to default value.
Output Signal
Equalization
Unequalized
Equalized
Unequalized l This parameter indicates whether the
output signals are equalized.
default value.

test.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Navigation Path
Configuration > PRBS Test from the Function Tree.
Parameters
PRBS test.
Direction Cross
Tributary
Cross l This parameter indicates or specifies the
direction of the PRBS test.
l In the tributary direction, the PRBS test
is performed to check the connectivity of
the cable from the tributary board to the
DDF.
l In the cross-connect direction, the PRBS
test is performed to check the processing
of the service from the tributary board to
the NE at the remote end.
Duration 1 to 255 1 This parameter indicates or specifies the
duration of the PRBS test.
Measured Time s
10min
h
s This parameter indicates or specifies the
time unit used for the PRBS test.
Start Time - - This parameter indicates the start time of the
PRBS test.
Progress - - This parameter indicates the progress
percentage of the PRBS test.
Total PRBS - - This parameter indicates the number of bit
errors that occur in the PRBS test.
Accumulating
Mode
Selected
Deselected
Deselected This parameter specifies whether to display
the values in accumulative mode. If
Accumulating Mode is selected, it
indicates that the values are displayed in
accumulative mode.

A.5.9 Parameters for Overhead
This topic describes the parameters that are related to overhead.
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the regenerator section overheads
(RSOHs).
A-155
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the VC-4 path overheads (POHs).
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the regenerator section overheads
(RSOHs).
Navigation Path
1. Select an SDH interface board in the NE Explorer Choose Configuration > Overhead
Management > Regenerator Section Overhead from the Function Tree.
2. Choose Display in Text Format or Display in Hexadecimal.
Parameters for Setting the Display Format
Display in Text
Format
Selected
Deselected
Selected This parameter specifies the display in the
text format.
Display in
Hexadecimal
Selected
Deselected
Deselected This parameter specifies the display in the
hexadecimal format.

Object - - This parameter indicates the object to be set.
J0 to be Sent
([Mode]Content)
- [16 Bytes]HuaWei
SBS
If the NE at the opposite end reports the
J0_MM alarm, this parameter is set
according to the J0 byte to be received at the
opposite end.
J0 to be Received
([Mode]Content)
- [Disabled] l This parameter specifies the J0 byte to be
received.
l If this parameter is set to [Disabled], the
board does not monitor the received J0
byte.
default value.
J0 Received
([Mode]Content)
- - This parameter indicates the J0 byte that is
actually received.

Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Navigation Path
1. Select SDH interface board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > Overhead Management > VC4 Path Overhead from the Function Tree.
Display in Text
Format
Selected
Deselected
text format.
Display in
Hexadecimal
Selected
Deselected
hexadecimal format.

Parameters for the Trace Byte J1
J1 to be Sent
([Mode]Content)
- [16 Bytes]HuaWei
SBS
HP_TIM or LP_TIM alarm, this parameter
is set according to the J1 byte to be received
at the opposite end.
J1 to be Received
([Mode]Content)
- [Disabled] l If this parameter is set to [Disabled], the
byte.
default value.
J1 Received
([Mode]Content)
- - This parameter displays the J1 byte that is
actually received.

Parameters for the Signal Flag C2
A-157
C2 to be Sent - - If the NE at the opposite end reports the
HP_SLM alarm, this parameter is set
according to the C2 byte to be received at the
opposite end.
C2 to be Received - - If the NE at the local end reports the
HP_SLM alarm, this parameter is set
according to the C2 byte to be sent at the
opposite end.
C2 Received - - This parameter displays the C2 byte that is
actually received.

Parameters for Overhead Termination
VC4 Overhead
Termination
Termination
Pass-Through
Auto
Auto l If this parameter is set to Pass-
Through, the NE forwards the original
overhead after monitoring the VC-4 path
overhead regardless of the C2 byte.
l If this parameter is set to Termination,
the NE generates the new VC-4 path
overhead according to the board setting
after monitoring the VC-4 path overhead
regardless of the C2 byte.
l If this parameter is set to Auto, the VC-4
path overhead in the VC-4 pass-through
service is passed through, and the VC-4
path overhead in the VC-12 service is
terminated.
default value.

Navigation Path
Configuration > Overhead Management > VC12 Path Overhead from the Function
Tree.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Display in Text
Format
Selected
Deselected
text format.
Display in
Hexadecimal
Selected
Deselected
hexadecimal format.

Parameters for the Trace Byte
J2 to be Sent - [16 Bytes]HuaWei
SBS
LP_TIM or LP_TIM_VC12 alarm, this
parameter is set according to the J2 byte to
be received by the NE at the opposite end.
J2 to be Received - [Disabled] l If this parameter is set to [Disabled], the
byte.
default value.
NOTE
IF boards do not support this parameter.
J2 Received - - This parameter displays the J2 byte that is
actually received.

A.6 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet Features
on the Packet Plane
packet plane, including service parameters, protocol parameters, OAM parameters, Ethernet port
parameters, and QoS parameters.
A.6.1 Parameters for Ethernet Services
This topic describes the parameters that are related to Ethernet services.
A.6.2 Parameters for Ethernet Protocols
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Ethernet protocol.
A.6.3 Parameters for the Ethernet OAM
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Ethernet operation, administration and
maintenance (OAM).
A.6.4 QoS Parameters
A-159
This topic describes the parameters that are related to QoS.
This topic describes the parameters that are related to Ethernet services.
A.6.1.1 Parameter Description: E-Line Service_Creation
This topic describes the interface parameters that are used for creating an Ethernet line (E-Line)
service.
A.6.1.2 Parameter Description: E-Line Service
This topic describes the parameters that are related to E-Line services.
A.6.1.3 Parameter Description: VLAN Forwarding Table Item_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating VLAN forwarding table items.
A.6.1.4 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an Ethernet local area network (E-
LAN) service.
A.6.1.5 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service
This topic describes the parameters that are related to E-LAN services.
A.6.1.6 Parameter Description: QinQ Link_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a QinQ link.
A.6.1.1 Parameter Description: E-Line Service_Creation
This topic describes the interface parameters that are used for creating an Ethernet line (E-Line)
service.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree.
2. Click Create.
Table A-4 Service direction of UNI-UNI
Service ID 1 to 4294967294 - This parameter specifies
the ID of the E-Line
service.
Service Name - - This parameter specifies
the name of the E-Line
service.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Direction UNI-UNI
UNI-NNI
NNI-NNI
UNI-UNI l This parameter
specifies the direction
of the E-Line service.
l Set this parameter to
UNI-UNI.
BPDU Not Transparently
Transmitted
Transparently
Transmitted
Not Transparently
Transmitted
l This parameter
specifies the
transparent
transmission ID of the
bridge protocol data
unit (BPDU) packets.
It is used to indicate
whether the E-Line
service transparently
transmits the BPDU
packets.
l If the BPDU packets
are used as the service
packets and
transparently
transmitted to the
opposite end, set this
parameter to
Transparently
Transmitted. That is,
the parameter value
Transparently
Transmitted takes
effect only if
Encapsulation Type
of the source and sink
ports of the E-Line
service are Null.
l In other cases, set this
parameter to Not
Transparently
Transmitted.
according to the
MTU(bytes) - - This parameter cannot be
set here.
Service Tag Role - - The OptiX RTN 950 does
not support this
parameter.
A-161
Source Port - - l Before setting this
parameter, check and
ensure that the
attributes in Ethernet
Interface of the port
are set correctly and
are the same as the
l The value of this
parameter cannot be
the same as the value
of sink port.
l The value of this
parameter cannot be
used for the E-LAN
port.
according to the
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Source VLANs 1 to 4094 - l This parameter can be
set to null, a number,
or several numbers.
When setting this
parameter to several
numbers, use the
comma (,) to separate
the discrete numbers,
or use the endash (-) to
represent a
consecutive number.
For example, the
numbers 1, and 3-6
indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and
6.
l The number and value
of VLANs must be the
same value of Sink
VLANs.
to null, all the services
at the source port are
used as the service
source.
l If this parameter is not
set to null, only the
service that contains
the VLAN ID at the
source port can be used
as the service source.
A-163
Sink Port - - l Before setting this
ensure that the
are the same as the
l The value of this
parameter cannot be
of Source Port.
l The value of this
parameter cannot be
used for the E-LAN
port.
according to the
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Sink VLANs 1 to 4094 - l This parameter can be
or several numbers.
When setting this
numbers, use the
represent a
consecutive number.
For example, the
numbers 1, and 3-6
6.
l The number and value
of VLANs must be the
same value of Source
VLANs.
at the sink port are
used as the service
sink.
the VLAN ID at the
sink port can be used
as the service sink.

Table A-5 Service direction of UNI-NNI (carried by PWs)
service.
service.
Direction UNI-UNI
UNI-NNI
NNI-NNI
UNI-NNI.
A-165
Transmitted
Transparently
Transmitted
Not Transparently
Transmitted
For UNI-NNI ETH
PWE3 services, the
parameter value is always
Not Transparently
Transmitted.
set here.
not support this
parameter.
ensure that the
are the same as the
l The value of this
parameter cannot be
of sink port.
l The value of this
parameter cannot be
used for the E-LAN
port.
according to the
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
or several numbers.
When setting this
numbers, use the
represent a
consecutive number.
For example, the
numbers 1, and 3-6
6.
used as the service
source.
the VLAN ID at the
source port can be
used as the service
source.
PRI - - The OptiX RTN 950 does
not support this
parameter.
Bearer Type QinQ Link
PW
PW For UNI-NNI ETH
PWE3 services, the
parameter value is always
PW.
A-167
Protection Type No Protection
PW APS
Slave Protection Pair
No Protection l If this parameter is set
to PW APS, working
and protection PWs
need to be configured.
to Slave Protection
Pair, you need to bind
the slave PW APS
protection group with
the master PW APS
protection group. The
switching of the
master PW APS
protection group
triggers the switching
of the slave PW APS
protection group
simultaneously.

Table A-6 Service direction of UNI-NNI (carried by QinQ links)
service.
service.
Direction UNI-UNI
UNI-NNI
NNI-NNI
UNI-NNI.
Transmitted
Transparently
Transmitted
Not Transparently
Transmitted
For UNI-NNI QinQ
services, the parameter
value is always Not
Transparently
Transmitted.
set here.
not support this
parameter.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
ensure that the
are the same as the
l The value of this
parameter cannot be
of sink port.
l The value of this
parameter cannot be
used for the E-LAN
port.
according to the
or several numbers.
When setting this
numbers, use the
represent a
consecutive number.
For example, the
numbers 1, and 3-6
6.
used as the service
source.
the VLAN ID at the
source port can be used
as the service source.
A-169
not support this
parameter.
Bearer Type QinQ Link
PW
PW For NNI-NNI QinQ
value is always QinQ
Link.
QinQ Link ID - - Selects or specifies the ID
of a QinQ link. You can
create a QinQ link or
select an existing QinQ
link.

Table A-7 Service direction of NNI-NNI
service.
service.
Direction UNI-UNI
UNI-NNI
NNI-NNI
NNI-NNI.
Transmitted
Transparently
Transmitted
Not Transparently
Transmitted
For NNI-NNI QinQ
value is always
Not Transparently
Transmitted
.
set here.
not support this
parameter.
not support this
parameter.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Bearer Type 1 QinQ Link QinQ Link Uses the QinQ link to
carry the E-Line service.
QinQ Link ID 1 - - l Selects the QinQ link
ID of the first QinQ
link.
l The QinQ link ID is
preset in QinQ Link.
Bearer Type 2 QinQ Link QinQ Link Uses the QinQ link to
carry the E-Line service.
QinQ Link ID 2 - - l Selects the QinQ link
ID of the second QinQ
link.
l The QinQ link ID is
QinQ Link ID - - Selects or specifies the ID
of a QinQ link. You can
create a QinQ link or
select an existing QinQ
link.

Parameters of PWs
NOTE
l Parameters of PWs need to be configured only when Direction is UNI-NNI and Bearer Type is PW.
l If the parameter Protection Type of PWs is set to PW APS or Slave Protection Pair, all the parameters
of working and protection PWs need to be configured. This section considers the parameters of the working
PW as an example.
PW ID - - Specifies the ID of the PW
that carries services.
PW Signaling Type Static Static Labels for static PWs need
to be manually assigned.
A-171
PW Type Ethernet
Ethernet Tagged Mode
Ethernet l Specifies the type of
the PW.
l PW Type indicates
whether P-TAG is
added to Ethernet
frames that are
encapsulated for
transmission on PWs.
If it is not required to
add VLAN IDs, set this
parameter to
Ethernet. If it is
required to add VLAN
IDs, set this parameter
to Ethernet Tagged
Mode and then set
Request VLAN in the
Advanced Attributes
tab.
PW Direction Bidirectional Bidirectional Displays the direction of
the PW.
PW Encapsulation Type MPLS MPLS Displays the
encapsulation type of the
packets on the PW.
PW Ingress Label/
Source Port
16 to 1048575 - Specifies the PW Ingress
label.
PW Egress Label/Sink
Port
16 to 1048575 - Specifies the PW Egress
label.
Tunnel selection mode - - Displays the method to
select tunnels.
Tunnel Type MPLS MPLS Displays the type of the
tunnel that carries the PW.
Tunnel - - A tunnel needs to be
selected. If no tunnel is
available, creation of a
PW will fail.
Egress Tunnel - - For a bidirectional tunnel,
the system will configure
the egress tunnel
automatically.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Peer LSR ID - - Specifies the LSR ID of
the PW at the remote end.
If an existing tunnel is
selected, the LSR ID will
be automatically assigned.

QoS Parameters (PW)
NOTE
QoS parameters need to be configured only when Direction is UNI-NNI and Bearer Type is PW.
Bandwidth Limit - - Specifies whether the
bandwidth limit function
is enabled.
l This function limits the
bandwidth of one or
more PWs in an MPLS
tunnel.
l An ETH PWE3 service
corresponds to a PW.
Therefore, this
function can also limit
the bandwidth of ETH
PWE3 services in an
MPLS tunnel.
Policy - - The OptiX RTN 950 does
CIR(Kbit/s) - - Specifies the committed
information rate (CIR) of
a PW.
It is recommended that
you set this parameter to
the same value as PIR.
CBS(byte) - - Specifies the committed
burst size (CBS) of a PW.
PIR(Kbit/s) - - Specifies the peak
information rate (PIR) of a
PW.
the same value as CIR.
A-173
PBS(byte) - - Specifies the peak burst
size (PBS) of a PW.
EXP - - The OptiX RTN 950 does
LSP Mode Pipe Pipe Pipe: When stripping
MPLS tunnel labels from
packets, an egress node
does not update the
scheduling priority for the
packets.

Parameters of Advanced Attributes (PW)
Control Word No Use No Use For ETH PWE3 services,
the parameter value is
always No Use.
Control Channel Type None
Alert Label
Alert Label l Specifies the mode of
PW connectivity
check.
l None indicates that
VCCV is not used.
l Alert Label indicates
VCCV packets in
Alert Label
encapsulation mode.
VCCV Verification
Mode
Ping
None
Ping l Specifies the VCCV
verification mode. The
VCCV verification is
used for PW
connectivity check.
l If the VCCV-Ping test
is required, do not set
this parameter to
None.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Request VLAN - - l Set this parameter
when PW Type is
Ethernet Tagged
Mode.
l If the received packets
do not carry any
VLAN IDs, the PW
will add VLAN IDs to
the packets as required
by the setting of this
parameter.
TPID - - The OptiX RTN 950 does
not support request VLAN
TPID of the PW level.

Protection Group Parameters (PW APS)
NOTE
The parameters of the PW APS protection group need to be configured if the Protection Type of PWs is set to
PW APS.
Protection Type - - Specifies the protection
type.
Protection Group ID - - Specifies the protection
group ID.
Enabling Status Disabled
Enabled
Disabled l Specifies the enabling
status of the PW
protection group.
l During the creation of
a protection group, set
Enabling Status to
Disabled. After the
APS protection group
is configured at both
ends, set Enabling
Status to Enabled.
Protection Mode - - Displays the protection
mode.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950
supports 1:1 protection
mode.
A-175
Working PW ID - - Displays the ID of the
working PW.
Protection PW ID - - Displays the ID of the
protection PW.
Switching Mode - - Displays the switching
mode to be used when a
PW fails.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950
supports dual-ended
switching.
Revertive Mode Non-revertive
Revertive
Revertive l This parameter
switch services back to
the original working
PW after it recovers.
l The value Revertive
indicates that services
are switched to the
original working PW
and the value Non-
revertive indicates
that services are not
switched to the
original working PW.
l The value Revertive is
recommended.
Switchover Restoration
Time(min)
1 to 12 1 l Specifies the WTR
time of the protection
group.
l When the preset WTR
time expires after the
original working PW
recovers, services are
switched to the
l This parameter is
available only when
Restoration Mode is
Revertive.
l The default value is
recommended.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Switchover Delay Time
(100ms)
0 to 100 0 l Specifies the hold-off
group.
to a value other than 0,
the protection group
does not trigger
switching once it
detects faults, but waits
until the hold-off time
expires, and then
detects whether any
faults persist. If any
faults persist, the
switching is triggered;
otherwise, no
switching is triggered.
recommended.
Detection mode - - Displays the detection
mode of the PW APS
protection group.

OAM Parameters
NOTE
l The OAM parameters of the PW APS protection group need to be configured if the Protection Type of
PWs is set to PW APS.
l To configure PW OAM parameters, choose Configuration > MPLS Management > PW Management >
PW OAM Parameter from the Function Tree.
OAM Status - - Displays the enabling
status of PW OAM.
A-177
Detection Mode Auto-Sensing
Manual
Auto-Sensing l Specifies the detection
mode of OAM packets.
l Manual: The
connectivity check
(CC) packets are sent
at the interval specified
by the user.
l Auto-Sensing: The
connectivity check
at the interval of
receiving PW OAM
packets.
l If Detection Mode is
set to Manual, you
need to set the PW
OAM detection
packets to be received
and transmitted.
l The value Auto-
Sensing is
recommended.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Detection Packet Type CV
FFD
CV l CV: The detection
packets are sent at a
fixed interval.
l FFD: The detection
packets are sent at the
interval specified by
the user.
set to Auto-Sensing,
this parameter
specifies the PW OAM
detection packets to be
transmitted.
set to Manual, this
parameter specifies the
PW OAM detection
and transmitted.
l The value FFD is
assumed for PW APS
and the value CV is
assumed for
continuous
connectivity check on
PWs.
Detection Packet Period
(ms)
3.3
10
20
50
100
200
500
50 l Specifies the period of
detection packets.
l This parameter is
configurable when
Detection Packet
Type is FFD and
assumes the fixed
value of 1000 when
Detection Packet
Type is CV.
3.3 for PW APS.
LSR ID to be Received - - Specifies the LSR ID to be
received.
PW ID to be Received - - Specifies the PW ID to be
received.

A-179
Protection Group Parameters (Slave Protection Pair)
NOTE
Slave Protection Pair.
mode.
Protection Group ID - - Specifies the ID of the
slave protection pair. The
switching of the master
PW APS protection group
triggers the switching of
the slave PW APS
protection group
simultaneously.
working PW in the slave
protection pair.
protection PW in the slave
protection pair.

A.6.1.2 Parameter Description: E-Line Service
This topic describes the parameters that are related to E-Line services.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service ID 1 to 4294967294 - This parameter indicates
service.
Service Name - - This parameter indicates
or specifies the name of
the E-Line service.
Source Node - - This parameter indicates
the source node.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Sink Node - - This parameter indicates
the sink node.
not support this
parameter.
MTU(byte) - - This parameter cannot be
queried here.
Transmitted
Transparently
Transmitted
the transparent
transmission tag of the
bridge protocol data unit
(BPDU) packets. This
parameter is used to
indicate whether the
Ethernet line
transparently transmits
the BPDU packets.
Deployment Status - - This parameter indicates
whether E-Line service is
deployed.

Parameters Associated with UNI Ports
the UNI port.
A-181
VLANs 1 to 4094 - This parameter indicates
or specifies the VLAN ID
of the UNI port.
l This parameter can be
or several numbers.
When setting this
numbers, use the
represent a
consecutive number.
For example, the
numbers 1, and 3-6
6.
only when Direction
is set to UNI-UNI or
UNI-NNI in the
process of creating an
E-Line service.
of the UNI work as the
service source or
service sink.
services of the UNI
port whose VLAN IDs
are included in the set
value of this parameter
work as the service
source or service sink.

NNI Parameters (PW)
PW ID - - This parameter displays
the PW ID.
Working Status - - This parameter displays
the working status of a
PW.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Enable Status - - This parameter displays
whether a PW is enabled.
PW Signaling Type - - This parameter displays
the PW signaling type.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950 uses
static PWs only.
PW Type - - This parameter displays
the configured PW type.
PW Direction - - This parameter displays
the direction of the PW.
PW Encapsulation Type - - This parameter displays
the PW encapsulation
type.
NOTE
MPLS only.
PW Ingress Label/
Source Port
- - This parameter displays
the configured PW ingress
label.
Port
the configured PW egress
label.
Tunnel Type MPLS MPLS This parameter displays
the type of the tunnel that
carries a PW.
Peer LSR ID - - This parameter displays
the opposite LSR ID.
Tunnel - - This parameter displays
the tunnel.
Control Word - - For ETH PWE3 services,
always No Use.
Control Channel Type - - This parameter displays
the control channel type.
VCCV Verification
Mode
the VCCV mode.
Local Working Status - - Displays the working
status of the PW at the
local end.
A-183
Remote Working Status - - This parameter displays
the working status of the
PW at the remote end.
Compositive Working
Status
the comprehensive
working status of the PW.
Request VLAN - - This parameter displays
the request VLAN.
Deployment Status - - This parameter displays
the deployment status.
Tunnel Automatic
Selection Policy
the automatic tunnel
selection policy.
not support request
VLAN TPID of the PW
level.

Parameters Associated with NNI Ports
QinQ Link ID 1 to 4294967295 - l This parameter
indicates the QinQ link
ID of the QinQ link
connected to the NNI
port.
only when Direction
UNI-NNI in the
E-Line service.
Port - - l This parameter
indicates the NNI port.
only when Direction
UNI-NNI in the
E-Line service.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
S-VLAN ID - - l This parameter
indicates or specifies
the VLAN ID of the
NNI port.
only when Direction
is set to UNI-NNI or
NNI-NNI in the
E-Line service.
l This parameter is

QoS Parameters
PW ID - - This parameter displays
the PW ID.
Direction - - l This parameter
displays the direction
of the PW.
l Egress indicates the
egress direction of the
PW.
l Ingress indicates the
ingress direction of the
PW.
A-185
Bandwidth Limit - - This parameter displays or
is enabled for a PW to
prevent network
congestion.
l Regarding
transmission channels,
this function can be
used to limit the
bandwidth of one or
more PWs in an MPLS
tunnel.
l An ETH PWE3
service corresponds to
a PW. Therefore, this
PWE3 services in an
MPLS tunnel.
not support this
parameter.
CIR (Kbit/s) - - This parameter displays or
specifies the committed
a PW.
CBS (kbyte) - - This parameter displays or
specifies the committed
PIR (kbit/s) - - This parameter displays or
specifies the peak
information rate (PIR) of
a PW.
PBS (kbyte) - - This parameter displays or
specifies the peak burst
size (PBS) of a PW.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
not support this
parameter.
does not update the
packets.

Parameters for the Port Attributes
Port - - Displays the port
information.
Enable Port - - l This parameter
indicates whether to
enable the port.
l This parameter is
preset in General
Attributes of
Ethernet Interface.
A-187
Encapsulation Type Null
802.1Q
QinQ
- l This parameter
indicates the
encapsulation type of
the port.
only when Direction
UNI-NNI in the
E-Line service.
to Null, the port
transparently
transmits the received
packets.
to 802.1Q, the port
IEEE 802.1Q
standard.
to QinQ, the port
IEEE 802.1 QinQ
standard.
l This parameter is
preset in General
Attributes of
Ethernet Interface.
TAG Tag Aware
Access
Hybrid
- l This parameter
displays the tag of the
port.
l This parameter is
preset in Layer 2
Attributes of
Ethernet Interface .

NOTE
The following parameters are available only after the PW APS protection group is configured.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Protection Group ID - - Displays the ID of the
protection group to be
created.
working PW.
protection PW.
mode.
Enabling Status Enabled
Disabled
- l Displays or specifies
the enabling status of
the PW protection
group.
Enabling Status to
Disabled. After the
ends, set Enabling
Status to Enabled.
Switchover Mode - - Displays the switching
PW fails.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950
supporting dual-ended
switching.
Restoration Mode Non-revertive
Revertive
- l Specifies whether to
switch services to the
original working PW
after the fault is
rectified.
are switched to the
original working PW
and the value Non-
revertive indicates
switched to the
recommended.
A-189
Time(min)
1 to 12 - l Displays or specifies
the WTR time of the
protection group.
original working PW
switched to the
l This parameter is
available only when
Restoration Mode is
Revertive.
(100ms)
the hold-off time of the
protection group.
does not trigger
switching once it
expires, and then
detects whether any
faults persist, the
otherwise, no
Deployment Status - - Display the deployment
status of the protection
group.
Switchover Status - - Displays the switchover
group.
Protocol Status - - Displays the enabling
status of the protocol.
Working Path Status - - Displays the status of the
current working path.
Protection Path Status - - Display the status of the
current protection path.

Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
NOTE
The following parameters are available only after the slave protection pair is configured.
the slave PW APS
protection group
simultaneously.
protection pair.
protection pair.
DNI PW ID - - Displays the DNI PW ID.
PW Type - - Displays the PW type.
Deployment Status - - Displays the deployment
status of the slave
protection pair.

A.6.1.3 Parameter Description: VLAN Forwarding Table Item_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating VLAN forwarding table items.
Navigation Path
2. Click the VLAN Forwarding Table Item tab.
3. Click New.
Parameters for VLAN Forwarding Table Item
Source Interface Type V-UNI V-UNI This parameter specifies
the network attribute of
the source interface.
Source Interface - - This parameter specifies
the source interface.
A-191
Source VLAN ID 1 to 4094 - This parameter specifies
the VLAN ID of the
source service.
Sink Interface Type V-UNI V-UNI This parameter specifies
the network attribute of
the sink interface.
Sink Interface - - This parameter specifies
the sink interface.
Sink VLAN ID 1 to 4094 - This parameter specifies
the VLAN ID of the sink
service.

NOTE
l The VLAN ID of the UNI-UNI E-Line service can be converted after a VLAN forwarding table item is
created. In this case, a service from Source Interface to Sink Interface carries the VLAN ID specified in
Sink VLAN ID when the service is transmitted from Sink Interface.
l The VLAN ID in a VLAN forwarding table item is converted unidirectionally and can be converted from
Source VLAN ID to Sink VLAN ID only. The VLAN ID can be converted bidirectionally only when the
other VLAN forwarding table item is configured reversely.
l In normal cases, Ethernet services are bidirectional. Hence, you need to set bidirectional conversion of
VLAN IDs.
A.6.1.4 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an Ethernet local area network (E-
LAN) service.
Navigation Path
Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree.
2. Click New.
Service ID 1 to 4294967294 - l This parameter
specifies the ID of the
E-LAN service.
l The OptiX RTN 950
supports simultaneous
creation of an E-LAN
service only.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
the name of the E-LAN
service.
BPDU - - l This parameter
indicates the
transparent
BPDU packets.
l In the case of an E-
LAN service, this
parameter supports
only Not
Transparently
Transmitted and
cannot be set
manually.
l Not Transparently
Transmitted
indicates that the
BPDU packets are
used as the protocol
packets to compute the
spanning tree topology
of the network.
A-193
Tag Type C-Awared
S-Awared
Tag-Transparent
C-Awared l C-Awared indicates
that the packets are
learnt according to C-
Tag (the VLAN tag on
the client-side). To
create the 802.1q
bridge, set this
parameter to C-
Awared.
l S-Awared indicates
learnt according to S-
Tag (the VLAN tag at
the carrier service
layer). To create the
802.1ad bridge, set this
parameter to S-
Awared.
l Tag-Transparent
indicates that the
packets are
transparently
transmitted. To create
the 802.1d bridge, set
this parameter to Tag-
Transparent.
according to the
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Self-Learning MAC
Address
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled l This parameter
enable the MAC
address self-learning
function.
l If the MAC self-
learning function of an
Ethernet LAN is
enabled, the Ethernet
LAN learns an MAC
address according to
the original MAC
address in the packet
and automatically
refreshes the MAC
address forwarding
table.
l If the MAC self-
Ethernet LAN is
disabled, a static MAC
address forwarding
table is recommended
to be configured.
MAC Address Learning
Mode
IVL
SVL
- l This parameter
indicates the mode
used to learn an MAC
address.
l When the bridge uses
the SVL mode, all the
VLANs share one
MAC address table. If
the bridge uses the IVL
mode, each VLAN has
an MAC address table.
whether E-LAN service is
deployed.
set here.
not support this
parameter.

A-195
Parameters for UNIs
the UNI port.
SVLAN 1 to 4094 - l This parameter
specifies the S-VLAN
ID of the UNI port.
only when Tag Type
is set to S-Awared.
according to the
VLANs/CVLAN 1 to 4094 - l This parameter
specifies the VLAN ID
of the UNI port.
or several numbers.
When setting this
numbers, use the
represent a
consecutive number.
For example, the
numbers 1, and 3-6
6.
of the UNI work as the
service source or
service sink.
services of the UNI
port whose VLAN IDs
are included in the set
work as the service
source or service sink.

Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameters of NNIs
only when Tag Type
is set to S-Awared.
SVLANs - - l This parameter
ID of the NNI port.
only when Tag Type
is set to S-Awared.

Parameters for the Split Horizon Group
Split Horizon Group ID - 1 l This parameter
indicates the ID of the
split horizon group.
l The default split
horizon group ID is 1
and cannot be set
manually.
A-197
Split Horizon Group
Member
- - l A split horizon group
member indicates the
logical port member in
the split horizon
group.
l The port members that
are added to the same
split horizon group
cannot communicate
with each other.
l The OptiX RTN 950
supports only the
division of the split
horizon group
members according to
the Ethernet physical
port.
l If a UNI or NNI logical
port of the 802.1ad
bridge is added to a
split horizon group
member, the physical
port that is mounted
with the logical port is
automatically added to
the split horizon group
member.

A.6.1.5 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service
This topic describes the parameters that are related to E-LAN services.
Navigation Path
Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Service ID 1 to 4294967294 - l This parameter
E-LAN service.
l The supports
simultaneous creation
of an E-LAN service
only.
the name of the E-LAN
service.
BPDU - - l This parameter
indicates the
transparent
BPDU packets.
l In the case of an E-
LAN service, this
parameter supports
only Not
Transparently
Transmitted and
cannot be set
manually.
l Not Transparently
Transmitted
indicates that the
BPDU packets are
used as the protocol
packets to compute the
spanning tree topology
of the network.
A-199
Tag Type C-Awared
S-Awared
Tag-Transparent
C-Awared l C-Awared indicates
learnt according to C-
Tag (the VLAN tag on
the client-side). To
create the 802.1q
bridge, set this
parameter to C-
Awared.
l S-Awared indicates
learnt according to S-
Tag (the VLAN tag at
the carrier service
layer). To create the
802.1ad bridge, set this
parameter to S-
Awared.
l Tag-Transparent
indicates that the
packets are
transparently
transmitted. To create
the 802.1d bridge, set
this parameter to Tag-
Transparent.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Self-Learning MAC
Address
Enabled Enabled l This parameter
indicates whether to
enable the MAC
address self-learning
function.
l If the MAC self-
Ethernet LAN is
enabled, the Ethernet
LAN learns an MAC
address according to
the original MAC
address in the packet
and automatically
refreshes the MAC
address forwarding
table.
l If the MAC self-
Ethernet LAN is
disabled, a static MAC
address forwarding
table is recommended
to be configured.
MAC Address Learning
Mode
indicates the mode
used to learn an MAC
address.
l When the bridge uses
the SVL mode, all the
VLANs share one
MAC address table. If
the bridge uses the IVL
mode, each VLAN has
an MAC address table.
queried here.
not support this
parameter.
whether E-LAN service is
deployed.

A-201
Parameters for UNIs
the UNI port.
ID of the UNI port.
only when Tag Type
is set to S-Awared.
according to the
VLANs/CVLAN 1 to 4094 - l This parameter
of the UNI port.
or several numbers.
When setting this
numbers, use the
represent a
consecutive number.
For example, the
numbers 1, and 3-6
6.
to null, the E-LAN
service exclusively
uses the corresponding
UNI physical port.
That is, the entire port
is mounted to the
bridge.
to a non-null value,
only the
corresponding UNI
port whose service
packets contain this
VLAN ID works as the
logical port and is
mounted to the bridge.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Parameters for NNIs
only when Tag Type
is set to S-Awared.
SVLANs - - l This parameter
ID of the UNI port.
only when Tag Type
is set to S-Awared.
or several numbers.
When setting this
numbers, use the
represent a
consecutive number.
For example, the
numbers 1, and 3-6
6.

A-203
Parameters for Static MAC Addresses
VLAN ID - - l This parameter is
invalid if MAC
Address Learning
Mode is SVL. That is,
the preset static MAC
address entries are
valid for all VLANs.
l If MAC Address
Learning Mode is set
to IVL, the preset
static MAC address
entries are valid for
only the VLANs
whose VLAN ID is
equal to the preset
VLAN ID.
according to the
MAC Address - - l This parameter
the static MAC
address.
l A static MAC address
is an address that is set
manually. It is not
aged automatically
and needs to be deleted
manually.
l Generally, a static
MAC address is used
for the port that
receives but does not
forward Ethernet
service packets or the
port whose MAC
address need not be
aged automatically.
Egress Interface - - l This parameter
specifies the Ethernet
port that corresponds
to the MAC address.
according to the

Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameters for Self-Learning MAC Address
VLAN ID - - l This parameter is
invalid if MAC
Address Learning
Mode is SVL. That is,
the preset self-learning
MAC address entries
are valid for all
VLANs.
l If MAC Address
Learning Mode is set
to IVL, the preset self-
learning MAC address
entries are valid for
only the VLANs
whose VLAN ID is
equal to the preset
VLAN ID.
according to the
the self-learning MAC
address. A self-
learning MAC address
is also called a
dynamic MAC
address.
l A self-learning MAC
address is an entry
obtained by a bridge in
SVL or IVL learning
mode. A self-learning
MAC address can be
aged.
Egress Interface - - l This parameter
specifies the Ethernet
port that corresponds
to the MAC address.
according to the

A-205
Parameters Associated with MAC Address Learning
Aging Ability Enabled
Disabled
Enabled The OptiX RTN 950
supports enabling/
disabling of the aging
function and aging time
for the MAC address
table.
If one routing entry is not
updated in a certain
period, that is, if no new
packet from this MAC
address is received to
enable the re-learning of
this MAC address, this
routing entry is
automatically deleted.
This mechanism is called
aging, and this period is
called aging time. The
aging time of a MAC
address table is 5 minutes
by default.
Aging Time(min) 1 to 65535 5

Parameters for Disabled MAC Addresses
VLAN ID - - This parameter indicates
or specifies the VLAN ID
of the service. A disabled
MAC address is valid for
the VLAN whose VLAN
ID is equal to the preset
VLAN ID.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
specifies or indicates
the disabled MAC
address. A disabled
MAC address is also
called a blacklisted
MAC address.
l This parameter is used
for discarding an
entry, also called a
black hole entry,
whose data frame that
contains a specific
destination MAC
address. A disabled
MAC address needs to
be set manually and
cannot be aged.

Parameters for the Split Horizon Group
Split Horizon Group ID - 1 l This parameter
split horizon group.
l The default split
horizon group ID is 1
and cannot be set
manually.
A-207
Split Horizon Group
Member
- - l A split horizon group
member indicates the
logical port member in
the split horizon
group.
l The port members that
are added to different
split horizon groups
cannot communicate
with each other.
l The supports only the
division of the split
horizon group
members according to
the Ethernet physical
port.
l If a UNI or NNI logical
port of the 802.1ad
bridge is added to a
split horizon group
member, the physical
port that is mounted
with the logical port is
automatically added to
the split horizon group
member.

Parameters for Unknown Frame Processing
Frame Type Unicast
Multicast
the type of the received
unknown frame.
Handing Mode Discard
Broadcast
Broadcast Selects the method of
processing the unknown
frame. If this parameter is
set to Discard, the
unknown frame is directly
discarded. If this
parameter is set to
Broadcast, the unknown
frame is broadcast at the
forwarding port.

Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A.6.1.6 Parameter Description: QinQ Link_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a QinQ link.
Navigation Path
Service Management > QinQ Link from the Function Tree.
2. Click New.
Parameters for the General Attributes
QinQ Link ID 1 to 4294967295 - This parameter specifies
the ID of the QinQ link.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950
supports 1024 QinQ links,
whose IDs must be different
from each other.
Board - - This parameter specifies
the board where the QinQ
link is located.
Port - - This parameter specifies
the port where the QinQ
link is located.
S-Vlan ID 1 to 4094 - l This parameter
(at the network
operator side) for the
QinQ link.
according to the

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Ethernet protocol.
A.6.2.1 Parameter Description: ERPS Management_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating ERPS management tasks.
A.6.2.2 Parameter Description: ERPS Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS)
management.
A.6.2.3 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating MSTP port groups.
A-209
A.6.2.4 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Configuration
A.6.2.5 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_ Bridge Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to MSTP bridges.
A.6.2.6 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_CIST Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the MSTP CIST.
A.6.2.7 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Running Information About the CIST
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the running information about the MSTP
CIST.
A.6.2.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation Management_LAG Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a link aggregation group (LAG).
A.6.2.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Link Aggregation
This section describes the parameters for port priorities and system priorities.
A.6.2.10 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Point-to-Point LPT
This topic describes the parameters that are related to point-to-point LPT.
A.6.2.11 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creating Point-to-Point LPT
This topic describes the parameters that are related to creating point-to-point LPT.
A.6.2.12 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Point-to-Multipoint LPT
This topic describes the parameters that are related to point-to-multipoint LPT.
A.6.2.13 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creating Point-to-Multipoint LPT
This topic describes the parameters that are related to creating point-to-multipoint LPT.
A.6.2.1 Parameter Description: ERPS Management_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating ERPS management tasks.
Navigation Path
Protection > ERPS Management.
2. Click New.
Parameters
ERPS ID 1 to 8 - l This parameter
specifies the ID of the
Ethernet ring
protection switching
(ERPS) instance.
l The IDs of ERPS
instances on an NE
must be different from
each other.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
East Port - - This parameter specifies
the east port of the ERPS
instance.
West Port - - This parameter specifies
the west port of the ERPS
instance.
RPL Owner Ring Node
Flag
Yes
No
No l This parameter
node on the ring is the
ring protection link
(RPL) owner.
l Only one node on the
ring can be set as the
RPL owner for each
Ethernet ring.
RPL Port - - l This parameter
specifies the RPL port.
l There is only one RPL
port and this RPL port
must be the east or
west port on the RPL
owner node.
A-211
Control VLAN 1 to 4094 - l This parameter
of Control VLAN.
l Each node on the
Ethernet ring transmits
the R-APS packets on
the dedicated ring APS
(R-APS) channel to
ensure consistency
between the nodes
when the ERPS
switching is
performed. Control
VLAN is used for
isolating the dedicated
R-APS channel.
Therefore, the VLAN
ID in Control VLAN
cannot be duplicate
with the VLAN IDs
that are contained in
the service packets.
l The Control VLAN
must be set to the same
value for all the NEs
on an ERPS ring.
Destination Node 01-19-A7-00-00-01 01-19-A7-00-00-01 This parameter indicates
destination node. The
default destination MAC
address in the R-APS
packets is always 01-19-
A7-00-00-01.

A.6.2.2 Parameter Description: ERPS Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS)
management.
Navigation Path
Protection > ERPS Management from the Function Tree.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameters
ERPS ID 1 to 8 - This parameter indicates
the ID of the ERPS
instance.
East Port - - This parameter indicates
the east port of the ERPS
instance.
West Port - - This parameter indicates
the west port of the ERPS
instance.
RPL Owner Ring Node
Flag
Yes
No
whether a node on the ring
is the ring protection link
(RPL) owner.
RPL Port - - This parameter indicates
the RPL port.
Control VLAN 1 to 4094 - l This parameter
the VLAN ID of
Control VLAN.
l Each node on the
Ethernet ring transmits
the R-APS packets on
the dedicated ring APS
(R-APS) channel to
ensure consistency
between the nodes
when the ERPS
switching is
performed. Control
VLAN is used for
isolating the dedicated
R-APS channel.
Therefore, the VLAN
ID in Control VLAN
cannot be duplicate
with the VLAN IDs
that are contained in
the service packets or
inband DCN packets.
l The Control VLAN
must be set to the same
value for all the NEs
on an ERPS ring.
A-213
Destination Node 01-19-A7-00-00-01 - This parameter indicates
destination node. The
default destination MAC
address in the R-APS
packets is always 01-19-
A7-00-00-01.
Hold-Off Time(ms) 0 to 10000, in step of 100 0 l This parameter
ERPS hold-off timer.
l The hold-off timer is
used for negotiating
the protection
switching sequence
when the ERPS
coexists with other
protection schemes so
that the fault can be
rectified in the case of
other protection
switching (such as
LAG protection)
before the ERPS
occurs. When a node
on the ring detects one
or more new faults, it
starts up the hold-off
timer if the preset
hold-off time is set to a
value that is not 0.
During the hold-off
time, the fault is not
reported to trigger an
ERPS. When the hold-
off timer times out, the
node checks the link
status regardless
whether the fault that
triggers the startup of
the timer exists. If the
fault exists, the node
reports it to trigger an
ERPS. This fault can
be the same as or
different from the fault
that triggers the initial
startup of the hold-off
timer.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Guard Time(ms) 10 to 2000, in step of 10 500 l This parameter
the guard time of the
ERPS guard timer.
l The nodes on the ring
continuously forward
the R-APS packets to
the Ethernet ring. As a
result, the outdated R-
APS packets may exist
on the ring network.
After a node on the
ring receives the
outdated R-APS
packets, an incorrect
ERPS may occur. The
ERPS guard timer is an
R-APS timer used for
preventing a node on
the ring from receiving
outdated R-APS
packets. When a faulty
node on the ring
detects that the
switching condition is
cleared, the node starts
up the guard timer and
starts to forward the R-
APS (NR) packets.
During this period, the
R-APS packets
received by the node
are discarded. The
received R-APS
packets are forwarded
only after the time of
the guard timer
expires.
A-215
WTR Time(mm:ss) 5 to 12, in step of 1 5 l This parameter
the WTR time of the
WRT timer in the case
of ERPS protection.
l The WTR time refers
to the duration from
the time when the
working channel is
restored to the time
when the switching is
released. When the
working channel is
restored, the WTR
timer of the RPL
owner starts up. In
addition, a signal that
indicates the operation
of the WTR timer is
continuously output in
the timing process.
When the WTR timer
times out and no
switching request of a
higher priority is
received, the signal
indicating the
operation of the WTR
timer is not
transmitted. In
addition, the WTR
release signal is
continuously output.
l The WTR timer is used
to prevent frequent
switching caused by
the unstable working
channel.
Packet Transmit
Interval(s)
1 to 10 5 This parameter displays or
specifies the interval for
sending R-APS packets
periodically.
Entity Level 0 to 7 4 This parameter indicates
or specifies the level of the
maintenance entity.
Last Switching Request - - This parameter indicates
the last switching request.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
RB Status - - This parameter indicates
the RB (RPL Blocked)
status of the packets
received by the working
node.
l noRB: The RPL is not
blocked.
l RB: The RPL is
blocked.
DNF Status - - This parameter indicates
the DNF status of the
packets received by the
working node.
l noDNF: The R-APS
packets do not contain
the DNF flag. In this
case, the packets are
forwarded by the node
that detects the fault on
a non-RPL link, and
the node that receives
the packets is
requested to clear the
forwarding address
table.
l DNF: The R-APS
packets contain the
DNF flags. In this
case, the packets are
forwarded by the node
that detects the fault on
an RPL link, and the
node that receives the
packets is informed
not to clear the
forwarding address
table.
A-217
State Machine Status - - This parameter indicates
the status of the state
machine at the working
node.
l Idle: The Ethernet ring
is in normal state. For
example, no node on
the Ethernet ring
detects any faults or
receives the R_APS
(NR, RB) packets.
l Protection: The
Ethernet ring is in
protected state. For
example, a fault on the
node triggers the
ERPS, or a node on the
ring is in the WTR
period after the fault is
rectified.
Node Carried with
Current Packet
the MAC address carried
in the R-APS packets
received by the current
node. The MAC address
refers to the MAC address
of the source node that
initiates the switching
request.
East Port Status - - Displays the status of the
east port.
West Port Status - - Displays the status of the
west port.

A.6.2.3 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Creation
Navigation Path
Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Port Group Parameters tab.
3. Click Create.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Protocol Type MSTP
STP
MSTP This parameter specifies
the protocol type.
l MSTP: stands for
Multiple Spanning
Tree Protocol. The
OptiX RTN 950
supports the CIST
MSTP only.
l STP: stands for
Spanning Tree
Protocol.
Enable Protocol Enabled
Disabled
enable the protocol of
the port group or a
member port in the
port group.
l If the STP or MSTP is
enabled, the spanning
tree topology is
automatically re-
configured. As a
result, the services are
interrupted.

Parameters for Application Ports
the board where the
member of port group is
located.
Available Port List - - This parameter indicates
the available port list in
which a port can be added
to the port group.
Selected Port List - - This parameter indicates
the selected ports that can
be added to the port group.

A-219
A.6.2.4 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Configuration
Navigation Path
2. Click the Port Group Parameters tab.
3. On the main interface, select the port group to be configured.
4. Click Config. The Config Port Group dialog box is displayed.
Parameters for the Added Port
the board where the
member of port group is
located.
Available Port List - - This parameter indicates
the available port list in
which a port needs to be
added to the port group.
Selected Port List - - This parameter indicates
the selected ports that
need to be added to the
port group.

A.6.2.5 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_ Bridge Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to MSTP bridges.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Bridge Parameters tab.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Port Group ID - - l This parameter
port group.
set to only the port
group ID that is
automatically
allocated.
MST Domain Name - - The OptiX RTN 950 does
not support this
parameter.
Redaction Level - - The OptiX RTN 950 does
not support this
parameter.
Mapping List - - The OptiX RTN 950 does
not support this
parameter.

Bridge Parameters
Port Group ID - - l This parameter
port group.
set to only the port
Group ID that is
automatically
allocated.
MST Domain Max Hop
Count
- 20 Specifies the maximum
hop count of the MSTP.
A-221
Network Diameter 2 to 7 7 l This parameter
specifies the MSTP
network diameter.
l Network Diameter is
related to the link
whose number of
switches is the most
and is indicated by the
number of switches
that are connected to
the link. When you set
Network Diameter
for the switches, the
MSTP automatically
sets Max Age(s),
Hello Time(s), and
Forward Delay(s) to
the more appropriate
values for the
switches.
l If the value of
Network Diameter is
greater, the network is
in a larger scale.
Hello Time(s) 1 to 10 2 l This parameter
specifies the interval
for transmitting the
CBPDU packets
through the bridge.
l The greater the value
of this parameter, the
less the network
resources that are
occupied by the
spanning tree. The
topology stability,
however, decreases.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Max Age(s) 6 to 40 20 l This parameter
specifies the
maximum age of the
CBPDU packet that is
recorded by the port.
l The greater the value,
the longer the
transmission distance
of the CBPDU, which
indicates that the
network diameter is
greater. When the
is greater, it is less
possible that the bridge
detects the link fault in
a timely manner and
thus the network
adaptation ability is
reduced.
Forward Delay(s) 4 to 30 15 l This parameter
specifies the holdoff
time of a port in the
listening state and in
the learning state.
the longer the delay of
the network state
change. Hence, the
topology changes are
slower and the
recovery in the case of
faults is slower.

Port Parameters
the port in the port group.
A-223
Enable Edge Attribute Disabled
Enabled
specifies the
management edge
attributes of the port.
l This parameter
set the port as an edge
port. The edge port
refers to the bridge
port that is connected
to the LAN. In normal
cases, this port does
not receive or transmit
BPDU messages.
set to Enabled only
when the port is
directly connected to
the data
communications
terminal equipment,
such as a computer. In
other cases, it is
Actual Edge Attribute - - This parameter indicates
the actual management
edge attributes of the port.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Point-to-Point Attribute false
true
auto
auto l This parameter
specifies the point-to-
point attribute of the
port.
l false: forced non-
point-to-point link
attribute
l true: forced point-to-
point link attribute
l auto: automatically
detected point-to-
to auto, the bridge
determines Actual
Point-to-Point
Attribute of the port
working mode. If the
actual working mode
is full-duplex, the
actual point-to-point
attribute is true. If the
actual working mode
is half-duplex, Actual
Point-to-Point
Attribute is false.
l Only the designated
port whose Actual
Point-to-Point
Attribute is "True"
can transmit the rapid
state migration request
and response.
you use the default
value.
Actual Point-to-Point
Attribute
the actual point-to-point
attribute of the port.
A-225
Max Transmit Packet
Count
specifies the
maximum number of
packets to be
transmitted.
l The maximum number
of packets to be
transmitted by the port
refers to the maximum
number of MSTP
packets that the port
can transmit within 1s.
l This parameter needs
to be set according to
the planning
information.

A.6.2.6 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_CIST Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the MSTP CIST.
Navigation Path
2. Click the CIST&MSTI Parameters tab.
Port Group - - This parameter specifies
the port group.
MSTI ID 0 0 This parameter indicates
the MSTI ID. The value 0
indicates common and
internal spanning tree
(CIST). The OptiX RTN
950 supports only the
MSTP that uses CIST.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Bridge Priority 0 to 61440, in step of 4096 32768 l The most significant
16 bits of the bridge ID
indicate the priority of
the bridge.
l When the value is
smaller, the priority is
higher. As a result, the
bridge is more possible
to be selected as the
root bridge.
l If the priorities of all
the bridges in the STP/
MSTP network use the
same value, the bridge
whose MAC address is
the smallest is selected
as the root bridge.

Port Parameters
Priority 0 to 240, in step of 16 128 l The most significant
eight bits of the port ID
indicate the port
priority.
l When the value is
higher.
Path Cost 1 to 200000000 200000 l This parameter
indicates the status of
the network that the
port is connected to.
l In the case of the
bridges on both ends of
the path, set this
parameter to the same
value.

A-227
A.6.2.7 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Running Information About
the CIST
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the running information about the MSTP
CIST.
Navigation Path
2. Click the CIST Running Information tab.
Port Group ID - - This parameter indicates
the ID of the port group.
Protocol Running Mode MSTP
STP
- l This parameter
indicates the running
mode of the protocol.
l MSTP: stands for
Multiple Spanning
Tree Protocol. The
OptiX RTN 950
supports only the
CIST-based MSTP.
l STP: stands for
Spanning Tree
Protocol.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Bridge Priority 0 to 61440, in step of 4096 32768 l This parameter
indicates the priority
of the bridge.
l The most significant
the bridge.
l When the value is
root bridge.
the bridges in the STP
network use the same
value, the bridge
as the root bridge.
Bridge MAC Address - - This parameter indicates
bridge.
Root Bridge Priority 0 to 61440, in step of 4096 32768 This parameter indicates
the priority of the root
bridge.
Root Bridge MAC
Address
root bridge.
External Path Cost
ERPC
- - The OptiX RTN 950 does
not support this
parameter.
Domain Root Bridge
Priority
not support this
parameter.
Domain Root Bridge
MAC Address
not support this
parameter.
Internal Path Cost IRPC - - The OptiX RTN 950 does
not support this
parameter.
A-229
Root Port Priority 0 to 240, in step of 16 128 l This parameter
of the root port.
l The most significant
eight bits of the ID of
the root port indicate
the priority of the root
port.
l When the value is
higher.
Root Port - - This parameter indicates
the root port.
Hello Time(s) - 2 l This parameter
indicates the interval
for transmitting
CBPDU packets
through the bridge.
less the network
resources that are
occupied by the
spanning tree. The
topology stability,
however, decreases.
specifies the
maximum age of the
the longer the
of the CBPDU, which
indicates that the
network diameter is
greater. When the
a timely manner and
thus the network
reduced.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
specifies the holdoff
the learning state.
the network state
change. Hence, the
slower and the
faults is slower.
MST Domain Max Hop
Count
not support this
parameter.
Topology Change Count - - This parameter indicates
the identifier of the
topology change.
Last Topology Change
Time(s)
the duration of the last
topology change.
Topology Change Count - - This parameter indicates
the count of the topology
changes.

Port Parameters
Enable Protocol Enabled
Disabled
Disabled This parameter indicates
whether the protocol of
the port group or a
member of the port group
is enabled.
Port Role - Disabled This parameter indicates
the role of a port.
A-231
Port Status Discarding
Learning
Forwarding
Discarding This parameter indicates
the state of a port.
l Discarding: receives
only BPDU packets
l Learning: only
receives or transmits
BPDU packets
l Forwarding: forwards
user traffic, and
transmits/receives
BPDU packets
Priority 0 to 240, in step of 16 128 l The most significant
indicate the port
priority.
l When the value is
higher.
Path Cost 1 to 200000000 200000 l This parameter
indicates the status of
the network that the
port is connected to.
l In the case of the
bridges on both ends of
the path, set this
parameter to the same
value.
Bridge Priority 0 to 61440, in step of 4096 32768 l The most significant
the bridge.
l When the value is
root bridge.
the bridges in the STP
network use the same
value, the bridge
as the root bridge.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Bridge MAC Address - - This parameter indicates
bridge.
Designated Port Priority 0 to 240, in step of 16 0 l The most significant
indicate the port
priority.
l When the value is
higher.
Design Port - 0 This parameter indicates
the designated port.
Edge Port Attribute Disabled
Enabled
specifies the
management edge
attributes of the port.
l This parameter
set the port as an edge
port. The edge port
refers to the bridge
port that is connected
to the LAN. In normal
cases, this port does
not receive or transmit
BPDU messages.
set to Enabled only
when the port is
directly connected to
the data
communications
terminal equipment,
such as a computer. In
other cases, it is
Actual Edge Port
Attribute
- Disabled This parameter indicates
the actual management
edge attributes of the port.
A-233
Point to Point false
true
auto
auto l This parameter
specifies the point-to-
point attribute of the
port.
l false: forced non-
point-to-point link
attribute
l true: forced point-to-
l auto: automatically
detected point-to-
to auto, the bridge
determines Actual
Point to Point
Attribute of the port
working mode. If the
actual working mode
is full-duplex, the
actual point-to-point
attribute is true. If the
actual working mode
is half-duplex, Actual
Point to Point
Attribute is false.
l Only the designated
port whose Actual
Point-to-Point
Attribute is "True"
can transmit the rapid
state migration request
and response.
you use the default
value.
Actual Point to Point - - This parameter indicates
the actual point-to-point
attribute of the port.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Max Count of
Transmitting Message
indicates the
maximum number of
packets to be
transmitted.
l The maximum number
of packets to be
transmitted by the port
refers to the maximum
number of MSTP
packets that the port
can transmit within 1s.
Protocol Running Mode STP
MSTP
- l This parameter
indicates the running
mode of the protocol.
l MSTP: stands for
Multiple Spanning
Tree Protocol. The
OptiX RTN 950
supports only the
CIST-based MSTP.
l STP: stands for
Spanning Tree
Protocol.
Hello Time(s) 1 to 10 2 l This parameter
indicates the interval
for transmitting the
CBPDU packets
through the bridge.
less the network
resources that are
occupied by the
spanning tree. The
topology stability,
however, decreases.
A-235
specifies the
maximum age of the
the longer the
of the CBPDU, which
indicates that the
network diameter is
greater. When the
a timely manner and
thus the network
reduced.
specifies the holding
the learning state.
the network state
change. Hence, the
slower and the
faults is slower.
Remain Hop - - The OptiX RTN 950 does
not support this
parameter.

A.6.2.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation Management_LAG
Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a link aggregation group (LAG).
Navigation Path
Management > Link Aggregation Group Management from the Function Tree.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
2. Click the Link Aggregation Group Management tab.
3. Click New.
LAG No. - 1 l This parameter
specifies the LAG
number to be set
manually.
only when
Automatically
Assign is not selected.
Automatically Assign Selected
Deselected
Selected l This parameter
indicates whether
LAG No. is allocated
automatically.
l When Automatically
Assign is selected,
LAG No. cannot be
set.
LAG Name - - This parameter specifies
the LAG name.
A-237
LAG Type Static
Manual
Static l Static: You can create
a LAG. When you add
or delete a member
port to or from the
LAG, the Link
Aggregation Control
Protocol (LACP)
protocol is required. In
a LAG, a port can be in
selected, standby, or
unselected state. The
aggregation
information is
exchanged among
different equipment
through the LACP
protocol to ensure that
the aggregation
information is the
same among all the
nodes.
l Manual: You can
create a LAG. When
you add or delete a
member port, the
LACP protocol is not
required. The port can
be in the up or down
state. The system
determines whether to
aggregate a port
according to its
physical state (UP or
DOWN), working
mode, and rate.
Switch Protocol - - The OptiX RTN 950 does
not support this
parameter.
Switch Mode - - The OptiX RTN 950 does
not support this
parameter.
Link Trace Protocol - - The OptiX RTN 950 does
not support this
parameter.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Non-Revertive Mode
Non-Revertive Mode l Revertive Mode can
be set only when Load
Sharing is set to Non-
Sharing.
l When Revertive
Mode is set to
Revertive Mode, the
services are switched
back to the former
working channel after
this channel is restored
to normal.
l When Revertive
Mode is set to Non-
Revertive Mode, the
status of the LAG does
not change after the
former working
channel is restored to
normal. That is, the
services are still
transmitted on the
protection channel.
A-239
Load Sharing Sharing
Non-Sharing
Non-Sharing l Set Load Sharing to
the same value as the
peer equipment. It is
set Load Sharing to
Non-Sharing at both
ends if the LAGs are
used for protection and
set Load Sharing to
Sharing at both ends if
the LAGs are used for
increasing
bandwidths.
l Sharing: Each member
link of a LAG
processes traffic at the
same time and shares
the traffic load. The
sharing mode can
increase a bandwidth
utilization for the link.
When the LAG
members change, or
certain links fail, the
system automatically
re-allocates the traffic.
l Non-Sharing: Only
one member link of a
LAG carries traffic,
and the other link is in
the standby state. In
this case, a hot backup
mechanism is
provided. When the
active link of a LAG is
faulty, the system
activates the standby
link, thus preventing
link failure.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Load Sharing Hash
Algorithm
Source MAC
Destination MAC
Source and Destination
MAC
Source IP
Destination IP
Source and Destination IP
MPLS Label
Source MAC l This parameter is valid
only when Load
Sharing of a LAG is
set to Sharing.
l The load sharing
computation methods
include computation
based on MAC
addresses (based on
the source MAC
address, based on the
destination MAC
address, and based on
the source MAC
address + sink MAC
address), computation
based on IP addresses
(based on the source IP
address, based on the
destination IP address,
and based on the
source IP address and
sink IP address), and
computation based on
MPLS labels.
l After the configuration
data is deployed, Load
Sharing Hash
Algorithm takes
effect for the entire
NE.
l For PW-carried UNI-
NNI E-Line services,
Load Sharing Hash
Algorithm cannot be
set to MPLS Label.
A-241
System Priority 0 to 65535 32768 l System Priority
of a LAG. The smaller
the value of System
Priority, the higher
the priority.
l When a local LAG
negotiates with an
opposite LAG through
LACP packets, both
LAGs can obtain the
system priorities of
each other. Then, the
LAG of the higher
system priority is
considered as the
comparison result of
both LAGs so that the
aggregation
information is
consistent at both
LAGs. If the priorities
of both LAGs are the
same, the system MAC
addresses are
compared. Then, the
comparison result
based on the LAG with
smaller system MAC
address is considered
as the result of both
LAGs and is used to
ensure that the
aggregation
information is
consistent at both
LAGs.
WTR Time(min) 1 to 30 10 l Specifies the WTR
time for the LAG.
l WTR Time(min)
takes effect only when
Revertive Mode is
Revertive Mode.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Switch LAG upon Air
Interface SD
Disabled
Enabled
enable the switching
triggered by bit errors.
l If Switch LAG upon
Air Interface SD is set
to Enabled, the
MW_BER_SD alarm
will trigger the LAG
switching at the air
interface.

Port Settings Parameters
Main Board - - l This parameter
specifies the main
board in a LAG.
according to the
Main Port - - l This parameter
specifies the main port
in a LAG.
l After a LAG is created,
you can add Ethernet
services to the main
port only. Services
cannot be added to a
slave port. When Load
Sharing is set to Non-
Sharing, the link
connected to the main
port is used to transmit
the services, and the
link connected to the
slave port is used for
protection.
Board (Available Slave
Ports)
specifies the slave
board in a LAG.
according to the
A-243
Port (Available Slave
Ports)
specifies the salve port
in a LAG.
l The slave ports in a
LAG are fixed. Unless
they are manually
modified, the system
does not automatically
add them to or delete
them from the LAG.
Selected Standby Ports - - This parameter indicates
the selected slave ports.

Navigation Path
Management > Link Aggregation Group Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Port Priority tab.
the port whose priority can
be set.
Port Priority 0 to 65535 32768 l This parameter
indicates the priorities
of the ports in a LAG
as defined in the LACP
protocol. The smaller
the value, the higher
the priority.
l When ports are added
into a LAG, the port of
the highest priority is
preferred for service
transmission.

Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A.6.2.10 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Point-to-Point LPT
This topic describes the parameters that are related to point-to-point LPT.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > LPT
Management > LPT from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Point-to-Point LPT tab.
Parameters on the main interface
Binding Status - - This parameter displays
the binding status of point-
to-point services.
Primary Function Point - - This parameter displays
the port where the primary
point of point-to-point
LPT resides.
Secondary Function
Point Type
the type of secondary
point for point-to-point
LPT.
Secondary Function
Point
the port where the
secondary point of point-
to-point LPT resides.
LPT Instance Status - - This parameter displays
the status of point-to-point
LPT.
LPT Enabled Enabled
Disabled
Disabled This parameter displays or
specifies the enabling
status of point-to-point
LPT.
The LPT function can take
effect only when LPT
Enabled is set to
Enabled.
Recovery Times(s) 1-600 1 This parameter displays or
specifies the recovery time
of point-to-point LPT.
Hold-Off Times(ms) 0-10000 1000 This parameter displays or
specifies the hold-off time
of point-to-point LPT.
A-245
Switching Mode - - This parameter displays
the switching mode of
point-to-point LPT. Point-
to-point LPT is available
only in strict mode.
Fault Detection Mode PW OAM
LPT OAM
LPT OAM This parameter displays
the fault detection mode of
point-to-multipoint LPT.
l LPT-enabled NEs
periodically transmit
LPT OAM packets in
specific formats to
check the status of an
L2 service network or
QinQ service network.
If the LPT OAM
packets are absent for
3.5 fault detection
periods or the number
and contents of
received LPT OAM
packets are incorrect,
the NEs consider that a
network-side fault
occurred and the LPT
l To detect a network-
side fault on a PSN,
LPT OAM or PW
OAM packets can be
used. Note that the PW
OAM function must be
enabled on NEs before
usage of PW OAM
packets.
Fault Detection Period
(100ms)
3-100 10 This parameter displays or
specifies the fault
detection period of point-
to-point LPT.
User-Side Port Status - - This parameter displays
the status of a user-side
port.
L2 net ID-L2 Peer net ID - - This parameter displays
the NET IDs of LPT
packet out ports at both
ends.

Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A.6.2.11 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creating Point-to-Point LPT
This topic describes the parameters that are related to creating point-to-point LPT.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Point-to-Point LPT tab.
3. Click Bind in the lower right corner of the pane based on the type of service network.
4. Choose PW+QinQ or L2 net from the shortcut menu based on the type of service network.
L2 net ID 1-4294967295 - This parameter specifies
the NET ID of LPT packet
out port at the local end.
L2 Peer net ID 1-4294967295 - This parameter specifies
the NET ID of LPT packet
out port at the opposite
end.
Primary Function Point - - This parameter specifies
point of point-to-point
LPT resides.
VLAN ID 1-4094 - This parameter specifies
the VLAN ID that is
carried by a point-to-point
LPT packet to traverse an
L2 network.
LPT package out port - - This parameter specifies
the out port of a point-to-
point LPT packet.

A.6.2.12 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Point-to-Multipoint LPT
This topic describes the parameters that are related to point-to-multipoint LPT.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Point-to-Multipoint LPT tab.
A-247
Parameters of Primary Point
Primary Function Point
Type
the type of primary point
for point-to-multipoint
LPT.
Primary Function Point - - This parameter displays
point of point-to-
multipoint LPT resides.
LPT Instance Status - - This parameter displays
the status of point-to-
multipoint LPT.
LPT Enabled Enabled
Disabled
Disabled This parameter displays
Recovery Times(s) 1-600 1 This parameter displays or
specifies the recovery time
of point-to-multipoint
LPT.
Hold-Off Times(ms) 0-10000 1000 This parameter displays or
specifies the hold-off time
of point-to-multipoint
LPT.
Switching Mode Strict mode
Non-strict mode
Strict mode This parameter displays
Point-to-point LPT is
available only in strict
mode.
l Strict mode
A primary point
triggers LPT switching
when all its secondary
points detect faults.
l Non-strict mode
A primary point
triggers LPT switching
when anyone of its
secondary points
detects a fault.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Fault Detection Mode PW OAM
LPT OAM
LPT OAM This parameter displays
the fault detection mode of
l LPT-enabled NEs
periodically transmit
LPT OAM packets in
specific formats to
check the status of an
L2 service network or
QinQ service network.
If the LPT OAM
packets are absent for
3.5 fault detection
periods or the number
and contents of
received LPT OAM
packets are incorrect,
the NEs consider that a
network-side fault
occurred and the LPT
l To detect a network-
side fault on a PSN,
LPT OAM or PW
OAM packets can be
used. Note that the PW
OAM function must be
enabled on NEs before
usage of PW OAM
packets.
Fault Detection Period
(100ms)
3-100 10 This parameter displays or
specifies the fault
detection period of point-
to-multipoint LPT.
port.
the NET IDs of LPT
ends, when the service
network is an L2 network.

A-249
Parameters of Secondary Point
Access Point Type - - This parameter displays
the type of second point
LPT.
Access Point - - This parameter displays
the port or PW ID for the
to-multipoint LPT.
port.
the NET IDs of LPT
ends, when the service
network is an L2 network.

A.6.2.13 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creating Point-to-Multipoint
LPT
This topic describes the parameters that are related to creating point-to-multipoint LPT.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Point-to-Multipoint LPT tab.
3. Click New in the lower right corner of the pane based on the type of service network.
4. Choose PW, QinQ, or L2 net from the shortcut menu based on the type of service network.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameters of primary point
Point Type UNI
PW
QinQ
L2 net
- This parameter specifies
the type of primary point
LPT. The value range of
this parameter pertains to
the type of service
network.
If the primary point is on
the access side, select
UNI; if the primary point
is on the network side, set
the parameter as follows.
l If the service network
is a PSN, select PW.
is a QinQ network,
select QinQ.
is an L2 network,
select L2 net.
the board where the
primary point of point-to-
This parameter is valid
only when Point Type is
set to UNI.
point of point-to-
set to UNI.
Point ID - - This parameter specifies
the service ID for the
primary point of point-to-
multipoint LPT.
set to PW or QinQ.
A-251
the NET ID of a local NE.
only when Point Type of
the primary point is set to
UNI, and when Point
Type of the secondary
point is set to L2 net.
the NET ID of an opposite
NE.
set to L2 net.
the VLAN ID that is
carried by an LPT packet
to traverse an L2 network.
set to L2 net.
LPT package out port - - This parameter specifies
the out port of an LPT
packet.
set to L2 net.

Parameters of secondary point
Point Type UNI
PW
QinQ
L2 net
- This parameter displays or
specifies the type of
secondary point for point-
to-multipoint LPT.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
the board where the
to-multipoint LPT resides.
set to PW, QinQ, or L2
net.
Available Points - - This parameter displays
the available ports where
the secondary point of
point-to-multipoint LPT
can reside.
net.
Selected Points - - This parameter displays
the selected port where the
to-multipoint LPT resides.
net.
the NET ID of a local NE.
set to UNI.
the NET ID of an opposite
NE.
UNI, and when Point
A-253
the VLAN ID that is
carried by an LPT packet
to traverse an L2 network.
UNI, and when Point
LPT Package out port - - This parameter specifies
the out port of an LPT
packet.
UNI, and when Point

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Ethernet operation, administration and
maintenance (OAM).
A.6.3.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Domain
Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating maintenance domains.
A.6.3.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Association
Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating maintenance associations.
A.6.3.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MEP Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a maintenance association end
point (MEP).
A.6.3.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Remote MEP Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a remote MEP.
A.6.3.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MIP Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a maintenance association
intermediate point (MIP).
A.6.3.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LB Enabling
This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the LB.
A.6.3.7 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LT Enabling
This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the LT.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A.6.3.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Parameter
This topic describes the OAM parameters that are related to Ethernet ports.
A.6.3.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Error Frame
Monitoring
This topic describes the parameters that are used for monitoring the OAM error frames at the
Ethernet port.
A.6.3.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance
Domain Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating maintenance domains.
Navigation Path
OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Maintenance Association tab.
3. Choose New > New Maintenance Domain.
Maintenance
Domain Name
- default l This parameter specifies the name of the
maintenance domain.
l The maintenance domain refers to the
network for the Ethernet OAM.
l This parameter can contain a maximum
of eight bytes.
Maintenance
Domain Level
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
4 l Maintenance Domain Level specifies
the level of the maintenance domain.
l The values 0-2 indicate the carrier level,
the values 3-4 indicate the supplier level,
and the values 5-7 indicate the user level.
l When the value is set to 0, the
maintenance domain is at the lowest
level. The values 0-7 indicate that the
level increases in a sequential order.
l The OAM packets whose level is higher
than the preset value are transparently
transmitted by the MEPs. The OAM
packets whose level is lower than the
preset value are directly discarded by the
MEPs. The OAM packets whose level is
the same as the preset value are
responded to or terminated by the MEPs
according to the message type.

A-255
A.6.3.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance
Association Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating maintenance associations.
Navigation Path
3. Select the maintenance domain in which a maintenance association needs to be created.
Choose New > New Maintenance Association.
Maintenance
Domain Name
- - This parameter indicates the maintenance
domain of the created maintenance
association.
Maintenance
Association Name
- - l This parameter specifies the name of the
maintenance association, which is a
domain related to a service. Through
maintenance association division, the
connectivity check (CC) can be
performed on the network that transmits
a service instance.
l This parameter can contain a maximum
of eight bytes.
Relevant Service - - This parameter specifies the service
instance that is related to the maintenance
association.
CC Test Transmit
Period
1s
10s
1m
10m
1s l This parameter specifies the interval for
transmitting packets in the CC.
l The CC is performed to check the
availability of the service.

A.6.3.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MEP Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a maintenance association end
point (MEP).
Navigation Path
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3. Select the maintenance association in which an MEP needs to be created. Choose New >
New MEP Point.
Maintenance
Domain Name
domain of the created MEP.
Maintenance
Association Name
association of the created MEP.
Board - - This parameter specifies the board where
the MEP is located.
Port - - This parameter specifies the port where the
MEP is located.
VLAN - - This parameter indicates the VLAN ID of
the current service.
MP ID 1 to 2048 1 l This parameter specifies the MEP ID.
l Each MEP needs to be configured with
an MP ID, which is unique in the
maintenance association. The MP ID is
required in the OAM operation.
Direction Ingress
Egress
Ingress l Direction specifies the direction of the
MEP.
l Ingress indicates the direction in which
the packets are transmitted to the port,
and Egress indicates the direction in
which the packets are transmitted from
the port.
CC Status Active
Inactive
Active l This parameter specifies whether to
enable the CC function of the MEP.
l In the case of the tests based on the MP
IDs, CC Status must be set to Active.
A-257
AIS Active Status Active
Inactive
Active l This parameter specifies the AIS active
status.
l If several MDs exist on a link, to locate
a fault accurately, set AIS Active
Status to Active and Client Layer
Level that functions to suppress the AIS
information.
l After a fault is detected by an MP, if this
MP activates the AIS, it sends the AIS
packet to a higher level MP, informing
the higher level MP of the fault
information; if this MP does not activate
the AIS, it does not report the fault.
Client Layer Level 1 to 7 1 l Normally, if an MP is set to level n,
Client Layer Level that functions to
suppress the AIS information should be
set to n+1.
l Client Layer Level is valid only if AIS
Active Status is Active.

A.6.3.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Remote MEP
Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a remote MEP.
Navigation Path
3. Choose OAM > Manage Remote MEP Point. Then, the Manage Remote MEP Point
dialog box is displayed.
4. Click New.
Maintenance
Domain Name
domain of the MEP.
Maintenance
Association Name
association of the created MEP.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Remote
Maintenance Point
ID(e.g:1,3-6)
1 to 2048 - l This parameter specifies the ID of the
remote MEP.
l If other MEPs may initiate OAM
operations to an MEP in the same MA,
set the other MEPs to be the remote
MEPs.

A.6.3.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MIP Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a maintenance association
intermediate point (MIP).
Navigation Path
2. Click the MIP Point tab.
3. Select the maintenance domain in which an MIP needs to be created, and then click New.
Maintenance
Domain Name
domain of the MIP.
Board - - This parameter specifies the board where
the MIP is located.
Port - - This parameter specifies the port where the
MIP is located.
MP ID 1 to 2048 1 l This parameter specifies the MIP ID.
l Each MIP needs to be configured with an
MP ID, which is unique in the
maintenance domain. The MP ID is
required in the OAM operation.
NOTE
To create MEPs and MIPs in a service at a
port, ensure that only one MIP can be created
and the level of the MIP must be higher than
the level of the MEP.

A.6.3.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LB Enabling
This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the LB.
A-259
Navigation Path
3. Select the maintenance domain and maintenance association for the LB test.
4. Choose OAM > Start LB.
Destination
Maintenance Point
ID
Selected
Deselected
Deselected This parameter needs to be selected if the
LB test is performed on the basis of
Destination Maintenance Point IDs.
Destination
Maintenance Point
MAC Address
Selected
Deselected
Selected This parameter needs to be selected if the
LB test is performed on the basis of MAC
addresses.
Maintenance
Domain Name
- - This parameter indicates the name of the
maintenance domain for the LB test.
Maintenance
Association Name
maintenance association for the LB test.
Source
Maintenance Point
ID
- - l This parameter specifies the source
maintenance point in the LB test.
l Only the MEP can be set to the source
maintenance point.
Destination
Maintenance Point
ID
- - l This parameter specifies the destination
maintenance point in the LB test.
l Only the MEP ID can be set to the
Destination Maintenance Point ID.
l Destination Maintenance Point ID can
be set only when MP ID is selected.
Destination
Maintenance Point
MAC Address
- 00-00-00-00-00-00 l This parameter specifies the MAC
address of the port where the destination
maintenance point is located in the LB
test.
l Only the MAC address of the MEP can
be set to the MAC address of the
Destination Maintenance Point MAC
Address.
l Destination Maintenance Point MAC
Address can be set only when Sink
Maintenance Point MAC Address.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Transmitted
Packet Count
1 to 255 3 l This parameter specifies the number of
packets transmitted each time in the LB
test.
l When the value is greater, the required
duration is longer.
Transmitted
Packet Length
64 to 1400 64 l This parameter specifies the length of a
transmitted LBM packet.
l If the packet length is different, the test
result may be different. In normal cases,
it is recommended that you use the
default value.
Transmitted
Packet Priority
0 to 7 7 l This parameter specifies the priority of
transmitting packets.
l 0 indicates the lowest priority, and 7
indicates the highest priority. In normal
cases, this parameter is set to the highest
priority.
Detection Result - - This parameter indicates the relevant
information and result of the LB test.

A.6.3.7 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LT Enabling
This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the LT.
Navigation Path
3. Select the maintenance domain and maintenance association for the LT test.
4. Choose OAM > Start LT.
Test Node Parameters
Destination
Maintenance Point
ID
Selected
Deselected
Deselected This parameter needs to be selected if the LT
test is performed on the basis of MP IDs.
Destination
Maintenance Point
MAC Address
Selected
Deselected
Selected This parameter needs to be selected if the LT
test is performed on the basis of MAC
addresses.
A-261
Maintenance
Domain Name
maintenance domain for the LT test.
Maintenance
Association Name
maintenance association for the LT test.
Source
Maintenance Point
ID
- - l This parameter specifies the source
maintenance point in the LT test.
l Only the MEP can be set to the source
maintenance point.
Destination
Maintenance Point
ID
- - l This parameter specifies the destination
l Only the MEP ID can be set to the
Destination Maintenance Point ID.
l Destination Maintenance Point ID can
be set only when MP ID is selected.
Destination
Maintenance Point
MAC Address
- 00-00-00-00-00-00 l This parameter specifies the MAC
address of the port where the destination
maintenance point is located in the LT
test.
l Only the MAC address of the MEP can
be set to the MAC address of the
Destination Maintenance Point MAC
Address.
l Destination Maintenance Point MAC
Address can be set only when Sink
Maintenance Point MAC Address.

Parameters for the Detection Result
Source
Maintenance Point
ID
- - This parameter indicates the source
Destination
Maintenance Point
ID/MAC
- - This parameter indicates the MAC address
of the port where the destination
maintenance point is located in the LT test.
Response
Maintenance Point
ID/MAC
- - This parameter indicates the MAC address
of the port where the responding
maintenance point is located in the LT test.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Hop Count 1 to 64 - l This parameter indicates the number of
hops from the source maintenance point
to the responding maintenance point or
to the destination maintenance point in
the LT test.
l The number of hops indicates the
adjacent relation between the responding
maintenance point to the source
maintenance point. The number of hops
increases by one when a responding
point occurs on the link from the source
maintenance point to the destination
maintenance point.
Test Result - - This parameter indicates the result of the LT
test.

A.6.3.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Parameter
This topic describes the OAM parameters that are related to Ethernet ports.
Navigation Path
OAM Management > Ethernet Port OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the OAM Parameter tab.
port.
Enable OAM
Protocol
Enabled
Disabled
whether to enable the OAM protocol.
l After the OAM protocol is enabled, the
current Ethernet port starts to use the
preset mode to create the OAM
connection with the opposite end.
A-263
OAM Working
Mode
Active
Passive
Active l This parameter indicates or specifies the
working mode of the OAM.
l The port whose OAM working mode is
set to Active can initiate the OAM
connection.
l The port whose OAM working mode is
set to Passive can only wait for the
opposite end to send the OAM
connection request.
l The OAM working mode of the
equipment at only one end can be
Passive.
Link Event
Notification
Enabled
Disabled
whether the local link events can be
notified to the opposite end.
l If the alarms caused by link events can
be reported, that is, if the number of
performance events (for example, error
frame period, error frame, error frame
second, and error frame signal cycle) at
the local end exceeds the preset
threshold, these performance events are
notified to the port at the opposite end
through the link event notification
function.
Remote Side
Loopback
Response
Disabled
Enabled
whether the port responds to the remote
loopback.
l Remote loopback indicates that the local
OAM entity transmits packets to the
remote OAM entity for loopback. The
local OAM entity can locate the fault and
test the link performance through
loopback data analysis.
l If a port does not support remote
loopback response, this port does not
respond to the loopback request from the
remote port regardless of the OAM port
status.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Loopback Status Non-Loopback
Initiate Loopback at
Local
Respond Loopback
of Remote
- This parameter indicates the loopback status
at the local end.
NOTE
Loopback Status is valid only after you choose
OAM > Enable Remote Loopback.
OAM Discovery
Status
- - This parameter indicates the OAM
discovery status at the local end.
Port Transmit
Status
- - This parameter indicates the status of
transmitting packets at the local end.
Port Receive Status - - This parameter indicates the status of
receiving packets at the local end.

A.6.3.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Error
Frame Monitoring
This topic describes the parameters that are used for monitoring the OAM error frames at the
Ethernet port.
Navigation Path
OAM Management > Ethernet Port OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the OAM Error Frame Monitor tab.
port.
Error Frame
Monitor Window
(ms)
1000 to 60000, in
step of 100
1000 This parameter specifies the duration of
monitoring error frames.
Error Frame
Monitor Threshold
(frames)
1 to 4294967295, in
step of 1
1 l This parameter specifies the threshold of
monitoring error frames.
l Within the specified value of Error
Frame Monitor Window(ms), if the
number of error frames on the link
exceeds the preset value of Error
Frame Monitor Threshold(frame), an
alarm is reported.
A-265
Error Frame
Period Window
(frame)
1488 to 892800000,
in step of 1
892800000 This parameter specifies the window of
monitoring the error frame period.
Error Frame
Period Threshold
(frames)
1 to 892800000, in
step of 1
monitoring the error frame period.
Frame Period Window(frame), if the
Frame Period Threshold(frame), an
alarm is reported.
Error Frame
Second Window(s)
10 to 900, in step of
1
60 This parameter specifies the time window of
monitoring the error frame second.
Error Frame
Second Threshold
(s)
1
monitoring error frame seconds.
l If any error frame occurs in one second,
this second is called an errored frame
second. Within the specified value of
Error Frame Second Window(s), if the
Frame Second Threshold(s), an alarm
is reported.
Error Frame
Signal Periodic
Monitor Window
(Entries)
1 to 60, in step of 1 1 This parameter specifies the window of
monitoring the error frame signal period.
Error Frame
Signal Periodic
Monitor Threshold
(Entries)
1 to 7500000000, in
step of 1
monitoring the error frame signal period.
Frame Signal Periodic Monitor
Window(Entries), if the number of
error signals exceeds the preset value of
Error Frame Signal Periodic Monitor
Threshold(Entries), an alarm is
reported.

This topic describes the parameters that are related to QoS.
A.6.4.1 Parameter Description: Diffserv Domain Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing DiffServ domains.
A.6.4.2 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Management_Create
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating DiffServ (DS) domains.
A.6.4.3 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Applied Port_Modification
This topic describes the parameters that are used for changing DiffServ (DS) domain applied
ports.
A.6.4.4 Parameter Description: Policy Management
This topic describes the parameters that are related to port policies.
A.6.4.5 Parameter Description: Port Policy
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port policies.
A.6.4.6 Parameter Description: Port Policy_Traffic Classification Configuration
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating traffic classification.
A.6.4.7 Parameter Description: Port Shaping Management_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port shaping management tasks.
A.6.4.1 Parameter Description: Diffserv Domain Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing DiffServ domains.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Diffserv Domain Management > Diffserv Domain Management from the
Function Tree.
Mapping Relation ID 1 to 8 1 This parameter indicates
the ID of the mapping
relation between DiffServ
domains.
Mapping Relation Name - Default Map This parameter indicates
the name of the mapping
relation between DiffServ
domains.

NOTE
If one default DiffServ domain exists on the OptiX RTN 950 equipment, Mapping Relation ID is set to 1, and
Mapping Relation Name is set to Default Map. If these parameters are not set, all the ports belong to this
domain.
A-267
Parameters for Ingress Mapping Relation
CVLAN 0 to 7 - l This parameter
of the C-VLAN of the
ingress packets.
l C-VLAN indicates the
client-side VLAN, and
the value 7 indicates
the highest priority.
of the S-VLAN of the
ingress packets.
l S-VLAN indicates the
server-side VLAN,
and the value 7
indicates the highest
priority.
IP DSCP 0 to 63 - l This parameter
indicates the DSCP
priority of the IP
addresses of the
ingress packets.
l The differentiated
services code point
(DSCP) refers to bits
0-5 of the
differentiated services
(DS) field in the packet
and indicates the
service class and
discarding priority of
the packet.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
MPLS EXP 0 to 7 - l Displays the MPLS
EXP value of ingress
packets.
l When a packet in an
egress queue leaves an
NNI port, the NNI port
obtains the packet
priority value
according to the
mappings between
PHB service classes of
egress queues and
egress packet
priorities (MPLS EXP
values), and writes the
obtained priority value
into the EXP field of
the egress MPLS
packet.
NOTE
The MPLS EXP value can
be modified in the default
Diffserv domain (Default
Map) only.
A-269
PHB BE
AF1
AF2
AF3
AF4
EF
CS6
CS7
- l This parameter
indicates the per-hop
behavior (PHB)
service class of the
DiffServ domain.
l The PHB service class
refers to the
forwarding behavior
of the DiffServ node
on the behavior
aggregate (BA)
operation. The
forwarding behavior
can meet the specific
requirements.
l The PHB service
classes are BE, AF1,
AF2, AF3, AF4, EF,
CS6, and CS7. The
priorities (C_VLAN
priority, S_VLAN
priority, DSCP value,
and MPLS EXP value)
contained in the
packets of the DiffServ
domain and the eight
PHB service classes
meet the requirements
of the specified or
default mapping
relation.
NOTE
The AF1 is classified into
three sub service classes,
namely, AF11, AF12, and
AF13, only one of which is
valid. It is the same case
with the AF2, AF3, and
AF4.

Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameters for Egress Mapping Relation
PHB BE
AF1
AF2
AF3
AF4
EF
CS6
CS7
- l This parameter
indicates the PHB
DiffServ domain.
refers to the
forwarding behavior
of the DiffServ node
on the behavior
aggregate (BA)
operation. The
forwarding behavior
requirements.
l The PHB service
AF2, AF3, AF4, EF,
CS6, and CS7. The
priorities (C_VLAN
priority, S_VLAN
priority, DSCP value
and MPLS value)
contained in the
packets of the DiffServ
PHB service classes
of the specified or
default mapping
relation.
NOTE
AF4.
of the C-VLAN of the
egress packets.
A-271
of the S-VLAN of the
egress packets.
server-side VLAN,
and the value 7
priority.
indicates the DSCP
priority of the IP
addresses of the
ingress packets.
l The DSCP refers to
bits 0-5 of the DS field
in the packet and
indicates the service
class and discarding
priority of the packet.
MPLS EXP 0 to 7 - l Displays the MPLS
EXP value of egress
packets.
l When a packet arrives
at an NNI port, the
NNI port obtains the
packet priority value
depending on its
trusted priority type
(MPLS EXP value)
and specifies the PHB
packet according to the
mappings between
packet priorities and
PHB service classes.
NOTE
Map) only.

Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
the port that uses the
DiffServ domain.
Packet Type CVLAN
SVLAN
IP-DSCP
MPLS-EXP
CVLAN The packets trusted by the
OptiX RTN 950 are the
C_VLAN, S_VLAN and
IP DSCP packets that
contain the C_VLAN
priority, S_VLAN
priority, DSCP value or
MPLS value. By default,
the untrusted packets are
mapped to the BE service
class for best-effort
forwarding.
NOTE
l The trusted packet
priorities of a UNI port
include DSCP value, C-
VLAN priority, and S-
VLAN priority. For the
E-Line services that are
transparently
transmitted end to end
(UNI-UNI), a UNI port
only trusts DSCP value.
l An NNI port carrying
MPLS/PWE3 services
trusts only packets with
MPLS EXP values.
priorities of a QinQ link
NNI port are configured
according to the

A.6.4.2 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Management_Create
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating DiffServ (DS) domains.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Diffserv Domain Management > Diffserv Domain Management from
the Function Tree.
2. Click New.
A-273
Mapping Relation ID 2 to 8 - This parameter specifies
the ID of the mapping
relation of a DS domain.
Mapping Relation Name - - This parameter specifies

Parameters for Ingress Mapping Relation
specifies the C-VLAN
priority of the ingress
packets.
priority of the ingress
packets.
server-side VLAN,
and the value 7
priority.
specifies the DSCP
priority of the IP
addresses of the
ingress packets.
services code point
0-5 of the
and indicates the
service class and
the packet.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
MPLS EXP - - l Displays the MPLS
EXP value of ingress
packets.
obtains the packet
priority value
according to the
mappings between
egress queues and
egress packet
the egress MPLS
packet.
NOTE
Map) only.
A-275
PHB BE
AF1
AF2
AF3
AF4
EF
CS6
CS7
- l This parameter
indicates the PHB
service class of the DS
domain.
refers to the
forwarding behavior
of the DS node on the
behavior aggregate
(BA) operation. The
forwarding behavior
requirements.
l The PHB service
AF2, AF3, AF4, EF,
CS6, and CS7. The
priorities (C_VLAN
priority, S_VLAN
and MPLS EXP value)
contained in the
packets of the DS
PHB service classes
of the specified or
default mapping
relation.
NOTE
AF4.

Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameters for Egress Mapping Relation
PHB BE
AF1
AF2
AF3
AF4
EF
CS6
CS7
- l This parameter
indicates the PHB
service class of the DS
domain.
refers to the
forwarding behavior
of the DS node on the
behavior aggregate
(BA) operation. The
forwarding behavior
requirements.
l The PHB service
AF2, AF3, AF4, EF,
CS6, and CS7. The
priorities (C_VLAN
priority, S_VLAN
and MPLS EXP value)
contained in the
packets of the DS
PHB service classes
of the specified or
default mapping
relation.
NOTE
AF4.
specifies the C-VLAN
priority of the egress
packets.
client-side VLAN
priority, and the value
7 indicates the highest
priority.
A-277
priority of the egress
packets.
server-side VLAN
priority, and the value
priority.
specifies the DSCP
priority of the IP
addresses of the egress
packets.
services code point
0-5 of the
and indicates the
service class and
the packet.
MPLS EXP - - l Displays the MPLS
EXP value of egress
packets.
obtains the packet
priority value
according to the
mappings between
egress queues and
egress packet
the egress MPLS
packet.
NOTE
Map) only.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

the board that uses the
mapping relations
between DS domains.
Available Port - - This parameter displays
the available port list from
which you can select the
port that uses the mapping
relations between DS
domains.
Port - - This parameter displays
the selected port list. The
ports in the list use the
mapping relations
between DS domains.
A-279
Packet Type cvlan
svlan
ip-dscp
mpls-exp
cvlan l This parameter
the packet.
l The packets trusted by
the OptiX RTN 950
are the C_VLAN,
S_VLAN, IP DSCP
and MPLS packets that
contain the C_VLAN
priority, S_VLAN
or MPLS EXP value.
By default, the
untrusted packets are
mapped to the BE
service class for best-
effort forwarding.
NOTE
transparently
MPLS/PWE3 services
MPLS EXP values.
according to the

A.6.4.3 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Applied Port_Modification
This topic describes the parameters that are used for changing DiffServ (DS) domain applied
ports.
Navigation Path
Management > Diffserv Domain Management > Diffserv Domain Management from
the Function Tree.
2. Select the DS domain to be changed in the main interface.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3. Click the Apply Port tab.
4. Click Modify.
Parameters for Configuring the Applied Ports
Mapping Relation Name - - This parameter indicates
Packet Type CVLAN
SVLAN
IP-DSCP
MPLS-EXP
CVLAN The packets trusted by the
OptiX RTN 950 are the C-
VLAN, S-VLAN, IP
DSCP packets, and MPLS
packets that respectively
contain the C-VLAN
priority, S-VLAN
priority, IP DSCP value
and MPLS EXP value. By
default, the untrusted
packets are mapped to the
BE service class for best-
effort forwarding.
NOTE
transparently
MPLS/PWE3 services
MPLS EXP values.
according to the
the board where the port is
located.
Available Port - - This parameter indicates
the available port.
A-281
Selected Port - - This parameter indicates
the selected port.
The selected port is
applied to the DS domain.

NOTE
If one default DS domain exists on the OptiX RTN 950, Mapping Relation ID is set to 1, and Mapping Relation
Name is set to Default Map. If these parameters are not set, all the ports belong to this domain.
A.6.4.4 Parameter Description: Policy Management
This topic describes the parameters that are related to port policies.
Navigation Path
Management > Policy Management > Port Policy from the Function Tree.
2. Click the CoS Configuration tab.
Parameters
Policy ID - - This parameter indicates
the policy ID of the port.
Policy Name - - This parameter indicates
or specifies the policy
name of the port.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
CoS CS7
CS6
EF
AF4
AF3
AF2
AF1
BE
- l The BE, AF1, AF2,
AF3, AF4, EF, CS6,
and CS7 service
classes respectively
map eight queuing
entities. The OptiX
RTN 950 provides
different QoS policies
for the queues at
different service
classes.
l CS6-CS7: indicates
the highest service
grade, which is mainly
involved in signaling
transmission.
l EF: indicates fast
forwarding. This
service class is
applicable to the traffic
whose delay is small
and packet loss ratio is
low, for example,
voice and video
services.
l AF1-AF4: indicates
assured forwarding.
This service class is
that requires rate
guarantee but does not
require delay or jitter
limit.
l BE: indicates that the
traffic is forwarded in
best-effort manner
without special
processing.
A-283
Grooming Police After
Reloading
SP
WRR
CS7, CS6, EF, BE: SP
AF4, AF3, AF2, AF1:
WRR
l The strict priority (SP)
scheduling algorithm
is designed for the key
services. One
important
characteristic of the
key services is that
higher priorities are
required to minimize
the response delay in
the case of congestion
events.
l The weighted round
robin (WRR)
divides each port into
multiple output sub-
queues. The polling
scheduling is
performed among the
output sub-queues to
ensure that each sub-
queue has a certain
period of service time.
l The OptiX RTN 950
supports the setting of
the SP+WRR
of the CoS queue
according to the
requirement, and
provides one or more
queues that comply
with the SP algorithm.
Except for the default
value, however, the
value of the WRR
and the value of the SP
cannot be interleaved.
That is, except for the
default value,
Grooming Police
After Reloading can
be changed from SP to
WRR according to the
queue priorities in a
descending order
(CS7-BE).
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
according to the
Policy Weight(%) 1 to 100 25 l This parameter
specifies the weight of
the policy in the WRR
queue. The weight
indicates the
percentage of the
bandwidth resources
obtained by the WRR
queue.
set only when
Grooming Police
After Reloading is set
to WRR.
according to the
Bandwidth Limit Disabled
Enabled
whether traffic
shaping is enabled for
an egress queue
corresponding to a
PHB service class.
l CIR (kbit/s), PIR
(kbit/s), CBS (byte),
and PBS (byte) can be
set only when
Bandwidth Limit is
set to Enabled.
according to the
CIR(kbit/s) - - Traffic shaping for an
egress queue uses the
single token bucket two
color marker algorithm.
The value of the CIR must
be equal to the value of the
PIR. In actual traffic
shaping processing, only
the PIR is valid.
A-285
PIR(kbit/s) - - l When the buffer queue
is empty, the packets
are processed as
follows: If the rate of a
packet is equal to or
lower than the PIR, it
is directly forwarded;
if the rate of a packet is
higher than the PIR, it
enters the buffer queue
and then is forwarded
at a rate equal to the
PIR.
l When the buffer queue
is not empty, the
packets whose rate
passes the restriction
of the PIR directly
enter the buffer queue
and then are forwarded
PIR.
according to the
CBS(byte) - - l It is recommended that
you set the value of the
CBS equal to the value
of the PIR. In actual
traffic shaping
processing, only the
PBS is valid.
according to the
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
PBS(byte) - - l When the buffer queue
is empty, certain burst
packets can be
forwarded if the rate of
the packets is equal to
or lower than the PIR
in a certain period. The
maximum traffic of the
burst packets is
determined by the
PBS.
according to the

A.6.4.5 Parameter Description: Port Policy
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port policies.
Navigation Path
3. Click New. The Create Port Policy dialog box is displayed.
Parameters
Policy ID - - This parameter specifies
the policy ID of the port.
Automatically Assign Selected
Deselected
Deselected This parameter specifies
whether to automatically
allocate the policy ID of
the port policy. After this
parameter is selected, the
system automatically
allocates the policy ID,
and then the policy ID
cannot be set manually.
Policy Name - - This parameter specifies
the policy name of the
port.
A-287
CoS CS7
CS6
EF
AF4
AF3
AF2
AF1
BE
- l The BE, AF1, AF2,
AF3, AF4, EF, CS6,
and CS7 service
classes respectively
map eight queuing
entities. The OptiX
RTN 950 provides
different QoS policies
for the queues at
different service class.
l CS6-CS7: indicates
the highest service
grade, which is mainly
transmission.
forwarding. This
service class is
low, for example,
voice and video
services.
assured forwarding.
that requires rate
limit.
best-effort manner
without special
processing.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Grooming Police After
Reloading
SP
WRR
CS7, CS6, EF, BE: SP
AF4, AF3, AF2, AF1:
WRR
l The strict priority (SP)
is designed for the key
services. One
important
characteristic of the
key services is that
higher priorities are
required to minimize
the response delay in
the case of congestion
events.
l The weighted round
robin (WRR)
divides each port into
multiple output sub-
queues. The polling
scheduling is
performed among the
output sub-queues to
ensure that each sub-
queue has a certain
period of service time.
l The OptiX RTN 950
the SP+WRR
of the CoS queue
according to the
requirement, and
provides one or more
queues that comply
with the SP algorithm.
Except for the default
value, however, the
value of the WRR
and the value of the SP
cannot be interleaved.
That is, except for the
default value,
Grooming Police
After Reloading can
be changed from SP to
WRR according to the
queue priorities in a
descending order
(CS7-BE).
A-289
according to the
Policy Weight(%) 1 to 100 25 l Policy Weight(%)
specifies the weight of
the policy in the WRR
queue. The weight
indicates the
percentage of the
bandwidth resources
obtained by the WRR
queue.
set only when
Grooming Police
After Reloading is set
to WRR.
according to the
Enabled
Disabled l Bandwidth Limit
whether traffic
shaping is enabled for
an egress queue
corresponding to a
PHB service class.
l CIR (kbit/s), PIR
set only when
Bandwidth Limit is
set to Enabled.
according to the
CIR(kbit/s) - - Traffic shaping for an
the PIR is valid.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
PIR(kbit/s) - - l When the buffer queue
are processed as
PIR.
is not empty, the
packets whose rate
of the PIR directly
PIR.
according to the
CBS(byte) - - l It is recommended that
you set the value of the
CBS equal to the value
of the PIR. In actual
traffic shaping
processing, only the
PBS is valid.
according to the
A-291
PBS(byte) - - l When the buffer queue
packets can be
burst packets is
determined by the
PBS.
according to the

A.6.4.6 Parameter Description: Port Policy_Traffic Classification Configuration
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating traffic classification.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Traffic Classification Configuration tab.
3. Click New.
Traffic Classification ID 1 to 1024 - This parameter specifies
the ID of the traffic
classification.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
ACL Action Permit
Deny
Permit l The access control list
(ACL) determines
whether to forward or
discard the packets
that enter the port
according to the
specified matching
rules.
l When ACL Action is
set to Permit, the
ingress port accepts
and then performs QoS
processing for only the
packets that meet the
specified mapping
rules.
l When ACL Action is
set to Deny, the
ingress port discards
the packets that meet
the specified mapping
rules.

Ingress Parameters
Logical Relation
Between Matched Rules
And And l This parameter
specifies the logical
relationship between
the traffic
classification
matching rules.
l The OptiX RTN 950
the logical AND
between multiple
matching rules.
A-293
Match Type DSCP Value
CVlan ID
CVlan priority
SVlan ID
SVlan priority
- l After you click Add or
Delete, complex
can be performed on
the traffic that enters
the ingress port
according to the preset
matching rules.
l In the case a specific
service, complex
can be divided into
basic traffic types
according to the DSCP
value, C-VLAN ID, C-
VLAN priority, S-
VLAN ID, or S-
VLAN priority.
Traffic type is based
on the associated
Ethernet packets.
Therefore, this
parameter is set
according to the packet
type and the planning
information.
Match Value DSCP Value: 0 to 63
CVlan ID: 1 to 4094
CVlan priority: 0 to 7
SVlan ID: 1 to 4094
SVlan priority: 0 to 7
- l If the matching value
of the packets is the
same as the preset
Match Value, the
packets match the
rules of complex
traffic classification.
according to the
Wildcard - - This parameter has a fixed
value of 0.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
CoS -
CS7
CS6
EF
AF4
AF3
AF2
AF1
BE
- l This parameter
specifies the PHB
service class queue
mapped by the traffic
classification packets.
to empty (-), the traffic
classification packets
map the PHB service
class queue according
the mapping relation
specified in the topic
about Diffserv domain
management.
according to the
Enabled
whether the CAR
operation is performed
for the flow in the
ingress direction.
l CIR (kbit/s), PIR
set only when
Bandwidth Limit is
set to Enabled.
according to the
A-295
CIR(kbit/s) - - l When the rate of the
packets is not more
than the CIR, the
packets are marked
blue and pass the CAR
policing. These
packets are first
forwarded in the case
of network congestion.
l When the rate of the
packets is more than
the CIR but not more
than the PIR, the
packets whose rate is
more than the CIR can
pass the restriction of
the CAR and are
marked yellow. The
processing method of
the packets marked
yellow can be set to
"Pass" or "Remark".
"Remark" indicates
mapped into another
specified queue of a
higher priority (this is
equal to changing the
priority of the packets)
and then forwarded to
the next port. If a
network congestion
event occurs again, the
packets marked
yellow can be
processed according to
the new priority.
according to the
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
PIR(kbit/s) - - l When the rate of the
the PIR, the packets
that exceed the rate
restriction are marked
red and directly
discarded.
l When the rate of the
the CIR but not more
than the PIR, the
packets whose rate is
more than the CIR can
pass the restriction of
the CAR and are
marked yellow. The
processing method of
the packets marked
yellow can be set to
"Pass" or "Remark".
"Remark" indicates
mapped into another
the next port. If a
network congestion
event occurs again, the
packets marked
yellow can be
processed according to
the new priority.
according to the
A-297
CBS(byte) - - l During a certain
period, if the rate of the
packets whose
processing method is
marked "Pass" is not
more than the CIR,
certain burst packets
are allowed and can be
first forwarded in the
case of network
congestion. The
burst packets is
determined by the
CBS.
according to the
PBS(byte) - - l During a certain
period, if the rate of the
packets whose
processing method is
marked "Pass" is more
than the CIR but not
more than the PIR,
certain burst packets
are allowed and
marked yellow. The
burst packets is
determined by the
PBS.
according to the
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Coloration Mode Color Blindness Color Blindness l This parameter
specifies the CAR
operation performed
by the equipment on
the packets. The
packets are dyed
according to the result
of the CAR operation.
The dying rule is
determined by the
comparison between
the rate of the packets
and the preset CAR
value.
l The OptiX RTN 950
supports Color
Blindness only.
Packet Color Red
Yellow
Green
- Packets can be dyed in
three colors: red, yellow,
and green. The packets in
red are first discarded.
Handling Mode Discard
Pass
Remark
- l This parameter
specifies the method of
handling the packets.
l Discard: The packets
are discarded.
l Pass: The packets are
forwarded.
l Remark: The packets
are remarked.
"Remark" indicates
mapped into another
the next port.
A-299
Relabeled CoS CS7
CS6
EF
AF4
AF3
AF2
AF1
BE
- If the handling method is
set to "Remark", you can
reset the CoS of the
packets.

Egress Parameters
Enable
Enable l This parameter
whether the traffic
shaping is performed
in the egress function.
l CIR (kbit/s), PIR
set only when
Bandwidth Limit is
set to Enabled.
according to the
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
CIR(kbit/s) - - l In the case that no
packets exist in the
egress queue: When
the rate of the packets
is not more than the
CIR, these packets
directly enter the
egress queue.
l In the case that certain
egress queue: The
packets whose rate
of the PIR directly
enter the egress queue,
which forwards the
packets to the next port
at the CIR.
according to the
A-301
PIR(kbit/s) - - l In the case that no
egress queue: If the
rate of the packets is
more than the CIR but
is not more than the
PIR, the packets
whose rate is more
than the CIR enter the
egress queue, which
forwards the packets to
the next port at the
CIR. If the rate of the
the PIR, the packets
are directly discarded.
l In the case that certain
egress queue: The
packets whose rate
of the PIR directly
enter the egress queue,
which forwards the
packets to the next port
at the CIR.
according to the
CBS(byte) - - l If the rate of the
packets is not more
than the CIR during a
certain period, the
burst packets are
directly transmitted.
The maximum traffic
of the burst packets is
determined by the
CBS.
according to the
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
PBS(byte) - - l If the rate of the
the CIR but is not more
than the PIR during a
certain period, the
burst packets enter the
egress queue. The
burst packets is
determined by the
PBS.
according to the

A.6.4.7 Parameter Description: Port Shaping Management_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port shaping management tasks.
Navigation Path
Management > Port Shaping Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click New.
Parameters for Port Shaping Management
Slot No. - - This parameter specifies
the slot ID.
the port.
CIR (kbit/s) - - Traffic shaping for an
the PIR is valid.
If the traffic shaping
function is enabled, OptiX
RTN 950 processes the
packets in the buffer
CBS (byte) - -
PIR (kbit/s) - -
A-303
PBS (byte) - -
queue through the
following methods when
no packets are available in
the queue.
are processed as
PIR.
packets can be
burst packets is
determined by the
PBS.
is not empty, the
packets whose rate
of the PIR directly
PIR.

Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A.7 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet Features
on the EoPDH Plane
EoPDH plane, including service parameters, protocol parameters, OAM parameters, Ethernet
port parameters, and QoS parameters.
This section describes the parameters for EoPDH-plane Ethernet services.
This section describes the parameters for EoPDH-plane Ethernet protocols.
This section describes the parameters for the Ethernet OAM on the EoPDH plane.
This section describes the parameters for the QoS on the EoPDH plane.
This section describes the parameters for the Ethernet ports on the EoPDH plane.
This section describes the parameters for EoPDH-plane Ethernet services.
A.7.1.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Line Service_Creation
This section describes the parameters for creating an Ethernet line service.
A.7.1.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Line Service_Creating QinQ-Based Ethernet Line
Services
This section describes the parameters associated with QinQ-based Ethernet line services, which
need to be set on the NMS.
A.7.1.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Line Service
This section describes the parameters for Ethernet line services.
A.7.1.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet LAN Service_Creation of Ethernet LAN Services
Based on IEEE 802.1d/802.1q Bridge
This section describes the parameters for creating an Ethernet LAN service.
A.7.1.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet LAN Service_Creating IEEE 802.1ad Bridge-Based
Ethernet LAN Service
This section describes the parameters associated with IEEE 802.1ad bridge-based Ethernet LAN
services, which need to be set on the NMS.
A.7.1.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet LAN Service
A.7.1.7 Parameter Description: VLAN Filtering Table_Creation
This section describes the parameters for creating VLAN filtering tables.
A.7.1.8 Parameter Description: Aging Time of MAC Address Table Entries
This section describes the parameters associated with the aging time of MAC address table
entries, which need to be set on the NMS.
A-305
A.7.1.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Line Service_Creation
This section describes the parameters for creating an Ethernet line service.
Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board from the Object Tree and choose
Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree.
2. Deselect Display QinQ Shared Service.
3. Click New.
Board - - Displays the board name.
Service Type EPL
EVPL(QinQ)
EPL Specify the Ethernet service type to EPL.
Service Direction Bidirectional
Unidirectional
Bidirectional l If this parameter is set to
Unidirectional, you only need to create
a service from the service source to the
service sink. That is, there is traffic only
in the direction from the service source
to the sink port.
l If this parameter is set to Bidirectional,
you need to create a service from the
service source to the service sink and a
service from the service sink to the
service source. That is, there is traffic in
the direction from the service source to
the sink port and in the direction from the
service sink to the source port at the same
time.
Source Port - - l Specifies the port of the service source.
l When you create bidirectional Ethernet
services from a PORT to a VCTRUNK,
it is recommended that you set the PORT
to the source port.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Source VLAN(e.g.
1,3-6)
1-4095 - l This parameter can be set to null, a
number, or several numbers. When
setting this parameter to several
numbers, use the comma (,) to separate
the discrete numbers, or use the hyphen
(-) to represent consecutive numbers. For
1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
l The number of VLANs must be the same
as the value of Sink VLAN(e.g. 1,3-6).
l If this parameter is set to null, all the
services at the source port are used as the
service source.
l If this parameter is not set to null, only
the service that carries a specified VLAN
ID at the source port can be used as the
service source.
Sink Port - - l Specifies the port of the service sink.
l This parameter cannot take the same
value as Source Port.
l When you create bidirectional Ethernet
services from a PORT to a VCTRUNK,
it is recommended that you set the
VCTRUNK to the sink port.
Sink VLAN(e.g.
1,3-6)
1-4095 - l This parameter can be set to null, a
number, or several numbers. When
setting this parameter to several
numbers, use the comma (,) to separate
the discrete numbers, or use the hyphen
(-) to represent consecutive numbers. For
1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
l The number of VLANs must be the same
as the value of Source VLAN(e.g.
1,3-6).
l If this parameter is set to null, all the
services at the sink port are used as the
service sink.
l If this parameter is not set to null, only
the service that carries a specified VLAN
ID at the sink port can be used as the
service sink.

A-307
Table A-9 Parameters for port attributes
Port - - Displays the ports involved in the Ethernet
service.
Port Type - - Displays the network attribute of the
Ethernet port.
Port Enabled Enabled
Disabled
- l When the source port or the sink port is
set to a PORT, set Port Enabled to
Enabled.
l This parameter need not be set when the
source port or sink port is a VCTRUNK.
TAG Tag Aware
Access
Hybrid
- l If all the accessed services are frames
with VLAN tags (tagged frames), set this
parameter to Tag Aware.
l If all the accessed services are frames
without VLAN tags (untagged frames),
set this parameter to Access.
l If the accessed services contain tagged
frames and untagged frames, set this
parameter to Hybrid.

Table A-10 Parameters for bound paths
Configurable
Ports
VCTRUNK1-
VCTRUNK16
- Specifies the VCTRUNK to bind paths.
Level - - Displays the level of the bound VC path.
In the case of the EFP8 board, this parameter
always takes the value of VC12-Xv.
Uplink
Downlink
Bidirectional l Specifies the direction of the bound path.
l Set this parameter to Bidirectional
unless otherwise specified.
Available
Resources
- - l Displays the available VC4 paths.
l In the case of the EFP8 board, this
parameter always takes the value of
VC4-1.
Available
Timeslots
VC12-1-VC12-63 - Specifies the available timeslots.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Bound Path - - You need to plan and set this parameter
according to the following principles:
l The capacity of the VCTRUNK is
determined by the actual bandwidth
required by the services.
l The EFP8 board supports 16
VCTRUNKs. Each VCTRUNK can
bind a maximum of 16 VC-12 paths and
the total number of bound VC-12 paths
cannot exceed 63.
Number of Bound
Paths
- - Displays the number of the bound VC path.
Activation Status - - Displays the activation status of the bound
VC path.

A.7.1.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Line Service_Creating QinQ-Based
Ethernet Line Services
This section describes the parameters associated with QinQ-based Ethernet line services, which
need to be set on the NMS.
Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board, and choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree.
2. Select Display QinQ Shared Service.
3. Click New.
Service Type EPL
EVPL(QinQ)
EPL Specifies the service type to EVPL(QinQ).
A-309
Unidirectional
Unidirectional, only the service from
the service source to the service sink is
created. That is, the service source is
forwarded only to the sink port.
Bidirectional, both the service from the
service source to the service sink and the
service from the service sink to the
service source are created. That is, when
the service source is forwarded to the
sink port, the service sink is forwarded to
the source port.
parameter to Bidirectional.
Operation Type l Add S-VLAN
l Transparently
transmit C-
VLAN
l Transparently
transmit S-
VLAN
l Transparently
transmit S-
VLAN and C-
VLAN
l Translate S-
VLAN
l Translate S-
VLAN and
transparently
transmit C-
VLAN
l Strip S-VLAN
Strip S-VLAN l When used for private line services,
QinQ can process VLAN tags in
different manners as required.
l When Service Direction is set to
Unidirectional, you can set Operation
Type to Strip S-VLAN.
l Set this parameter according to actual
situations.
Source Port - - l Specifies the port where the service
source resides.
l When creating a bidirectional Ethernet
service from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it
is recommended that you use the PORT
as the source port.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Source C-VLAN
(e.g. 1, 3-6)
1-4095 - l You can set this parameter to null, a
number, or several numbers. When you
set this parameter to several numbers,
use "," to separate these discrete values
and use "-" to indicate continuous
numbers. For example, "1, 3-6" indicates
numbers 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
l The number of VLANs set in this
parameter should be the same as the
number of VLANs set in Sink C-VLAN
(e.g. 1, 3-6).
l When you set this parameter to null, all
the services of the source port work as
the service source.
l When you set this parameter to a non-
null value, only the services of the source
port whose VLAN IDs are included in
the value range of this parameter work as
the service source.
Source S-VLAN 1-4095 - l This parameter must be set to a
numerical value.
l Only the service of the source port whose
S-VLAN ID is equal to the value of this
parameter work as the service source.
Sink Port - - l Specifies the port where the service sink
resides.
l This parameter must be set to be a value
different from Source Port.
l When creating a bidirectional Ethernet
service from a PORT to a VCTRUNK, it
is recommended that you use the
VCTRUNK as the sink port.
A-311
Sink C-VLAN(e.g.
1, 3-6)
1-4095 - l You can set this parameter to null, a
number, or several numbers. When you
set this parameter to several numbers,
use "," to separate these discrete values
and use "-" to indicate continuous
numbers. For example, "1, 3-6" indicates
numbers 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.
l The number of VLANs set in this
parameter should be the same as the
number of VLANs set in Source C-
VLAN(e.g. 1, 3-6).
l When you set this parameter to null, all
the services of the sink port work as the
service sink.
l When you set this parameter to a non-
null value, only the services of the sink
port whose VLAN IDs are included in
the value range of this parameter work as
the service sink.
Sink S-VLAN 1-4095 - l This parameter must be set to a
numerical value.
l Only the services of the sink port whose
S-VLAN IDs are equal to the value of
this parameter work as the service sink.
C-VLAN Priority AUTO AUTO Displays the C-VLAN priority.
S-VLAN Priority AUTO
Priority 0 to Priority
7
AUTO Specifies the S-VLAN priority. The bigger
the value, the higher the priority.

Table A-12 Parameters of port attributes
Port - - Displays the ports that are configured to
transmit the service.
Ethernet port.
Port Enabled Enabled
Disabled
- l When the source port or the sink port is
set to a PORT, set Port Enabled to
Enabled.
l This parameter need not be set when the
source port or sink port is a VCTRUNK.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
TAG - - This parameter is invalid for QinQ line
services.

Configurable
Ports
VCTRUNK1-
VCTRUNK16
Uplink
Downlink
Available
Resources
VC4-1.
Available
Timeslots
cannot exceed 63.
Number of Bound
Paths
VC path.

A.7.1.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Line Service
This section describes the parameters for Ethernet line services.
A-313
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board from the Object Tree and choose Configuration >
Ethernet Service > Ethernet Line Service from the Function Tree.
Table A-14 Parameters on the main interface (Display QinQ Shared Service is not selected)
Service Type - - Displays the service type.
Service Direction - - Displays the service direction.
Source Port - - Displays the port of the service source.
Source VLAN - - Displays the VLAN ID of the service source.
Sink Port - - Displays the port of the service sink.
Sink VLAN - - Displays the VLAN ID of the service sink.
Activation Status - - Displays whether to activate the service.

Table A-15 Parameters on the main interface (Display QinQ Shared Service is selected)
Service Type - - Displays the service type.
Source Port - - Displays the port of the service source.
Source C-VLAN - - Displays the VLAN ID of the service source.
Source S-VLAN - - l Displays the S-VLAN ID of the service
source.
l This parameter can be set only for the
QinQ-based EVPL service.
Sink Port - - Displays the port of the service sink.
Sink C-VLAN - - Displays the VLAN ID of the service sink.
Sink S-VLAN - - l Displays the S-VLAN ID of the service
sink.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
C-VLAN Priority - - l Displays the priority of the C-VLAN.
S-VLAN Priority - - l Displays the priority of the S-VLAN.
Activation Status - - Displays whether to activate the service.

Table A-16 Parameters for port attributes
Ethernet port.
Port Enabled - - When the source port or sink port is a PORT,
this parameter indicates whether the port is
enabled.
TAG - - Displays the tag attribute of the Ethernet
port.

VCTRUNK Port - - Displays the VCTRUNK that binds VC
paths.
Level - - Displays the level of the bound VC paths.
Service Direction - - Displays the direction of the bound VC
paths.
Bound Path - - Displays the serial numbers of the bound VC
paths.
Number of Bound
Paths
- - Displays the number of the bound VC paths.
Activation Status - - Displays whether the bound VC paths are
activated.

A-315
A.7.1.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet LAN Service_Creation of Ethernet LAN
Services Based on IEEE 802.1d/802.1q Bridge
Navigation Path
Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree.
2. Click New.
Board - - Displays the board that is configured with a
bridge.
VB name - - Describes the bridge. It is recommended that
you set this parameter to a character string
that indicates the function of the bridge.
Bridge Type 802.1q
802.1d
802.1ad
802.1q l If this parameter is set to 802.1q, an
IEEE 802.1q bridge is created.
l If this parameter is set to 802.1d, an
IEEE 802.1d bridge is created.
Bridge Switch
Mode
l IVL/Ingress
Filter Enable
(supported by the
IEEE 802.1q
bridge and IEEE
802.1ad bridge,
unsupported by
the IEEE 802.1d
bridge)
l SVL/Ingress
Filter Disable
(supported by the
IEEE 802.1d
bridge and IEEE
802.1ad bridge,
unsupported by
the IEEE 802.1q
bridge)
l IVL/Ingress
Filter Enable
(IEEE 802.1q
bridge and the
IEEE 802.1ad
bridge)
l SVL/Ingress
Filter Disable
(IEEE 802.1d
bridge)
l When the bridge uses the SVL mode, all
the VLANs share one MAC address
table. When the bridge uses the IVL
mode, each VLAN has an MAC address
table.
l When the filtering function is enabled at
the ingress port, the ingress port checks
the VLAN tags of all incoming packets.
If the VLAN ID contained in the VLAN
tag of a packet is not included in the
VLAN filtering table, the packet is
discarded. When the filtering function is
disabled at the ingress port, the ingress
port does not check any VLAN tag of the
incoming packets.
Bridge Learning
Mode
- - Displays the learning mode of the bridge.
Ingress Filter - - Displays whether the filtering function is
enabled at the ingress port.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
MAC Address Self-
learning
- - Displays whether the MAC address self-
learning of the bridge is enabled.

Table A-19 Parameters for mounting services
VB Port - - Displays the ID of the logical port on the
bridge.
Mount Port - - Displays or specifies which physical port or
VCTRUNK on the Ethernet switch board is
Port Type - - Displays the network attribute of the port
Port Enabled Disabled
Enabled
- Displays or specifies whether the port
mounted to the bridge is enabled.
TAG Access
Tag Aware
Hybrid
- Displays or specifies the tag attribute of the
port mounted to the bridge.
Default VLAN ID - - Displays or specifies the default VLAN ID
of the port mounted to the bridge.
This parameter is valid only when you set
the tag attribute of the port to Access or
Hybrid.
10M Half-Duplex
10M Full-Duplex
100M Half-Duplex
100M Full-Duplex
- Displays or specifies the working mode of
the port mounted to the bridge.
Active - - Displays whether to activate the service.
Service Direction - - Displays the direction of the service.
C-VLAN - - The IEEE 802.1d/802.1q bridge does not
support this parameter.
S-VLAN - - The IEEE 802.1d/802.1q bridge does not
S-VLAN Priority - - The IEEE 802.1d/802.1q bridge does not
A-317
C-VLAN Priority - - The IEEE 802.1d/802.1q bridge does not

Table A-20 Parameters for mounting configuration
Available Mounted
Ports
- - Displays which physical port or VCTRUNK
on the Ethernet switch board can be mounted
to the bridge.
Selected Mounted
Ports
- - Displays which physical port or VCTRUNK
on the Ethernet switch board is mounted to
the bridge.

Configurable
Ports
VCTRUNK1-
VCTRUNK16
Uplink
Downlink
Available
Resources
VC4-1.
Available
Timeslots
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
cannot exceed 63.
Number of Bound
Paths
VC path.

A.7.1.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet LAN Service_Creating IEEE 802.1ad
Bridge-Based Ethernet LAN Service
This section describes the parameters associated with IEEE 802.1ad bridge-based Ethernet LAN
services, which need to be set on the NMS.
Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board, and then choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree.
2. Click New.
Board - - Displays the board where the bridge is
configured.
VB Name - - This parameter is a string that describes the
bridge. It is recommended that you set this
parameter to a character string that contains
the information about the detailed
application of the bridge.
Bridge Type 802.1q
802.1d
802.1ad
802.1q When this parameter is set to 802.1ad,
create the IEEE 802.1ad bridge.
A-319
Bridge Switch
Mode
l IVL/Ingress
Filter Enable
(supported by the
802.1q bridge
and 802.1ad
bridge,
unsupported by
the 802.1d
bridge)
l SVL/Ingress
Filter Disable
(supported by the
802.1d bridge
and 802.1ad
bridge,
unsupported by
the 802.1q
bridge)
l IVL/Ingress
Filter Enable (the
802.1q bridge
and the 802.1ad
bridge)
l SVL/Ingress
Filter Disable
(the 802.1d
bridge)
l When the bridge uses the SVL mode, all
the VLANs share one MAC address
table. When the bridge uses the IVL
mode, all the VLANs correspond to their
respective MAC address tables.
l If the ingress filter is enabled, the VLAN
tag is checked at the ingress port. If the
VLAN ID does not equal the VLAN ID
of the port defined in the VLAN filtering
table, the packet is discarded. If the
ingress filter is disabled, the preceding
described check is not conducted.
Bridge Learning
Mode
- - Displays the bridge learning mode.
Ingress Filter - - Displays whether the ingress filter function
is enabled.
MAC Address Self-
learning
learning function of the bridge is enabled.

Table A-23 Parameters of service mounting
VB Port - - Displays the ID of the logical port of the
bridge.
Mount Port - - Displays or specifies the external port or
VCTRUNK on the Ethernet switching
board that is connected to the bridge.
external port/VCTRUNK connected to the
bridge.
Port Enabled Disabled
Enabled
- Displays or specifies whether the external
port connected to the bridge is enabled.
TAG - - This parameter is invalid in the case of
Ethernet LAN services based on 802.1ad
bridge.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Default VLAN ID - - Displays or specifies the default VLAN ID.
This parameter is valid only when TAG is
set to Access or Hybrid.
10M Half-Duplex
10M Full-Duplex
100M Half-Duplex
100M Full-Duplex
Auto-Negotiation Displays or specifies the working mode of
the external port.
Activate - - Displays whether the service is activated.
C-VLAN - - Displays or specifies the C-VLAN ID that
the data frames carry.
Is valid only when the bridge is an IEEE
802.1ad bridge and Operation Type is set
to Add S-VLAN Base for Port and C-
VLAN.
Specifies the mapping relationship between
the C-VLAN ID carried by the data frames
and the S-VLAN ID to be added.
S-VLAN - - Displays or specifies the S-VLAN ID that
the data frames carry.
l When Operation Type is set to Add S-
VLAN Base for Port, this parameter
specifies that the data frames that enter
the IEEE 802.1ad bridge need to be
added with the S-VLAN ID.
VLAN Base for Port and C-VLAN,
this parameter and C-VLAN specify the
mapping relationship between the S-
VLAN ID to be added and the C-VLAN
ID carried by the data frames that enter
the IEEE 802.1ad bridge.
l When Operation Type is set to Mount
Port, this parameter is invalid.
Port and Base for Port and S-VLAN,
this parameter specifies the S-VLAN ID
to be carried by the data frames that enter
S-VLAN Priority - - Displays or specifies the S-VLAN priority.
C-VLAN Priority - - Displays or specifies the C-VLAN priority.
A-321

Table A-24 Parameters of service mounting
Operation Type Add S-VLAN base
for port
Add S-VLAN base
for Port and C-
VLAN
Mount Port
Mount Port and base
for Port and S-
VLAN
Add S-VLAN base
for port
For the meaning of each operation type, see
Application of the QinQ Technology in
802.1ad Bridge Services.
VB Port - - Specifies the ID of the logical port of the
bridge.
Mount Port - - Selects the external port or VCTRUNK on
the Ethernet switching board that is
connected to the bridge.
Port Type - - Displays the port type.
C-VLAN 1-4095 - Is valid only when Operation Type is set to
Add S-VLAN Base for Port and C-
VLAN.
Specifies the mapping relationship between
the C-VLAN ID carried by the data frames
and the S-VLAN ID to be added.
S-VLAN 1-4095 - l When Operation Type is set to Add S-
specifies that the data frames that enter
the IEEE 802.1ad bridge need to be
added with the S-VLAN ID.
mapping relationship between the S-
VLAN ID to be added and the C-VLAN
ID carried by the data frames that enter
this parameter specifies the S-VLAN ID
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
S-VLAN Priority AUTO
Priority 0 to Priority
7
AUTO Specifies the S-VLAN priority.
C-VLAN Priority AUTO AUTO Specifies the C-VLAN priority.
Port Enabled - - Displays or specifies whether the external
port connected to the bridge is enabled.

Configurable
Ports
VCTRUNK1-
VCTRUNK16
Uplink
Downlink
Available
Resources
VC4-1.
Available
Timeslots
cannot exceed 63.
Number of Bound
Paths
VC path.

A-323
A.7.1.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet LAN Service
Navigation Path
Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree.
Board - - Displays the board that is configured with a
bridge.
VB ID - - Displays the ID of the bridge.
VB Name - - This parameter is a character string that
describes the bridge. It is recommended that
you set this character string to a value that
indicates the specific purpose of the bridge.
Bridge Type - - Displays the type of the bridge.
Bridge Switch
Mode
- - Displays the switching mode of the bridge.
Bridge Learning
Mode
- - Displays the learning mode of the bridge.
Ingress Filter - - Displays whether the filtering function is
enabled at the ingress port.
MAC Address self-
Learning
learning of the bridge is enabled.
Active - - Displays whether to activate the service.

Table A-27 Parameters for mounting services
bridge.
Mount Port - - Displays or specifies which physical port or
VCTRUNK on the Ethernet switch board is
Port Type - - Displays the network attribute of the port
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Port Enabled - - Displays or specifies whether the port
mounted to the bridge is enabled.
Hub/Spoke Hub
Spoke
Hub Displays or specifies the Hub/Spoke
attribute of the port mounted to the bridge.
l Hub ports can mutually access each
other.
l Hub ports and Spoke ports can mutually
access each other.
l Spoke ports cannot mutually access each
other.
TAG - - Displays or specifies the TAG attribute of
the mounted port in the case of Ethernet
LAN services based on 802.1d bridge or
802.1q bridge.
This parameter is invalid in the case of
Ethernet LAN services based on 802.1ad
bridge.
Default VLAN ID - - Displays or specifies the default VLAN ID
of the port mounted to the bridge.
This parameter is valid only when you set
the tag attribute of the port to Access or
Hybrid.
Working Mode - - Displays or specifies the working mode of
the port mounted to the bridge.
Service Direction - - Displays the direction of the service.
C-VLAN - - Displays or specifies the C-VLAN ID
carried by the data frame.
This parameter is valid only when the bridge
is an IEEE 802.1ad bridge and Operation
Type is Add S-VLAN Base for Port and
C-VLAN.
This parameter specifies the mapping
relation between the C-VLAN tag carried by
the data frame and the S-VLAN tag to be
added.
A-325
S-VLAN - - Displays or specifies the S-VLAN ID
carried by the data frame.
specifies the S-VLAN to be added to the
data frames that enter the IEEE 802.1ad
bridge.
mapping relation between the S-VLAN
tag to be added and the C-VLAN tag
carried by the data frame that enters the
IEEE 802.1ad bridge.
this parameter specifies the S-VLAN tag
S-VLAN Priority - - Displays the priority of the S-VLAN.
C-VLAN Priority - - Displays the priority of the C-VLAN.

Table A-28 Parameters for VLAN filtering table
VLAN ID - - Displays the VLAN ID that needs to be
filtered in forwarding.
bridge.
Forwarding
Physical Port
- - Displays the actually specified forwarding
port.
l Selected forwarding ports can send
packets only among themselves.
l Selected forwarding ports can only
forward the packet that carries the
VLAN ID tag. These ports discard the
packet that carries other VLAN tags.
l The broadcast packets transmitted by
any of Selected forwarding ports can
be forwarded only among Selected
forwarding ports.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Activation Status - - Displays whether the VLAN ID entry is
valid.

Table A-29 Parameters for VLAN unicast
VLAN ID - - l This parameter is invalid for the 802.1d
bridge and the 802.1ad bridge that adopt
the SVL learning mode. The entry
applies to all VLANs.
l In the case of the 802.1d bridge and the
802.1ad bridge that adopt the SVL
learning mode, the entry applies to only
the VLAN with the ID specified by this
parameter.
l Set this parameter according to the
MAC Address - - l Displays or specifies the static MAC
address.
l A static MAC address is an address that
is set manually. It does not age
automatically and needs to be deleted
manually.
l Generally, a static MAC address is used
for the port that receives but does not
forward Ethernet service packets or the
port whose MAC address need not age
automatically.
bridge.
Physical Port - - l Specifies the Ethernet port that
corresponds to the MAC address.
Aging Status - - Displays the aging status of the entries.

A-327
Table A-30 Parameters for disabling MAC addresses
VLAN ID(e.g.
1,3-6)
- - Displays or specifies the VLAN ID of the
service. A disabled MAC address is valid for
the VLAN with the ID as specified by this
parameter.
MAC Address - - l Displays or specifies the disabled MAC
address. A disabled MAC address is also
called a blacklisted MAC address.
l The data frame that contains a disabled
destination MAC address is discarded. A
disabled MAC address needs to be set
manually and does not age.

VCTRUNK Port - - Displays the VCTRUNK to bind VC paths.
Level - - Displays the level of the bound VC paths.
Service Direction - - Displays the direction of the bound VC
paths.
Bound Path - - Displays the bound paths.
Number of Bound
Paths
- - Displays the number of bound paths.

Table A-32 Parameters for self-learned MAC addresses
MAC Address - - l Displays or specifies the self-learned
MAC address. A self-learned MAC
address is also called a dynamic MAC
address.
l The entries of self-learned MAC
addresses are obtained when the bridge
uses the SVL or IVL learning mode. A
self-learned MAC address ages.
bridge.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
VLAN ID - - l If the bridge uses the SVL learning
mode, this parameter is invalid. That is,
the preset self-learned MAC address
entries are valid for all VLANs.
l If the bridge uses the IVL learning mode,
the preset self-learned MAC address
entries are valid only for the VLAN with
the ID specified by this parameter.

Table A-33 Parameters for VLAN MAC address table capacity
VLAN ID - - Displays the VLAN ID specified for
querying the self-learned MAC addresses.
Actual MAC
Address Table
Capacity
- - Displays how many MAC addresses are
actually self-learned in the query condition
of a specific VLAN ID.

Table A-34 Parameters for VB port MAC address table capacity
bridge. The ID is specified for querying the
self-learned MAC addresses.
Actual MAC
Address Table
Capacity
- - Displays how many MAC addresses are
actually self-learned in the query condition
of a specific VB port.

A.7.1.7 Parameter Description: VLAN Filtering Table_Creation
This section describes the parameters for creating VLAN filtering tables.
Navigation Path
Configuration > Ethernet Service > Ethernet LAN Service from the Function Tree.
2. Select an IEEE 802.1q or 802.1ad bridge and click the VLAN Filtering tab.
A-329
NOTE
In the case of IEEE 802.1ad bridge-based Ethernet LAN services, the learning mode of the VB must
be IVL.
3. Click New.
VB - - Displays the bridge whose VLAN filtering
table is to be created.
VLAN ID(e.g.
1,3-6)
1-4095 1 Specifies the VLAN IDs in the VLAN
filtering table.
l You can set this parameter to a number
or several numbers. When you set this
parameter to several numbers, use "," to
separate these discrete values and use "-"
to indicate continuous numbers. For
example, "1, 3-6" indicates numbers 1,
3, 4, 5, and 6.
Available
forwarding ports
- - Displays the ports mounted to the bridge.
Selected
forwarding ports
- - Displays the selected forwarding ports.
l The selected forwarding ports can send
packets only among themselves.
l The selected forwarding ports can only
forward the packet that carries the
VLAN ID (e.g:1,3-6) tag. These ports
discard the packet that carries other
VLAN tags.
l The broadcast packet that carries the
VLAN ID(e.g.1,3-6) tag can be
forwarded only among the selected
forwarding ports.

A.7.1.8 Parameter Description: Aging Time of MAC Address Table Entries
This section describes the parameters associated with the aging time of MAC address table
entries, which need to be set on the NMS.
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board, and choose Configuration > Layer-2 Switching
Management > Aging Time from the Function Tree.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Board - - Displays the Ethernet board.
MAC Address
Aging Time
l 1 to 120 Min
l 1 to 120 Hour
l 1 to 120 Day
5 Min l If one entry is not updated in a certain
period, that is, if no new packet from this
MAC address is received to enable the
re-learning of this MAC address, this
entry is deleted automatically. This
mechanism is called aging, and this
period is called the aging time.
l If you set this parameter to a very large
value, the bridge stores excessive MAC
address table entries that are outdated,
which exhausts the resources of the
MAC address forwarding table.
l If you set this parameter to a very small
value, the bridge may delete the MAC
address table entry that is required,
which reduces the forwarding
efficiency.

This section describes the parameters for EoPDH-plane Ethernet protocols.
A.7.2.1 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Protocol Enabling
This section describes the parameters for the types of spanning tree protocols and for enabling
the spanning tree protocols.
A.7.2.2 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Bridge Parameters
This section describes the parameters for the spanning tree protocol.
A.7.2.3 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Port Parameters
This section describes the parameters associated with the spanning tree protocol, which need to
be set on the NMS.
A.7.2.4 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Bridge Running Information
This section describes the parameters associated with the type and enabled status of the spanning
tree protocol, which need to be set on the NMS.
A.7.2.5 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Port Running Information
A.7.2.6 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Point-to-Point Attribute
A-331
This section describes the parameters associated with the point-to-point attribute of the spanning
A.7.2.7 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Protocol_Enabling
This section describes the parameters for enabling the IGMP snooping protocol.
A.7.2.8 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Protocol_Creation of Static Multicast Table
Entries
This section describes the parameters for creating static multicast table entries.
A.7.2.9 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Protocol_Aging Time of Multicast Table
Entries
This section describes the parameters for the aging time of multicast table entries.
A.7.2.10 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Creation of LAGs
This topic describes the parameters for creating a link aggregation group (LAG).
A.7.2.12 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creation of Point-to-Point Service LPT
This section describes the parameters for creating point-to-point service LPT.
A.7.2.13 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creation of Point-to-Multipoint Service
LPT
This section describes the parameters for creating point-to-multipoint service LPT.
A.7.2.14 Parameter Description: Port Mirroring_Creation
This section describes the parameters for creating port mirroring tasks.
A.7.2.1 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Protocol Enabling
This section describes the parameters for the types of spanning tree protocols and for enabling
the spanning tree protocols.
Navigation Path
Configuration > Layer-2 Switching Management > Spanning Tree from the Function
Tree.
2. Click the Protocol Enabled tab.
VB - - Displays the created bridge.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Protocol Enabled Enabled
Disabled
Disabled l Indicates whether to enable the spanning
tree protocol.
l Try to avoid Layer 2 service loopbacks
in the service networking. If no loop
occurs, you need not start the STP/
RSTP.
l If the loop is already formed in the
service networking, you must start the
STP or RSTP.
Protocol Type STP
RSTP
RSTP l This parameter is valid only when
Protocol Enabled is Enabled.
l The protocol type should be set
according to the requirement of the
interconnected Ethernet equipment. The
default value is recommended unless
otherwise specified.

A.7.2.2 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Bridge Parameters
This section describes the parameters for the spanning tree protocol.
Navigation Path
Configuration > Layer-2 Switching Management > Spanning Tree from the Function
Tree.
2. Click the Bridge Parameters tab.
Priority 0-61440 32768 l The most significant 16 bits of the bridge
ID indicate the priority of the bridge.
l When the value is smaller, the priority is
higher. As a result, the bridge is more
likely to be selected as the root bridge.
l If the priorities of all the bridges on the
STP network take the same value, the
bridge whose MAC address is the
smallest is selected as the root bridge.
A-333
MAC Address - - Displays the MAC address of a bridge.
Max Age(s) 6-40 20 l Indicates the maximum age of the
CBPDU packet that is recorded by the
port.
l The greater the value, the longer the
transmission distance of the CBPDU
packet, and the greater the network
diameter. When the value of this
parameter is greater, however, the link
fault detection of the bridge is slower and
thus the network adaptability is reduced.
Hello Time(s) 1-10 2 l Indicates the interval for transmitting
CBPDU packets through the bridge.
l The greater the value of this parameter,
the less the network resources that are
occupied by the spanning tree. As the
value of this parameter increases,
however, the topology stability
decreases.
Forward Delay(s) 4-30 15 l Indicates the holding time of a port in the
listening state and in the learning state.
l The greater the value, the longer the
delay of the network state change.
Therefore, the topology changes are
slower and recovery in the case of faults
is slower.
TxHoldCout(per
second)
1-10 6 Indicates how many times the port transmits
CBPDU packets in every second.

A.7.2.3 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Port Parameters
This section describes the parameters associated with the spanning tree protocol, which need to
be set on the NMS.
Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board, and choose Configuration > Layer-2
Switching Management > Spanning Tree from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Port Parameters tab.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Port - - Displays the created bridge.
Priority 0-240 128 l The most significant eight bits of the port
ID indicate the port priority.
l The smaller the value of this parameter,
the higher the priority.
Port Path Cost 1-200000000 - l Indicates the status of the network to
which the port is connected.
l In the case of the bridges on both ends of
the path, set this parameter to the same
value.
Status - - Displays the state of a port.
Admin Edge
Attribute
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled l Is valid only when the RSTP is used.
l Specifies whether to set the port to an
edge port. The edge port refers to the
bridge port that is connected only to the
LAN. The edge port receives the BPDU
and does not transmit the BPDU.
l Set this parameter to Enabled only when
the Ethernet port on the Ethernet board
is directly connected to the data
communication terminal equipment,
such as a computer. In other cases, it is
recommended that this parameter takes
the default value.
Protocol Enabled Enabled
Disabled
Enabled l Specifies whether the STP or RSTP is
enabled for the port.
l When this parameter is set to Disabled,
the port does not process or transmit the
BPDU.
A-335
Auto Edge
Detection
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled l Is valid only when Admin Edge
Attribute is set to Enabled.
if the bridge detects that this port is
connected to the port of another bridge,
the RSTP considers this port as a non-
edge port.
l When Admin Edge Attribute is set to
Enabled, set this parameter to
Enabled. In other cases, it is
recommended that this parameter takes
the default value.

A.7.2.4 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Bridge Running Information
Navigation Path
2. Click the Bridge Running Information tab.
Priority - - Displays the priority of the bridge. The most
significant 16 bits of the bridge ID indicate
the priority of the bridge.
MAC Address - - Displays the MAC address of the bridge.
Designed Root
Bridge Priority
- - Displays the priority of the specified bridge.
Designed Root
Bridge MAC
Address
- - Displays the MAC address of the specified
bridge.
Root Path Cost - - Displays the root path cost. The root path
cost is the path cost of the root port and is
used for calculating the network topology.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Root Port - - Displays the root port of the spanning tree
protocol.
Max Age(s) - - Displays the maximum age of the CBPDU
packet that is recorded by the port.
Hello Time(s) - - Displays the interval for transmitting the
CBPDU packets through the bridge.
Forward Delay(s) - - Displays the holding time of a port in
listening state and in learning state.
HoldCout - - Displays the number of times that each port
transmits CBPDU packets per second.

A.7.2.5 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Port Running Information
Navigation Path
2. Click the Port Running Information tab.
Port - - Displays the logical port of the bridge.
Port ID - - Displays the port ID.
Port Status - - Displays the port status.
Port Path Cost - - Displays the port path cost.
Designated Port D - - Displays the ID of the specified port.
Designated Root
Bridge Priority
- - Displays the priority of the specified root
bridge.
Designated Root
Bridge MAC
Address
root bridge.
Designated Path
Cost
- - Displays the specified path cost.
A-337
Designated Bridge
Priority
- - Displays the priority of the specified bridge.
Designated Bridge
MAC Address
bridge.
Topology
Detection
- - Displays the enabled status of topology
detection.
Edge Port Status - - Displays the enabled status of the edge port.
Running Time(s) - - Displays the duration when the topology
remains unchanged.

A.7.2.6 Parameter Description: Spanning Tree_Point-to-Point Attribute
This section describes the parameters associated with the point-to-point attribute of the spanning
Navigation Path
2. Click the Point to Point Attribute tab.
Port - - Displays the internal and external ports on
the Ethernet board.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Point-to-point
Attribute
Adaptive
connection
Link connection
Shared media
Adaptive connection l This parameter is valid only when the
RSTP is used.
l If this parameter is set to Adaptive
connection, the bridge determines the
actual point-to-point attribute of the port
according to the actual working mode of
the port. If the port works in full-duplex
mode, the actual point-to-point attribute
of the port is True. If the port works in
half-duplex mode, the actual point-to-
point attribute of the port is False.
l If you set this parameter to Link
connection, the actual point-to-point
attribute of the port is True.
l If you set this parameter to Shared
media, the actual point-to-point attribute
of the port is False.
l Only the port whose actual point to point
attribute is True can transmit the fast
transition request and response
messages.

A.7.2.7 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Protocol_Enabling
This section describes the parameters for enabling the IGMP snooping protocol.
Navigation Path
Configuration > Layer-2 Switching Management > IGMP Snooping Protocol from the
Function Tree.
2. Click the Enable IGMP Snooping Protocol tab.
VB - - Displays the ID of the bridge.
A-339
Protocol Enable Enabled
Disabled
Disabled l Specifies whether to enable the IGMP
snooping protocol.
l If the IGMP multicast router exists on
the interconnected Ethernet network,
enable the IGMP snooping protocol
according to the requirements of the
router.
The Discarded Tag
of the Packet
Excluded in the
Multicast Group
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled l This parameter specifies the method of
the port to process unknown multicast
packets. When the IEEE 802.1q or
802.1ad bridge receives the multicast
packets whose multicast addresses are
not included in the multicast table, these
packets are considered as unknown
packets.
Protocol Enable is Enabled.
l If this parameter is set to Enabled,
unknown multicast packets are
discarded.
l If this parameter is set to Disabled,
unknown multicast packets are
broadcast in the VLAN.
l Set this parameter as required by the
IGMP multicast server.
Max.Non-
Response Times
1 to 4 3 If the bridge transmits an IGMP group query
packet to the multicast member ports, the
router port starts the timer for the query of
the maximum response time. If the bridge
does not receive the IGMP report packet
within the maximum response time, the
bridge adds one to the no-response times of
the multicast member port. When the no-
response times of the port exceed the preset
threshold, the bridge deletes the multicast
member from the multicast group.

A.7.2.8 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Protocol_Creation of Static
Multicast Table Entries
This section describes the parameters for creating static multicast table entries.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Navigation Path
Function Tree.
2. Click the Static Multicast Table tab.
3. Click New.
VB ID - - Displays the ID of the created bridge.
VLAN ID - - Specifies the VLAN ID of the static
multicast table entry.
MAC Address - - l Specifies the MAC address in the static
multicast table.
Multicast Port - - l Specifies the port as an entry in the static
multicast table.
l An entry in the static multicast table does
not age.

A.7.2.9 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Protocol_Aging Time of Multicast
Table Entries
This section describes the parameters for the aging time of multicast table entries.
Navigation Path
Function Tree.
2. Click the Multicast Aging Time tab.
A-341
Multicast Aging
Time(Min)
1-120 8 l Specifies the aging time for multicast
table entries. When a dynamic multicast
table entry is not updated in a certain
period (that is, no IGMP request from
this multicast address is received), this
entry is automatically deleted. This
mechanism is called aging, and this
period is called aging time.
l If this parameter is set to a very great
value, the bridge stores excessive
multicast table entries that are no longer
needed, which exhausts the resources of
the multicast table.
l If this parameter is set to a very small
value, the bridge may delete the
multicast table entry that is needed,
which reduces the forwarding
efficiency.
l The default value is recommended.

A.7.2.10 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Creation of LAGs
This topic describes the parameters for creating a link aggregation group (LAG).
Navigation Path
Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Link Aggregation
2. Click the Link Aggregation Group Management tab.
3. Click New.
Attribute Parameters
LAG No 1-12 1 Specifies the LAG number.
LAG Name - - Specifies the LAG name.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
LAG Type Static
Manual
Static l Static: A static LAG is created by the
user. To add or delete a member port, you
need to run the Link Aggregation
Control Protocol (LACP) protocol. In a
static LAG, a port can be in selected,
standby, or unselected state. By running
the LACP protocol, devices exchange
aggregation information so that they
share the same aggregation information.
l Manual: A manual LAG is created by the
user. When you add or delete a member
port, you need not run the LACP
protocol. In a manual LAG, a port can be
in the UP or DOWN state. The system
determines whether to aggregate a port
according to its physical state (UP or
DOWN), working mode, and rate.
Load Sharing Sharing
Non-Sharing
Sharing l Sharing: In a sharing LAG, all member
ports always share the traffic load. The
sharing mode can improve bandwidth
utilization on a link. When the member
ports are changed or some member ports
fail, the traffic load of each member port
is automatically re-allocated.
l Non-Sharing: In a non-sharing LAG,
only one member port carries the traffic
load and the other member ports are in
Standby state. Actually, a non-sharing
LAG works in hot-standby mode. When
the active port fails, the system selects a
standby port to substitute for the failed
port, thus preventing a link failure.
Sharing Mode IP Sharing Mode
MAC Sharing Mode
IP Sharing Mode You can set this parameter only when Load
Sharing is Sharing.
Revertive Mode Revertive
Non-Revertive
Revertive l You can set this parameter only when
Load Sharing is Non-Sharing.
l If this parameter is set to Revertive,
services are automatically switched back
to the working path after the working
path recovers.
l If this parameter is set to Non-
Revertive, services are still transmitted
in the protection path after the working
path recovers and the LAG remains the
same.

A-343
Port Setting Parameters
Main Port - - l Specifies the main port in a LAG.
l After a LAG is created, you can add
Ethernet services to the main port only.
That is, services cannot be added to a
slave port.
l When Load Sharing is set to Non-
Sharing, the link connected to the main
port is the working path and the links
connected to the slave ports are
protection paths.
Available Standby
Ports
- - l Specifies the salve port in a LAG.
l After a LAG is created, you need to
perform manual operations to add or
delete a slave port.
Selected Standby
Ports
- - Displays the selected slave ports.

Navigation Path
Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Ethernet Link Aggregation
2. Click the Link Aggregation Parameters tab.
Port Priority 0-65535 32768 l This parameter is valid only when LAG
Type of a LAG is set to Static.
l This parameter indicates the priorities of
the ports in a LAG as defined in the
LACP protocol. The smaller the value,
the higher the priority.

Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameters for the system settings
System Priority 0-65535 32768 l This parameter is valid only when LAG
Type of a LAG is set to Static.
l This parameter indicates the priority of a
LAG. The smaller the value, the higher
the priority.
l When the local LAG and the opposite
LAG negotiate through LACP packets,
one can obtain the system priority of the
other. The LAG with the higher system
priority is considered as the comparison
result. Then, the aggregation
information is consistent at both ends. If
the local LAG and the opposite LAG
have the same system priority, the MAC
addresses are compared. The LAG with
a lower MAC address is considered as
the comparison result. Then, the
aggregation information is consistent at
both ends.
System MAC
Address
- - Displays the MAC address of the system.

A.7.2.12 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creation of Point-to-Point
Service LPT
This section describes the parameters for creating point-to-point service LPT.
Navigation Path
Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > LPT Management from the
Function Tree.
2. Click Query.
VCTRUNK Port - - Displays the VCTRUNK used by the
Ethernet service.
A-345
Direction - - l Displays the direction of the Ethernet
service at the port.
l The service direction is set to positive
when the source port is a PORT and the
sink port is a VCTRUNK; the service
direction is set to reverse when the
source port is a VCTRUNK and the sink
port is a PORT.
LPT Yes
No
No Specifies whether to enable the LPT.
Bearer Mode GFP(HUAWEI)
Ethernet
GFP-CSF
GFP(HUAWEI) l Specifies the bearer mode of the LPT
packets.
PORT-Type Port
Hold-Off Time(ms)
0-10000 100 l When the link on which Ethernet
services are transmitted is configured
with other protection schemes, you need
to set the hold-off time of LPT. This
enables the NE to notify the equipment
at both ends of a transmission network of
the fault on the transmission link only
when the other protection schemes fail.
l This parameter is valid only in the
positive direction of LPT.
VCTRUNK Port
Hold-Off Time(ms)
0-10000 100 l When the link on which Ethernet
services are transmitted is configured
with other protection schemes, you need
to set the hold-off time of LPT. This
enables the NE to notify the equipment
at both ends of a transmission network of
the fault on the transmission link only
when the other protection schemes fail.
l This parameter is valid only in the
reverse direction of LPT.

A.7.2.13 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creation of Point-to-Multipoint
Service LPT
This section describes the parameters for creating point-to-multipoint service LPT.
Navigation Path
Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > LPT Management from the
Function Tree.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
2. Click PtoMP LPT. Then, the LPT Management dialog box appears.
3. Click New.
Parameters for Convergence Points
Port - - Specifies the port of the convergence point.
Ethernet
GFP-CSF
GFP(HUAWEI) l This parameter can be set only when the
selected port is a VCTRUNK.
Port Hold-Off
Time(ms)
0-10000 0 When the link on which Ethernet services
are transmitted is configured with other
protection schemes, you need to set the
hold-off time of LPT. This enables the NE
to notify the equipment at both ends of a
transmission network of the fault on the
transmission link only when the other
protection schemes fail.

Parameters for Access Points
Port - - Specifies the port at the access node.
Ethernet
GFP-CSF
GFP(HUAWEI) l This parameter can be set only when the
selected port is a VCTRUNK.

A.7.2.14 Parameter Description: Port Mirroring_Creation
This section describes the parameters for creating port mirroring tasks.
Navigation Path
Configuration > Ethernet Interface Management > Port Mirroring from the Function
Tree.
2. Click New.
A-347
Mirror Listener
Port
- - l After the mirroring function of the port
is configured, you can monitor all the
mirrored ports by analyzing the packets
at the mirroring port only. As a result,
you can easily manage the ports.
l Mirror Listener Port indicates the port
that sends the packets copied from
Uplink Listened Port and Downlink
Listened Port.
l Mirror Listener Port cannot be set to a
port that carries any service.
Mirrored
Upstream Port
- - l Mirrored Upstream Port and
Mirrored Downstream Port indicate
the ports that copy packets for Mirror
Listener Port.
l Mirrored Upstream Port can be a
PORT or a VCTRUNK. As a PORT, the
port copies the packets that it receives;
as a VCTRUNK, the port copies the
packets that it transmits. Mirror
Listener Port sends the packets copied
from Mirrored Upstream Port.
l Mirrored Downstream Port can be a
PORT or a VCTRUNK. As a PORT, the
port copies the packets that it transmits;
as a VCTRUNK, the port copies the
packets that it receives. Mirror Listener
Port sends the packets copied from
Mirrored Downstream Port.
NOTE
The transmit direction and receive direction
mentioned in this section are related to the local
NE.
Mirrored
Downstream Port
- -

This section describes the parameters for the Ethernet OAM on the EoPDH plane.
A.7.3.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MDs
This topic describes the parameters for creating maintenance domains (MDs).
A.7.3.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MAs
This section describes the parameters for creating maintenance associations (MAs).
A.7.3.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MPs
This section describes the parameters for creating a maintenance point (MP).
A.7.3.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Enabling LB
This section describes the parameters for enabling the LB.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A.7.3.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Enabling LT
This topic describes the parameters for enabling the LT.
A.7.3.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM_OAM Parameter
This section describes the OAM parameters that are related to Ethernet ports.
A.7.3.7 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM_OAM Error Frame Monitoring
This section describes the parameters for monitoring the OAM error frames at the Ethernet port.
A.7.3.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM_Remote OAM Parameter
This section describes the parameters for monitoring the OAM errored frames at the Ethernet
port.
A.7.3.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MDs
This topic describes the parameters for creating maintenance domains (MDs).
Navigation Path
Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Ethernet Service OAM from the Function
Tree.
2. In the right pane, click OAM Configuration.
3. Click New and choose Create MD from the drop-down list.
Maintenance Domain
Name
For example: MD1 - Specifies the name of the
MD.
Maintenance Domain
Level
Consumer High(7)
Consumer Middle(6)
Consumer Low(5)
Provider High(4)
Provider Low(3)
Operator High(2)
Operator Middle(1)
Operator Low(0)
Operator Low(0) Specifies the level of the
MD. The greater the value,
the higher the level.

A.7.3.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MAs
This section describes the parameters for creating maintenance associations (MAs).
A-349
Navigation Path
Tree.
2. In the right pane, click OAM Configuration.
3. Click New and choose Create MA from the drop-down list.
Maintenance Domain
Name
For example: MD1 - Displays the MD in which
an MA is to be created.
Maintenance
Association Name
For example: MA1 - This parameter specifies
the name of the MA,
which is a service-related
domain. By creating MAs,
the connectivity check
(CC) can be performed on
the network that transmits
a particular service
instance.

A.7.3.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Creation of MPs
This section describes the parameters for creating a maintenance point (MP).
Navigation Path
Tree.
2. Click New.
Maintenance
Domain Name
- NULL Specifies the maintenance domain (MD) of
the MP.
NOTE
An MD is not required for a common MP. For
the creation of a common MP, select NULL.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Maintenance
Association Name
- NULL Specifies the maintenance association (MA)
of the MP.
NOTE
An MA is not required for a common MP. For
the creation of a common MP, select NULL.
Node - - Specifies the port where you want to create
an MP.
VLAN ID - - l Configures the ID of the VLAN to which
the service of the MP belongs. The
information is contained in the OAM
data packet. The MPs with the same
VLAN ID in an MD can communicate
with each other.
l This parameter can be null in the case of
PORT services, but need to be set in the
case of PORT+VLAN services.
MP ID Standard MP:
00-00-0000 to FF-
FF-1FFF
Common MP:
00-00-0000 to FF-
FF-FF00
00-00-0000 Uniquely identifies an MP. From the highest
to the lowest, the first byte indicates the
network number, the second byte indicates
the number of the node in the local network,
and the third and forth bytes indicate the ID
of the MP on the network node. The MP ID
must be unique in the entire network.
Type MEP
MIP
MEP Specifies the MP type defined in IEEE
802.1ag. An MP can be a maintenance
association end point (MEP) or a
maintenance association intermediate point
(MIP).
Direction Ingress
Egress
Ingress l Specifies the direction of the MEP.
l Set this parameter to Ingress if the OAM
data initiated by the MEP travels through
the Ethernet switching unit on the local
NE. Otherwise, set this parameter to
Egress.

A-351
Table A-46 Parameters for advanced attributes
Level Consumer High(7)
Consumer Middle
(6)
Consumer Low(5)
Provider High(4)
Provider Low(3)
Operator High(2)
Operator Middle(1)
Operator Low(0)
Provider High(4) Specifies the level of a common MP. The
greater the value, the higher the level.
NOTE
This parameter is valid only for a common MP
(NULL).
CC Status Active
Inactive
Inactive Specifies whether to enable the connectivity
check (CC) function at an MP.
LB Timeout(ms) 3000 to 60000, in
step of 100
5000 l Specifies the timeout duration of an LB
test.
l This parameter can be set only for an
MEP.
LT Timeout(ms) 3000 to 60000, in
step of 100
5000 l Specifies the timeout duration of an LT
test.
MEP.
CCM Sending
Period(ms)
Standard MP:
1000
10000
6000
600000
Common MP:
1000 to 60000, in
step of 100
Standard MP
1000
Common MP:
5000
Specifies the interval for sending the CCM
packet at the MP where the CC test is
performed.
l If this parameter takes a very small
value, service bandwidth decreases
significantly.
l If this parameter takes a very great value,
the CC test will become less capable in
detecting service interruptions. The
default value is recommended.
MEP.

A.7.3.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Enabling LB
This section describes the parameters for enabling the LB.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Navigation Path
Tree.
2. Select the node that requires an LB test, click OAM Operation, and select Start LB.
LB Source MP ID - - Specifies the ID of the
source maintenance point
in the LB test.
LB Sink MP ID - - Specifies the ID of the sink
maintenance point in the
LB test.
Test Result - - Indicates the result of one
LB test.
Test based on the MAC
Address
Selected
Not selected
Not selected Select this parameter for
an LB test based on MAC
addresses.
NOTE
This parameter is valid only
for a standard MP.
LB Sink MP MAC
Address
- - Specifies the MAC
address of the sink
maintenance point in the
LB test. This parameter is
valid only in the case of
Test based on the MAC
Address.

A.7.3.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM_Enabling LT
This topic describes the parameters for enabling the LT.
Navigation Path
Tree.
2. Select the node that requires an LT test, click OAM Operation, and select Start LT.
A-353
LT Source MP ID - - Specifies the source MP in
the LT test.
LT Sink MP ID - - Specifies the sink MP in
the LT test.
Responding MP ID - - Displays the MP that
responds to the test.
Responding MP Type - - Displays the type of the
MP that responds to the
test.
Hop Count - - Displays the count of hops
between the source MP
and the responding MP.
That is, the number of
responding MPs from the
source MP to a certain
responding MP in an LT
test.
Test Result - - Indicates the result of one
LT test.

A.7.3.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM_OAM Parameter
This section describes the OAM parameters that are related to Ethernet ports.
Navigation Path
Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Ethernet Port OAM from the Function Tree.
PORT - - Displays the name of the
external Ethernet port.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Enable OAM Protocol Enabled
Disabled
Disabled Specifies whether the
point-to-point OAM
protocol (IEEE 802.3ah
protocol) is enabled.
After the OAM protocol is
enabled, the current
Ethernet port starts to use
the preset mode to set up
an OAM connection with
the opposite end.
OAM Working Mode Active
Passive
Active The negotiation mode of
IEEE 802.3ah includes
active and passive modes.
If this parameter is set to
Active, the port can
initiate an OAM
connection. If this
parameter is set to
Passive, the port can only
respond to the OAM
connection requests from
the opposite end.
Remote Alarm Support
for Link Event
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled Specifies whether the
detected link event is
notified to the opposite
end (for example, error
frame periods, error
frames, and error frame
seconds).
Max OAM Packet
Length(byte)
- - Displays the maximum
length of the OAM
packets.
This parameter takes the
same value as the
Maximum Frame
Length of the external
port.
Loopback Status - - Displays the loopback
status.

A.7.3.7 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM_OAM Error Frame Monitoring
This section describes the parameters for monitoring the OAM error frames at the Ethernet port.
A-355
Navigation Path
Configuration > Ethernet Maintenance > Ethernet Port OAM from the Function Tree.
2. Click the OAM Error Frame Monitor tab.
PORT For example:
PORT1
- Displays the name of the external Ethernet
port.
Error Frame
Monitor Window
(ms)
1000 to 60000, in
step of 100
1000 In the specified Error Frame Monitor
Window (ms), if the number of error frames
exceeds the specified Error Frame
Monitor Threshold (Entries) due to the
link degradation, the link event alarm is
reported.
Error Frame
Monitor Threshold
(frames)
1 to 4294967295, in
step of 1
2 Specifies the threshold of monitoring error
frames.
Error Frame
Period Window
(frames)
14880 to 8928000,
in step of 1
148800 Within the specified value of Error Frame
Period Window (frames), if the number of
error frames on the link exceeds the preset
value of Error Frame Period Threshold
(frames), an alarm is reported.
Error Frame
Period Threshold
(frames)
1 to 892800000, in
step of 1
2 Specifies the threshold of monitoring the
error frame period.
Error Frame
Second Window(s)
1
60 If any error frame occurs in one second, this
second is called an error frame second.
Within the specified value of Error Frame
Second Window(s), if the number of error
frames on the link exceeds the preset value
of Error Frame Second Threshold (s), an
alarm is reported.
Error Frame
Second Threshold
(s)
1 to 900, in step of 1 2 Specifies the threshold of monitoring error
frame seconds.

A.7.3.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM_Remote OAM Parameter
This section describes the parameters for monitoring the OAM errored frames at the Ethernet
port.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board and choose Configuration > Ethernet
Maintenance > Ethernet Port OAM from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Remote OAM parameter tab.
Field Value Range Default Value Description
Port - - Displays the name of the
remote Ethernet port.
Remote OAM Working
Mode
- - Displays the working
mode of the remote
Ethernet port.
Remote Alarm Support
for Link Event
- - Displays whether the
remote Ethernet port can
notify link events to the
local port.
Remote Side Loopback
Response
- - Displays how the remote
Ethernet port responds to a
loopback.
Unidirectional
Operation
- - Displays whether the
remote Ethernet port
supports unidirectional
operations.
Max.OAM Packet
Length (byte)
OAM packet size
supported by the remote
Ethernet port.

This section describes the parameters for the QoS on the EoPDH plane.
A.7.4.1 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of Flows
This parameter describes the parameters for creating flows.
A.7.4.2 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of CAR
This section describes the parameters for creating CAR.
A.7.4.3 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of CoS
This section describes the parameters for creating CoS.
A.7.4.4 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of CAR/CoS
This section describes the parameters for creating CAR/CoS.
A-357
A.7.4.5 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Shaping Management of Egress Queues
This section describes the parameters for shaping management of egress queues.
A.7.4.1 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of Flows
This parameter describes the parameters for creating flows.
Navigation Path
Configuration > QoS Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Flow Configuration tab.
3. Click New.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Flow Type Port Flow
Port+VLAN Flow
Port+SVLAN Flow
Port+CVLAN
+SVLAN Flow
Port+VLAN
+Priority Flow
Port Flow l Port flow: The packets from a certain
port are classified as a type of flow. The
Ethernet service associated with this
flow type is the line service or Layer 2
switching service that uses this port as
the service source.
l Port+VLAN flow: The packets that are
from a certain port and have a specified
VLAN ID are classified as a type of flow.
The associated Ethernet service of this
flow type is the EVPL service (based on
VLAN) or EVPLAN service (based on
802.1q bridge) that uses this PORT
+VLAN as the service source.
l Port+SVLAN flow: The packets that are
from a certain port and have a specified
SVLAN ID are classified as a type of
flow. The associated Ethernet service of
this flow type is the EVPL service (based
on QinQ) or EVPLAN service (based on
802.1ad bridge) that uses this PORT
+SVLAN as the service source.
l Port+CVLAN+SVLAN flow: The
packets that are received from or
transmitted to a certain port and have a
specified CVLAN+SVLAN are
classified as a type of flow. The
associated Ethernet service of this flow
type is the EVPL service (based on
QinQ) or EVPLAN service (based on
802.1ad bridge) that uses this PORT
+CVLAN+SVLAN as the service
source.
l Port+VLAN+Priority flow: The packets
that are from a certain port and have a
specified VLAN ID and a specified
VLAN priority are classified as a type of
flow. The associated Ethernet service of
this flow type is the line service that uses
this Port+VLAN+Priority as the service
source.
A-359
Port PORT1-PORT9,
VCTRUNK1-
VCTRUNK16
PORT1 l When the associated service is the line
service, set this parameter to the source
port or sink port of the associated
Ethernet service.
l When the associated service is the Layer
2 switching service, set this parameter to
a mounted port of the bridge.
VLAN ID 1-4095 1 l This parameter is valid only when Flow
Type is set to Port+VLAN Flow or Port
+VLAN+Priority Flow.
l Set this parameter to the source VLAN
of the associated Ethernet service.
C-VLAN 1-4095 1 l This parameter is valid only when Flow
Type is set to Port+CVLAN+SVLAN
Flow.
l Set this parameter to the source C-
VLAN of the associated Ethernet
service.
S-VLAN 1-4095 1 l This parameter is valid only when Flow
Type is set to Port+SVLAN Flow or
Port+SVLAN+CVLAN Flow.
l Set this parameter to the source S-VLAN
of the associated Ethernet service.
Priority - - l This parameter is valid only when Flow
Type is PORT+VLAN+Priority Flow.
l This parameter indicates the VLAN
priority of the flow-associated Ethernet
services.

A.7.4.2 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of CAR
This section describes the parameters for creating CAR.
Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board, and then choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Flow Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the CAR Configuration.
3. Click New.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
CAR ID 1-512 1 This parameter identifies a CAR operation,
and is used to bind a flow to an associated
CAR operation.
Disabled
Disabled Indicates whether to enable the CAR
operation performed on the flow bound to
the CAR.
Committed
information Rate
(kbit/s)
0-100032
Step: 64
0 l Indicates the CIR. When the rate of a
packet is not more than the CIR, this
packet passes the restriction of the CAR
and is forwarded first even in the case of
network congestion.
l The value of this parameter should not
be more than the PIR.
Committed Burst
Size(kbyte)
0-1024 0 Indicates the CBS. When the rate of a packet
that passes the restriction of the CAR is not
more than the CIR in a certain period, some
packets can burst and can pass the
restriction of the CAR. These packets can
be forwarded first even in the case of
network congestion. The maximum traffic
of the burst packets is determined by the
CBS. Note that the CBS has an inherent
size, and this parameter indicates the
increment value only. The inherent size of
the CBS is determined by the CIR. The
greater the CIR, the greater the CBS.
Peak information
Rate(kbit/s)
0-100032
Step: 64
0 l Indicates the PIR. When the rate of a
packet is more than the PIR, the packet
that exceeds the rate restriction is
directly discarded. When the rate of
packets is more than the CIR but is lower
than or equal to the PIR, these packets
whose rate exceeds the CIR can pass the
restriction of the CAR and are marked
yellow, and these packets are discarded
first in the case of network congestion.
be more than the port bandwidth.
A-361
Maximum Burst
Size(kbyte)
0-1024 0 Indicates the MBS. When the rate of the
packet that passes the restriction of the CAR
is more than the CIR but is not more than
the PIR, some packets can burst and are
marked yellow, which enables these
packets to be discarded first in the case of
network congestion. The maximum traffic
of the burst packets is determined by the
MBS. Note that the MBS has an inherent
size, and this parameter indicates the
increment value only. The inherent size of
the MBS is determined by the PIR. The
greater the PIR, the greater the MBS.

A.7.4.3 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of CoS
This section describes the parameters for creating CoS.
Navigation Path
3. Click New.
CoS ID 1-64 1 This parameter identifies a CoS operation,
and is used to bind a flow to an associated
CoS operation.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
CoS Type simple
VLAN Priority
IPTOS
DSCP
simple l If the CoS type of a flow is set to simple,
all the packets in this flow are directly
scheduled to a specified egress queue.
l If the CoS type of a flow is set to VLAN
priority, the packets in this flow are
scheduled to specified egress queues
according to the user priorities specified
in the VLAN tags of these packets.
l If the CoS type of a flow is set to DSCP,
the packets in this flow are scheduled to
specified egress queues according to
differentiated services code point
(DSCP) in the IPv6 tags of these packets.
l If the CoS type of a flow is set to IP TOS,
the packets in this flow are scheduled to
specified egress queues according to the
TOS values carried in the IPv4 packets.
This CoS type is applicable to IPv4
packets.
CoS parameter - - Displays the CoS parameters corresponding
to different CoS types.
CoS Priority 0-7 - This parameter determines to which egress
queue a packet is schedule.
l Each Ethernet port on the EFP8 board
supports eight egress port queues.
Queues 1-8 respectively correspond to
the CoS priorities from 0 to 7.
l Queue 8, with the CoS priority of 7, is as
SP queue. Queues 1-7, with the CoS
priorities from 0 to 6, are WRR queues.
The weighted proportion of these WRR
queues is 1:2:4:8:16:32:64 (from
priority 0 to priority 6). On the EFP8
board, the weighted proportion of these
WRR queues cannot be changed.
l If the traffic shaping feature of some
queues is enabled, bandwidth is
allocated first to the queues whose traffic
shaping feature is enabled based on the
CIR. The remaining bandwidth is
allocated to the eight queues by using the
SP+WRR algorithm.

A.7.4.4 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Creation of CAR/CoS
This section describes the parameters for creating CAR/CoS.
A-363
Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the required Ethernet switching board, and then choose
2. Click the Flow Configuration tab.
Flow Type - - Displays the type of a flow.
VB ID - - Displays the ID of the bridge.
Port - - Displays the port where a flow is to be
created.
C-VLAN - - l Displays the C-VLAN.
l This parameter is valid is Flow Type is
Port+VLAN Flow, Port+CVLAN
+SVLAN Flow, or Port+VLAN
+Priority Flow.
S-VLAN - - l Displays the S-VLAN.
l This parameter is valid when Flow
Type is Port+SVLAN Flow or Port
+CVLAN+SVLAN Flow.
Priority - - l Displays the priority of the flow.
l This parameter is valid when Flow
Type is Port+VLAN+Priority Flow.
Bound CAR - None This parameter indicates the CAR ID
corresponding to a CAR operation.
Different CAR IDs should be bound to
different flows, even though the parameters
of the CAR operations are the same.
Bound CoS - None Indicates the CoS ID that corresponds to a
CoS operation.

A.7.4.5 Parameter Description: QoS Management_Shaping Management of Egress
Queues
This section describes the parameters for shaping management of egress queues.
Navigation Path
QoS Management > Port Shaping Management from the Function Tree.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Port Queue - - Displays the queue name.
Status Enabled
Disabled
Disabled Indicates whether to enable the traffic
shaping feature of an egress queue.
CIR(kbit/s) 0-100032
Step: 64
0 l When the rate of a packet is not more
than the CIR, this packet directly enters
the egress queue.
be more than the PIR.
DCBS(kbyte) - 0 Displays the excess burst size.
PIR(kbit/s) 0-100032
Step: 64
0 l When the rate of a packet is more than
the PIR, the packet that exceeds the rate
restriction is directly discarded. When
the rate of packets is more than the CIR
but not more than the PIR, the packets
that exceed the restriction of the CIR
enter the buffer of the CIR. When the
buffer overflows, the packets are marked
yellow and enter the egress queue, which
enables the packets to be discarded first
in the case of queue congestion.
be more than the port bandwidth.
DMBS(kbyte) - 0 Displays the maximum excess burst size.

This section describes the parameters for the Ethernet ports on the EoPDH plane.
This section describes the parameters for Ethernet external ports.
This section describes the parameters for Ethernet internal ports.
This section describes the parameters for setting the type field of QinQ frames.
This section describes the parameters for Ethernet external ports.
A-365
Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet
2. Select External Port.
Table A-57 Parameters for the basic attributes
Port - - Displays the name of the external port.
Name - - Displays or specifies the name of the
external port.
Disabled
Disabled l If the port gains access to services, set
this parameter to Enabled. Otherwise,
set this parameter to Disabled.
l If this parameter is set to Enabled for the
port that does not access services, an
ETH_LOS alarm may be generated.
This parameter is invalid for PORT9.
10M Half-Duplex
10M Full-Duplex
100M Half-Duplex
100M Full-Duplex
Auto-Negotiation l Different types of Ethernet ports support
different working modes.
l If the opposite port works in auto-
negotiation mode, set this parameter to
Auto-Negotiation.
l If the opposite port works in full-duplex
mode, set this parameter to 10M Full-
Duplex or 100M Full-Duplex,
depending on the rate of the opposite
port.
l If the opposite port works in half-duplex
mode, set this parameter to 10M Half-
Duplex or 100M Half-Duplex,
depending on the rate of the opposite
port, or set this parameter to Auto-
Negotiation.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Maximum Frame
Length
1518-2000 1522 l Set this parameter to a value greater than
the maximum length of all the data
frames to be transmitted.
l The default value is recommended if the
jumbo frame is not considered and the
data frames contain only one layer of
VLAN tags or even no tags. The value of
1526 or greater is recommended if the
data frames contain two layers of tags,
such as QinQ.
Port Physical
Parameters
- - Displays the actual working status of a
PORT.
Loopback
Non-Loopback l A MAC loopback is to loop back the
Ethernet frames transmitted to the
opposite port.
l Use the default value unless otherwise
specified.
PHY Loopback Non-Loopback
Loopback
Non-Loopback l A PHY loopback is to loop back the
Ethernet physical signals transmitted to
the opposite port.
l Use the default value unless otherwise
specified.

Table A-58 Parameters for flow control
A-367
Non-
Autonegotiation
Flow Control
Mode
Disabled
Enable Symmetric
Flow Control Mode
Send Only
Receive Only
Disabled l This parameter is valid only when
Working Mode is not set to Auto-
Negotiation.
l If this parameter is set to Enable
Symmetric Flow Control Mode, the
port can send PAUSE frames and
process the received PAUSE frames.
l If this parameter is set to Send Only, the
port can send PAUSE frames in the case
of congestion but cannot process the
received PAUSE frames.
l If this parameter is set to Receive Only,
the port can process the received PAUSE
frames but cannot send PAUSE frames
in the case of congestion.
l Set this parameter to the same as the non-
autonegotiation flow control mode of the
opposite port.
Autonegotiation
Flow Control
Mode
Disabled
Enable
Dissymmetric Flow
Control
Enable Symmetric
Control
Enable Symmetric/
Dissymmetric Flow
Control
Disabled l This parameter is valid only when
Working Mode is Auto-Negotiation.
Symmetric Control, the port can send
PAUSE frames and process the received
PAUSE frames.
Dissymmetric Flow Control, the port
can send PAUSE frames in the case of
congestion but cannot process the
received PAUSE frames.
Symmetric/Dissymmetric Flow
Control, the port can function as
follows:
Sends and processes PAUSE frames.
Sends but does not process PAUSE
frames.
Processes but does not send PAUSE
frames.
autonegotiation flow control mode of the
opposite port.

Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Table A-59 Parameters for the tag attributes
TAG Tag Aware
Access
Hybrid
Tag Aware l With different tag attributes, the port
processes frames in different modes. For
details, see Table A-62.
l Set this parameter to Tag Aware if the
port processes the frames with VLAN
tags (or tagged frames).
l Set this parameter to Access if the port
processes the frames without VLAN tags
(or untagged frames).
l Set this parameter to Hybrid if the port
processes the tagged frames and
untagged frames.
Default VLAN ID 1-4095 1 l This parameter is valid only when
l For the usage of this parameter, see
Table A-62.
VLAN Priority 0-7 0 l This parameter is valid only when
Table A-62.
l When the VLAN priority is required for
traffic classification or other purposes,
set this parameter as required. Use the
default value unless otherwise specified.
Entry Detection Enabled
Disabled
Enabled l Indicates whether to check the incoming
packets according to the tag attribute.

Table A-60 Parameters for the network attributes
A-369
Port Attributes UNI
C-Aware
S-Aware
UNI l If this parameter is set to UNI, the port
processes data frames according to the
tag attribute.
l If this parameter is set to C-Awareor S-
Aware, the port processes the data
frames by using the processing method
of QinQ services.
l Set this parameter to C-Aware or S-
Aware when the port processes QinQ
services. Otherwise, this parameter takes
the default value.

Table A-61 Parameters for the advanced attributes
Broadcast Packet
Suppression
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled This parameter specifies whether to restrict
the traffic of broadcast packets according to
the proportion of the broadcast packets to
the total packets. Set this parameter to
Enabled when a broadcast storm may occur
at the opposite port.
Broadcast Packet
Suppression
Threshold
10%-100% 30% When the proportion of the received
broadcast packets to the total packets
crosses the threshold, the port discards the
received broadcast packets. Set this
parameter to a value greater than the
proportion when no broadcast storm occurs.
The value of 30% or greater is
recommended.
Traffic Threshold
(Mbit/s)
0-100 (PORT1-
PORT8)
0-1000 (PORT9)
100 (PORT1-
PORT8)
1000 (PORT9)
Specifies the traffic threshold of the port.
You can specify the traffic monitoring
period by setting Port Traffic Threshold
Time Window(Min).
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Port Traffic
Threshold Time
Window(Min)
0-30 0 Specifies the traffic monitoring period.
l If Port Traffic Threshold Time
Window(Min) is set to 0, an associated
alarm is reported at the moment when the
traffic received at the port crosses the
value of Traffic Threshold(Mbit/s).
l If the Port Traffic Threshold Time
Window(Min) is set to a value other
than 0, an associated alarm is reported
only when the traffic received at the port
always crosses the value of Traffic
Threshold(Mbit/s) in the monitoring
period.
Loop Detection Enabled
Disabled
Disabled This parameter specifies whether to enable
loop detection, which is used to check
whether a loop exists on the port.

Table A-62 Methods used by ports to process data frames
Direction Type of Data
Frame
Processing Method
Tag aware Access Hybrid
Ingress port Tagged frame Receives the frame. Discards the frame. Receives the frame.
Untagged frame Discards the frame. The port receives the
frame after adding to
the frame the VLAN
tag that contains
Default VLAN ID
and VLAN
Priority.
The port receives the
the frame the VLAN
tag that contains
Default VLAN ID
and VLAN
Priority.
A-371
Frame
Processing Method
Egress port Tagged frame Transmits the frame. The port strips the
VLAN tag from the
frame and then
l If the VLAN ID
in the frame is
Default VLAN
ID, the port
strips the VLAN
tag from the
frame and then
transmits the
frame.
l If the VLAN ID
in the frame is
not Default
VLAN ID, the
port directly
transmits the
frame.

This section describes the parameters for Ethernet internal ports.
Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the EFP8 board and then choose Configuration > Ethernet
2. Select Internal Port.
Table A-63 Parameters for the tag attributes
Port - - Displays the name of the internal port.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
TAG Tag Aware
Access
Hybrid
Tag Aware l With different tag attributes, the port
processes frames in different modes. For
details, see Table A-68.
l Set this parameter to Tag Aware if the
port processes the frames with VLAN
tags (or tagged frames).
l Set this parameter to Access if the port
processes the frames without VLAN tags
(or untagged frames).
l Set this parameter to Hybrid if the port
processes the tagged frames and
untagged frames.
Default VLAN ID 1-4095 1 l This parameter is valid only when
Table A-68.
VLAN Priority 0-7 0 l This parameter is valid only when
l For the usage of this parameter, refer to
Table A-68.
l When the VLAN priority is required for
traffic classification or other purposes,
set this parameter as required. The
default value is recommended unless
otherwise specified.
Entry Detection Enabled
Disabled
Enabled l Indicates whether to check the incoming
packets according to the tag attribute.

Table A-64 Parameters for encapsulation or mapping
Mapping Protocol GFP GFP The default value is recommended.
The EFP8 board supports GFP only.
Scramble Scrambling Mode
[X43+1]
Unscrambled
Scrambling Mode
[X43+1]
l Indicates the scrambling polynomial
used by the mapping protocol.
A-373
Set Inverse Value
for CRC
- - This parameter is invalid for the EFP8
board.
Check Field
Length
FCS32
No
FCS32 l When the Ethernet board uses the GFP
mapping protocol, set this parameter to
FCS32 or No.
l When you set this parameter to FCS32,
a 32-bit FCS is used.
FCS Calculated Bit
Sequence
Big endian
Little endian
Big endian l When you set this parameter to Big
endian, the least significant byte of the
FCS is placed first and the most
significant byte is placed last.
l When you set this parameter to Little
endian, the most significant byte of the
FCS is placed first and the least
significant byte is placed last.

Table A-65 Parameters for the network attributes
Port Attributes UNI
C-Aware
S-Aware
UNI l If this parameter is set to UNI, the port
processes data frames according to the
tag attribute.
l If this parameter is set to C-Aware or S-
Aware, the port processes the data
frames by using the processing method
of QinQ services.
l Set this parameter to C-Aware or S-
Aware when the port processes QinQ
services. Otherwise, this parameter takes
the default value.

Table A-66 Parameters for the LCAS
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Enabling LCAS Disabled
Enabled
Disabled l Indicates whether to enable the LCAS
function.
l The LCAS can dynamically adjust the
number of virtual containers for
mapping required services to meet the
bandwidth needs of the applications. As
a result, the bandwidth utilization is
improved.
LCAS Mode Huawei Mode
Standard Mode
Huawei Mode l Indicates the sequence in which the
LCAS sink sends the MST control
packet and Rs-Ack control packet.
l When you set this parameter to Huawei
Mode, the LCAS sink first sends the Rs-
Ack and then sends the MST.
l When you set this parameter to
Standard Mode, the LCAS sink first
sends the MST and then sends the Rs-
Ack.
l If the equipment at the opposite end is
the third-party equipment and does not
support the Huawei mode, set this
parameter to Standard Mode.
Otherwise, set this parameter to Huawei
Mode.
Hold Off Time(ms) An integer ranging
from 0, 2000 to
10000, in the
increments of 100
2000 l When a member link is faulty, the LCAS
performs switching after a delay of time
to prevent the situation where an NE
simultaneously performs a protection
switching such as SNCP and performs an
LCAS switching. This parameter
specifies the duration of the delay.
WTR Time(s) 0-720 300 l When the time after a member link is
restored to normal reaches the specified
value of this parameter, the VCG uses
the restored member link.
TSD Disabled
Enabled
Disabled l Indicates whether the TSD is used as a
condition for determining whether a
member link is faulty. In the case of the
VC-12, the TSD refers to the BIP_SD.
In the case of the VC-3, the TSD refers
to the B3_SD_VC3.
A-375
Min. Members-
Transmit Direction
2-256 16 l Specifies the minimum number of
members in the transmit direction. After
the LCAS is enabled, the LCAS_PLCT
alarm is reported when the number of
effective members in the transmit
direction becomes lower than the
minimum number specified by this
parameter.
Mini. Members-
Receive Direction
2-256 16 l Specifies the minimum number of
members in the receive direction. After
the LCAS is enabled, the LCAS_PLCT
alarm is reported when the number of
effective members in the receive
direction becomes lower than the
minimum number specified by this
parameter.

Configurable
Ports
VCTRUNK1-
VCTRUNK16
Uplink
Downlink
Available
Resources
VC4-1.
Available
Timeslots
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
cannot exceed 63.
Number of Bound
Paths
VC path.

Table A-68 Methods used by ports to process data frames
Frame
Processing Method
Ingress port Tagged frame Receives the frame. Discards the frame. Receives the frame.
Untagged frame Discards the frame. The port receives the
the frame the VLAN
tag that contains
Default VLAN ID
and VLAN
Priority.
The port receives the
the frame the VLAN
tag that contains
Default VLAN ID
and VLAN
Priority.
Egress port Tagged frame Transmits the frame. The port strips the
VLAN tag from the
frame and then
l If the VLAN ID
in the frame is
Default VLAN
ID, the port
strips the VLAN
tag from the
frame and then
transmits the
frame.
l If the VLAN ID
in the frame is
not Default
VLAN ID, the
port directly
transmits the
frame.

A-377
This section describes the parameters for setting the type field of QinQ frames.
Navigation Path
Advance Attribute > QinQ Type Area Settings from the Function Tree.
Board - - Displays the Ethernet board on which the
type field of QinQ frames needs to be set.
If the Ethernet board is the EFP8 board, this
parameter always takes the value of EFP8.
QinQ Type Area
(Hexadecimal)
81 00
88 A8
91 00
0600 to FFFF
8100 Specifies the type field of QinQ frames. Set
this parameter according to the type field of
the accessed QinQ frames.

A.8 RMON Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON performances.
A.8.1 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_Statistics Group
This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON statistics groups.
A.8.2 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Group
This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON history groups.
A.8.3 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Control Group
This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON history control groups.
A.8.4 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_RMON Setting
This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON setting.
A.8.1 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_Statistics Group
This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON statistics groups.
Navigation Path
Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Statistics Group tab.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameters
Object - - This parameter specifies the object to be
monitored.
Sampling Period 5 to 150 5 This parameter specifies the duration of the
monitoring period.
Display
Accumulated
Value
Selected
Deselected
Deselected l This parameter specifies the method of
displaying the performance events.
l If this parameter is not selected, the
displayed value is an increment
compared to the value that is collected in
last sampling period and stored in the
register.
l If this parameter is selected, the
displayed value is an absolute value that
is currently stored in the register.
Display Mode Graphics
List
List l This parameter specifies the method of
l If this parameter is set to Graphics, the
number of performance events to be
monitored at each time cannot be more
than 10, and the unit should be the same.
Legend Color
Description
- l This parameter indicates the description
of different colors.
Display Mode is set to Graphics.
Event - - l This parameter indicates the queried
performance events.
Display Mode is set to List.

A.8.2 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Group
This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON history groups.
Navigation Path
2. Click the History Group tab.
A-379
Parameters
Object - - The parameter indicates the object to be
monitored.
Ended from/to - - This parameter specifies the start time and
end time of the monitoring period.
History Table
Type
30-Second
30-Minute
Custom Period 1
Custom Period 2
30-Second This parameter specifies the monitoring
period.
Display Mode Graphics
List
List l This parameter specifies the method of
l If this parameter is set to Graphics, the
number of performance events to be
monitored at each time cannot be more
than 10, and the unit should be the same.
Legend Color
Description
- l This parameter indicates the description
of different colors.
Display Mode is set to Graphics.
Event - - l This parameter indicates the queried
performance events.
Display Mode is set to List.
Statistical Item - - This parameter indicates the performance
items to be monitored.
Statistical Value - - This parameter indicates the statistical value
of the monitored performance items.
Time Flag - - This parameter indicates the time point of
each performance event.

A.8.3 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Control
Group
This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON history control groups.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Performance > RMON History
Control Group.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameters
30-Second Enabled
Disabled
Disabled This parameter indicates or specifies
whether to enable the 30-Second
monitoring function.
30-Minute Enabled
Disabled
Enabled This parameter indicates or specifies
whether to enable the 30-Minute
Custom Period 1 Enabled
Disabled
whether to enable Custom Period 1.
Disabled
whether to enable Custom Period 2.
Period Length(s) 300 to 43200
(Custom Period 1)
300 to 86400
(Custom Period 2)
900(Custom Period
1)
86400(Custom
Period 2)
l This parameter indicates or specifies the
monitoring period in Custom Period 1
and Custom Period 2.
l The value must be an integer multiple of
30.
History Register
Count
1 to 50 16
6(Custom Period 2)
This parameter indicates or specifies the
quantity of the history registers.
RMON Monitor
Start Time
- - This parameter specifies the RMON start
time.

A.8.4 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_RMON Setting
This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON setting.
Navigation Path
l Click the RMON Setting tab.
Object Parameters
Object - - This parameter indicates the object to be
collected.
A-381
30-Second Enabled
Disabled
- This parameter indicates or specifies
whether to enable the 30-Second
NOTE
In the case of Object, 30-Second cannot be set.
30-Minute Enabled
Disabled
l In RMON History Control Group of
the NE, if 30-Minute is set to Disabled,
Not Supported is displayed for this
parameter.
Disabled
whether to enable the monitoring
function based on Custom Period 1.
the NE, if Custom Period 1 is set to
Disabled, Not Supported is displayed
for this parameter.
Disabled
whether to enable the monitoring
function based on Custom Period 2.
the NE, if Custom Period 2 is set to
Disabled, Not Supported is displayed
for this parameter.

Event Parameters
Event - - This parameter indicates the performance
event to be monitored.
30-Second Enabled
Disabled
whether to enable the monitoring function
based on 30-Second.
30-Minute Enabled
Disabled
- This parameter indicates or specifies
Disabled
based on Custom Period 1Custom Period
1 Monitor.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Disabled
based on Custom Period 2Custom Period
2 Monitor.
Threshold Detect Report All
Do Not Detect
Report Only the
Upper Threshold
Report Only the
Lower Threshold
Report All l This parameter indicates or specifies the
threshold detection method.
l If the number of detected events reaches
the preset threshold, the events are
reported to the NMS. Otherwise, the
events are not reported to the NMS.
l If an event does not support this
parameter, Not Supported is displayed.
Upper Threshold - - This parameter indicates or specifies the
upper threshold. If the number of
performance events exceeds the preset
upper threshold, the corresponding
performance events are reported.
Lower Threshold - - This parameter indicates or specifies the
lower threshold. If the number of
performance events is less than the preset
lower threshold, the corresponding
performance events are reported.
Threshold Unit - - This parameter indicates the unit of each
threshold of the performance events.

A.9 Parameters for MPLS/PWE3 Services
This topic describes parameters that are related to MPLS/PWE3 services.
NOTE
For parameters for PW-carried E-Line services, see A.6 Parameters for Ethernet Services and Ethernet
Features on the Packet Plane.
A.9.1 MPLS Tunnel Parameters
This topic describes parameters that are related to MPLS tunnels.
A.9.2 CES Parameters
This topic describes parameters that are related to CES services.
A.9.3 ATM Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to ATM services.
A.9.1 MPLS Tunnel Parameters
This topic describes parameters that are related to MPLS tunnels.
A.9.1.1 Parameter Description: Basic Configurations of MPLS Tunnels
A-383
This topic describes parameters that are related to the basic configurations of MPLS tunnels.
A.9.1.2 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Static Tunnel
This topic describes parameters that are related to static tunnels.
A.9.1.3 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Creation of Unidirectional
Tunnels
This topic describes parameters that are used for creating unidirectional tunnels.
A.9.1.4 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Creation of Bidirectional Tunnels
This topic describes the parameters that are related to creating bidirectional tunnels.
A.9.1.5 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_OAM Parameters
This topic describes parameters that are related to MPLS OAM.
A.9.1.6 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_FDI
This topic describes FDI parameters.
A.9.1.7 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_LSP Ping
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the LSP Ping test.
A.9.1.8 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_LSP Traceroute
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the LSP Traceroute test.
A.9.1.9 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW Management
This topic describes parameters that are related to PW management.
A.9.1.10 Parameter Description: PW Management_MS-PW Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are related to MS-PW creation.
A.9.1.11 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW OAM
This topic describes parameters that are related to PW OAM.
A.9.1.12 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW Ping
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the PW Ping test.
A.9.1.13 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW Traceroute
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the PW Traceroute test.
A.9.1.14 Parameter Description: MPLS APS Protection Management
This topic describes parameters that are related to MPLS APS protection management.
A.9.1.15 Parameter Description: Tunnel Protection Group_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are related to creating a tunnel protection group.
A.9.1.16 Parameter Description: PW APS Protection Group_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a PW APS protection group.
A.9.1.17 Parameter Description: Slave Protection Pair of a PW APS Protection Group_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a slave protection pair of a PW
APS protection group.
A.9.1.1 Parameter Description: Basic Configurations of MPLS Tunnels
This topic describes parameters that are related to the basic configurations of MPLS tunnels.
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration >
MPLS Management > Basic Configuration from the Function Tree.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
LSR ID - 0.0.0.0 l Specifies or displays
the LSR ID of an NE.
On a PSN, each NE is
assigned a unique LSR
ID.
l This parameter must
be set in IPv4 address
format.
Start of Global Label
Space
0-1015808 0 l Specifies the start
value of a global label
space. The OptiX RTN
950 supports a step of
2048.
l The start value of a
global label space is
the smallest unicast
tunnel label. When
Start of Global Label
Space is 0, the smallest
unicast tunnel label is
16, with values 0 to 15
reserved.
l On an MPLS-enabled
network, global label
spaces of NEs are
recommended to
overlap each other if
possible.
Global Label Space Size - - Displays the size of a
global label space.
Start of Multicast Label
Space

A.9.1.2 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Static Tunnel
This topic describes parameters that are related to static tunnels.
Navigation Path
Configuration > MPLS Management > Unicast Tunnel Management from the Function
Tree.
2. Click the Static Tunnel tab.
A-385
3. Click Query.
ID - - Displays the tunnel ID.
customized tunnel name.
Enable State Enabled
Disabled
Enabled l Specifies or displays
whether a tunnel is
enabled.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950
supports only the value
Enabled.
Node Type - - l Displays the node type.
l For bidirectional
tunnels, this parameter
displays the node types
of forward tunnels.
Direction - - Displays the direction of a
tunnel.
CIR(kbit/s) No Limit
1024-1024000
- l Specifies or displays
the committed
information rate (CIR)
of a tunnel.
l Generally, it is
set this parameter to No
Limit. If you need to
enable the CES CAC
function or limit the
PW bandwidth, set this
parameter to be the
same as the planned
tunnel bandwidth.
PIR(kbit/s) - - The OptiX RTN 950 does
CBS(byte) - - The OptiX RTN 950 does
PBS(byte) - - The OptiX RTN 950 does
Bandwidth Remaining
(kbit/s)
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
In Port - - Displays the ingress port
of a forward tunnel, which
is also the egress port of
the mapping reverse
tunnel.
Forward In Label - - Displays the MPLS label
that a forward tunnel
carries when entering a
node.
Reverse Out Label - - Specifies the MPLS label
that a reverse tunnel
tunnel.
Out Port - - Displays the egress port of
a forward tunnel, which is
also the ingress port of the
mapping reverse tunnel.
Forward Out Label - - Displays the MPLS label
that a forward tunnel
carries when leaving a
node.
Reverse In Label - - Displays the MPLS label
that a reverse tunnel
node.
Forward Next Hop
Address
- - Displays the IP address of
the next-hop port of a
forward tunnel.
Reverse Next Hop
Address
- - Displays the IP address of
the next-hop port of a
reverse tunnel.
Source Node - - Displays the LSR ID of the
ingress node.
Sink Node - - Displays the LSR ID of the
egress node.
Tunnel Type - - Displays the tunnel type.
A-387
EXP 0-7
None
the value of the EXP
field in the packets
transmitted through
MPLS tunnels.
l For unidirectional
is available only if
Node Type is Ingress.
l For bidirectional
cannot be set if Node
Type is Transit.
to a value from 0 to 7,
the EXP field takes its
fixed value.
l If this parameter takes
its default value None,
the EXP field varies
based on the DiffServ
mappings.
LSP Mode Pipe - l Displays or specifies
the LSP mode.
l Pipe: When stripping
MPLS tunnel labels
from packets, an egress
node does not update
the scheduling priority
for the packets.
l For bidirectional
is available only if
Node Type is Egress.
l For bidirectional
cannot be set if Node
Type is Transit.
NOTE
On the OptiX RTN 950, this
parameter can be set to
Pipe only.
MTU(byte) - - The OptiX RTN 950 does
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Protection Group - - Displays the MPLS APS
protection group to which
a tunnel belongs.
VLAN ID - - l Specifies or displays
the VLAN ID that
Ethernet packets carry
when transmitted over
MPLS tunnels.
l If packets need to
traverse a Layer 2
network, set the VLAN
ID for the tunnel
carried by the NNI port
according to the
VLAN planning
requirements on the
Layer 2 network.
the same value for both
ends of a tunnel.
A-389
CoS CS7
CS6
EF
AF4
AF3
AF2
AF1
BE
- l This parameter
specifies the PHB
service class of an L-
LSP, if the type of an
MPLS tunnel is L-LSP.
l CS6-CS7: indicates the
highest service grade,
which is mainly
transmission.
forwarding. This
service class is
low, for example,
voice and video
services.
assured forwarding.
that requires rate
limit.
best-effort manner
without special
processing.
Deployment - - Displays the deployment
status of the tunnel.

A.9.1.3 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Creation of
Unidirectional Tunnels
This topic describes parameters that are used for creating unidirectional tunnels.
Navigation Path
Tree.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3. Click New and choose Unidirectional Tunnel from the drop-down list.
The New Unicast Unidirectional Tunnel dialog box is displayed.
4. Select New Reverse Tunnel.
Tunnel ID 1-65535 - l Specifies the tunnel ID.
l The total number of
tunnels and PWs must
be equal to or less than
1024. The number of
tunnels that carry PWs
are not included in the
total.
Tunnel Name - - Specifies the tunnel name.
Node Type Ingress
Egress
Transit
Ingress Specifies the node type of
a forward tunnel.
Direction - - Indicates the direction of a
tunnel.
1024-1024000
No Limit l Specifies the
committed information
rate (CIR) of a tunnel.
l Generally, it is
enable the CES CAC
parameter to be the
same as the planned
tunnel bandwidth.
CBS(kbit/s) - - The OptiX RTN 950 does
PIR(Byte) - - The OptiX RTN 950 does
PBS(Byte) - - The OptiX RTN 950 does
In Board/Logic
Interface Type
- - Specifies the board where
the ingress port of a
forward tunnel is located.
A-391
In Port - - Specifies the ingress port
the mapping reverse
tunnel.
In Label
a
16-1048575 - l Specifies the MPLS
label that a tunnel
node.
set for only egress and
transit nodes.
Out Board/Logic
Interface Type
the egress port of a
Out Port - - Specifies the egress port of
Out Label
a
16-1048575 - l Specifies the MPLS
label that a tunnel
node.
set for only ingress and
transit nodes.
Next Hop Address - - l Specifies the port IP
address of the next-hop
node for a tunnel.
transit nodes.
Source Node - - l Specifies the LSR ID
of the ingress node.
set for only egress
nodes and transit
nodes.
Sink Node - - l Specifies the LSR ID
of the egress node.
transit nodes.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Tunnel Type E-LSP
L-LSP
E-LSP l Specifies the tunnel
type.
l The value E-LSP
indicates that the EXP
field is used to identify
packet scheduling
priorities of PWs. An
E-LSP tunnel can
contain PWs of eight
packet scheduling
priorities.
l The value L-LSP
indicates that the
MPLS label value is
used to identify packet
scheduling priorities of
PWs. An L-LSP tunnel
can contain PWs of the
same packet
scheduling priority.
EXP 0-7
None
None l Specifies the value of
the EXP field in the
packets transmitted
through MPLS
tunnels.
l This parameter is
available only if Node
Type is Ingress.
the EXP field takes its
fixed value.
its default value None,
the EXP field varies
based on the DiffServ
mappings.
A-393
LSP Mode Pipe Pipe l Pipe: When stripping
MPLS tunnel labels
for the packets.
l This parameter is
available only if Node
Type is Egress.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950
Pipe.
MTU - - The OptiX RTN 950 does
CoS CS7
CS6
EF
AF4
AF3
AF2
AF1
BE
BE l This parameter
specifies the PHB
which is mainly
transmission.
forwarding. This
service class is
low, for example,
voice and video
services.
assured forwarding.
that requires rate
limit.
best-effort manner
without special
processing.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

NOTE
At an MPLS node, in labels must be different from each other, out labels must also be different from each
other, but out labels can be the same as in labels.
A.9.1.4 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_Creation of
Bidirectional Tunnels
This topic describes the parameters that are related to creating bidirectional tunnels.
Navigation Path
Tree.
3. Click New and choose Bidirectional Tunnel from the drop-down list.
Tunnel ID 1 to 65535 - l Specifies the tunnel ID.
l The total number of
tunnels and PWs must
be equal to or less than
1024. The number of
tunnels that carry PWs
is not included in the
total.
Tunnel Name - - Specifies the tunnel name.
Node Type Ingress
Egress
Transit
Ingress Specifies the node type of
a forward tunnel.
Direction - - Indicates the direction of a
tunnel.
A-395
1024-1024000
No Limit l Specifies the
rate (CIR) of a tunnel.
l Generally, it is
enable the CES CAC
parameter to be the
same as the planned
tunnel bandwidth.
CBS(kbit/s) - - The OptiX RTN 950 does
PIR(Byte) - - The OptiX RTN 950 does
PBS(Byte) - - The OptiX RTN 950 does
In Board/Logic
Interface Type
the ingress port of a
In Port - - Specifies the ingress port
the mapping reverse
tunnel.
Forward In Label
a
16 to 1048575 - l Specifies the MPLS
label that data carries
when entering a
forward tunnel.
transit nodes.
Reverse Out Label
a
when leaving a reverse
tunnel.
transit nodes.
Out Board/Logic
Interface Type
the egress port of a
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Out Port - - Specifies the egress port of
Forward Out Label
a
when leaving a
forward tunnel.
transit nodes.
Reverse In Label
a
when entering a
reverse tunnel.
transit nodes.
Forward Next Hop
Address
- - l Indicates or specifies
the IP address of the
next hop in a forward
tunnel.
transit nodes.
Reverse Next Hop
Address
- - l Indicates or specifies
the IP address of the
next hop in a reverse
tunnel.
transit nodes.
Source Node - - l Specifies the LSR ID
of the ingress node.
set for only egress
nodes and transit
nodes.
Sink Node - - l Specifies the LSR ID
of the egress node.
transmit nodes.
A-397
Tunnel Type E-LSP
L-LSP
E-LSP l Specifies the tunnel
type.
l The value E-LSP
indicates that the EXP
field is used to identify
packet scheduling
priorities of PWs. An
E-LSP tunnel can
contain PWs of eight
packet scheduling
priorities.
l The value L-LSP
indicates that the
MPLS label value is
used to identify packet
scheduling priorities of
PWs. An L-LSP tunnel
can contain PWs of the
same packet
scheduling priority.
EXP 0 to 7
None
None l Specifies the value of
the EXP field in the
packets transmitted
through MPLS
tunnels.
l This parameter cannot
be set if Node Type is
Transit.
the EXP field assumes
the fixed value.
the default value
None, the EXP field is
set based on the
DiffServ mappings.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
LSP Mode Pipe Pipe l Pipe: When stripping
MPLS tunnel labels
for the packets.
l This parameter cannot
be set if Node Type is
Transit.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950
Pipe.
MTU - - The OptiX RTN 950 does
CoS CS7
CS6
EF
AF4
AF3
AF2
AF1
BE
BE l This parameter
specifies the PHB
which is mainly
transmission.
forwarding. This
service class is
low, for example,
voice and video
services.
assured forwarding.
that requires rate
limit.
best-effort manner
without special
processing.
A-399

NOTE
At an MPLS node, in labels must be different from each other, out labels must also be different from each
other, but out labels can be the same as in labels.
A.9.1.5 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_OAM Parameters
This topic describes parameters that are related to MPLS OAM.
Navigation Path
Tree.
Tunnel ID - - Displays the tunnel ID.
Tunnel Name - - Displays the tunnel name.
Node Type - - l Displays the node type.
l For bidirectional
displays the node types
of forward tunnels.
Tunnel Direction - - Displays the direction of a
tunnel.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OAM Status Enabled
Disabled
Disabled l Specifies or displays
whether the local node
can perform and
respond to OAM
operations.
l If OAM Status is
Enabled, the local NE
can perform and
respond to OAM
operations.
l If OAM Status is
Disabled, the local NE
cannot perform and
respond to OAM
operations.
l If MPLS APS
protection needs to be
configured or a CC test
needs to be performed
for the tunnel, OAM
Status needs to be set
to Enabled.
A-401
Manual
Auto-Sensing l Specifies or displays
the MPLS OAM
detection mode.
l Manual: During a CC
test, MPLS OAM
the user.
l Auto-Sensing: During
a CC test, MPLS OAM
interval for receiving
MPLS OAM packets.
l For a unidirectional
tunnel, this parameter
can be set for its egress
node only.
l For a bidirectional
tunnel, if Detection
Mode is set to
Manual, you need to
set the MPLS OAM
received and
transmitted.
l Generally, the value
Auto-Sensing is
recommended.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
FFD
fixed interval.
the user.
l For the egress node of
a unidirectional tunnel,
if Detection Mode is
set to Manual, this
type of MPLS OAM
received.
Mode is set to Auto-
Sensing, this
type of MPLS OAM
transmitted.
Mode is set to
Manual, this
types of MPLS OAM
received and
transmitted.
l The value FFD is
assumed for MPLS
APS and the value
CV is assumed for
continuous
MPLS tunnels.
A-403
(ms)
3.3
10
20
50
100
200
500
50 l Displays or specifies
the OAM detection
period.
l This parameter is
available only when
Detection Packet
Type is FFD. It takes
its fixed value of 1000
ms when Detection
Packet Type is CV.
3.3 for MPLS APS
usually. If the packet
transmission delay
time of an MPLS
tunnel exceeds 3.3 ms,
the transmission
interval of FFD
packets needs to be a
value greater than the
delay time.
Reverse Tunnel - - l Specifies the mapping
reverse tunnel of a
forward tunnel.
cannot be set.
CV/FFD Status - - Displays whether CV/
FFD is enabled.
LSP Status - - Displays whether an LSP
is available.
LSP Defect Type - - Displays the LSP defect
type.
Disable LSP Duration
(ms)
- - Displays the duration
when an LSP is
unavailable.
LSP Defect Location - - Displays the LSR ID of a
node where LSP defects
are detected.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
SD Threshold 0-100 0 l Specifies or displays
the SD threshold.
When the OAM packet
loss ratio is higher than
the parameter value,
the corresponding
alarm is reported.
node only.
set to 0, SD threshold
detection is not
supported.
SF Threshold 0-100 0 l Specifies or displays
the SF threshold.
When the OAM packet
the corresponding
alarm is reported.
node only.
set to 0, SF threshold
detection is not
supported.
l The SD threshold is not
higher than the SF
threshold.
Source Node - - Displays the source node
of a tunnel.
Sink Node - - Displays the sink node of
a tunnel.

A.9.1.6 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_FDI
This topic describes FDI parameters.
A-405
Navigation Path
Tree.
2. Click the FDI tab.
Enable FDI Selected
Not selected
Selected l Specifies or displays
whether Enable FDI is
selected.
l If the FDI function is
enabled for a transit
node, the transit node
inserts an FDI packet
to all LSPs that travel
through the transit
node when a fault
occurs on the link
between the ingress
and transit nodes. On
reception of the FDI
packet, the egress node
reports an alarm. In
this case, if MPLS APS
is configured
correctly, protection
switching is triggered
before the egress node
detects an LSP defect
within a detection
period.
l Generally, the default
parameter value is
recommended.

A.9.1.7 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_LSP Ping
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the LSP Ping test.
Navigation Path
Tree.
2. Click the OAM Parameters tab.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
3. Select the required tunnel, click OAM Operation in the lower right corner, and choose
Ping Test from the drop-down list.
Packet Count 1 to 4294967295 3 Specifies the number of
test request packets.
EXP Value 0 to 7 7 l Specifies the EXP
value of the MPLS
label in test request
packets. The value 7
priority.
recommended.
TTL 1 to 255 255 l Specifies the time-to-
live (TTL) value of the
MPLS label in test
request packets.
recommended.
Transmit Interval
(10ms)
1 to 1000 100 l Specifies the interval
for transmitting test
request packets.
recommended.
Packet Length 64 to 1400 64 l Specifies the length of
recommended.
Wait-to-Response
Timeout Time(10ms)
1 to 6000 300 l Specifies the wait-to-
response timeout
value.
recommended.
A-407
Response Mode IPv4 UDP Response
No Response
Application Control
Channel
IPv4 UDP Response l Specifies the response
mode of test request
packets.
l The value No
Response indicates
that the test
performance event is
reported without
sending response
packets.
l The value Application
Control Channel
indicates that response
is performed through
the reverse channel.
l The value IPv4 UDP
Response indicates
that the IPv4 UDP
packets encapsulating
MPLS echo reply
messages are sent as
response packets.
Response is reserved
for scenarios where all
nodes on an LSP
communicate with
each other over a DCN
running IP protocols.
based on the situation
of the egress node. If
the egress node
supports reverse
channel response, set
this parameter to
Application Control
Channel. If the egress
node does not support
reverse channel
response but supports
DCN channel response
by means of IP
protocols, set this
parameter to IPv4
UDP Response.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
NOTE
For a unidirectional
tunnel, Response
Mode cannot be set to
Application Control
Channel.

A.9.1.8 Parameter Description: Unicast Tunnel Management_LSP Traceroute
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the LSP Traceroute test.
Navigation Path
Tree.
2. Click the OAM Parameters tab.
3. Select the required tunnel, click OAM Operation in the lower right corner, and choose
Traceroute Test from the drop-down list.
value of the MPLS
label in test request
packets. The value 7
priority.
recommended.
MPLS label in test
request packets.
recommended.
recommended.
A-409
Wait-to-Response
Timeout Time(10ms)
response timeout
value.
recommended.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
No Response
Application Control
Channel
packets.
l The value No
Response indicates
that the test
reported without
sending response
packets.
Control Channel
indicates that response
is performed through
the reverse channel.
Response indicates
that the IPv4 UDP
packets encapsulating
MPLS echo reply
messages are sent as
response packets.
Response is reserved
for scenarios where all
nodes on an LSP
communicate with
each other over a DCN
running IP protocols.
of the egress node. If
the egress node
supports reverse
channel response, set
this parameter to
Application Control
Channel. If the egress
node does not support
reverse channel
response but supports
DCN channel response
by means of IP
protocols, set this
parameter to IPv4
UDP Response.
A-411
NOTE
For a unidirectional
tunnel, Response
Mode cannot be set to
Application Control
Channel.

A.9.1.9 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW Management
This topic describes parameters that are related to PW management.
Navigation Path
Configuration > MPLS Management > PW Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the PW Management tab.
PW ID - - Displays the ID of the PW that carries a
service.
Enable State - - Displays whether a PW is enabled.
PW Signaling
Type
- - Displays the PW signaling type.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950 uses only static PWs.
PW Type - - l Displays the PW type. Different PW types
perform different service processing
modes.
l When a PW transmits E-Line services, set
PW Type to Ethernet or Ethernet
Tagged Mode.
l If a PW transmits CES services, set PW
Type to CESoPSN or SATop.
l If a PW transmits ATM services, set PW
Type to ATM n-to-one VCC Cell
transport, ATM one-to-one VCC Cell
Mode, ATM n-to-one VPC Cell
transport, or ATM one-to-one VPC Cell
Mode.
Direction - - Displays the direction of a PW.
PW Ingress
Label/Source
Port
- - Displays the ingress label at the source port of
a PW.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
PW
Encapsulation
Type
- - Displays the encapsulation type of the packets
on a PW.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950 supports only MPLS
encapsulation.
PW Egress
Label/Sink
Port
- - Displays the egress label at the sink port of a
PW.
Opposite LSR
ID
- - Displays the LSR ID of the node at the other
end of a PW.
Local
Working
Status
- - Displays the working status of the PW at the
local end.
Remote
Working
Status
- - Displays the working status of the PW at the
remote end.
Compositive
Working
Status
- - Displays the working status of the entire PW.
Tunnel Type - - Displays the type of the tunnel that carries a
PW.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950 supports only MPLS tunnels.
Tunnel - - Displays the ID of the tunnel that carries a PW.
Deployment
Status
- - Displays the deployment status of a PW.
Tunnel
Automatic
Selection
Policy
parameter.

QoS Parameters
Table A-70 CES services
PW ID - - Displays the ID of the PW
that carries the service.
A-413
Direction - - Displays the direction of
the PW that carries the
service.
CIR(kbit/s) - - The OptiX RTN 950 does

Table A-71 E-Line services
service.
Bandwidth Limit - - Displays whether the
bandwidth is limited.
CIR(kbit/s) - - Displays the committed
a PW.
CBS(byte) - - Displays the committed
PIR(kbit/s) - - Displays the peak
PW
PBS(byte) - - Displays the peak burst
size (PBS) of a PW.
LSP Mode - - Displays the LSP mode.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950
supports only Pipe.

Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Table A-72 ATM services
service.
Bandwidth Limit - - Displays whether the
bandwidth is limited.
CIR(kbit/s) - - Displays the committed
a PW.
CBS(byte) - - Displays the committed
PIR(kbit/s) - - Displays the peak
PW
PBS(byte) - - Displays the peak burst
size (PBS) of a PW.

PW ID - - Displays the PW ID.
RTP Head - - Displays whether the CES
service packets carry an
RTP header.
Packet Loading Time
(us)
- - Displays the packet
loading time.
Jitter Compensation
Buffering Time(us)
- - Displays the jitter buffer
time for the received CES
packets.
Ingress Clock Mode - - The OptiX RTN 950 does
A-415
Egress Clock Mode - - The OptiX RTN 950 does
Control Channel Type - - Displays the control
channel type.
VCCV Verification
Mode
- - Displays the VCCV mode.
Enable CES Service
Alarm Transparent
Transmission
- - Displays whether CES
service alarms are
transparently transmitted.
Threshold of Entering R
bit Inserting Status
- - Displays the threshold of
the packet loss ratio of
CES services. The
corresponding alarm will
be reported if the actual
packet loss ratio crosses
this threshold.
Threshold of Exiting R
received CES service
packets. The
be cleared after the actual
number of received CES
service packets crosses
this threshold.
Sequence Number Mode - - Displays the sequence
number mode.

Control Word - - Displays whether the
control word is used to
transfer packet
information. For ETH
PWE3 services, this
parameter is always not
used.
channel type.
VCCV Verification
Mode
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Request VLAN - - When PW Type is
Ethernet Tag, this
parameter displays the
VLAN ID to be added to
packets that are sent from
the opposite end and do
not carry any VLAN IDs.
TPID - - When PW Type is
Ethernet Tag, this
TPID.

transfer packet
information.
channel type.
VCCV Verification
Mode
Max Concatenated Cell
Count
number of concatenated
cells.
Packet Loading Time
(us)
loading time.

A.9.1.10 Parameter Description: PW Management_MS-PW Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are related to MS-PW creation.
Navigation Path
2. Click the MS PW tab.
3. Click New.
A-417
ID - - Specifies the ID of MS-PW.
Name - - Specifies the name of MS-PW.
MTU(bytes) - - The OptiX RTN 950 does not support this
parameter.
Service Type Ethernet Service
CES Service
ATM Service
Ethernet Service l Specifies the type of services carried by the
MS-PW.
Connection
Type
Port Transparent
PVP
PVC
Port Transparent l This parameter is available only when
Service Type is ATM Service.
l PVP: Only the VPIs of the source and sink
are exchanged.
l PVP: The VPIs and VCIs of the source and
sink are exchanged.
l Port Transparent: ATM transparent
transmission refers to the transparent
transmission of ATM cells that are
encapsulated into PWs as payloads.

Parameters for the Basic Attributes of PWs
PW Signaling Type Static Static Specifies the signaling
type of the PW. Labels for
static PWs need to be
manually assigned.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
PW Type - - l Specifies the type of
the PW.
Ethernet if Service
Type is ETH Service
and no VLAN IDs
need to be added. If it
is required to add
VLAN IDs, set this
parameter to Ethernet
Tag Mode and then set
Request VLAN in the
Advanced Attribute
tab.
l If Service Type is
CES Service, the
value CESoPSN
indicates structure-
aware emulation,
which allows timeslot
compression; the value
SAToP indicates
structure-agnostic
emulation, which does
not allow timeslot
compression.
l If Service Type is
ATM Service, set this
parameter according to
the value of
Connection Type.
PW Direction - - Displays the direction of
the PW.
PW Encapsulation Type - - Displays the
PW.
PW Ingress Label/
Source Port
label.
Port
label.
Tunnel Selection Mode Manually Manually Specifies the method to
select tunnels.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950
Manually.
A-419
Tunnel Type MPLS MPLS Specifies the type of the
Tunnel - - A created tunnel needs to
be selected. If no tunnel is
available, no PW can be
created.
the reverse tunnel
automatically.

QoS Parameters
CES Services

Ethernet services
is enabled.
bandwidth of one or
more PWs in an MPLS
tunnel.
Therefore, this
PWE3 services in an
MPLS tunnel.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
CIR(Kbit/s) - - Specifies the committed
a PW.
PIR(Kbit/s) - - Specifies the peak
PW.
size (PBS) of a PW.
does not update the
packets.

A-421
ATM services
bandwidth limit is
enabled.
l This function can be
used to limit the
bandwidth of one or
more PWs, or the
bandwidth of one or
more ATM PWE3
services, in an MPLS
tunnel. (One ATM
PWE3 service
corresponds to one
PW.)
l An ATM PWE3
the bandwidth of ATM
PWE3 services in an
MPLS tunnel.
CIR (Kbit/s) - - Specifies the committed
the PW.
CBS (kbyte) - - Specifies the excess burst
size of the PW.
PIR (kbit/s) - - Specifies the peak
the PW.
PBS (kbyte) - - Specifies the maximum
excess burst size of the
PW.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)

Parameters for the Advanced Attributes of PWs
CES Services
RTP Header Disable
Enable
Disable l Specifies the RTP
header.
l The RTP header
carries time stamps.
recommended.
Jitter Compensation
Buffering Time(us)
375 to 16000 8000 l Specifies the jitter
buffer time for the
received CES packets.
l A greater value of this
parameter means
fewer impacts of
transmission jitters on
CES services, greater
delays of CES
services, and more
resources occupied by
CES services.
recommended.
NOTE
Set Jitter Compensation
Buffering Time(us) to a
value greater than the value
of Packet Loading Time
(us) at the opposite end and
the local end.
A-423
Packet Loading Time
(us)
125 to 5000 1000 l Specifies the length of
fragments in the TDM
data stream. Each
fragment is
encapsulated into one
PW packet.
parameter means
higher encapsulation
efficiency but greater
delays of CES
services.
recommended.
Ingress Clock mode - - The OptiX RTN 950 does
Egress Clock mode - - The OptiX RTN 950 does
CW
Alert Label
CW l Specifies the mode of
PW connectivity
check.
l The value None
indicates that the
control word is not
supported. That is, the
PW connectivity
check is not supported.
VCCV packets in Alert
Label encapsulation
mode.
l The value CW
indicates that the
control word is
supported.
VCCV Verification
Mode
None
Ping
used for PW
connectivity check.
this parameter to
None.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
64K Timeslot Number 1 to 31 1 l Specifies the number
of 64 kbit/s timeslots
that transmit service
traffic. If Frame
Mode of the opposite
end is 30, the source 64
kbit/s timeslots at the
local end must include
the 16th timeslot.
l On the two ends of a
radio link, the timeslot
lists can be different
but the numbers of
timeslots must be the
same.
l This parameter is
unavailable if PW
Type is SAToP.
Sequence Number Mode Huawei Mode
Standard Mode
Huawei Mode Specifies the sequence
number mode.

Ethernet services
Control Word No Use No Use For ETH PWE3 services,
always No Use.
Alert Label
Alert Label l Specifies the mode of
PW connectivity
check.
l None indicates that
VCCV is not used.
VCCV packets in
Alert Label
encapsulation mode.
A-425
VCCV Verification
Mode
Ping
None
used for PW
connectivity check.
this parameter to
None.
Request VLAN - - l Set this parameter
when PW Type is
Ethernet Tagged
Mode.
l If the received packets
do not carry any
VLAN IDs, the PW
will add VLAN IDs to
the packets as required
by the setting of this
parameter.
not support request VLAN
TPID of the PW level.

ATM services
Control Word Must Use
No Use
Must Use l Specifies whether to
use the control word.
In the MPLS packet
switching network, the
transmit packet
information.
l Set Control Word to
Must Use if PW
Type is ATM 1:1.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Control Channel Type CW
None
Alert Label
PW connectivity
check.
l The value None
indicates that the
control word is not
PW connectivity check
is not supported.
l The value CW
indicates that the
control word is
supported.
l The value Alert
Label indicates VCCV
packets in Alert
Label encapsulation
mode.
VCCV Verification
Mode
Ping
None
used for PW
connectivity check.
this parameter to
None.
Max. Concatenated Cell
Count
1 to 31 10 l Specifies the
maximum number of
concatenated cells.
l If the value 1 is
assumed, only one
ATM cell is
encapsulated in one
packet. If the value
from 2 to 31 is
assumed, a maximum
of 2 to 31 ATM cells
are encapsulated into
one packet.
A-427
Packet Loading Time
(us)
100 to 50000 1000 l Specifies the packet
loading time. Once the
packet loading time
expires, the packet is
sent out even if the
concatenated cells are
less than the
maximum.
l If Max. Concatenated
Cell Count assumes
the value 1, this
parameter is
ineffective. That is, the
packet will be sent out
once the cell is loaded.

A.9.1.11 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW OAM
This topic describes parameters that are related to PW OAM.
Navigation Path
2. Click the PW OAM Parameter tab.
PW Type - - Displays the type of the
PW that carries the
service.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
OAM Status Enabled
Disabled
Disabled l Specifies or displays
whether the local node
can perform and
respond to OAM
operations.
l If OAM Status is
Enabled, the local NE
can perform and
respond to OAM
operations.
l If OAM Status is
Disabled, the local NE
cannot perform and
respond to OAM
operations.
l If PW APS protection
needs to be configured
or a CC test needs to be
performed for the
tunnel, OAM Status
needs to be set to
Enabled.
Associate AC State - - The OptiX RTN 950 does
Manual
Auto-Sensing l Specifies or displays
the detection mode for
PW OAM packets.
l Manual: During a CC
test, PW OAM packets
are sent at the interval
specified by the user.
l Auto-Sensing: During
a CC test, PW OAM
interval for receiving
PW OAM packets.
set to Manual, you
need to set the type of
PW OAM detection
and transmitted.
l The value Auto-
Sensing is
recommended.
A-429
FFD
fixed interval.
the user.
this parameter
PW OAM detection
packets to be
transmitted.
set to Manual, this
type of PW OAM
received and
transmitted.
l The value FFD is
assumed for PW APS
and the value CV is
assumed for
continuous
PWs.
(ms)
3.3
10
20
50
100
200
500
50 l Displays or specifies
the OAM detection
period.
l If Detection Packet
Type is FFD, this
parameter can be set; if
Detection Packet
Type is CV, the value
is always 1000.
3.3 for PW APS
usually. If the packet
transmission delay
time of a PW exceeds
3.3 ms, the
transmission interval
of FFD packets needs
to be a value greater
than the delay time.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
SD Threshold (%) 0-100 0 l Specifies or displays
the SD threshold.
When the OAM packet
the corresponding
alarm is reported.
set to 0, SD threshold
detection is not
supported.
SF Threshold (%) 0-100 0 l Specifies or displays
the SF threshold.
When the OAM packet
the corresponding
alarm is reported.
set to 0, SF threshold
detection is not
supported.
l The SD threshold is not
higher than the SF
threshold.
LSR ID to Be Received - - l Specifies or displays
the LSR ID to be
received.
l This parameter is
available only if OAM
Status is Disabled.
PW ID to be Received - - l Specifies or displays
the PW ID to be
received.
l This parameter is
available only if OAM
Status is Disabled.
Local Working Status - - Displays whether PWs at
the local end are available.
Local PW Defect Type - - Displays the local PW
defect type.
Local Disable PW
Duration(ms)
when the local PW is
unavailable.
A-431
Local PW Defect
Location
- - Displays the local PW
defect location.
Remote Working Status - - Displays whether PWs at
the remote end are
available.
Remote PW Defect Type - - Displays the remote PW
defect type.
Remote Disable PW
Duration(ms)
when the remote PW is
unavailable.
Remote PW Defect
Location
- - Displays the remote PW
defect location.

A.9.1.12 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW Ping
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the PW Ping test.
Navigation Path
3. Select the required PW and click OAM Operation > Ping Test.
Packet Count 1 to 4294967295 3 Specifies the number of
value of the PW label
in test request packets.
The value 7 indicates
recommended.
PW label in test request
packets.
recommended.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Transmit Interval
(10ms)
1 to 1000 100 l Specifies the interval
for transmitting test
request packets.
recommended.
recommended.
Wait-to-Response
Timeout Time(10ms)
response timeout
value.
recommended.
A-433
No Response
Application Control
Channel Response
packets.
l The value No
Response indicates
that the test
reported without
sending response
packets.
Control Channel
Response indicates
that response is
performed through the
reverse channel.
indicates that the IPv4
UDP packets
encapsulating MPLS
echo reply messages
are sent as response
packets.
l The value IPv4 UDP is
reserved for scenarios
where all nodes on an
LSP communicate
with each other over a
DCN running IP
protocols.
of the remote PE. If the
remote PE supports
reverse channel
response, set this
parameter to
Application Control
Channel Response. If
the remote PE does not
support reverse
channel response but
supports DCN channel
response by means of
IP protocols, set this
parameter to IPv4
UDP Response.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Peer PW ID - - Specifies the PW ID of the
peer end.
Peer IP - - Specifies the IP address of
the peer port.

A.9.1.13 Parameter Description: PW Management_PW Traceroute
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the PW Traceroute test.
Navigation Path
3. Select the required PW, click OAM Operation in the lower right corner, and choose
Traceroute Test from the drop-down list.
value of the PW label
in test request packets.
The value 7 indicates
recommended.
PW label in test request
packets.
recommended.
recommended.
Wait-to-Response
Timeout Time(10ms)
response timeout
value.
recommended.
A-435
No Response
Application Control
Channel Response
packets.
l The value No
Response indicates
that the test
reported without
sending response
packets.
Control Channel
Response indicates
that response is
performed through the
reverse channel.
indicates that the IPv4
UDP packets
encapsulating MPLS
echo reply messages
are sent as response
packets.
l The value IPv4 UDP is
reserved for scenarios
where all nodes on an
LSP communicate
with each other over a
DCN running IP
protocols.
of the remote PE. If the
remote PE supports
reverse channel
response, set this
parameter to
Application Control
Channel Response. If
the remote PE does not
support reverse
channel response but
supports DCN channel
response by means of
IP protocols, set this
parameter to IPv4
UDP Response.

Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A.9.1.14 Parameter Description: MPLS APS Protection Management
This topic describes parameters that are related to MPLS APS protection management.
Navigation Path
Configuration > APS Protection Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Tunnel APS Management tab.
Protection Group ID - - l Displays the protection
group ID.
l The system
automatically assigns
IDs to the protection
groups according to
their creation
sequence.
Protection Type - - Displays the protection
group type.
Switching Mode Dual-Ended
Single-Ended
a protection group.
l The value Single-
Ended indicates that
only in the direction
where faults occur.
l The value Dual-
services in both
positive and reverse
directions are switched
to their protection
channels when faults
occur.
you set this parameter
to Dual-Ended.
A-437
BDI Status Disabled
Enabled
whether the protection
switching is triggered
upon receiving BDI
packets.
l This parameter is
available only when
Switching Mode is set
to Single-Ended.
l If BDI Status is set to
Enabled, the egress
node notifies the
ingress node of any
detected faults by
sending BDI packets;
upon receiving BDI
packets, the ingress
node triggers
Transmit and receive
Status of Protocol Packet
- - Displays the protocol
packet status.
Revertive
whether to switch
services to the original
working tunnel after
the fault is rectified.
indicates to perform
the switching; the
value Non-Revertive
indicates not to
perform the switching.
to Revertive.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
WTR Time(min) 1-12 - l Specifies and displays
the WTR time of the
protection group.
original working
tunnel recovers,
to the original working
tunnel.
l This parameter is
available only when
Revertive Mode is
Revertive.
to 5.
Hold-Time(100ms) 0-100 - l Specifies the hold-off
group.
does not trigger
switching once it
detects faults, but wait
expires, and then
detect whether any
faults persist, the
otherwise, no
to 0.
Protocol Status - - Displays the protocol
status.
Switching Status - - Displays the switching
group.
group.
A-439
Unit - - Displays whether a tunnel
is a working or protection
tunnel.
Active Tunnel - - Displays the currently
used tunnel.
Tunnel Status - - Displays the tunnel status.
Tunnel Type - - Displays the tunnel type.
Tunnel Direction - - Displays the direction of a
tunnel.
Ingress Tunnel - - Displays the ingress
tunnel.
Egress Tunnel - - Displays the egress tunnel.

A.9.1.15 Parameter Description: Tunnel Protection Group_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are related to creating a tunnel protection group.
Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > APS
Protection Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Tunnel APS Management tab.
3. Click New.
Protection Type 1:1 1:1 Specifies the protection
type of the tunnel
protection group.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950
supports only the value 1:1.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Dual-Ended
Dual-Ended l Specifies the switching
mode to be adopted
when a tunnel fails.
l The value Single-
only in the direction
where faults occur.
l The value Dual-
to the protection
channel in both
directions when faults
occur.
l The value Dual-
Ended is
recommended.
BDI Status Enabled
Disabled
Disabled l Specifies whether the
protection switching is
triggered upon
receiving BDI packets.
l This parameter is
available only when
Switching Mode is set
to Single-Ended.
l If BDI Status is set to
Enabled, the egress
node notifies the
ingress node of any
detected faults by
sending BDI packets;
upon receiving BDI
packets, the ingress
node triggers the
Working Tunnel Type MPLS Tunnel MPLS Tunnel Specifies the type of the
working tunnel.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950
MPLS Tunnel.
A-441
Working Ingress Tunnel
ID
- - l Specifies the working
tunnel of the protection
group in the ingress
direction.
for a bidirectional
tunnel, a value is
automatically assigned
to the parameter
Working Egress
Tunnel ID.
Working Ingress Tunnel
Name
- - Displays the name of the
working tunnel in the
ingress direction.
Working Egress Tunnel
ID
group in the egress
direction.
tunnel, if the parameter
Working Ingress
Tunnel ID is set, a
value is automatically
assigned to the
parameter Working
Egress Tunnel ID.
Working Egress Tunnel
Name
working tunnel in the
egress direction.
Protection Tunnel Type - - Displays the type of
protection tunnel, which is
the same as the type of
working tunnel.
Protection Ingress
Tunnel ID
group in the ingress
direction.
for a bidirectional
tunnel, a value is
automatically assigned
to the parameter
Protection Egress
Tunnel ID.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Protection Ingress
Tunnel Name
protection tunnel in the
ingress direction.
Protection Egress
Tunnel ID
- - l Specifies the
protection tunnel of the
protection group in the
egress direction.
tunnel, if the parameter
Protection Ingress
Tunnel ID is set, a
value is automatically
assigned to the
parameter Protection
Egress Tunnel ID.
Protection Egress
Tunnel Name
protection tunnel in the
egress direction.
Revertive
Non-Revertive l This parameter
tunnel after it recovers.
indicates to switch
services back to the
original working
tunnel after it recovers;
the value Non-
Revertive indicates
not to switch services
back to the original
working tunnel after it
recovers.
recommended.
A-443
WTR Time(min) 1 to 12 5 l Specifies the WTR
group.
original working
tunnel recovers,
to the original working
tunnel.
l This parameter is
available only when
Revertive Mode is
Revertive.
recommended.
Hold-Time(100ms) 0 to 100 0 l Specifies the hold-off
group.
does not trigger
switching once it
expires, and then
detects whether any
faults persist, the
otherwise, no
recommended.
Protocol Status Disabled
Enabled
Disabled l Specifies the protocol
status.
Protocol Status to
Disabled. After the
ends, set Protocol
Status to Enabled.

Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A.9.1.16 Parameter Description: PW APS Protection Group_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a PW APS protection group.
Navigation Path
The navigation path for CES services is as follows:
1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > CES
Service Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Protection Group tab.
3. Click the PW APS tab.
4. Click New.
The navigation path for E-Line services is as follows:
4. Click New.
The navigation path for ATM services is as follows:
1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > ATM
4. Click New.
manually assigned.
the PW.
PW.
PW Ingress Label/
Source Port
label.
A-445
Port
label.
select tunnels.
PW will fail.
the reverse tunnel
automatically.

QoS Parameters

Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Enabled
- Specifies whether the
is enabled.
bandwidth of one or
more PWs in an MPLS
tunnel.
Therefore, this
PWE3 services in an
MPLS tunnel.
CIR(kbit/s) - - Specifies the committed
a PW.
PIR(kbit/s) - - Specifies the peak
PW.
size (PBS) of a PW.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950
supports only Pipe.

A-447
Enabled
is enabled.
bandwidth of one or
more PWs in an MPLS
tunnel.
l An ATM PWE3
PWE3 services in an
MPLS tunnel.
a PW.
PW.
size (PBS) of a PW.

Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
RTP header.
Packet Loading Time
(us)
loading time.
Jitter Compensation
Buffering Time(us)
packets.
Control Channel Type - - Displays the mode of PW
connectivity check.
VCCV Verification
Mode
- - Displays the VCCV
VCCV verification is used
for PW connectivity
check.
Enable CES Service
Alarm Transparent
Transmission
service alarms are
CES services. The
this threshold.
packets. The
this threshold.
number mode.

A-449
transfer packet
PWE3 services, this
used.
channel type.
VCCV Verification
Mode
Ethernet Tag, this
not support VLAN TPID
of the PW level.

transfer packet
information.
channel type.
VCCV Verification
Mode
Count
cells.
Packet Loading Time
(us)
loading time.

Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
type.
group ID.
Enabled
status of the PW
protection group.
Enabling Status to
Disabled. After the
ends, set Enabling
Status to Enabled.
mode.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950
mode.
working PW.
protection PW.
PW fails.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950
supports dual-ended
switching.
A-451
Revertive
are switched to the
original working PW
and the value Non-
revertive indicates
switched to the
recommended.
Time(min)
group.
original working PW
switched to the
l This parameter is
available only when
Restoration Mode is
Revertive.
recommended.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
(100ms)
group.
does not trigger
switching once it
expires, and then
detects whether any
faults persist, the
otherwise, no
recommended.
mode of the PW APS
protection group.

OAM Parameters
status of PW OAM.
A-453
Manual
l Manual: The
connectivity check
by the user.
l Auto-Sensing: The
connectivity check
at the interval of
receiving PW OAM
packets.
set to Manual, you
need to set the PW
OAM detection
and transmitted.
l The value Auto-
Sensing is
recommended.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
FFD
fixed interval.
the user.
this parameter
transmitted.
set to Manual, this
PW OAM detection
and transmitted.
l The value FFD is
assumed for PW APS
and the value CV is
assumed for
continuous
PWs.
(ms)
3.3
10
20
50
100
200
500
detection packets.
l This parameter is
configurable when
Detection Packet
Type is FFD and
assumes the fixed
value of 1000 when
Detection Packet
Type is CV.
3.3 for PW APS.
received.
received.

A-455
A.9.1.17 Parameter Description: Slave Protection Pair of a PW APS Protection
Group_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a slave protection pair of a PW
APS protection group.
Navigation Path
The navigation path for CES services is as follows:
3. Click the Slave Protection Pair tab.
4. Click New.
The navigation path for E-Line services is as follows:
4. Click New.
The navigation path for ATM services is as follows:
4. Click New.
manually assigned.
the PW.
PW.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
PW Ingress Label/
Source Port
label.
Port
label.
select tunnels.
PW will fail.
the reverse tunnel
automatically.

QoS Parameters

A-457
Enabled
is enabled.
bandwidth of one or
more PWs in an MPLS
tunnel.
Therefore, this
PWE3 services in an
MPLS tunnel.
a PW.
PW.
size (PBS) of a PW.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950
supports only Pipe.

Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Enabled
is enabled.
bandwidth of one or
more PWs in an MPLS
tunnel.
l An ATM PWE3
PWE3 services in an
MPLS tunnel.
a PW.
PW.
size (PBS) of a PW.

A-459
RTP header.
Packet Loading Time
(us)
loading time.
Jitter Compensation
Buffering Time(us)
packets.
connectivity check.
VCCV Verification
Mode
for PW connectivity
check.
Enable CES Service
Alarm Transparent
Transmission
service alarms are
CES services. The
this threshold.
packets. The
this threshold.
number mode.

Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
transfer packet
PWE3 services, this
used.
channel type.
VCCV Verification
Mode
Ethernet Tag, this
not support VLAN TPID
of the PW level.

transfer packet
information.
channel type.
VCCV Verification
Mode
Count
cells.
Packet Loading Time
(us)
loading time.

A-461
mode.
the slave PW APS
protection group
simultaneously.
protection pair.
protection pair.

A.9.2 CES Parameters
This topic describes parameters that are related to CES services.
A.9.2.1 Parameter Description: CES Service Management
This topic describes the parameters that are related to CES service management.
A.9.2.2 Parameter Description: CES Service Management_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are related to creating CES services.
A.9.2.1 Parameter Description: CES Service Management
This topic describes the parameters that are related to CES service management.
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > CES
Service ID - - Displays the ID of the CES
service to be created.
Service name - - Displays or specifies the
service name.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Level - - Displays the level of the
received TDM frames.
Source Board - - Displays the source board
of the CES service.
Source High Channel - - For the OptiX RTN 950,
configured.
Source Low Channel - - Displays the source lower
order path.
Source 64K Timeslot - - Displays the source 64
kbit/s timeslot.
A-463
Priority List CS7
CS6
EF
AF4
AF3
AF2
AF1
BE
- l Specifies the priority
of a CES service. This
parameter is available
only when Mode is set
to UNI-NNI.
to be configured if QoS
processing needs to be
performed for different
CES services.
l CS6-CS7: indicate the
highest service classes,
which are mainly
transmission.
l EF: indicates the
expedited forwarding
of service, which is
applicable to services
of low transmission
delay and low packet
loss rate, for example,
voice and video
services.
l AF1-AF4: indicate the
assured forwarding
classes of service,
which are applicable to
services that require an
assured rate but no
delay or jitter limit.
l BE: is applicable to
services that need not
be processed in a
special manner.
recommended.
that carries the CES
service. This parameter is
meaningful when the CES
service type is UNI-NNI.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Tunnel - - Displays the tunnel that
carries the PW. The tunnel
must have been
configured in advance.
This parameter is
service type is UNI-NNI.
Sink Board - - Displays the sink board of
the CES service. This
parameter is meaningful
when the CES service type
is UNI-UNI.
Sink High Channel - - For the OptiX RTN 950,
configured.
Sink Low Channel - - Displays the sink lower
order path. This parameter
is meaningful when the
CES service type is UNI-
UNI.
Sink 64K Timeslot - - Displays the sink 64 kbit/s
timeslot. This parameter is
service type is UNI-UNI.
status of the CES service.

that carries the CES
service.
Working Status - - Displays working status of
the PW.
PW Status - - Displays the enabling
status of the PW.
PW Signaling Type - - Displays the PW signaling
type.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950
supports static PWs only.
A-465
PW Type - - Displays the PW type for
CES service
encapsulation.
CESoPSN: Indicates
structure-aware TDM
circuit emulation service
over packet switched
network. Timeslot
compression can be set.
SAToP: Indicates
structure-agnostic TDM
over packet. Timeslot
compression cannot be
set.
PW Encapsulation Type - - Displays the tunnel type
for PW encapsulation.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950
supports MPLS only.
PW Ingress Label/
Source Port
- - Displays the Ingress label
of the PW that carries the
CES service.
Port
- - Displays the Egress label
of the PW that carries the
CES service.
Peer LSR ID - - Displays the LSR ID of the
PW at the remote end.
Local Working Status - - Displays the working
local end.
Remote Working Status - - Displays the working
remote end.
Compositive Working
Status
- - Displays the compositive
working status of the PW.
The compositive working
status is up when both
ends are up, and is down
when one end is down.
Tunnel type - - Displays the type of the
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950
supports MPLS tunnels
only.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Tunnel - - Displays the ID of the
tunnel that carries the CES
service.
status of the tunnel.
Tunnel Automatic
Selection Policy

QoS Parameters
the PW.
CIR(kbit/s) - - The OptiX RTN 950 does

Parameters of Advanced Attributes
RTP Header - - Displays the RTP header.
The RTP header carries
time stamps.
Jitter Compensation
Buffering Time(us)
the jitter buffer time.
l The jitter buffer time
guarantees the real-
time performance of
the CES service.
NOTE
the local end.
A-467
Packet Loading Time
(us)
loading time.
connectivity check.
VCCV Verification
Mode
for PW connectivity
check.
Enable CES Service
Alarm Transparent
Transmission
Enabled
Disabled
- Displays or specifies the
enabling status of the
transparent transmission
of CES service alarms. If
this function is enabled,
the fault on the AC side of
the CES service is notified
to the remote end. Upon
receiving the fault
notification from the
network side or the remote
end, the local NE inserts
the corresponding alarm to
the AC side.
Bit Inserting Status
1-65535 - Displays or specifies the
threshold of packet loss
ratio of CES services. The
be reported once the actual
this threshold. This
only when the transparent
transmission of CES
service alarms is enabled.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
1-65535 - Displays or specifies the
threshold of received CES
service packets. The
this threshold. This
only when the transparent
transmission of CES
service alarms is enabled.
Standard Mode
- Specifies the sequence
number mode. The
Sequence Number
Mode must be set to the
same value at both ends of
a radio link.

NOTE
created.
working PW.
protection PW.
mode.
A-469
Disabled
the PW protection
group.
Enabling Status to
Disabled. After the
ends, set Enabling
Status to Enabled.
PW fails.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950
switching.
Revertive
original working PW
after the fault is
rectified.
are switched to the
original working PW
and the value Non-
revertive indicates
switched to the
recommended.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Time(min)
the WTR time of the
protection group.
original working PW
switched to the
l This parameter is
available only when
Restoration Mode is
Revertive.
(100ms)
protection group.
does not trigger
switching once it
expires, and then
detects whether any
faults persist, the
otherwise, no
group.
group.

A-471
NOTE
The following parameters are available only after the slave protection pair is configured.
the slave PW APS
protection group
simultaneously.
protection pair.
protection pair.
DNI PW ID - - Displays the DNI PW ID.
status of the slave
protection pair.

A.9.2.2 Parameter Description: CES Service Management_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are related to creating CES services.
Navigation Path
2. Click New.
Service ID(e.g.1,3-6) 1 to 4294967295 - Specifies the service ID.
Service name - - Specifies the service
name.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Level E1 E1 The value E1 indicates
that the CES service is
used to transmit the TDM
services from E1 ports.
Mode UNI-NNI
UNI-UNI
UNI-NNI l Specifies the mode of
CES service.
l The value UNI-NNI
indicates that the CES
service is carried by a
PW. Therefore, the
information about the
PW needs to be
configured.
Source Board - - Specifies the board where
the source (UNI) of the
CES service is located.
Source High Channel - - The OptiX RTN 950 does
Source Low Channel
(e.g.1,3-6)
- - If Level is set to E1, this
parameter indicates the E1
port where the service
source is located. If
Mode is set to UNI-NNI,
this parameter can assume
only one value.
Source 64K Timeslot
(e.g.1,3-6)
1-31 1-31 l Specifies the 64 kbit/s
timeslot that transmits
data. This parameter
can assume multiple
values. If Frame
Mode of the opposite
end is 30, the source 64
kbit/s timeslots at the
local end must include
the 16th timeslot.
l On the two ends of a
but the numbers of
timeslots must the
same.
l This parameter does
not need to be set if
Mode is UNI-NNI and
PW Type is SAToP.
A-473
Priority List CS7
CS6
EF
AF4
AF3
AF2
AF1
BE
EF l Specifies the priority
of a CES service. This
only when Mode is set
to UNI-NNI.
to be configured if QoS
processing needs to be
performed for different
CES services.
l CS6-CS7: indicate the
highest service classes,
which are mainly
transmission.
l EF: indicates the
expedited forwarding
of service, which is
of low transmission
delay and low packet
loss rate, for example,
voice and video
services.
l AF1-AF4: indicate the
assured forwarding
classes of service,
which are applicable to
services that require an
assured rate but no
delay or jitter limit.
l BE: is applicable to
services that need not
be processed in a
special manner.
recommended.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
PW Type CESoPSN
SAToP
CESoPSN l Specifies the type of
the PW. This
only when Mode is
UNI-NNI.
l CESoPSN: Indicates
structure-aware TDM
circuit emulation
service over packet
switched network.
Timeslot compression
can be set. SAToP:
Indicates structure-
agnostic TDM over
packet. Timeslot
compression cannot be
set.
PW APS
No Protection l Specifies the
protection mode of the
PW. This parameter is
available only when
Mode is UNI-NNI.
to PW APS, working
and protection PWs
set to
, you need to bind the
slave PW APS
protection group with
the master PW APS
protection group. The
PW APS protection
group triggers the
switching of the slave
PW APS protection
group simultaneously.
Sink Board - - l Specifies the board
where the sink of the
CES service is located.
l This parameter is
available only when
Mode is set to UNI-
UNI.
A-475
Sink High Channel - - The OptiX RTN 950 does
Sink Low Channel(e.g.
1,3-6)
- - l If Level is set to E1,
this parameter
indicates the E1 port
where the service sink
is located.
l This parameter is
available only when
Mode is set to UNI-
UNI.
Sink 64K Timeslot(e.g.
1,3-6)
1-31 1-31 l Specifies the 64 kbit/s
timeslot that the
service sink occupies.
On the two ends of a
but the numbers of
timeslots must the
same.
l This parameter is
available only when
Mode is set to UNI-
UNI.

NOTE
If the parameter Protection Type of PWs is set to PW APS or Slave Protection Pair, all the parameters of
working and protection PWs need to be configured. This section considers the parameters of the working PW
as an example.
manually assigned.
the PW.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
PW.
PW Ingress Label/
Source Port
label.
Port
label.
select tunnels.
PW will fail.
the reverse tunnel
automatically.

QoS Parameters

A-477
Parameters for the Advanced Attributes of PWs
RTP Header Disable
Enable Huawei RTP
Disable l Specifies the RTP
header.
l The RTP header
carries time stamps.
recommended.
Jitter Compensation
Buffering Time (us)
375 to 16000 8000 l Specifies the jitter
buffer time for the
received CES packets.
The step is 125.
parameter means
fewer impacts of
transmission jitters on
CES services, greater
delays of CES
services, and more
resources occupied by
CES services.
recommended.
NOTE
the local end.
Packet Loading Time
(us)
125 to 5000 1000 l Specifies the length of
fragments in the TDM
data stream. The step is
125.
parameter means
higher encapsulation
efficiency but greater
delays of CES
services.
recommended.
Ingress Clock Mode Null
Adaptive Clock Mode
Null The OptiX RTN 950 does
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
CW
Alert Label
PW connectivity
check.
l The value None
indicates that the
control word is not
PW connectivity
check is not supported.
VCCV packets in Alert
Label encapsulation
mode.
l The value CW
indicates that the
control word is
supported.
VCCV Verification
Mode
None
Ping
used for PW
connectivity check.
this parameter to
None.
Enable CES Service
Alarm Transparent
Transmission
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled If this function is enabled,
the fault on the AC side of
the CES service is notified
to the remote end. On
receiving the fault
notification from the
network side or the remote
end, the local NE inserts
the corresponding alarm
to the AC side.
A-479
1-65535 100 l The corresponding
alarm will be reported
if the number of
consecutive lost
packets crosses the
threshold specified by
this parameter.
l This function is
available only when
the transparent
transmission of CES
service alarms is
enabled.
1-65535 5 l The corresponding
alarm will be cleared if
the number of
consecutive received
packets crosses the
threshold specified by
this parameter.
l This function is
available only when
the transparent
transmission of CES
service alarms is
enabled.
Standard Mode
Standard Mode Specifies the sequence
number mode. The
Sequence Number
Mode must be set to the
same value at both ends of
a radio link.

NOTE
PW APS.
type.
group ID.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Enabled
status of the PW
protection group.
Enabling Status to
Disabled. After the
ends, set Enabling
Status to Enabled.
mode.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950
mode.
working PW.
protection PW.
PW fails.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950
supports dual-ended
switching.
Revertive
are switched to the
original working PW
and the value Non-
revertive indicates
switched to the
recommended.
A-481
Time(min)
group.
original working PW
switched to the
l This parameter is
available only when
Restoration Mode is
Revertive.
recommended.
(100ms)
group.
does not trigger
switching once it
expires, and then
detects whether any
faults persist, the
otherwise, no
recommended.
mode of the PW APS
protection group.

OAM Parameters
NOTE
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
status of PW OAM.
Manual
l Manual: The
connectivity check
by the user.
l Auto-Sensing: The
connectivity check
at the interval of
receiving PW OAM
packets.
set to Manual, you
need to set the PW
OAM detection
and transmitted.
l The value Auto-
Sensing is
recommended.
A-483
FFD
fixed interval.
the user.
this parameter
transmitted.
set to Manual, this
PW OAM detection
and transmitted.
l The value FFD is
assumed for PW APS
and the value CV is
assumed for
continuous
PWs.
(ms)
3.3
10
20
50
100
200
500
detection packets.
l This parameter is
configurable when
Detection Packet
Type is FFD and
assumes the fixed
value of 1000 when
Detection Packet
Type is CV.
3.3 for PW APS.
received.
received.

Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
NOTE
mode.
the slave PW APS
protection group
simultaneously.
protection pair.
protection pair.

A.9.3 ATM Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to ATM services.
A.9.3.1 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Group Management
This topic describes the parameters that are related to IMA group management.
A.9.3.2 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_Bound Path Configuration
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the bound paths in the ATM TRUNK.
A.9.3.3 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Group Status
This topic describes the parameters that are related to IMA group status.
A.9.3.4 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Link Status
This topic describes the parameters that are related to IMA link status.
A.9.3.5 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_ATM Interface Management
This topic describes the parameters that are related to ATM interface management.
A.9.3.6 Parameter Description: Configuration of ATM Service Class Mapping Table
This topic describes the parameters that are related to configuration of the ATM service class
mapping table.
A.9.3.7 Parameter Description: Configuration of ATM Service Class Mapping Table_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are related to creation of the ATM service class mapping
table.
A-485
A.9.3.8 Parameter Description: ATM Policy Management
This topic describes the parameters that are related to ATM policy management.
A.9.3.9 Parameter Description: ATM Policy Management_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are related to creation of ATM policies.
A.9.3.10 Parameter Description: ATM Service Management
This topic describes the parameters that are related to ATM service management.
A.9.3.11 Parameter Description: ATM Service Management_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are related to creation of ATM services.
A.9.3.12 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_Segment and End Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are related to segment end attributes of ATM OAM.
A.9.3.13 Parameter Description: ATM OMA Management_CC Activation Status
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the CC activation status of ATM OAM.
A.9.3.14 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_Remote End Loopback Status
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the remote end loopback status of ATM
OAM.
A.9.3.15 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_LLID
This topic describes the parameters that are related to LLID configuration.
A.9.3.1 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Group Management
This topic describes the parameters that are related to IMA group management.
Navigation Path
Interface Management > ATM IMA Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the IMA Group Management tab.
VCTRUNK - - Displays the ATM
TRUNK.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
IMA Protocol Enable
Status
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled l Specifies the IMA
protocol enable status.
l Set IMA Protocol
Enable Status to
Enabled if the links
bound in the ATM
TRUNK require the
IMA protocol;
otherwise, set this
parameter to
Disabled.
l After IMA Protocol
Enable Status is set to
Enabled, the E1 links
or Fractional E1
timeslots bound in the
ATM TRUNK start
running the IMA
protocol.
Minimum Number of
Active Transmitting
Links
1 to 16 1 l The links of the IMA
group can carry
services only when the
number of activated
links in the transmit/
receive direction is not
smaller than the value
of Minimum Number
of Active
Transmitting Links/
Minimum Number of
Active Receiving
Links.
l The values of
Minimum Number of
Active Transmitting
Links and Minimum
Number of Active
Receiving Links must
be the same because
the OptiX RTN 950
supports Symmetrical
Mode and
Symmetrical
Operation only. The
parameters Minimum
Number of Active
Transmitting Links
and Minimum
A-487
Minimum Number of
Active Receiving Links
1 to 16 1 Number of Active
Receiving Links must
assume the same value
on the two ends of an
IMA link.
recommended.
IMA Protocol Version 1.0
1.1
1.1 l Specifies the IMA
protocol version.
l The parameter IMA
Protocol Version
must assume the same
value on the two ends
of an IMA link.
recommended.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
IMA Transmit Frame
Length
32
64
128
256
128 l Specifies the IMA
transmit frame length.
l Based on the IMA
frame format, the
receive end rebuilds
the ATM cell stream
with the cells arriving
from diversely-
delayed links. Longer
IMA frames result in
higher transmission
efficiency and occupy
more resources. Once a
member link fails, the
impact on the entire
IMA group increases
as the length of IMA
frames increases.
l The IMA Transmit
Frame Length must
IMA link.
recommended.
A-489
IMA Symmetry Mode Symmetrical Mode and
Symmetrical Operation
Symmetrical Mode and
Symmetrical Operation
l Specifies the
symmetrical mode of
the IMA group.
l If the symmetrical
mode and symmetrical
operation is adopted,
the bandwidth of the
IMA group is always
consistent in the
transmit direction and
in the receive
direction, even when
some member links
fail. In symmetrical
mode:
Bandwidth of the
IMA group = min
{bandwidth in the
transmit direction,
bandwidth in the
receive direction}
The unidirectional
failure of one
member link is
equivalent to the
bidirectional
failure of one
member link.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Maximum Delay
Between Links (ms)
maximum differential
delay that is allowed
between the member
links.
l If the differential delay
between a member link
and the other member
links exceeds the
value, this link will be
deactivated and
deleted from the IMA
group.
to a value higher than
the normal value
range, the delay of
IMA services will be
prolonged and even
packet loss will occur;
if this parameter is set
to a value lower than
the normal value
range, a working link
will be deleted by
mistake.
l The Maximum Delay
Between Links (ms)
must assume the same
value on the two ends
of an IMA link.
recommended.
Clock Mode CTC Mode
ITC Mode
CTC Mode l Specifies the clock
mode of the IMA
group.
l Clock Mode is set to
the same value for the
interconnected ends of
IMA links.

A.9.3.2 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_Bound Path Configuration
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the bound paths in the ATM TRUNK.
A-491
Navigation Path
2. Click the Binding tab.
3. Click Configuration.
Available Boards - - Selects the available
boards.
Configurable Ports - - Selects the configurable
ATM trunks.
Level E1
Fractional E1
E1 Specifies the level of
bound paths.
l If ATM/IMA services
need to be mapped into
the ATM TRUNK that
binds one or more E1
ports, select E1 in
Level.
l If ATM/IMA services
need to be mapped into
the ATM TRUNK that
binds one or more
serial ports, select
Fractional E1 in
Level.
bound paths. The fixed
value is bidirectional.
Optical Interface - - The OptiX RTN 950 does
Available Resources - - Displays the ports that
carry the available paths
for IMA services.
NOTE
For Fractional ATM/IMA
services, set Port Mode in
PDH Interface to Layer 1
and configure Setting Serial
Port Parameters.
Available Timeslots - - The OptiX RTN 950 does
Selected Bound Paths - - Displays the bound paths.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
VCTRUNK - - Displays the name of the
ATM TRUNK.
Level - - Displays the level of
bound paths.
Bound Paths - - Displays the bound paths.
Number of Bound Paths - - Displays the number of
bound paths.
Display in Combination Selected
Not selected
Selected Specifies whether to
display bound paths in
combination.

A.9.3.3 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Group Status
This topic describes the parameters that are related to IMA group status.
Navigation Path
2. Click the IMA Group States tab.
VCTRUNK - - Displays the VCTRUNK.
Near-End Group Status - - Displays the status of the
near-end group.
Far-End Group Status - - Displays the status of the
far-end group.
Transmit Rate (cell/s) - - Displays the cell
transmission rate.
Receive Rate (cell/s) - - Displays the cell receiving
rate.
Number of Transmit
Links
- - Displays the number of
transmit links.
Number of Receive
Links
receive links.
A-493
Number of Activated
Transmit Links
activated transmit links.
Number of Activated
Receive Links
activated receive links.

A.9.3.4 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_IMA Link Status
This topic describes the parameters that are related to IMA link status.
Navigation Path
2. Click the IMA Link States tab.
E1 Link - - Displays E1 links.
Differential Delay Check
Status
- - Displays the status of the
deferential delay check.
Near-End Receiving
Status
- - Displays the near-end
receiving status.
Near-End Transmitting
Status
- - Displays the near-end
transmitting status.
Far-End Receiving
Status
- - Displays the far-end
receiving status.
Far-End Transmitting
Status
- - Displays the far-end
transmitting status.

A.9.3.5 Parameter Description: ATM IMA Management_ATM Interface
Management
This topic describes the parameters that are related to ATM interface management.
Navigation Path
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
2. Click the ATM Interface Management tab.
Port - - Displays the port.
Name - - Displays or specifies the
name of port.
Port Type UNI
NNI
UNI Specifies the type of ATM
port.
l UNI: the port
connecting user-side
devices. For example,
the UNI port applies to
the user-side interface
on the common ATM
network or to the user-
side interface of the PE
on the PSN network
that transmits ATM
PWE3 services.
l NNI: the port
connecting network-
side devices. For
example, the NNI port
applies to the network-
side interface on the
common ATM
network.
A-495
ATM Cell Payload
Scrambling
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled Specifies whether to
enable payload
scrambling of ATM cells.
l The ITU-T G.804
stipulates that the
payload (48 bytes) of
ATM cells must be
scrambled before it is
mapped into E1
signals. Therefore, it is
set ATM Cell Payload
Scrambling to
Enabled.
l ATM Cell Payload
Scrambling must
ATM link. Otherwise,
packet loss will occur.
Min. VPI - - The OptiX RTN 950 does
Max. VPI - - The OptiX RTN 950 does
Min. VCI - - The OptiX RTN 950 does
Max. VCI - - The OptiX RTN 950 does
VCC-Supported VPI
Count
Loopback No Loopback
Outloop
Inloop
No Loopback Specifies the loopback
status of the port.

A.9.3.6 Parameter Description: Configuration of ATM Service Class Mapping
Table
This topic describes the parameters that are related to configuration of the ATM service class
mapping table.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Diffserv domain Management > ATM COS Mapping Configuration from
the Function Tree.
Mapping Relation ID - - Specifies the ID of the
mapping table.
Mapping Relation Name - - Specifies the name of the
mapping relationship.
UBR BE
AF11
AF12
AF13
AF21
AF22
AF23
AF31
AF32
AF33
AF41
AF42
AF43
EF
CS6
CS7
UBR: BE
CBR: EF
RT-VBR: AF31
NRT-VBR: AF21
UBR+: AF11
PORT-TRANS: BE
Displays or specifies the
PHB service classes that
correspond to different
ATM service types.
l Eight PHB service
classes are available:
BE, AF1, AF2, AF3,
AF4, EF, CS6, and
CS7. The OptiX RTN
950 provides different
QoS policies for the
queues of different
service classes.
l CS6 to CS7: highest
service classes, mainly
applicable to signaling
transmission.
l EF: fast forwarding,
of low transmission
delays and low packet
loss rates.
l AF1 to AF4: assured
forwarding, applicable
to services that require
an assured
transmission rate
rather than delay or
jitter limits.
CBR
RT-VBR
NRT-VBR
UBR+
A-497
PORT-TRANS
NOTE
The AF1 class includes
three subclasses: AF11,
AF12, and AF13. Only
one of these subclasses
can take effect for one
queue. It is the same
case with AF2, AF3, and
AF4.
l BE: best effort,
that do not require
special processing.

A.9.3.7 Parameter Description: Configuration of ATM Service Class Mapping
Table_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are related to creation of the ATM service class mapping
table.
Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Diffserv domain Management > ATM COS Mapping Configuration
2. Click New.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Mapping Relation ID 2 to 8 - Specifies the ID of the
mapping table.
Mapping Relation Name - - Specifies the name of the
mapping relationship.
UBR BE
AF11
AF12
AF13
AF21
AF22
AF23
AF31
AF32
AF33
AF41
AF42
AF43
EF
CS6
CS7
UBR: BE
CBR: EF
RT-VBR: AF31
NRT-VBR: AF21
UBR+: AF11
PORT-TRANS: BE
Specifies the PHB service
classes that correspond to
different ATM service
types.
l Eight PHB service
classes are available:
BE, AF1, AF2, AF3,
AF4, EF, CS6, and
CS7. The OptiX RTN
950 provides different
QoS policies for the
queues of different
service classes.
l CS6 to CS7: highest
service classes, mainly
applicable to signaling
transmission.
l EF: fast forwarding,
of low transmission
delays and low packet
loss rates.
l AF1 to AF4: assured
forwarding, applicable
to services that require
an assured
transmission rate
rather than delay or
jitter limits.
NOTE
The AF1 class includes
three subclasses: AF11,
AF12, and AF13. Only
one of these subclasses
can take effect for one
queue. It is the same
case with AF2, AF3, and
AF4.
l BE: best effort,
that do not require
special processing.
CBR
RT-VBR
NRT-VBR
UBR+
PORT-TRANS

A-499
A.9.3.8 Parameter Description: ATM Policy Management
This topic describes the parameters that are related to ATM policy management.
Navigation Path
Management > Policy Management > ATM Policy from the Function Tree.
2. Click the ATM Policy tab.
Policy ID - 1 Displays the policy ID of
the ATM service.
Policy Name - - Displays or specifies the
policy name of the ATM
service. The maximum
length of the value is 64
bytes.

Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameters for Configuring ATM Traffic
Service Type UBR
CBR
RT-VBR
NRT-VBR
UBR+
UBR Displays or specifies the
type of the ATM service.
l The UBR service is
characterized by non-
real-time applications
and many bursts. The
UBR service does not
specify traffic-related
service guarantees. To
be specific, the UBR
service only requires
that the network side
provides the service
with the best effort.
The network side does
not provide any
assured QoS for the
UBR service. In the
case of network
congestion, the UBR
cells are discarded
first.
l The CBR service
requires tightly
constrained delay
variation and requires
that data be transmitted
at a constant rate. In
addition, the CBR
service requests a
static amount of
bandwidth and the
highest priority. The
CBR service is
characterized by stable
traffic and few bursts.
l The rt-VBR service
requires tightly
constrained delay and
delay variation.
Compared with the
CBR service, the rt-
VBR service allows
sources to transmit
data at a rate that varies
with time.
Equivalently, the
sources can be
A-501
described as bursty. In
addition, the rt-VBR
service does not
require a static amount
of bandwidth.
l Compared with the rt-
VBR service, the nrt-
VBR service does not
require tightly
constrained delay or
delay variation, and is
intended for non-real-
time applications.
l The UBR+ service is
supplementary to the
UBR service and is
intended for
applications that
require assured
minimum cell rate,
which is indicated by
the minimum cell rate
(MCR) parameter. The
other characteristics of
the UBR+ service are
the same as the
corresponding
characteristics of the
UBR service.
Traffic Type - - The Table A-89 lists the
ATM service type, traffic
type descriptor, and the
related traffic parameters.
ATM policies are
configured based on these
mapping relationships.
Clp01Pcr(cell/s) 90 to 74539 -
Clp01Scr(cell/s) 90 to 74539 -
Max. Cell Burst Size
(cell)
2 to 200000 -
Cell Delay Variation
Tolerance (0.1us)
7 to 13300000 -
Discard Traffic Frame Enabled
Disabled
Disabled Displays or specifies the
frame discarding mark in
ATM policies. This
parameter is effective to
AAL5 traffic.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
UPC/NPC Enabled
Disabled
Disabled Displays or specifies
UPC/NPC.
l UPC is user-side
parameter control and
NPC is network-side
parameter control.
l After UPC/NPC is
enabled, the cells with
a frame discarding
mark will be discarded
in network congestion.

Table A-89 Mapping relationship between ATM service types, traffic types, and traffic parameters
ATM
Service
Type
ATM Traffic Type
Descriptor
Traffic
Parameter 1
Traffic
Parameter 2
Traffic
Parameter 3
Traffic
Parameter 4
UBR NoTrafficDescriptor - - - -
NoClpTaggingNoScr Clp01Pcr CDVT - -
NoClpNoScr Clp01Pcr - - -
NoClpNoScrCdvt Clp01Pcr CDVT - -
CBR ClpTransparentNoScr Clp01Pcr CDVT - -
ClpNoTaggingNoScr Clp01Pcr Clp0Pcr - -
ClpTaggingNoScr Clp01Pcr Clp0Pcr - -
nrtVBR NoClpScr Clp01Pcr Clp01Scr MBS -
ClpNoTaggingScr Clp01Pcr Clp0Scr MBS -
ClpTaggingScr Clp01Pcr Clp0Scr MBS -
rtVBR ClpTransparentScr Clp01Pcr Clp01Scr MBS CDVT
NoClpScrCdvt Clp01Pcr Clp01Scr MBS CDVT
ClpNoTaggingScrCdvt Clp01Pcr Clp0Scr MBS CDVT
ClpTaggingScrCdvt Clp01Pcr Clp0Scr MBS CDVT
UBR+ atmnotrafficdescriptormcr Clp01Mcr - - -
atmnoclpmcr Clp01Pcr Clp01Mcr - -
A-503
ATM
Service
Type
ATM Traffic Type
Descriptor
Traffic
Parameter 1
Traffic
Parameter 2
Traffic
Parameter 3
Traffic
Parameter 4
atmnoclpmcrcdvt Clp01Pcr Clp01Mcr CDVT -

Parameters for the application object
Service ID - - Displays the ID
configured for the ATM
service.
Service Name - - Displays the name
configured for the ATM
service.
Link ID - - Displays the link ID.
the service.

A.9.3.9 Parameter Description: ATM Policy Management_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are related to creation of ATM policies.
Navigation Path
Management > Policy Management > ATM Policy from the Function Tree.
2. Click New.
Policy ID - 1 Specifies the policy ID of
the ATM service. The
policy ID can also be
automatically allocated.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Policy Name Synchronous signal
Signaling
Voice
Data
Video
Synchronous signal Specifies the policy name
of the ATM service. The
maximum length of the
value is 64 bytes.
NOTE
You can select one of the
five ATM service policy
names from the drop-down
list or enter the policy name.
A-505
Service Type UBR
CBR
RT-VBR
NRT-VBR
UBR+
UBR Specifies the type of the
ATM service.
l The UBR service is
characterized by non-
real-time applications
and many bursts. The
UBR service does not
specify traffic-related
service guarantees. To
be specific, the UBR
service only requires
that the network side
provides the service
with the best effort.
The network side does
not provide any
assured QoS for the
UBR service. In the
case of network
congestion, the UBR
cells are discarded
first.
l The CBR service
requires tightly
constrained delay
variation and requires
that data be transmitted
at a constant rate. In
addition, the CBR
service requests a
static amount of
bandwidth and the
highest priority. The
CBR service is
characterized by stable
traffic and few bursts.
l The rt-VBR service
requires tightly
constrained delay and
delay variation.
Compared with the
CBR service, the rt-
VBR service allows
sources to transmit
data at a rate that varies
with time.
Equivalently, the
sources can be
described as bursty. In
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
addition, the rt-VBR
service does not
require a static amount
of bandwidth.
l Compared with the rt-
VBR service, the nrt-
VBR service does not
require tightly
constrained delay or
delay variation, and is
intended for non-real-
time applications.
l The UBR+ service is
supplementary to the
UBR service and is
intended for
applications that
require assured
minimum cell rate,
which is indicated by
the minimum cell rate
(MCR) parameter. The
other characteristics of
the UBR+ service are
the same as the
corresponding
characteristics of the
UBR service.
Traffic Type - - For the mapping
relationships between
ATM service types, ATM
traffic type descriptors,
and traffic parameters, see
Table A-90. ATM
policies are configured
based on these mapping
relationships.
Max. Cell Burst Size
(cell)
2 to 200000 -
Cell Delay Variation
Tolerance (0.1us)
7 to 13300000 -
Discard Traffic Frame Enabled
Disabled
Disabled Specifies the frame
discarding mark in ATM
policies. This parameter is
effective to AAL5 traffic.
A-507
UPC/NPC Enabled
Disabled
Disabled l UPC is user-side
parameter control and
NPC is network-side
parameter control.
l After UPC/NPC is
enabled, the cells with
a frame discarding
mark will be discarded
in network congestion.

Table A-90 Mapping relationship between ATM service types, ATM traffic types, and traffic parameters
ATM
Service
Type
ATM Traffic Type
Descriptor
Traffic
Parameter 1
Traffic
Parameter 2
Traffic
Parameter 3
Traffic
Parameter 4
UBR NoTrafficDescriptor - - - -
NoClpTaggingNoScr Clp01Pcr CDVT - -
CBR ClpTransparentNoScr Clp01Pcr CDVT - -
ClpNoTaggingNoScr Clp01Pcr Clp0Pcr - -
ClpTaggingNoScr Clp01Pcr Clp0Pcr - -
nrtVBR NoClpScr Clp01Pcr Clp01Scr MBS -
ClpNoTaggingScr Clp01Pcr Clp0Scr MBS -
ClpTaggingScr Clp01Pcr Clp0Scr MBS -
rtVBR ClpTransparentScr Clp01Pcr Clp01Scr MBS CDVT
NoClpScrCdvt Clp01Pcr Clp01Scr MBS CDVT
ClpNoTaggingScrCdvt Clp01Pcr Clp0Scr MBS CDVT
ClpTaggingScrCdvt Clp01Pcr Clp0Scr MBS CDVT
UBR+ atmnotrafficdescriptormcr Clp01Mcr - - -
atmnoclpmcr Clp01Pcr Clp01Mcr - -
atmnoclpmcrcdvt Clp01Pcr Clp01Mcr CDVT -

Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A.9.3.10 Parameter Description: ATM Service Management
This topic describes the parameters that are related to ATM service management.
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > ATM
Service ID - - Displays the service ID.
Service Name - - Displays or specifies the
service name.
Service Type - - Displays the ATM service
type.
status of the ATM service.

Connection Parameters
Connection ID - - Displays the connection
ID of the ATM service.
Connection Name - - Displays or specifies the
connection name of the
ATM service.
Source Port - - Displays the source port of
the ATM service.
that carries ATM PWE3
services, if any.
Sink Port - - Displays the sink board of
the ATM service.
Source VPI - - Displays the VPI of the
source port of the ATM
service.
Source VCI - - Displays the VCI of the
service.
A-509
Sink VPI - - Displays the VPI of the
sink port of the ATM
service.
Sink VCI - - Displays the VCI of the
service.
Uplink Policy - - Displays the QoS policy of
the uplink ATM
connection.
Down link Policy - - Displays the QoS policy of
the downlink ATM
connection.

Parameters for Port Attributes
Port - - Displays the port of the
ATM IMA service.
Port Type - - Displays the port type of
the ATM IMA service.
Max. VPI - - Displays the maximum
VPI.
Max. VCI - - Displays the maximum
VCI.
VCC-Supported VPI
Count
- - Displays the count of VPIs
that are used for VC
exchange.

Parameters for Bound Paths
Level - - Displays the level of
bound paths.
Bound Paths - - Displays the bound paths.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Number of Bound Paths - - Displays the number of
bound paths.
IMA Group Status - - Displays the status of the
IMA group.

Parameters of PWs
Tab Parameter Value Range Default Value Description
General
Attributes
Work Status - - Displays the working
status of a PW.
- - Displays whether a PW
is enabled.
PW Signaling Type - - Displays the PW
signaling type.
NOTE
static PWs only.
PW Type - - l Displays the
configured PW type.
l This parameter
corresponds to the
connection type.
The encapsulation
type can be 1:1 or N:
1 if the connection
type is PVP or PVC.
PW Direction - - Displays the direction
of the PW.
PW Encapsulation
Type
- - Displays the
encapsulation type of
the packets on the PW.
NOTE
MPLS only.
- - Displays the configured
PW Ingress label.
PW Outgoing
Label / Sink Port
- - Displays the configured
PW Egress label.
Peer LSR ID - - Displays the LSR ID of
the destination.
A-511
Tunnel Type - - Displays the type of the
tunnel.
Ingress Tunnel No - - Displays the tunnel ID
of the ingress tunnel.
Egress Tunnel No - - Displays the tunnel ID
of the egress tunnel.
Local Operating
Status
- - Displays the local
running status of PW.
Remote Operating
Status
- - Displays the remote
running status of PW.
Overall Operating
Status
- - Displays the
comprehensive
working status of the
PW.
Tunnel for Auto
Selection
- - Displays the tunnel that
is automatically
selected.
QoS PW ID - - Displays the PW ID.
Direction - - Displays the direction
of the PW.
Bandwidth Limit - - Displays or specifies
whether the bandwidth
limit is enabled.
used to limit the
bandwidth of one or
more PWs, or the
bandwidth of one or
more ATM PWE3
services, in an
MPLS tunnel. (One
ATM PWE3 service
corresponds to one
PW.)
l An ATM PWE3
service corresponds
to a PW. Therefore,
this function can
also limit the
bandwidth of ATM
PWE3 services in an
MPLS tunnel.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
CIR (Kbit/s) - - Displays or specifies
the committed
information rate.
CBS (kbyte) - - Displays or specifies
the excess burst size of
the PW.
PIR (kbit/s) - - Displays or specifies
the peak information
rate.
PBS (kbyte) - - Displays or specifies
the maximum excess
burst size of the PW.
EXP - - The OptiX RTN 950
parameter.
Policy - - The OptiX RTN 950
parameter.
Advanced
Attributes
No Use
- Displays or specifies
whether to use the
control word. In the
MPLS packet switching
network, the control
word is used to transmit
packet information.
A-513
Control Channel
Type
CW
None
Alert Label
- l Displays or
specifies the mode
of PW connectivity
check.
l The value None
indicates that the
control word is not
supported. That is,
the PW connectivity
check is not
supported.
l The value CW
indicates that the
control word is
supported.
l The value Alert
Label indicates
VCCV packets in
Alert Label
encapsulation
mode.
VCCV Verification
Mode
Ping
None
- l Displays or
specifies the VCCV
verification mode.
The VCCV
verification is used
for PW connectivity
check.
l If the VCCV-ping
function is required,
do not set VCCV
Verification Mode
of PWs to None.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Max. Concatenated
Cell Count
1 to 31 - l Displays or
specifies the
maximum number
of concatenated
cells.
l If the value 1 is
assumed, only one
ATM cell is
encapsulated in one
from 2 to 31 is
assumed, a
maximum of 2 to 31
ATM cells are
encapsulated into
one packet.
Packet Loading
Time (us)
100 to 50000 - l Displays or
specifies the packet
loading time. Once
the packet loading
time expires, the
packet is sent out
even if the
concatenated cells
are less than the
maximum.
l If Max.
Concatenated Cell
Count assumes the
value 1, this
parameter is
ineffective. That is,
the packet will be
sent out once the cell
is loaded.

Parameters for CoS Mapping
A-515
CoS Mapping - - Specifies the policy for
mapping different ATM
service levels to CoS
priorities. By setting this
parameter, different
quality measures are
provided for different
ATM services.

NOTE
created.
working PW.
protection PW.
mode.
Disabled
the PW protection
group.
Enabling Status to
Disabled. After the
ends, set Enabling
Status to Enabled.
PW fails.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950
switching.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Revertive
original working PW
after the fault is
rectified.
are switched to the
original working PW
and the value Non-
revertive indicates
switched to the
recommended.
Time(min)
the WTR time of the
protection group.
original working PW
switched to the
l This parameter is
available only when
Restoration Mode is
Revertive.
(100ms)
protection group.
does not trigger
switching once it
expires, and then
detects whether any
faults persist, the
otherwise, no
A-517
group.
group.

A.9.3.11 Parameter Description: ATM Service Management_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are related to creation of ATM services.
Navigation Path
2. Click New.
Service ID 1 to 4294967295 - Specifies the service ID.
Service Name - - Specifies the service
name.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Service Type UNIs-NNI
UNI-UNI
UNIs-NNI l Specifies the type of
the ATM service.
l UNIs-NNI: This value
applies to ATM PWE3
services. The attributes
in Connection, PW,
and CoS Mapping
l UNI-UNI: This value
applies to common
ATM services. Only
the attributes in
Connection need to be
configured.
Connection Type PVC
PVP
Transparent
PVC Specifies the connection
type of the ATM service.
For common ATM
services (UNI-UNI):
l PVP: Only the VPIs of
the source and sink are
exchanged.
l PVC: The VPIs and
VCIs of the source and
sink are exchanged.
For ATM PWE3 services
(UNIs-NNI):
l PVP: This value
applies to the N-to-1/1-
to-1 VPC
encapsulation mode.
l PVC: This value
applies to the N-to-1/1-
to-1 VCC
encapsulation mode.
For transparently
transmitted ATM
services, set Connection
Type to Transparent.
A-519
PW APS
No Protection l Specifies the
protection mode of the
PW. This parameter is
available only when
Service Type is UNIs-
NNI.
according to the

Connection Parameters
Connection Name - - Specifies the name of the
ATM connection.
Source Board - - Specifies the source board
of the ATM service.
Source Port - - Specifies the source port
of the ATM service.
Source VPI(eg.35,36-39) UNI: 0 to 255
NNI: 0 to 4095
- Specifies the VPI of the
service.
Source VCI(eg.35,36-39) 32 to 65535 - Specifies the VCI of the
service.
PW ID 1 to 4294967295 - Specifies the ID of the PW
Sink Board - - Specifies the sink board of
the ATM service.
Sink Port - - Specifies the sink board of
the ATM service.
NOTE
This parameter does not
need to be set if Service
Type is UNIs-NNI. This
parameter needs to be set if
Service Type is UNI-UNI
and the value must be
different from that of the
source board.
Sink VPI(eg.35,36-39) UNI: 0 to 255
NNI: 0 to 4095
- Specifies the VPI of the
service.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Sink VCI(eg.35,36-39) 32 to 65535 - Specifies the VCI of the
service.
Uplink Policy - - Specifies the QoS policy
of the uplink ATM
connection.
Down link Policy - - Specifies the QoS policy
of the downlink ATM
connection.

Parameters of PWs
NOTE
If the parameter Protection Type of PWs is set to PW APS, all the parameters of working and protection PWs
need to be configured. This section considers the parameters of the working PW as an example.
Working Status - - Displays the working
status of the PW.
NOTE
This parameter is available
only after the PW
parameters are configured.
Enable Status - - Displays the enabling
status of the PW.
NOTE
This parameter is available
only after the PW
parameters are configured.
PW Signaling Type Static Static Labels for static PWs need
to be manually assigned.
A-521
PW Type The ATM connection type
is PVC:
l ATM n-to-one VCC
cell transport
l ATM one-to-one VCC
Cell Mode
The ATM connection type
is PVP:
l ATM n-to-one VPC
cell transport
l ATM one-to-one VPC
Cell Mode
is PVC:
ATM n-to-one VCC cell
transport
is PVP:
ATM n-to-one VPC cell
transport
l Specifies the type of
the PW.
l In the case of ATM
1_to_1 encapsulation,
one PW carries one
VPC or VCC.
l In the case of ATM
n_to_1 encapsulation,
one PW carries one or
more VPCs or VCCs.
PW Direction Bidirectional Bidirectional Displays the direction of
the PW.
PW Encapsulation Type MPLS MPLS Displays the
packets on the PW.
PW Ingress Label /
Source Port
label.
PW Egress Label / Sink
Port
label.
Tunnel Selection Mode Manually Manually Displays the method to
select tunnels.
PW will fail.

Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
QoS Parameters
bandwidth limit is
enabled.
used to limit the
bandwidth of one or
more PWs, or the
bandwidth of one or
more ATM PWE3
services, in an MPLS
tunnel. (One ATM
PWE3 service
corresponds to one
PW.)
l An ATM PWE3
PWE3 services in an
MPLS tunnel.
CIR (Kbit/s) - - Specifies the committed
the PW.
CBS (kbyte) - - Specifies the excess burst
size of the PW.
PIR (kbit/s) - - Specifies the peak
the PW.
PBS (kbyte) - - Specifies the maximum
excess burst size of the
PW.
A-523

Parameters of Advanced Attributes
No Use
Must Use l Specifies whether to
use the control word.
In the MPLS packet
switching network, the
transmit packet
information.
l Set Control Word to
Must Use if PW
Type is ATM 1:1.
Control Channel Type CW
None
Alert Label
PW connectivity
check.
l The value None
indicates that the
control word is not
PW connectivity check
is not supported.
l The value CW
indicates that the
control word is
supported.
l The value Alert
Label indicates VCCV
packets in Alert
Label encapsulation
mode.
VCCV Verification
Mode
Ping
None
used for PW
connectivity check.
this parameter to
None.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Max. Concatenated Cell
Count
maximum number of
concatenated cells.
l If the value 1 is
assumed, only one
ATM cell is
encapsulated in one
from 2 to 31 is
assumed, a maximum
of 2 to 31 ATM cells
are encapsulated into
one packet.
Packet Loading Time
(us)
100 to 50000 1000 l Specifies the packet
loading time. Once the
packet loading time
expires, the packet is
sent out even if the
concatenated cells are
less than the
maximum.
l If Max. Concatenated
Cell Count assumes
the value 1, this
parameter is
ineffective. That is, the
packet will be sent out
once the cell is loaded.

NOTE
PW APS.
type.
group ID.
A-525
Enabled
status of the PW
protection group.
Enabling Status to
Disabled. After the
ends, set Enabling
Status to Enabled.
mode.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950
mode.
working PW.
protection PW.
PW fails.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 950
supports dual-ended
switching.
Revertive
are switched to the
original working PW
and the value Non-
revertive indicates
switched to the
recommended.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Time(min)
group.
original working PW
switched to the
l This parameter is
available only when
Restoration Mode is
Revertive.
recommended.
(100ms)
group.
does not trigger
switching once it
expires, and then
detects whether any
faults persist, the
otherwise, no
recommended.
mode of the PW APS
protection group.

OAM Parameters
NOTE
A-527
status of PW OAM.
Manual
l Manual: The
connectivity check
by the user.
l Auto-Sensing: The
connectivity check
at the interval of
receiving PW OAM
packets.
set to Manual, you
need to set the PW
OAM detection
and transmitted.
l The value Auto-
Sensing is
recommended.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
FFD
fixed interval.
the user.
this parameter
transmitted.
set to Manual, this
PW OAM detection
and transmitted.
l The value FFD is
assumed for PW APS
and the value CV is
assumed for
continuous
PWs.
(ms)
3.3
10
20
50
100
200
500
detection packets.
l This parameter is
configurable when
Detection Packet
Type is FFD and
assumes the fixed
value of 1000 when
Detection Packet
Type is CV.
3.3 for PW APS.
received.
received.

A-529
NOTE
mode.
the slave PW APS
protection group
simultaneously.
protection pair.
protection pair.

Parameters for CoS Mapping
that carries service.
CoS Mapping - - Specifies the policy for
mapping different ATM
service levels to CoS
priorities. By setting this
parameter, different
quality measures are
provided for different
ATM services.

A.9.3.12 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_Segment and End
Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are related to segment end attributes of ATM OAM.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Navigation Path
OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Segment End Attributes tab.
Source - - Displays the source node
of the ATM/IMA service.
Sink - - Displays the sink node of
the ATM/IMA service.
A-531
Connection Direction Source
Sink
- Displays the direction of
the ATM connection.
l Source: indicates the
forward direction.
For common ATM
services (UNI-
UNI), Source
indicates the
direction from the
source end to the
sink end of the
ATM connection.
For ATM PWE3
services (UNI-
NNI), Source
indicates the
direction from the
UNI port side to the
MPLS interface
side.
l Sink: indicates the
backward direction.
For common ATM
services (UNI-
UNI), Sink
indicates the
direction from the
sink end to the
source end of the
ATM connection.
For ATM PWE3
services (UNI-
NNI), Sink
indicates the
direction from the
MPLS interface
side to the UNI port
side.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Segment and End
Attribute
Non segment and
Endpoint
Segment point
Endpoint
Segment and Endpoint
Non segment and
Endpoint
Specifies the segment and
end attributes of the source
and sink of the ATM
connection.
l Non segment and
endpoint: intermediate
point, which refers to
the OAM node
between two segment
points or two end
points. Therefore,
intermediate points
can be further
classified into
intermediate points
between segment
points, and
intermediate points
between end points.
Upon detecting a
fault, an
intermediate point
reports the
corresponding
alarms and inserts
segment AIS cells
and end AIS cells to
the downstream.
Afterwards, the
intermediate point
periodically sends
these cells.
An intermediate
point does not catch
any AIS/RDI cells.
l Segment point: an end
point of a segment.
One ATM link consists
of multiple segments.
Upon detecting a
fault, a segment
point reports the
corresponding
alarms and inserts
end AIS cells to the
downstream.
Afterwards, the
segment point
A-533
periodically sends
these cells.
A segment point
catches segment
AIS/RDI cells
only.
l End point: an end point
of an ATM link. It is
usually an edge point
on the ATM network.
Upon detecting a
fault, an end point
reports the
corresponding
alarms but does not
insert any AIS
cells.
An end point
catches end AIS/
RDI cells only.
l Segment and endpoint:
a segment-end point,
or an edge point of a
segment and an end.
Upon detecting a
fault, a segment-
end point reports
the corresponding
alarms but does not
insert any AIS
cells.
A segment-end
point catches the
AIS/RDI cells of a
segment and an
end.

A.9.3.13 Parameter Description: ATM OMA Management_CC Activation Status
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the CC activation status of ATM OAM.
Navigation Path
2. Click the CC Activation Status tab.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Sink
- Specifies the connection
direction.
forward direction.
For common ATM
services (UNI-
UNI), Source
indicates the
direction from the
source end to the
sink end of the
ATM connection.
For ATM PWE3
services (UNI-
NNI), Source
indicates the
direction from the
MPLS interface
side.
backward direction.
For common ATM
services (UNI-
UNI), Sink
indicates the
direction from the
sink end to the
source end of the
ATM connection.
For ATM PWE3
services (UNI-
NNI), Sink
indicates the
direction from the
MPLS interface
side.
A-535
Segment and End
Attribute
- - Specifies the segment and
end attributes of nodes.
l Segment point: an end
point of a segment.
One ATM link consists
of multiple segments.
Segment CC cells are
terminated at segment
points.
l End point: an end point
of an ATM link. It is
usually an edge point
on an ATM network.
End-to-end CC cells
are terminated at end
points.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
CC Activate Flag Deactivate
Source activate
Sink activate
Source + sink activate
- l Specifies the CC
activation flag.
l Deactivate: This node
does not transmit or
receive CC cells.
l Source activate: This
point transmits but
does not receive CC
cells.
l Sink activate: This
point receives but does
not transmit CC cells.
If this point does not
receive any service
cells or CC cells within
a time interval of 3.5
(0.5) seconds, it will
report the LOC alarm
and transmit AIS cells
in the forward
direction.
l Source + sink activate:
This node transmits
and receives CC cells.
If this point does not
receive any service
cells or CC cells within
a time interval of 3.5
(0.5) seconds, it will
report the LOC alarm
and transmit AIS cells
in the forward
direction.
l Once the node receives
any CC cells or service
cells, the LOC alarm
will be cleared.

A.9.3.14 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_Remote End Loopback
Status
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the remote end loopback status of ATM
OAM.
A-537
Navigation Path
2. Click the Remote Loopback Test tab.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Sink
- Displays the direction of
the ATM connection.
forward direction.
For common ATM
services (UNI-
UNI), Source
indicates the
direction from the
source end to the
sink end of the
ATM connection.
For ATM PWE3
services (UNI-
NNI), Source
indicates the
direction from the
MPLS interface
side.
backward direction.
For common ATM
services (UNI-
UNI), Sink
indicates the
direction from the
sink end to the
source end of the
ATM connection.
For ATM PWE3
services (UNI-
NNI), Sink
indicates the
direction from the
MPLS interface
side.
A-539
Segment and End
Attribute
- - Specifies the segment and
end attribute.
l Segment LB cells are
looped back only at a
Segment point,
Segment and
Endpoint, or Non
segment and
Endpoint.
l End-to-end LB cells
are looped back only at
an Endpoint or
Segment and
Endpoint.
Loopback Point NE - - l Specifies the NE
where the loopback
point is located.
l Before an end-to-end
LB test, you need to set
end points in the test
domain. After the test,
remove the end points.
l Before a segment-to-
segment LB test, you
need to set segment
points in the test
domain. After the test,
remove the segment
points.
Test Result - - Displays whether the
loopback command is
successfully issued.

A.9.3.15 Parameter Description: ATM OAM Management_LLID
This topic describes the parameters that are related to LLID configuration.
Navigation Path
2. Click the LLID tab.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Country Code
(Hexadecimal Code)
- 00 00 Displays or specifies the
country code of the ATM
service. The value is 2
bytes in length.
Network Code
(Hexadecimal Code)
- 00 01 Displays or specifies the
network code of the ATM
service. The value is 2
bytes in length.
NE Code (Hexadecimal
Code)
- 00 30 00 04 00 00 00 00 00
00 00
l Displays or specifies
the NE code of the
ATM service. The
value is 11 bytes in
length.
l The default NE code
can be used if it is
unique on the network.
l NE code and NE ID are
associated. Therefore,
each NE on the
network has a unique
NE code.

A.10 Clock Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to clocks.
A.10.1 Physical Clock Parameters
This topic describes physical clock parameters.
A.10.2 CES ACR Clock Parameters
This topic describes CES ACR clock parameters.
A.10.3 Parameter Description: Auxiliary Ports
This topic describes parameters that are used for configuring an external time port as an RS-485
monitoring port.
A.10.1 Physical Clock Parameters
This topic describes physical clock parameters.
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the priority table of a clock source.
A.10.1.2 Parameter Description: Priority Table for the PLL Clock Source of the External Clock
Port
A-541
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the priority table for the phase-locked loop
(PLL) clock source of the external clock port.
A.10.1.3 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Subnet
This topic describes the parameters that are related to a clock subnet.
A.10.1.4 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Quality
This topic describes the parameters that are related clock quality.
A.10.1.5 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_SSM Output Control
This topic describes the parameters that are related to SSM output control.
A.10.1.6 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_Clock ID Enabling Status
This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the clock ID function.
A.10.1.7 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Restoration Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to clock source restoration.
A.10.1.8 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Switching
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the switching status of a clock source.
A.10.1.9 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Switching Conditions
This section describes the parameters that are related to the switching conditions of clock sources.
A.10.1.10 Parameter Description: Output Phase-Locked Source of the External Clock Source
This topic describes the parameters of the output phase-locked source of the external clock
source.
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the clock synchronization status.
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the priority table of a clock source.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock >
Physical Clock > Clock Source Priority.
2. Click the System Clock Source Priority List tab.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameters
Clock Source - - l External clock source
1 indicates the external
clock source at the
CLK or TIME1 port on
the CST or CSH board
in physical slot 7.
External clock source
2 indicates the external
clock source at the
CLK or TIME1 port on
the CST or CSH board
in physical slot 8.
l The internal clock
source is always at the
lowest priority and
indicates that the NE
works in the free-run
mode.
l The clock sources and
the corresponding
clock source priority
levels are determined
according to the clock
synchronization
schemes.
External Clock Source
Mode
2Mbit/s
2MHz
2Mbit/s l This parameter
indicates the type of
the external clock
source signal.
according to the
external clock signal.
In normal cases, the
external clock signal is
a 2 Mbit/s signal.
A-543
Synchronous Status Byte SA4 to SA8 SA4 l This parameter is valid
only when External
Clock Source Mode is
set to 2Mbit/s.
l This parameter
indicates which bit of
the TS0 in odd frames
of the external clock
signal is used to
transmit the SSM.
to be set only when the
SSM or extended SSM
is enabled. In normal
cases, the external
clock sources use the
SA4 to transmit the
SSM.
Clock Source Priority
Sequence (Highest:1)
- - Displays the priority
sequence of clock sources.
clock source priority.

A.10.1.2 Parameter Description: Priority Table for the PLL Clock Source of the
External Clock Port
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the priority table for the phase-locked loop
(PLL) clock source of the external clock port.
Navigation Path
1. In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and then choose Configuration >
Clock > Physical Clock > Clock Source Priority from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Priority for PLL Clock Sources of 1st External Output tab.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameters for configuring the priority table for the PLL clock source of the external
clock port
Clock Source - Internal Clock Source l When the PLL clock
source of the external
clock port extracts the
system clock (namely,
the local clock of the
NE), Clock Source
Internal Clock
Source. In this case,
no manual
configuration is
required.
l When the PLL clock
source of the external
clock port needs to
extract the clock from
an SDH line board,
clock from a radio link,
clock from a PDH
tributary board, or
synchronous Ethernet
clock, set Clock
Source to the
corresponding clock
source according to the
network planning
information.
Current Status - - Displays the valid status
of clock sources.
A-545
Lock Status - - l The PLL clock source
of the external clock
port extracts only an
unlocked clock source.
l If a clock source is in
locked state, the PLL
clock source of the
external clock port
does not extract the
clock source until the
clock source is
changed from the
locked state to the
unlocked state.
l The internal clock
source should not be in
locked state.
Clock Source Priority
(Highest: 1)
- - Displays the priority level
of a clock source. 1 is the
highest priority.

A.10.1.3 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Subnet
This topic describes the parameters that are related to a clock subnet.
Navigation Path
Physical Clock > Clock Subnet Configuration.
2. Click the Clock Subnet tab.
Parameters for Setting a Clock Subnet
Affiliated Subnet - - The OptiX RTN 950 does
not support this
parameter.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Protection Status Start Extended SSM
Protocol
Start Standard SSM
Protocol
Stop SSM Protocol
Stop SSM Protocol l The SSM protocol is a
scheme used for
synchronous
management on an
SDH network and
indicates that the SSM
is passed by the lower
four bits of the S1 byte
and can be exchanged
between the nodes.
The SSM protocol
ensures that the
equipment
automatically selects
the clock source of the
highest quality and
highest priority, thus
preventing mutual
clock tracing.
l After the standard
SSM protocol is
started, the NE first
performs the
on the clock source
quality level
information provided
by the S1 byte. If the
quality level of the
clock source is the
same, the NE then
performs the
priority table. That is,
the NE selects an
unlocked clock source
that is of the highest
quality and highest
priority from all the
current available clock
sources as the clock
source to be
synchronized and
traced by the local
station.
l If the SSM protocol is
stopped, it indicates
A-547
that the S1 byte is not
used. The NE selects
and switches a clock
source only according
to the sequence
specified in the
priority table. The
clock source of the
highest priority is used
as the clock source to
be traced.
l After the SSM
protocol is stopped,
each NE performs the
on the clock according
to the preset priority
table of the clock
source only when the
clock source of a
higher priority is lost.
Clock Source - - This parameter indicates
the clock source that is
configured for an NE. In
Clock Source Priority,
you can set whether to add
or delete a clock source.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Clock Source ID (None)
1 to 15
(None) l This parameter is valid
only when the
extended SSM
protocol is started.
l Clock source IDs are
allocated for the
following clock
sources only:
External clock
source
Internal clock
source of the node
that accesses the
external clock
sources
Internal clock
source of the joint
node of a ring and a
chain or the joint
node of two rings
Line clock source
that enters the ring
when the intra-ring
line clock source is
configured at the
joint node of a ring
and a chain or the
joint node of two
rings

A.10.1.4 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Quality
This topic describes the parameters that are related clock quality.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Received Quality tab.
A-549
Parameters for Clock Source Quality
the name of the
configured clock source.
In Clock Source
Priority, you can set
whether to add or delete a
clock source.
Configured Quality Unknown
Synchronization Quality
G.811 Clock Signal
G.812 Transit Clock
Signal
G.812 Local Clock Signal
G.813 SDH Equipment
Timing Source (SETS)
Signal
Do Not Use For
Synchronization
Automatic Extraction
Automatic Extraction This parameter specifies
the quality level that is
configured for the clock
source. This function is
required only in a special
scenario or in a test.
Generally, this parameter
need not be set.
Received Quality - - This parameter indicates
the clock source quality
signal received by the NE.
The NE extracts the clock
source quality signal from
the S1 byte of each clock
source.

Parameters for Manual Setting of 0 Quality Level
the name of the NE.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Quality Level 0 Do Not Use For
Synchronization
G.811 Reference Clock
Between G.811 Reference
Clock and G.812 Transit
Clock
G.812 Transit Clock
Between G.812 Transit
Clock and G.812 Local
Clock
G.812 Local Clock
Between G.812 Local
Clock and synchronous
equipment timing source
(SETS)
SETS Clock
Between synchronous
equipment timing source
(SETS) and quality
unavailable
Do Not Use For
Synchronization
This parameter specifies
the clock quality whose
level is manually set to
zero.
l Do Not Use For
Synchronization: the
notification
information in the
reverse direction of the
selected
synchronization clock
source to avoid direct
mutual locking of
adjacent NEs.
l G.811 Reference
Clock: the clock signal
specified in ITU-T G.
811.
l Between G.811
Reference Clock and
G.812 Transit Clock:
lower than the quality
level of the clock
signal specified in
ITU-T G.811 but
higher than the quality
level of the transit
exchange clock signal
812.
l G.812 Transit Clock:
the transit exchange
clock signal specified
in ITU-T G.812.
l Between G.812
Transit Clock and G.
812 Local Clock:
level of the transit
exchange clock signal
812 but higher than the
quality level of the
local exchange clock
signal specified in
ITU-T G.812.
l G.812 Local Clock:
the local exchange
A-551
in ITU-T G.812.
l Between G.812 Local
Clock and
synchronous
equipment timing
source (SETS): lower
than the quality level
of the local exchange
in ITU-T G.812 but
level of the clock
signal of the SETS.
l SETS Clock: the clock
signal of the SETS.
l Between synchronous
equipment timing
source (SETS) and
quality unavailable:
level of the clock
signal of the SETS but
level unavailable in the
synchronous timing
source.

A.10.1.5 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_SSM Output Control
This topic describes the parameters that are related to SSM output control.
Navigation Path
2. Click the SSM Output tab.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Parameters
Line Port - - l This parameter
indicates the name of
the line clock port.
l Line Port: indicates
the SSM quality
information output
port of the current
available line clock
source and the external
clock source. This
output port can
transmit the quality
information of the
clock source by
outputting the S1 byte
to the downstream NE.
Output S1 Byte Info Enabled
Disabled
Enabled l Output S1 Byte Info
is valid only when the
SSM protocol or the
extended SSM
l Output S1 Byte Info
indicates whether the
SSM is output at the
line port.
l When the line port is
connected to an NE in
the same clock subnet,
set Output S1 Byte
Info to Enabled.
Otherwise, set this
parameter to
Disabled.

A.10.1.6 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_Clock ID Enabling Status
This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the clock ID function.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Clock ID Output tab.
A-553
Parameters
Line Port - - l This parameter
indicates the name of
the line clock port.
l Line Port: indicates
the SSM quality
information output
port of the current
available line clock
source and the external
clock source. This
output port can
transmit the quality
information of the
clock source by
outputting the S1 byte
to the downstream NE.
Output Clock ID Enabled
Disabled
Enabled l Output Clock ID is
valid only when the
extended SSM
l Output Clock ID
indicates whether the
clock source ID is
output at the line port.
l If the line ports are
connected to the NEs
in the same clock
subnet and if the
extended SSM
protocol is started on
the opposite NE,
Output Clock ID is
set to Enabled.
Otherwise, this
parameter is set to
Disabled.

A.10.1.7 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Restoration
Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to clock source restoration.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Navigation Path
Clock Source Switching.
2. Click the Clock Source Reversion tab.
Parameters
the name of the NE.
Higher Priority Clock
Source Reversion
Auto-Revertive
Non-Revertive
Auto-Revertive l When the quality of a
higher-priority clock
source degrades, the
NE automatically
switches the clock
source to a lower-
priority clock source.
If this parameter is set
to Auto-Revertive,
the NE automatically
switches the clock
source to the higher-
priority clock source
when this higher-
priority clock source
restores. If this
parameter is set to
Non-Revertive, the
NE does not
automatically switch
the clock source to the
source when this
source restores.
l Correct setting of
Clock Source
Switching Condition
ensures the reliability
of the clock source
switching. To improve
the clock quality,
select Auto-
Revertive. Otherwise,
to prevent jitter of the
clock, generally, it is
Non-Revertive.
A-555
Clock Source WTR
Time(min.)
specifies the duration
from the time when the
clock source
restoration is detected
to the time when the
clock source switching
is triggered. This
parameter is used to
avoid frequent
switching of the clock
source due to
instability of the clock
source state within a
short time.
only when Higher
Priority Clock
Source Reversion is
set to Auto-
Revertive.

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the switching status of a clock source.
Navigation Path
Physical Clock > Clock Source Switching.
2. Click the Clock Source Switching tab.
Parameters
the name of the clock
source.
Current Status Valid
Invalid
whether the clock source
is valid.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Lock Status Lock
Unlock
- l This parameter
specifies the locking
status of the clock
source in the priority
table.
l Lock: A clock source
in the priority table is
in the locked state. The
clock source in the
locked state cannot be
switched.
l Unlock: A clock
source in the priority
table is in the unlocked
state. The clock source
in the unlocked state
can be switched.
Switching Source - - This parameter indicates
the clock source to be
traced by the NE after the
switching.
Switching Status Normal
Manual Switching
Forced Switching
the switching status of the
current clock source.

Conditions
This section describes the parameters that are related to the switching conditions of clock sources.
Navigation Path
Clock > Clock Source Switching from the Function Tree.
2. Click the Clock Source Switching Conditions tab.
Parameters
NE Name - - Displays the name of the
NE.
Clock Source - - Displays the clock source.
A-557
AIS Alarm Yes
No
No l The default value is
recommended.
set to Yes, it indicates
that clock source
switching occurs if the
clock source reports
the AIS alarm.
set to No, it indicates
that no clock source
the AIS alarm.
B1 BER Threshold-
Crossing
- - The parameter is invalid.
RLOS,RLOF and OOF/
RLOC Alarms
Yes Yes This parameter indicates
that clock switching
occurs when the clock
source reports the RLOS,
RLOF, OOF, or LOC
alarm.
CV Threshold-Crossing - - The parameter is invalid.
CV Threshold - - The parameter is invalid.
B2-EXC Alarm Yes
No
No l The default value is
recommended.
set to Yes, it indicates
that clock source
the B2-EXC alarm.
set to No, it indicates
that no clock source
the B2-EXC alarm.

A.10.1.10 Parameter Description: Output Phase-Locked Source of the External
Clock Source
This topic describes the parameters of the output phase-locked source of the external clock
source.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock >
Physical Clock > Phase-Locked Source Output by External Clock.
Parameters
2M Phase-Locked
Source Number
External Clock Source 1
External Clock Source 2
the number of the external
clock source output of the
NE.
External Clock Output
Mode
2Mbit/s
2MHz
2Mbit/s l This parameter
specifies the mode of
the output clock.
to be set according to
the requirements of the
interconnected
equipment. Generally,
the output external
clock signal is a 2
Mbit/s signal.
External Clock Output
Timeslot
SA4 to SA8
ALL
ALL l This parameter is valid
only when External
Clock Output Mode
is set to 2Mbit/s.
l This parameter
indicates which bit of
the TS0 in odd frames
of the output clock
signal is used to
transmit the SSM.
to ALL, it indicates
that all the bits of the
TS0 are used to
transmit the SSM.
you use the default
value.
A-559
External Source Output
Threshold
Threshold Disabled
Not Inferior to G.813
SETS Signal
Local Signal
Transit Clock Signal
Clock Signal
Threshold Disabled l This parameter
specifies the lowest
quality of the output
clock. If the clock
quality is lower than
the value of this
parameter, it indicates
that the external clock
source does not output
any clock signal.
to Threshold
Disabled, it indicates
that the external clock
source always outputs
the clock signal.
you use the default
value.
2M Phase-Locked
Source Failure
Condition
No Failure Condition
AIS
LOF
AIS OR LOF
No Failure Condition l This parameter
specifies the failure
condition of the 2
Mbit/s phase-locked
clock source.
you use the default
value.
2M Phase-Locked
Source Failure Action
Shut Down Output
2M Output S1 Byte
Unavailable
Send AIS
Shut Down Output l This parameter is valid
only when 2M Phase-
Locked Source
Failure Condition is
not set to No Failure
Condition.
l This parameter
specifies the operation
of the 2 Mbit/s phase-
locked loop (PLL)
when the 2 Mbit/s
phase-locked clock
source meets the
failure conditions.
you use the default
value.

Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the clock synchronization status.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock >
Physical Clock > Clock Synchronization Status.
Parameters
the name of the NE.
NE Clock Mode - - This parameter indicates
the working mode of the
NE clock.
S1 Byte Synchronization
Quality Info
the synchronization
quality information of the
S1 byte.
S1 Byte Clock
Synchronous Source
the clock synchronization
source of the S1 byte.
Synchronous Source - - This parameter indicates
the synchronization
source.
A-561
Data Output Method in
Holdover Mode
Normal Data Output
Keep the Latest Data
Normal Data Output l When all the reference
timing signals are lost,
the slave clock
changes to the
holdover mode. At this
time, the slave clock
works based on the
latest frequency
information stored
before the reference
timing signals are lost.
Then, the frequency of
the oscillator drifts
slowly to ensure that
the offset between the
frequency of the slave
clock and the reference
frequency is very
small. As a result, the
impact caused by the
drift is limited within
the specified
requirement.
l Normal Data Output:
The slave clock works
based on the latest
frequency information
stored before the
reference timing
signals are lost, and the
holdover duration
depends on the size of
the phase-locked clock
register on the
equipment. The
holdover duration can
be up to 24 hours.
l Keep the Latest Data:
The slave clock works
in holdover mode all
the time based on the
latest frequency
information stored
before the reference
timing signals are lost.

A.10.2 CES ACR Clock Parameters
This topic describes CES ACR clock parameters.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A.10.2.1 Parameter Description: ACR Clock Source
This topic describes parameters that are related to the ACR clock source.
A.10.2.2 Parameter Description: Clock Domain
This topic describes parameters that are related to clock domains.
A.10.2.3 Parameter Description: Clock Domain_Creation
This topic describes the parameters for creating a clock domain.
A.10.2.1 Parameter Description: ACR Clock Source
This topic describes parameters that are related to the ACR clock source.
Navigation Path
Clock > ACR Clock from the Function Tree.
ACR Clock Source - - Identifies the ACR clock
domain.
CES Service - - This parameter displays or
specifies the CES service
that the master ACR clock
source uses.
Current CES Service - - This parameter displays
the CES service from
which the current ACR
clock source is obtained.

A.10.2.2 Parameter Description: Clock Domain
This topic describes parameters that are related to clock domains.
Navigation Path
Clock > Clock Domain from the Function Tree.
Clock Domain - - Displays the clock
domain.
A-563
Clock Domain Board - - Displays the board where
the clock domain is
located.
Clock Port - - Displays the Smart E1
ports that are bound to a
clock domain.

A.10.2.3 Parameter Description: Clock Domain_Creation
This topic describes the parameters for creating a clock domain.
Navigation Path
Configuration > Clock > Clock Domain from the Function Tree.
2. Click New.
Clock Domain System Clock Domain
CES ACR1 Clock
Domain
CES ACR2 Clock
Domain
CES ACR3 Clock
Domain
CES ACR4 Clock
Domain
System Clock Domain Specifies the clock
domain to be bound.
Clock Domain Board - - Displays the board where
the clock domain is
located.
Board - - Specifies the board where
the Smart E1 port is
located.
Available Port - - Displays the Smart E1
ports that are not bound to
a clock domain.
Selected Port - - Displays the Smart E1
ports that are bound to a
clock domain.

Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
A.10.3 Parameter Description: Auxiliary Ports
This topic describes parameters that are used for configuring an external time port as an RS-485
monitoring port.
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select the NE from the Object Tree and choose Configuration > Auxiliary
Port - - Displays the port that
functions as the auxiliary
port.
Interface Mode 1st external clock
2nd external clock
1st external time
2nd external time
MON
Orderwire
S1/F1
Commissioning serial port
1st external clock Specifies the working
mode of the auxiliary port.
l If the running status of
the outdoor cabinet
needs to be monitored,
set Interface Mode to
MON.
l For an external time
input/output port, set
Interface Mode to 1st
external time or 2nd
external time.

A.11 Parameters for the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the orderwire and auxiliary interfaces.
This topic describes the parameters that are used for general orderwire features.
A.11.2 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Advanced
This topic describes the parameters that are used for advanced orderwire features.
This topic describes the parameters that are used for F1 data ports.
This topic describes the parameters that are used for broadcast data ports.
This topic describes the parameters that are used for environment monitoring interfaces.
A-565
This topic describes the parameters that are used for general orderwire features.
Navigation Path
1. Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >
Orderwire from the Function Tree.
2. Click the General tab.
Parameters
Call Waiting Time
(s)
1 to 9 9 l This parameter indicates the waiting
time after the local station dials the
number. If the calling station does not
receive the response message from the
called station within the call waiting
time, it automatically removes the
communication connection.
l If less than 30 nodes exist in the
orderwire subnet, it is recommended that
you set this parameter to five seconds. If
more than 30 nodes exist in the orderwire
subnet, it is recommended that you set
this parameter to nine seconds.
l The call waiting time should be set to the
same for all the NEs.
Dialling Mode Pulse
Dual-Tone
Frequency
Dual-Tone
Frequency
This parameter indicates the dialling mode
of the orderwire phone.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Conference Call - 888 l This parameter indicates the telephone
number of the network-wide orderwire
conference call.
l When an OptiX RTN 950 dials the
telephone number 888, the orderwire
phones of all the NEs on the orderwire
subnet ring. When an OptiX RTN 950
receives the call, the orderwire phones
on the other NEs do not ring. In this case,
the orderwire point-to-multipoint group
call changes to a point-to-point call
between two NEs.
l The telephone number of the orderwire
conference call should be the same for
all the nodes on the same subnet.
l The telephone number of the orderwire
conference call must have the same
length as the telephone number of the
orderwire phone (phone 1) at the local
site.
Phone 1 100 to 99999999 101 l This parameter specifies the orderwire
phone number of the local station. An
addressing call refers to a point-to-point
call.
l The length of the orderwire phone
number of each NE should be the same.
It is recommended that you set the phone
number to a three-digit number.
l The orderwire phone number of each NE
should be unique. It is recommended that
the phone numbers are allocated from
101 for the NEs in a sequential order
according to the NE IDs.
l The orderwire phone number cannot be
set to the group call number 888 and
cannot start with 888.
Available
Orderwire Port
- - This parameter indicates the available port
for the orderwire phone.
Selected
Orderwire Port
- - This parameter indicates the selected port
for the orderwire phone.

A.11.2 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Advanced
This topic describes the parameters that are used for advanced orderwire features.
A-567
Navigation Path
2. Click the Advanced tab.
Parameters for Bytes Occupied by Orderwire Phones
Orderwire
Occupied Bytes
E1
E2
E1 l This parameter specifies the overhead
byte that is used to transmit the orderwire
signals.
l Regardless the parameter value, the
radio link always uses a customized
overhead byte to transmit the orderwire
signals. Hence, this parameter should be
set according to the occupied SDH
overhead bytes in the ordinary SDH.

This topic describes the parameters that are used for F1 data ports.
Navigation Path
2. Click the F1 Data Port tab.
Parameters
Available Data
Path
- - l This parameter indicates the available F1
data channel.
l Two data channels should be selected for
the configuration.
Number - - This parameter indicates the number of the
F1 data port.
Data Channel 1 - - l If an SDH optical or electrical line port
is selected, this parameter corresponds to
the F1 byte in the SDH frame at the line
port.
l If an IF port is selected, this parameter
corresponds to the customized F1 byte in
the microwave frame at the IF port.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Data Channel 2 l If F1 is selected, this parameter
corresponds to the F1/S1 interface on the
AUX board. The F1/S1 interface
complies with ITU-T G.703 and
operates at the rate of 64 kbit/s.

This topic describes the parameters that are used for broadcast data ports.
Navigation Path
2. Click the Broadcast Data Port tab.
Parameters for Broadcast Data Ports
Overhead Byte SERIAL1 to
SERIAL4
SERIAL1 l In the case of an SDH optical/electrical
line, the preset overhead byte is used to
transmit the asynchronous data services.
l In the case of a radio link, a customized
serial overhead byte in the microwave
frame is used to transmit the
asynchronous data services.
Broadcast Data
Source
- No Data l When this parameter is set to the
SERIAL1, the F1/S1 interface on the
corresponding AUX board is used.
l When this parameter is set to the SDH
optical/electrical line port, the value of
Overhead Byte of this port is used.
l When this parameter is set to the IF port,
the customized Serial byte in the
microwave frame of this port is used.
Available
Broadcast Data
Sink
- - This parameter indicates the available
broadcast data sink.
A-569
Selected Broadcast
Data Sink
- - l When this parameter is set to the
SERIAL1, the F1/S1 interface on the
corresponding AUX board is used.
l When this parameter is set to the SDH
optical/electrical line port, the value of
Overhead Byte of this port is used.
l When this parameter is set to the IF port,
the customized Serial byte in the
microwave frame of this port is used.

This topic describes the parameters that are used for environment monitoring interfaces.
Navigation Path
Select the AUX board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >
Environment Monitor Configuration > Environment Monitor Interface from the Function
Tree.
Parameters for the General Attributes
Operation Object - - This parameter indicates the operation
object.
Relay Control
Mode
Auto Control
Manual Control
Auto Control l Auto Control: If an alarm is reported, the
alarming relay is started up
automatically. Otherwise, the alarming
relay is shut down.
l Manual Control: Relay Status in Major
Alarm(K0) and Relay Status in
Critical Alarm(K1) need to be set.
Relay Status in
Major Alarm(K0)
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled l This parameter indicates that the status
of the relay is set manually for major
alarms.
l Enable: The relay is set to the "ON"
status for major alarms.
l Disabled: The relay is set to the "OFF"
status for major alarms.
l This parameter is valid only when Relay
Control Mode is set to Manual
Control.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Relay Status in
Critical Alarm(K1)
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled l This parameter indicates that the status
of the relay is set manually for critical
alarms.
l Enable: The relay is set to the enabled
status for critical alarms.
l Disabled: The relay is set to the disabled
status for critical alarms.
l This parameter is valid only when Relay
Control Mode is set to Manual
Control.

Parameters for the Input Relay
object.
Path Name - - This parameter indicates or specifies the
name of the channel.
Using Status Unused
Used
Unused This parameter specifies whether the alarm
interface of the input relay is used.
Alarm Mode Relay Turns Off/
High Level
Relay Turns On/
Low Level
Relay Turns Off/
High Level
l If this parameter is set to Relay Turns
Off/High Level, an alarm is generated
when the relay is turned off.
l If this parameter is set to Relay Turns
On/Low Level, an alarm is generated
when the relay is turned on.
l This parameter is valid only when Using
Status is set to Used.
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm
Major Alarm
Minor Alarm
Warning Alarm
Critical Alarm This parameter specifies the severity of the
alarm that is generated at the input relay.

Parameters for the Output Relay
object.
A-571
Path Name - - This parameter indicates or specifies the
name of the output channel.
Use or Not Unused
Used
Unused This parameter specifies whether the alarm
interface of the output relay is used.

Parameters for the Temperature Attributes
object.
Monitor Status - - This parameter indicates whether the
temperature attribute is monitored.
Temperature
Upper Threshold
(DEG.C)
- - This parameter indicates the upper
temperature threshold of the board. When
the actual temperature is higher than the
preset value, an alarm is generated.
Temperature
Lower Threshold
(DEG.C)
- - This parameter indicates the lower
temperature threshold of the board. When
the actual temperature is lower than the
preset value, an alarm is generated.

Parameters for the Alarm Relay
Alarm Severity Critical Alarm
Major Alarm
Minor Alarm
Warning Alarm
- This parameter indicates the severity of the
alarm.
Alarm Output
Channel
CSK-1
CSK-2
CSK-3
CSK-4
CSK-1 This parameter specifies the channel of the
output alarm relay.

Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
B Board Loopback Types
Different service interface boards support different loopback types.
Table B-1 Loopback types that service interface boards support
Board Loopback Type Remarks
SL1D l Inloops at optical ports
l Outloops at optical ports
l Outloops on VC-4 paths
-
SP3S/SP3D/ML1/MD1 l Inloops at E1 tributary
ports
l Outloops at E1 tributary
ports
-
EM6T/EM6F l Inloops at the MAC layer of
Ethernet ports
l Inloops at the PHY layer of
Ethernet ports
-
EFP8 l Inloops at the PHY layer of
Ethernet ports
Ethernet ports
The bridging port of the EFP8
does not support loopbacks at the
PHY layer.
IF1 l Inloops at IF ports
l Outloops at IF ports
l Inloops at composite ports
l Outloops at composite
ports
-
IDU Hardware Description B Board Loopback Types
B-1
Board Loopback Type Remarks
IFU2/IFX2 l Inloops and outloops at IF
ports
l Inloops and outloops at
multiplexing ports
IF_ETH ports
-
ISU2/ISX2 l Inloops and outloops at IF
ports
l Inloops and outloops at
multiplexing ports
-
B Board Loopback Types
B-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
C Indicators of Boards
Indicators of Boards
Table C-1 Status explanation for indicators on the CST
board.
100 ms intervals
of the board.
300 ms intervals
of the board.
100 ms intervals
board.
IDU Hardware Description C Indicators of Boards
C-1
the board.
switchover occurs.
system.
system.
been activated.
activated.

Table C-2 Status explanation for indicators on the CSH
board.
C-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
100 ms intervals
of the board.
300 ms intervals
of the board.
100 ms intervals
board.
the board.
switchover occurs.
system.
system.
been activated.
C-3
activated.

Table C-3 Status explanation for indicators on the IF1
properly.
l There is no power
properly.
l There is no power
alarms.
300 ms intervals
reporting defects.
of defects.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
active one.
the board has been
activated.
standby one.

Table C-4 Status explanation for indicators on the IFU2
services.
services.
ODU On (green) The ODU is working properly.
On (red) l The ODU is reporting critical or major
alarms.
l There is no power supplied to the ODU.
On (yellow) The ODU is reporting minor alarms.
Blinks on (yellow)
and off at 300 ms
intervals
RMT On (yellow) The remote equipment is reporting defects.
C-5
Off The remote equipment is free of defects.
ACT On (green) l In a 1+1 protected system, the board
l In an unprotected system, the board has
been activated.
Off l In a 1+1 protected system, the board
l In an unprotected system, the board is not
activated.

Table C-5 Status explanation for indicators on the ISU2
properly.
l There is no power
properly.
l There is no power
alarms.
300 ms intervals
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
reporting defects.
of defects.
active one.
the board has been
activated.
standby one.

Table C-6 Status explanation for indicators on the IFX2
normal.
disabled.
properly.
l There is no power
C-7
properly.
l There is no power
alarms.
300 ms intervals
reporting defects.
of defects.
active one.
the board has been
activated.
standby one.

Table C-7 Status explanation for indicators on the ISX2
normal.
disabled.
properly.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
l There is no power
properly.
l There is no power
alarms.
300 ms intervals
reporting defects.
of defects.
active one.
the board has been
activated.
standby one.

C-9
Table C-8 Status explanation for indicators on the EM6T/EM6F
system.
100 ms intervals
board.
300 ms intervals
the board.
being initialized.
ms intervals
On (red) The memory self-check fails or loading
upper layer software fails during the power-
on or resetting process of the board.
The logic file or upper layer software is lost
during the running process of the board.
The pluggable storage card is faulty.
LINK1
a
data.
LINK2
a
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
data.

NOTE
a: The LINK1 and LINK2 indicators are available only on the EM6F and indicate the states of the
corresponding GE ports.
Table C-9 Status explanation for indicators on the EFP8
100 ms intervals
board.
300 ms intervals
the board.
being initialized.
ms intervals
On (red) l The memory self-check fails or loading
upper layer software fails during the
power-on or resetting process of the
board.
l The logic file or upper layer software is
lost during the running process of the
board.
C-11
system.

Table C-10 Status explanation for indicators on the SL1D
properly.
l There is no power
configured.
LOS1 On (red) The first optical port of the
R_LOS alarm.
Off The first optical port of the
alarms.
LOS2 On (red) The second optical port of the
R_LOS alarm.
Off The second optical port of the
alarms.

Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Table C-11 Status explanation for indicators on the SP3S/SP3D
properly.
l There is no power
configured.

Table C-12 Status explanation for indicators on the ML1/MD1
properly.
l There is no power
configured.

C-13
Table C-13 Status explanation for indicators on the AUX
board.
system.
system.

Table C-14 Status explanation for indicators on the PIU
PWR On (green) The power supply is connected.
Off There is no power supplied to the PIU or the power
supply is connected incorrectly.

Table C-15 Status explanation for indicators on the FAN
FAN On (green) The fan is working properly.
On (red) The fan is faulty.
Off The fan is not powered on or is not installed.

NOTE
The CRIT, MAJ, or MIN indicator on the front panel of the FAN indicates the current alarm severity of the
subrack.
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
D Weight and Power Consumption of Each
Board
Weight and Power Consumption of Each Board
Table D-1 Weight and power consumption of each board
Board Weight (kg) Power Consumption (W)
CST 0.72 kg < 20.7 W
CSH 0.74 kg < 25.3 W
IF1 0.72 kg < 12.0 W
IFU2 0.79 kg < 23.0 W
IFX2 0.80 kg < 33.0 W
ISU2 0.60 kg < 22.0 W
ISX2 0.60 kg < 23.0 W
EM6T 0.37 kg < 10.4 W
EM6F 0.40 kg < 11.3 W
EFP8 0.60 kg < 13.5 W
SL1D 0.30 kg < 3.4 W
ML1 0.45 kg < 7.0 W
MD1 0.50 kg < 12.2 W
SP3S 0.50 kg < 5.7 W
SP3D 0.64 kg < 9.6 W
AUX 0.27 kg < 1.3 W
PIU 0.12 kg < 0.5 W
IDU Hardware Description D Weight and Power Consumption of Each Board
D-1
Board Weight (kg) Power Consumption (W)
FAN 0.30 kg < 4.1 W (room temperature)
< 29.6 W (high temperature)
Empty chassis
(with only the
backplane)
2.80 kg -
D Weight and Power Consumption of Each Board
D-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
E Glossary
Terms are listed in an alphabetical order.
E.1 0-9
This section provides the terms starting with numbers.
E.2 A-E
This section provides the terms starting with letters A to E.
E.3 F-J
This section provides the terms starting with letters F to J.
E.4 K-O
This section provides the terms starting with letters K to O.
E.5 P-T
This section provides the terms starting with letters P to T.
E.6 U-Z
This section provides the terms starting with letters U to Z.
IDU Hardware Description E Glossary
E-1
E.1 0-9
This section provides the terms starting with numbers.
1U The standard electronics industries association (EIA) rack unit (44 mm/1.75 in.)
E.2 A-E
This section provides the terms starting with letters A to E.
A
ABR See available bit rate
ACAP See adjacent channel alternate polarization
access control list A list of entities, together with their access rights, which are authorized to have access
to a resource.
ACL See access control list
adaptive modulation A technology that is used to automatically adjust the modulation mode according to the
channel quality. When the channel quality is favorable, the equipment adopts a high-
efficiency modulation mode to improve the transmission efficiency and the spectrum
utilization of the system. When the channel quality is degraded, the equipment adopts
the low-efficiency modulation mode to improve the anti-interference capability of the
link that carries high-priority services.
ADC See analog to digital converter
add/drop multiplexer Network elements that provide access to all or some subset of the constituent signals
contained within an STM-N signal. The constituent signals are added to (inserted), and/
or dropped from (extracted) the STM-N signal as it passed through the ADM.
Address Resolution
Protocol
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is an Internet Protocol used to map IP addresses to
MAC addresses. It allows hosts and routers to determine the link layer addresses through
ARP requests and ARP responses. The address resolution is a process in which the host
converts the target IP address into a target MAC address before transmitting a frame.
The basic function of the ARP is to query the MAC address of the target equipment
through its IP address.
adjacent channel
alternate polarization
A channel configuration method, which uses two adjacent channels (a horizontal
polarization wave and a vertical polarization wave) to transmit two signals.
ADM See add/drop multiplexer
administrative unit The information structure which provides adaptation between the higher order path layer
and the multiplex section layer. It consists of an information payload (the higher order
VC) and an AU pointer which indicates the offset of the payload frame start relative to
the multiplex section frame start.
AF See assured forwarding
aggregation A collection of objects that makes a whole. An aggregation can be a concrete or
conceptual set of whole-part relationships among objects.
E Glossary
E-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
AIS See alarm indication signal
alarm automatic report When an alarm is generated on the device side, the alarm is reported to the Network
Management System (NMS). Then, an alarm panel prompts and the user can view the
details of the alarm.
alarm cascading The shunt-wound output of the alarm signals of several subracks or cabinets.
Alarm Filtering An NE reports the detected alarm to the element management system (EMS). Based on
the filter state of the alarm, the EMS determines whether to display or save the alarm
information. If the filter state of an alarm is set to Filter, the alarm is not displayed or
stored on the EMS. The alarm, however, is still monitored by the NE.
alarm indication signal A code sent downstream in a digital network as an indication that an upstream failure
has been detected and alarmed. It is associated with multiple transport layers.
alarm suppression A function used not to monitor alarms for a specific object, which may be the
networkwide equipment, a specific NE, a specific board and even a specific function
module of a specific board.
AM See adaptive modulation
analog to digital
converter
An electronic circuit that converts continuous signals to discrete digital numbers. The
reverse operation is performed by a digital-to-analog converter (DAC).
APS See automatic protection switching
ARP See Address Resolution Protocol
assured forwarding One of the four per-hop behaviors (PHB) defined by the Diff-Serv workgroup of IETF.
It is suitable for certain key data services that require assured bandwidth and short delay.
For traffic within the bandwidth limit, AF assures quality in forwarding. For traffic that
exceeds the bandwidth limit, AF degrades the service class and continues to forward the
traffic instead of discarding the packets.
Asynchronous
Transfer Mode
A protocol for the transmission of a variety of digital signals using uniform 53 byte cells.
A transfer mode in which the information is organized into cells; it is asynchronous in
the sense that the recurrence of cells depends on the required or instantaneous bit rate.
Statistical and deterministic values may also be used to qualify the transfer mode.
ATM See Asynchronous Transfer Mode
ATM PVC ATM permanent virtual circuit
ATPC See automatic transmit power control
attenuator A device used to increase the attenuation of an Optical Fiber Link. Generally used to
ensure that the signal at the receive end is not too strong.
AU See administrative unit
automatic protection
switching
Capability of a transmission system to detect a failure on a working facility and to switch
to a standby facility to recover the traffic.
automatic transmit
power control
A method of adjusting the transmit power based on fading of the transmit signal detected
at the receiver
available bit rate A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. ABR only provides possible
forwarding service and applies to the connections that does not require the real-time
quality. It does not provide any guarantee in terms of cell loss or delay.
E-3
B
backward defect
indication
When detecting a defect, the sink node of an LSP uses backward defect indication (BDI)
to inform the upstream end of the LSP of a downstream defect along the return path.
bandwidth A range of transmission frequencies that a transmission line or channel can carry in a
network. In fact, it is the difference between the highest and lowest frequencies the
transmission line or channel. The greater the bandwidth, the faster the data transfer rate.
base station controller A logical entity that connects the BTS with the MSC in a GSM network. It interworks
with the BTS through the Abis interface, the MSC through the A interface. It provides
the following functions: radio resource management, base station management, power
control, handover control, and traffic measurement. One BSC controls and manages one
or more BTSs in an actual network.
base transceiver station A Base Transceiver Station terminates the radio interface. It allows transmission of traffic
and signaling across the air interface. The BTS includes the baseband processing, radio
equipment, and the antenna.
basic input/output
system
A firmware stored in the computer mainboard. It contains basic input/output control
programs, power-on self test (POST) programs, bootstraps, and system setting
information. The BIOS provides hardware setting and control functions for the computer.
BDI See backward defect indication
BE See best effort
BER See bit error rate
best effort A traditional IP packet transport service. In this service, the diagrams are forwarded
following the sequence of the time they reach. All diagrams share the bandwidth of the
network and routers. The amount of resource that a diagram can use depends of the time
it reaches. BE service does not ensure any improvement in delay time, jitter, packet loss
ratio, and high reliability.
binding strap The binding strap is 12.7 mm wide, with one hook side (made of transparent
polypropylene material) and one mat side (made of black nylon material).
BIOS See basic input/output system
BIP See bit interleaved parity
bit error An incompatibility between a bit in a transmitted digital signal and the corresponding
bit in the received digital signal.
bit error rate Ratio of received bits that contain errors. BER is an important index used to measure the
communications quality of a network.
bit interleaved parity A method of error monitoring. With even parity an X-bit code is generated by the
transmitting equipment over a specified portion of the signal in such a manner that the
first bit of the code provides even parity over the first bit of all X-bit sequences in the
covered portion of the signal, the second bit provides even parity over the second bit of
all X-bit sequences within the specified portion, etc. Even parity is generated by setting
the BIP-X bits so that there is an even number of 1s in each monitored partition of the
signal. A monitored partition comprises all bits which are in the same bit position within
the X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal. The covered portion includes
the BIP-X.
BPDU See bridge protocol data unit
E Glossary
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
bridge protocol data
unit
The data messages that are exchanged across the switches within an extended LAN that
uses a spanning tree protocol (STP) topology. BPDU packets contain information on
ports, addresses, priorities and costs and ensure that the data ends up where it was
intended to go. BPDU messages are exchanged across bridges to detect loops in a
network topology. The loops are then removed by shutting down selected bridges
interfaces and placing redundant switch ports in a backup, or blocked, state.
broadcast A means of delivering information to all members in a network. The broadcast range is
determined by the broadcast address.
BSC See base station controller
BTS See base transceiver station
buffer A storage area used for handling data in transit. Buffers are used in internetworking to
compensate for differences in processing speed between network devices. Bursts of data
can be stored in buffers until they can be handled by slower processing devices. In a
program, buffers are created to hold some amount of data from each of the files that will
be read or written. In a streaming media application, the program uses buffers to store
an advance supply of audio or video data to compensate for momentary delays.
C
cable tie The tape used to bind the cables.
cable tray N/A
cable trough N/A
CAR See committed access rate
CBR See constant bit rate
CBS See committed burst size
CC See connectivity check
CCC See circuit cross connect
CCDP See co-channel dual polarization
CCM See continuity check message
CE See customer edge
central processing unit The computational and control unit of a computer. The CPU is the device that interprets
and executes instructions. The CPU has the ability to fetch, decode, and execute
instructions and to transfer information to and from other resources over the computer's
main data-transfer path, the bus.
CES See circuit emulation service
CF See compact flash
CGMP See Cisco Group Management Protocol
channel A telecommunication path of a specific capacity and/or at a specific speed between two
or more locations in a network. The channel can be established through wire, radio
(microwave), fiber or a combination of the three. The amount of information transmitted
per second in a channel is the information transmission speed, expressed in bits per
second. For example, b/s (100 bit/s), kb/s (103 bit/s), Mb/s (106 bit/s), Gb/s (109 bit/s),
and Tb/s (1012 bit/s).
E-5
CIR See committed information rate
circuit cross connect An implementation of MPLS L2VPN through the static configuration of labels.
circuit emulation
service
A function with which the E1/T1 data can be transmitted through ATM networks. At the
transmission end, the interface module packs timeslot data into ATM cells. These ATM
cells are sent to the reception end through the ATM network. At the reception end, the
interface module re-assigns the data in these ATM cells to E1/T1 timeslots. The CES
technology guarantees that the data in E1/T1 timeslots can be recovered to the original
sequence at the reception end.
Cisco Group
Management Protocol
N/A
CIST See common and internal spanning tree
CIST root A switch of the highest priority is elected as the root in an MSTP network.
clock tracing The method to keep the time on each node being synchronized with a clock source in a
network.
co-channel dual
polarization
A channel configuration method, which uses a horizontal polarization wave and a vertical
polarization wave to transmit two signals. The Co-Channel Dual Polarization is twice
the transmission capacity of the single polarization.
coarse wavelength
division multiplexing
A signal transmission technology that multiplexes widely-spaced optical channels into
the same fiber. CWDM widely spaces wavelengths at a spacing of several nm. CWDM
does not support optical amplifiers and is applied in short-distance chain networking.
colored packet A packet whose priority is determined by defined colors.
committed access rate A traffic control method that uses a set of rate limits to be applied to a router interface.
CAR is a configurable method by which incoming and outgoing packets can be classified
into QoS (Quality of Service) groups, and by which the input or output transmission rate
can be defined.
committed burst size committed burst size. A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket C, that is,
the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the committed
information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this
parameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be
forwarded.
rate
The rate at which a frame relay network agrees to transfer information in normal
conditions. Namely, it is the rate, measured in bit/s, at which the token is transferred to
the leaky bucket.
common and internal
spanning tree
The single spanning tree calculated by STP and RSTP together with the logical
continuation of that connectivity by using MST Bridges and regions, calculated by MSTP
to ensure that all LANs in the bridged local area network are simply and fully connected.
compact flash Compact flash (CF) was originally developed as a type of data storage device used in
portable electronic devices. For storage, CompactFlash typically uses flash memory in
a standardized enclosure.
concatenation A process that combines multiple virtual containers. The combined capacities can be
used a single capacity. The concatenation also keeps the integrity of bit sequence.
connectivity check Ethernet CFM can detect the connectivity between MEPs. The detection is achieved by
each MEP transmitting a Continuity Check Message (CCM) periodically.
E Glossary
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
constant bit rate A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. CBR transfers cells based on
the constant bandwidth. It is applicable to service connections that depend on precise
clocking to ensure undistorted transmission.
continuity check
message
CCM is used to detect the link status.
corrugated pipe Used to protect optical fibers.
CPU See central processing unit
CRC See cyclic redundancy check
cross polarization
interference
cancellation
A technology used in the case of the Co-Channel Dual Polarization (CCDP) to eliminate
the cross-connect interference between two polarization waves in the CCDP.
customer edge A part of BGP/MPLS IP VPN model. It provides interfaces for direct connection to the
Service Provider (SP) network. A CE can be a router, switch, or host.
CWDM See coarse wavelength division multiplexing
cyclic redundancy
check
A procedure used in checking for errors in data transmission. CRC error checking uses
a complex calculation to generate a number based on the data transmitted. The sending
device performs the calculation before transmission and includes it in the packet that it
sends to the receiving device. The receiving device repeats the same calculation after
transmission. If both devices obtain the same result, it is assumed that the transmission
was error free. The procedure is known as a redundancy check because each transmission
includes not only data but extra (redundant) error-checking values.
D
data communication
network
A communication network used in a TMN or between TMNs to support the Data
Communication Function (DCF).
data communications
channel
The data channel that uses the D1-D12 bytes in the overhead of an STM-N signal to
transmit information on operation, management, maintenance and provision (OAM&P)
between NEs. The DCC channels that are composed of bytes D1-D3 is referred to as the
192 kbit/s DCC-R channel. The other DCC channel that are composed of bytes D4-D12
is referred to as the 576 kbit/s DCC-M channel.
Datagram A kind of PDU which is used in Connectionless Network Protocol, such as IP datagram,
UDP datagram.
DC See direct current
DC-C See DC-return common (with ground)
DC-C DC-return common (with ground)
DC-C See DC-return common (with ground)
DC-I See DC-return isolate (with ground)
DC-return common
(with ground)
A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with
the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and also on the line between
the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.
DC-return common
(with ground)
the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and also on the line between
the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.
E-7
DC-return isolate (with
ground)
the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and is isolated from the PGND
on the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.
DCC See data communications channel
DCN See data communication network
DDF See digital distribution frame
DDN See digital data network
DE See discard eligible
differentiated services A service architecture that provides the end-to-end QoS function. It consists of a series
of functional units implemented at the network nodes, including a small group of per-
hop forwarding behaviors, packet classification functions, and traffic conditioning
functions such as metering, marking, shaping and policing.
code point
A marker in the header of each IP packet that prompts network routers to apply
differentiated grades of service to various packet streams. It is specified by the DiffServ
policy proposed by the IETF (Internet Engineering Task Force). This allows Internet and
other IP-based network service providers to offer different levels of service to customers.
DiffServ See differentiated services
digital data network A high-quality data transport tunnel that combines the digital channel (such as fiber
channel, digital microwave channel, or satellite channel) and the cross multiplex
technology.
digital distribution
frame
A type of equipment used between the transmission equipment and the exchange with
transmission rate of 2 to 155 Mbit/s to provide the functions such as cables connection,
cable patching, and test of loops that transmitting digital signals.
digital modulation A digital modulation controls the changes in amplitude, phase, and frequency of the
carrier based on the changes in the baseband digital signal. In this manner, the
information can be transmitted by the carrier.
direct current Electrical current whose direction of flow does not reverse. The current may stop or
change amplitude, but it always flows in the same direction.
discard eligible A bit in the frame relay header. It indicates the priority of a packet. If a node supports
the FR QoS, the rate of the accessed FR packets is controlled. When the packet traffic
exceeds the specified traffic, the DE value of the redundant packets is set to 1. In the
case of network congestion, the packets with DE value as 1 are discarded at the node.
Distance Vector
Multicast Routing
Protocol
An Internet gateway protocol mainly based on the RIP. The protocol implements a typical
dense mode IP multicast solution. The DVMRP protocol uses IGMP to exchange routing
datagrams with its neighbors.
DS boundary node A DS node that connects one DS domain to a node either in another DS domain or in a
domain that is not DS-capable.
DS domain In the DifferServ mechanism, the DS domain is a domain consisting of a group of
network nodes that share the same service provisioning policy and same PHB. It provides
point-to-point QoS guarantees for services transmitted over this domain.
DS interior node A DS node located at the center of a DS domain. It is a non-DS boundary node.
DS node A DS-compliant node, which is subdivided into DS boundary node and ID interior node.
DSCP See differentiated services code point
E Glossary
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
dual-polarized antenna An antenna intended to radiate or receive simultaneously two independent radio waves
orthogonally polarized.
DVMRP See Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol
E
E-Aggr See Ethernet aggregation
E-LAN See Ethernet LAN
E-Line See Ethernet line
E-Tree See Ethernet-tree
EBS See excess burst size
ECC See embedded control channel
EF See expedited forwarding
electromagnetic
compatibility
Electromagnetic compatibility is the condition which prevails when telecommunications
equipment is performing its individually designed function in a common electromagnetic
environment without causing or suffering unacceptable degradation due to unintentional
electromagnetic interference to or from other equipment in the same environment.
electromagnetic
interference
Any electromagnetic disturbance that interrupts, obstructs, or otherwise degrades or
limits the effective performance of electronics/electrical equipment.
electrostatic discharge The sudden and momentary electric current that flows between two objects at different
electrical potentials caused by direct contact or induced by an electrostatic field.
embedded control
channel
A logical channel that uses a data communications channel (DCC) as its physical layer,
to enable transmission of operation, administration, and maintenance (OAM)
information between NEs.
EMC See electromagnetic compatibility
EMI See electromagnetic interference
Engineering label A mark on a cable, a subrack, or a cabinet for identification.
EPL See Ethernet private line
EPLAN See Ethernet private LAN service
equalization A method of avoiding selective fading of frequencies. Equalization can compensate for
the changes of amplitude frequency caused by frequency selective fading.
ERPS See Ethernet ring protection switching
ESD See electrostatic discharge
ESD jack Electrostatic discharge jack. A hole in the cabinet or shelf, which connect the shelf or
cabinet to the insertion of ESD wrist strap.
Ethernet A technology complemented in LAN. It adopts Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision
Detection. The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/
s or 10000 Mbit/s. The Ethernet network features high reliability and easy maintaining.
Ethernet A technology complemented in LAN. It adopts Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision
Detection. The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/
s or 10000 Mbit/s. The Ethernet network features high reliability and easy maintaining..
E-9
Ethernet aggregation A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-point EVC (Ethernet virtual
connection).
Ethernet LAN A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-multipoint EVC (Ethernet
virtual connection).
Ethernet line A type of Ethernet service that is based on a point-to-point EVC (Ethernet virtual
connection).
Ethernet private LAN
service
An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over a
dedicated bridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or
MPLS server layer networks.
Ethernet private line A type of Ethernet service that is provided with dedicated bandwidth and point-to-point
connections on an SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer network.
Ethernet ring
protection switching mechanisms for ETH layer Ethernet ring topologies.
Ethernet virtual
private LAN service
An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over a shared
bridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server
layer networks.
Ethernet virtual
private line
An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over shared
bandwidth, point-to-point connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server
layer networks.
Ethernet-tree An Ethernet service type that is based on a Point-to-multipoint Ethernet Virtual
Connection.
ETS European Telecommunication Standards
ETSI See European Telecommunications Standards Institute
European
Telecommunications
Standards Institute
A standards-setting body in Europe. Also the standards body responsible for GSM.
EVPL See Ethernet virtual private line
EVPLAN See Ethernet virtual private LAN service
excess burst size A parameter related to traffic. In the single rate three color marker (srTCM) mode, the
traffic control is achieved by the token buckets C and E. Excess burst size is a parameter
used to define the capacity of token bucket E, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size
when the information is transferred at the committed information rate. This parameter
must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than the
maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded.
Exercise Switching An operation to check if the protection switching protocol functions normally. The
protection switching is not really performed.
expansion Connecting a storage system to more disk enclosures through connection cables, thus
expanding the capacity of the storage system.
expedited forwarding The highest order QoS in the Diff-Serv network. EF PHB is suitable for services that
demand low packet loss ratio, short delay, and broad bandwidth. In all the cases, EF
traffic can guarantee a transmission rate equal to or faster than the set rate. The DSCP
value of EF PHB is "101110".
E Glossary
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
E.3 F-J
This section provides the terms starting with letters F to J.
F
failure If the fault persists long enough to consider the ability of an item with a required function
to be terminated. The item may be considered as having failed; a fault has now been
detected.
fast Ethernet Any network that supports transmission rate of 100Mbits/s. The Fast Ethernet is 10 times
faster than 10BaseT, and inherits frame format, MAC addressing scheme, MTU, and so
on. Fast Ethernet is extended from the IEEE802.3 standard, and it uses the following
three types of transmission media: 100BASE-T4 (4 pairs of phone twisted-pair cables),
100BASE-TX (2 pairs of data twisted-pair cables), and 100BASE-FX (2-core optical
fibers).
fast link pulse The link pulse that is used to encode information during automatic negotiation.
FD See frequency diversity
FDI See forward defect indication
FE See fast Ethernet
FEC See forward error correction
FFD fast failure detection
fiber patch cord A kind of fiber used for connections between the subrack and the ODF, and for
connections between subracks or inside a subrack.
field programmable
gate array
A type of semi-customized circuit used in the Application Specific Integrated Circuit
(ASIC) field. It is developed on the basis of the programmable components, such as the
PAL, GAL, and EPLD. It not only remedies the defects of customized circuits, but also
overcomes the disadvantage of the original programmable components in terms of the
limited number of gate arrays.
FIFO See First in First out
File Transfer Protocol A member of the TCP/IP suite of protocols, used to copy files between two computers
on the Internet. Both computers must support their respective FTP roles: one must be an
FTP client and the other an FTP server.
First in First out A stack management mechanism. The first saved data is first read and invoked.
Forced switch For normal traffic signals, switches normal traffic signal to the protection section, unless
an equal or higher priority switch command is in effect or SF condition exists on the
protection section, by issuing a forced switch request for that traffic signal.
forward defect
indication
Forward defect indication (FDI) is generated and traced forward to the sink node of the
LSP by the node that first detects defects. It includes fields to indicate the nature of the
defect and its location. Its primary purpose is to suppress alarms being raised at affected
higher level client LSPs and (in turn) their client layers.
forward error
correction
A bit error correction technology that adds the correction information to the payload at
the transmit end. Based on the correction information, the bit errors generated during
transmission are corrected at the receive end.
E-11
Forwarding plane Also referred to as the data plane. The forwarding plane is connection-oriented, and can
be used in Layer 2 networks such as an ATM network.
FPGA See field programmable gate array
fragment Piece of a larger packet that has been broken down to smaller units.
Fragmentation Process of breaking a packet into smaller units when transmitting over a network medium
that cannot support the original size of the packet.
frame A frame, starting with a header, is a string of bytes with a specified length. Frame length
is represented by the sampling circle or the total number of bytes sampled during a circle.
A header comprises one or a number of bytes with pre-specified values. In other words,
a header is a code segment that reflects the distribution (diagram) of the elements pre-
specified by the sending and receiving parties.
frequency diversity A diversity scheme that enables two or more microwave frequencies with a certain
frequency interval are used to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is then
performed between the two signals to ease the impact of fading.
FTP See File Transfer Protocol
full-duplex A full-duplex, or sometimes double-duplex system, allows communication in both
directions, and, unlike half-duplex, allows this to happen simultaneously. Land-line
telephone networks are full-duplex, since they allow both callers to speak and be heard
at the same time. A good analogy for a full-duplex system would be a two-lane road with
one lane for each direction.
G
gateway network
element
A network element that is used for communication between the NE application layer and
the NM application layer
GE See gigabit Ethernet
generic framing
procedure
A framing and encapsulated method which can be applied to any data type. It has been
standardized by ITU-T SG15.
generic traffic shaping A traffic control measure that initiatively adjusts the output speed of the traffic. This is
to adapt the traffic to network resources that can be provided by the downstream router
to avoid packet discarding and congestion.
GFP See generic framing procedure
gigabit Ethernet GE adopts the IEEE 802.3z. GE is compatible with 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s Ethernet.
It runs at 1000 Mbit/s. Gigabit Ethernet uses a private medium, and it does not support
coaxial cables or other cables. It also supports the channels in the bandwidth mode. If
Gigabit Ethernet is, however, deployed to be the private bandwidth system with a bridge
(switch) or a router as the center, it gives full play to the performance and the bandwidth.
In the network structure, Gigabit Ethernet uses full duplex links that are private, causing
the length of the links to be sufficient for backbone applications in a building and campus.
Global Positioning
System
A global navigation satellite system. It provides reliable positioning, navigation, and
timing services to worldwide users.
GNE See gateway network element
GPS See Global Positioning System
E Glossary
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
graphical user interface A visual computer environment that represents programs, files, and options with
graphical images, such as icons, menus, and dialog boxes, on the screen.
GTS See generic traffic shaping
GUI See graphical user interface
guide rail Components to guide, position, and support plug-in boards.
H
HA See high availability
half-duplex A transmitting mode in which a half-duplex system provides for communication in both
directions, but only one direction at a time (not simultaneously). Typically, once a party
begins receiving a signal, it must wait for the transmitter to stop transmitting, before
replying.
HDLC See high level data link control
hierarchical quality of
service
A type of QoS that can control the traffic of users, and perform the scheduling according
to the priority of user services. HQoS has a perfect traffic statistics function, and the
administrator can monitor the usage of bandwidth of each service. Hence, the bandwidth
can be allocated reasonably through traffic analysis.
high availability Typically, a scheme in which two modules operate in active/standby mode to achieve
high availability. When the active module fails, the standby module automatically takes
over the system functions of the active module.
high level data link
control
The HDLC protocol is a general purpose protocol which operates at the data link layer
of the OSI reference model. Each piece of data is encapsulated in an HDLC frame by
adding a trailer and a header.
High Speed Downlink
Packet Access
A modulating-demodulating algorithm put forward in 3GPP R5 to meet the requirement
for asymmetric uplink and downlink transmission of data services. It enables the
maximum downlink data service rate to reach 14.4 Mbit/s without changing the
WCDMA network topology.
higher order path In an SDH network, the higher order path layers provide a server network from the lower
order path layers.
Hold priority The priority of the tunnel with respect to holding resources, ranging from 0 (indicates
the highest priority) to 7. It is used to determine whether the resources occupied by the
tunnel can be preempted by other tunnels.
hop A network connection between two distant nodes. For Internet operation a hop represents
a small step on the route from one main computer to another.
hot standby A mechanism of ensuring device running security. The environment variables and
storage information of each running device are synchronized to the standby device. When
the faults occur on the running device, the standby device can take over the services in
the faulty device in automatic or manual way to ensure the normal running of the entire
system.
HP See higher order path
HQoS See hierarchical quality of service
HSB See hot standby
HSDPA See High Speed Downlink Packet Access
E-13
HSM hitless switch mode
HTB high tributary bus
hybrid radio The hybrid transmission of Native E1 and Native Ethernet signals. Hybrid radio supports
the AM function.
I
ICMP See Internet Control Message Protocol
IDU See indoor unit
IEC See International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE See Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IETF See Internet Engineering Task Force
IF See intermediate frequency
IGMP See Internet Group Management Protocol
IGMP snooping A multicast constraint mechanism running on a layer 2 device. This protocol manages
and controls the multicast group by listening to and analyze the Internet Group
Management Protocol (IGMP) packet between hosts and layer 3 devices. In this manner,
the spread of the multicast data on layer 2 network can be prevented efficiently.
IMA See inverse multiplexing over ATM
indoor unit The indoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements accessing,
multiplexing/demultiplexing, and IF processing for services.
Inloop A method of looping the signals from the cross-connect unit back to the cross-connect
unit.
Institute of Electrical
and Electronics
Engineers
A society of engineering and electronics professionals based in the United States but
boasting membership from numerous other countries. The IEEE focuses on electrical,
electronics, computer engineering, and science-related matters.
intermediate frequency The transitional frequency between the frequencies of a modulated signal and an RF
signal.
Intermediate System The basic unit in the IS-IS protocol used to transmit routing information and generate
routes.
Intermediate System to
Intermediate System
routing protocol
A protocol used by network devices (routers) to determine the best way to forward
datagrams or packets through a packet-based network, a process called routing.
internal spanning tree A segment of CIST in a certain MST region. An IST is a special MSTI whose ID is 0.
International
Electrotechnical
Commission
The International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) is an international and non-
governmental standards organization dealing with electrical and electronic standards.
International
Organization for
Standardization
An international association that works to establish global standards for communications
and information exchange. Primary among its accomplishments is the widely accepted
ISO/OSI reference model, which defines standards for the interaction of computers
connected by communications networks.
E Glossary
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
International
Telecommunication
Union-
Telecommunication
Standardization Sector
An international body that develops worldwide standards for telecommunications
technologies. These standards are grouped together in series which are prefixed with a
letter indicating the general subject and a number specifying the particular standard. For
example, X.25 comes from the "X" series which deals with data networks and open
system communications and number "25" deals with packet switched networks.
Internet Control
Message Protocol
A network-layer (ISO/OSI level 3) Internet protocol that provides error correction and
other information relevant to IP packet processing. For example, it can let the IP software
on one machine inform another machine about an unreachable destination. See also
communications protocol, IP, ISO/OSI reference model, packet (definition 1).
Internet Engineering
Task Force
A worldwide organization of individuals interested in networking and the Internet.
Managed by the Internet Engineering Steering Group (IESG), the IETF is charged with
studying technical problems facing the Internet and proposing solutions to the Internet
Architecture Board (IAB). The work of the IETF is carried out by various working groups
that concentrate on specific topics, such as routing and security. The IETF is the publisher
of the specifications that led to the TCP/IP protocol standard.
Internet Group
Management Protocol
The protocol for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups among
the TCP/IP protocols. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish
and maintain multicast group memberships.
Internet Protocol The TCP/IP standard protocol that defines the IP packet as the unit of information sent
across an internet and provides the basis for connectionless, best-effort packet delivery
service. IP includes the ICMP control and error message protocol as an integral part. The
entire protocol suite is often referred to as TCP/IP because TCP and IP are the two
fundamental protocols. IP is standardized in RFC 791.
Internet protocol
version 6
A update version of IPv4. It is also called IP Next Generation (IPng). The specifications
and standardizations provided by it are consistent with the Internet Engineering Task
Force (IETF). IPv6 is also called. It is a new version of the Internet Protocol, designed
as the successor to IPv4. The difference between IPv6 and IPv4 is that an IPv4 address
has 32 bits while an IPv6 address has 128 bits.
Internet protocol
version 6
A update version of IPv4. It is also called IP Next Generation (IPng). The specifications
and standardizations provided by it are consistent with the Internet Engineering Task
Force (IETF). IPv6 is also called. It is a new version of the Internet Protocol, designed
as the successor to IPv4. The difference between IPv6 and IPv4 is that an IPv4 address
has 32 bits while an IPv6 address has 128 bits.
inverse multiplexing
over ATM
The ATM inverse multiplexing technique involves inverse multiplexing and de-
multiplexing of ATM cells in a cyclical fashion among links grouped to form a higher
bandwidth logical link whose rate is approximately the sum of the link rates. This is
referred to as an IMA group.
IP See Internet Protocol
IPV6 See Internet protocol version 6
IPv6 See Internet protocol version 6
IS-IS See Intermediate System to Intermediate System routing protocol
ISO See International Organization for Standardization
IST See internal spanning tree
ITU-T See International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication Standardization
Sector
E-15
J
Jitter Short waveform variations caused by vibration, voltage fluctuations, and control system
instability.
E.4 K-O
This section provides the terms starting with letters K to O.
L
L2VPN See Layer 2 virtual private network
label switched path A sequence of hops (R0...Rn) in which a packet travels from R0 to Rn through label
switching mechanisms. A label-switched path can be chosen dynamically, based on
normal routing mechanisms, or through configuration.
label switching router Basic element of MPLS network. All LSRs support the MPLS protocol. The LSR is
composed of two parts: control unit and forwarding unit. The former is responsible for
allocating the label, selecting the route, creating the label forwarding table, creating and
removing the label switch path; the latter forwards the labels according to groups
received in the label forwarding table.
LACP See Link Aggregation Control Protocol
LAG See link aggregation group
LAN See local area network
LAN See local area network
LAPS link access protocol-SDH
Laser A component that generates directional optical waves of narrow wavelengths. The laser
light has better coherence than ordinary light. The fiber system takes the semi-conductor
laser as the light source.
layer 2 switch A data forwarding method. In LAN, a network bridge or 802.3 Ethernet switch transmits
and distributes packet data based on the MAC address. Since the MAC address is the
second layer of the OSI model, this data forwarding method is called layer 2 switch.
Layer 2 virtual private
network
A virtual private network achieved by Layer 2 switching technologies in the packet
switched (IP/MPLS) network.
LB See loopback
LCAS See link capacity adjustment scheme
LCT local craft terminal
line rate The maximum packet forwarding capacity on a cable. The value of line rate equals the
maximum transmission rate capable on a given type of media.
line rate forwarding The line rate equals the maximum transmission rate capable on a given type of media.
Link Aggregation
Control Protocol
A method of bundling a group of physical interfaces together as a logical interface to
increase bandwidth and reliability. For related protocols and standards, refer to IEEE
802.3ad.
E Glossary
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
link aggregation group An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a link
aggregation group so that a MAC client can treat the link aggregation group as if it were
a single link.
link capacity
adjustment scheme
LCAS in the virtual concatenation source and sink adaptation functions provides a
control mechanism to hitlessly increase or decrease the capacity of a link to meet the
bandwidth needs of the application. It also provides a means of removing member links
that have experienced failure. The LCAS assumes that in cases of capacity initiation,
increases or decreases, the construction or destruction of the end-to-end path is the
responsibility of the Network and Element Management Systems.
Link Protection Protection provided by the bypass tunnel for the link on the working tunnel. The link is
a downstream link adjacent to the PLR. When the PLR fails to provide node protection,
the link protection should be provided.
LMSP linear multiplex section protection
local area network A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few square
kilometers or within a single building. It features high speed and low error rate. Ethernet,
FDDI, and Token Ring are three technologies used to implement a LAN. Current LANs
are generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and running at 1,000 Mbit/
s (that is, 1 Gbit/s).
local area network A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few square
kilometers or within a single building. It features high speed and low error rate. Ethernet,
FDDI, and Token Ring are three technologies used to implement a LAN. Current LANs
are generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and running at 1,000 Mbit/
s (that is, 1 Gbit/s).
Locked switching When the switching condition is satisfied, this function disables the service from being
switched from the working channel to the protection channel. When the service has been
switched, the function enables the service to be restored from the protection channel to
the working channel.
LOF See Loss Of Frame
LOM loss of multiframe
loopback A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to its source so that the
signal or message can be analyzed for errors.
LOP See loss of pointer
LOS See Loss Of Signal
Loss Of Frame A condition at the receiver or a maintenance signal transmitted in the PHY overhead
indicating that the receiving equipment has lost frame delineation. This is used to monitor
the performance of the PHY layer.
loss of pointer Loss of Pointer: A condition at the receiver or a maintenance signal transmitted in the
PHY overhead indicating that the receiving equipment has lost the pointer to the start of
cell in the payload. This is used to monitor the performance of the PHY layer.
Loss Of Signal Loss of signal (LOS) indicates that there are no transitions occurring in the received
signal.
LP lower order path
LPT link-state pass through
LSP See label switched path
E-17
LSR See label switching router
M
MA See maintenance association
MAC See media access control
MAC See media access control
MADM multiple add/drop multiplexer
main topology A interface that displays the connection relation of NEs on the NMS (screen display).
The default client interface of the NMS, a basic component of the human-machine
interactive interface. The topology clearly shows the structure of the network, the alarms
of different NEs, subnets in the network, the communication status as well as the basic
network operation status. All topology management functions are accessed here.
maintenance
association
That portion of a Service Instance, preferably all of it or as much as possible, the
connectivity of which is maintained by CFM. It is also a full mesh of Maintenance
Entities.
maintenance
association end point
A MEP is an actively managed CFM Entity, associated with a specific DSAP of a Service
Instance, which can generate and receive CFM frames and track any responses. It is an
end point of a single Maintenance Association, and terminates a separate Maintenance
Entity for each of the other MEPs in the same Maintenance Association.
maintenance domain The network or the part of the network for which connectivity is managed by CFM. The
devices in an MD are managed by a single ISP.
maintenance point Maintenance Point (MP) is one of either a MEP or a MIP.
management
information base
A type of database used for managing the devices in a communications network. It
comprises a collection of objects in a (virtual) database used to manage entities (such as
routers and switches) in a network.
manual switch Switches normal traffic signal to the protection section, unless a failure condition exists
on other sections (including the protection section) or an equal or higher priority switch
command is in effect, by issuing a manual switch request for that normal traffic signal.
maximum transmission
unit
The largest packet of data that can be transmitted on a network. MTU size varies,
depending on the network576 bytes on X.25 networks, for example, 1500 bytes on
Ethernet, and 17,914 bytes on 16 Mbps Token Ring. Responsibility for determining the
size of the MTU lies with the link layer of the network. When packets are transmitted
across networks, the path MTU, or PMTU, represents the smallest packet size (the one
that all networks can transmit without breaking up the packet) among the networks
involved.
MBS maximum burst size
MCF See message communication function
MD See maintenance domain
MDI See medium dependent interface
Mean Time Between
Failures
The average time between consecutive failures of a piece of equipment. It is a measure
of the reliability of the system.
Mean Time To Repair The average time that a device will take to recover from a failure.
E Glossary
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
media access control A protocol at the media access control sublayer. The protocol is at the lower part of the
data link layer in the OSI model and is mainly responsible for controlling and connecting
the physical media at the physical layer. When transmitting data, the MAC protocol
checks whether to be able to transmit data. If the data can be transmitted, certain control
information is added to the data, and then the data and the control information are
transmitted in a specified format to the physical layer. When receiving data, the MAC
protocol checks whether the information is correct and whether the data is transmitted
correctly. If the information is correct and the data is transmitted correctly, the control
information is removed from the data and then the data is transmitted to the LLC layer.
media access control A protocol at the media access control sublayer. The protocol is at the lower part of the
data link layer in the OSI model and is mainly responsible for controlling and connecting
the physical media at the physical layer. When transmitting data, the MAC protocol
checks whether to be able to transmit data. If the data can be transmitted, certain control
information is added to the data, and then the data and the control information are
transmitted in a specified format to the physical layer. When receiving data, the MAC
protocol checks whether the information is correct and whether the data is transmitted
correctly. If the information is correct and the data is transmitted correctly, the control
information is removed from the data and then the data is transmitted to the LLC layer.
medium dependent
interface
The electrical and mechanical interface between the equipment and the media
transmission.
MEP See maintenance association end point
MEP maintenance end point
message
communication
function
The MCF is composed of a protocol stack that allows exchange of management
information with their prs.
MIB See management information base
MIP maintenance intermediate point
mounting ear A piece of angle plate with holes in it on a rack. It is used to fix network elements or
components.
MP See maintenance point
MPID maintenance point identification
MPLS See Multiprotocol Label Switching
MPLS L2VPN The MPLS L2VPN provides the Layer 2 VPN service based on an MPLS network. In
this case, on a uniform MPLS network, the carrier is able to provide Layer 2 VPNs of
different media types, such as ATM, FR, VLAN, Ethernet, and PPP.
MPLS OAM The MPLS OAM provides continuity check for a single LSP, and provides a set of fault
detection tools and fault correct mechanisms for MPLS networks. The MPLS OAM and
relevant protection switching components implement the detection function for the CR-
LSP forwarding plane, and perform the protection switching in 50 ms after a fault occurs.
In this way, the impact of a fault can be lowered to the minimum.
MPLS TE See multiprotocol label switching traffic engineering
E-19
MPLS TE tunnel In the case of reroute deployment, or when traffic needs to be transported through
multiple trails, multiple LSP tunnels might be used. In traffic engineering, such a group
of LSP tunnels are referred to as TE tunnels. An LSP tunnel of this kind has two
identifiers. One is the Tunnel ID carried by the SENDER object, and is used to uniquely
define the TE tunnel. The other is the LSP ID carried by the SENDER_TEMPLATE or
FILTER_SPEC object.
MS See multiplex section
MSP See multiplex section protection
MSTP See Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
MTBF See Mean Time Between Failures
MTTR See Mean Time To Repair
MTU See maximum transmission unit
Multicast A process of transmitting packets of data from one source to many destinations. The
destination address of the multicast packet uses Class D address, that is, the IP address
ranges from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. Each multicast address represents a multicast
group rather than a host.
Multiple Spanning
Tree Protocol
Multiple spanning tree protocol. The MSTP can be used in a loop network. Using an
algorithm, the MSTP blocks redundant paths so that the loop network can be trimmed
as a tree network. In this case, the proliferation and endless cycling of packets is avoided
in the loop network. The protocol that introduces the mapping between VLANs and
multiple spanning trees. This solves the problem that data cannot be normally forwarded
in a VLAN because in STP/RSTP, only one spanning tree corresponds to all the VLANs.
multiplex section The trail between and including two multiplex section trail termination functions.
multiplex section
protection
A function, which is performed to provide capability for switching a signal between and
including two multiplex section termination (MST) functions, from a "working" to a
"protection" channel.
Multiprotocol Label
Switching
A technology that uses short tags of fixed length to encapsulate packets in different link
layers, and provides connection-oriented switching for the network layer on the basis of
IP routing and control protocols. It improves the cost performance and expandability of
networks, and is beneficial to routing.
multiprotocol label
switching traffic
engineering
N/A
N
N+1 protection A radio link protection system composed of N working channels and one protection
channel.
NE See network element
NE Explorer The main operation interface, of the NMS, which is used to manage the
telecommunication equipment. In the NE Explorer, the user can query, manage and
maintain the NE, boards, and ports on a per-NE basis.
E Glossary
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
network element A network element (NE) contains both the hardware and the software running on it. One
NE is at least equipped with one system control and communication(SCC) board which
manages and monitors the entire network element. The NE software runs on the SCC
board.
Network Management
System
A system in charge of the operation, administration, and maintenance of a network.
network service access
point
A network address defined by ISO, through which entities on the network layer can
access OSI network services.
network to network
interface
An internal interface within a network linking two or more elements.
next hop The next router to which a packet is sent from any given router as it traverses a network
on its journey to its final destination.
NLP normal link pulse
NMS See Network Management System
NNI See network to network interface
node A node stands for a managed device in the network. For a device with a single frame,
one node stands for one device. For a device with multiple frames, one node stands for
one frame of the device. Therefore, a node does not always mean a device.
Node Protection A parameter of the FRR protection. It indicates that the bypass tunnel should be able to
protect the downstream node that is involved in the working tunnel and adjacent to the
PLR. The node cannot be a merge point, and the bypass tunnel should also be able to
protect the downstream link that is involved in the working tunnel and adjacent to the
PLR.
non-gateway network
element
A network element whose communication with the NM application layer must be
transferred by the gateway network element application layer.
non-GNE See non-gateway network element
NSAP See network service access point
NSF not stop forwarding
O
OAM See operation, administration and maintenance
ODF See optical distribution frame
ODU See outdoor unit
OM Operation and maintenance
One-to-One Backup A local repair method in which a backup tunnel is separately created for each protected
tunnel at a PLR.
open shortest path first A link-state, hierarchical interior gateway protocol (IGP) for network routing. Dijkstra's
algorithm is used to calculate the shortest path tree. It uses cost as its routing metric. A
link state database is constructed of the network topology which is identical on all routers
in the area.
E-21
Open Systems
Interconnection
A framework of ISO standards for communication between different systems made by
different vendors, in which the communications process is organized into seven different
categories that are placed in a layered sequence based on their relationship to the user.
Each layer uses the layer immediately below it and provides a service to the layer above.
Layers 7 through 4 deal with end-to-end communication between the message source
and destination, and layers 3 through 1 deal with network functions.
operation,
administration and
maintenance
A group of network support functions that monitor and sustain segment operation,
activities that are concerned with, but not limited to, failure detection, notification,
location, and repairs that are intended to eliminate faults and keep a segment in an
operational state and support activities required to provide the services of a subscriber
access network to users/subscribers.
optic fiber connector A device installed at the end of a fiber, optical source or receive unit. It is used to couple
the optical wave to the fiber when connected to another device of the same type. A
connector can either connect two fiber ends or connect a fiber end and an optical source
(or a detector).+
optical distribution
frame
A frame which is used to transfer and spool fibers.
orderwire A channel that provides voice communication between operation engineers or
maintenance engineers of different stations.
OSI See Open Systems Interconnection
OSPF See open shortest path first
outdoor unit The outdoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements frequency
conversion and amplification for RF signals.
Outloop A method of looping back the input signals received at a port to an output port without
changing the structure of the signals.
Output optical power The ranger of optical energy level of output signals.
E.5 P-T
This section provides the terms starting with letters P to T.
P
packet switched
network
A telecommunication network which works in packet switching mode.
Packing case A case which is used for packing the board or subrack.
Path A performance resource object defined in the network management system. The left end
of a path is a device node whose port needs to be specified and the right end of a path is
a certain IP address which can be configured by the user. By defining a path in the
network management system, a user can test the performance of a network path between
a device port and an IP address. The tested performance may be the path delay, packet
loss ratio or other aspects.
PBS See peak burst size
PCB See printed circuit board
E Glossary
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
PCI bus PCI (Peripheral Component Interconnect) bus. A high performance bus, 32-bit or 64-bit
for interconnecting chips, expansion boards, and processor/memory subsystems.
PDH See plesiochronous digital hierarchy
PDU See protocol data unit
PE See provider edge
peak burst size A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket P, that is, the maximum burst
IP packet size when the information is transferred at the peak information rate. This
parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not
less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded.
peak information rate A traffic parameter, expressed in bit/s, whose value should be not less than the committed
information rate.
penultimate hop
popping
Penultimate Hop Popping (PHP) is a function performed by certain routers in an MPLS
enabled network. It refers to the process whereby the outermost label of an MPLS tagged
packet is removed by a Label Switched Router (LSR) before the packet is passed to an
adjacent Label Edge Router (LER).
per-hop behavior IETF Diff-Serv workgroup defines forwarding behaviors of network nodes as per-hop
behaviors (PHB), such as, traffic scheduling and policing. A device in the network should
select the proper PHB behaviors, based on the value of DSCP. At present, the IETF
defines four types of PHB. They are class selector (CS), expedited forwarding (EF),
assured forwarding (AF), and best-effort (BE).
PHB See per-hop behavior
PHP See penultimate hop popping
PIR See peak information rate
plesiochronous digital
hierarchy
A multiplexing scheme of bit stuffing and byte interleaving. It multiplexes the minimum
rate 64 kit/s into the 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, and 565 Mbit/s rates.
Point-to-Point Protocol A protocol on the data link layer, provides point-to-point transmission and encapsulates
data packets on the network layer. It is located in layer 2 of the IP protocol stack.
polarization A kind of electromagnetic wave, the direction of whose electric field vector is fixed or
rotates regularly. Specifically, if the electric field vector of the electromagnetic wave is
perpendicular to the plane of horizon, this electromagnetic wave is called vertically
polarized wave; if the electric field vector of the electromagnetic wave is parallel to the
plane of horizon, this electromagnetic wave is called horizontal polarized wave; if the
tip of the electric field vector, at a fixed point in space, describes a circle, this
electromagnetic wave is called circularly polarized wave.
Power box A direct current power distribution box at the upper part of a cabinet, which supplies
power for the subracks in the cabinet.
PPP See Point-to-Point Protocol
PQ See priority queue
PRBS See pseudo random binary sequence
PRC primary reference clock
printed circuit board A board used to mechanically support and electrically connect electronic components
using conductive pathways, tracks, or traces, etched from copper sheets laminated onto
a non-conductive substrate.
E-23
priority queue An abstract data type in computer programming that supports the following three
operations: 1) InsertWithPriority: add an element to the queue with an associated priority
2) GetNext: remove the element from the queue that has the highest priority, and return
it (also known as "PopElement(Off)", or "GetMinimum") 3) PeekAtNext (optional): look
at the element with highest priority without removing it
protection ground
cable
A cable which connects the equipment and the protection grounding bar. Usually, one
half of the cable is yellow; while the other half is green.
Protection path A specific path that is part of a protection group and is labeled protection.
protocol data unit It is a data packet at the network layer of the OSI model.
provider edge A device that is located in the backbone network of the MPLS VPN structure. A PE is
responsible for VPN user management, establishment of LSPs between PEs, and
exchange of routing information between sites of the same VPN. During the process, a
PE performs the mapping and forwarding of packets between the private network and
the public channel. A PE can be a UPE, an SPE, or an NPE.
pseudo random binary
sequence
A sequence that is random in a sense that the value of an element is independent of the
values of any of the other elements, similar to real random sequences.
pseudo wire An emulated connection between two PEs for transmitting frames. The PW is established
and maintained by PEs through signaling protocols. The status information of a PW is
maintained by the two end PEs of a PW.
pseudo wire emulation
edge-to-edge
A type of end-to-end Layer 2 transmitting technology. It emulates the essential attributes
of a telecommunication service such as ATM, FR or Ethernet in a Packet Switched
Network (PSN). PWE3 also emulates the essential attributes of low speed Time Division
Multiplexed (TDM) circuit and SONET/SDH. The simulation approximates to the real
situation.
PSN See packet switched network
PTN packet transport network
PW See pseudo wire
PWE3 See pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge
Q
QinQ A layer 2 tunnel protocol based on IEEE 802.1Q encapsulation. It encapsulates the tag
of the user's private virtual local area network (VLAN) into the tag of the public VLAN.
The packet carries two layers of tags to travel through the backbone network of the
carrier. In this manner, the layer 2 virtual private network (VPN) is provided for the user.
QoS See quality of service
QPSK See quadrature phase shift keying
quadrature phase shift
keying
A modulation method of data transmission through the conversion or modulation and
the phase determination of the reference signals (carrier). It is also called the fourth period
or 4-phase PSK or 4-PSK. QPSK uses four dots in the star diagram. The four dots are
evenly distributed on a circle. On these phases, each QPSK character can perform two-
bit coding and display the codes in Gray code on graph with the minimum BER.
E Glossary
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
quality of service A commonly-used performance indicator of a telecommunication system or channel.
Depending on the specific system and service, it may relate to jitter, delay, packet loss
ratio, bit error ratio, and signal-to-noise ratio. It functions to measure the quality of the
transmission system and the effectiveness of the services, as well as the capability of a
service provider to meet the demands of users.
R
radio frequency A type of electric current in the wireless network using AC antennas to create an
electromagnetic field. It is the abbreviation of high-frequency AC electromagnetic wave.
The AC with the frequency lower than 1 kHz is called low-frequency current. The AC
with frequency higher than 10 kHz is called high-frequency current. RF can be classified
into such high-frequency current.
radio network
controller
A device in the RNS which is in charge of controlling the use and the integrity of the
radio resources.
random early detection A packet loss algorithm used in congestion avoidance. It discards the packet according
to the specified higher limit and lower limit of a queue so that global TCP synchronization
resulted in traditional Tail-Drop can be prevented.
Rapid Spanning Tree
Protocol
An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol, providing for faster spanning tree
convergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward compatible with
the STP protocol.
RDI See remote defect indication
received signal level The signal level at a receiver input terminal.
Received Signal
Strength Indicator
The received wide band power, including thermal noise and noise generated in the
receiver, within the bandwidth defined by the receiver pulse shaping filter, for TDD
within a specified timeslot. The reference point for the measurement shall be the antenna
Receiver Sensitivity Receiver sensitivity is defined as the minimum acceptable value of average received
power at point R to achieve a 1 x 10-12 BER (The FEC is open).
RED See random early detection
Reed-Solomon-Code A forward error correction code located before interleaving that enables correction of
errors induced by burst noise. Widely used error correction scheme to fight transmission
errors at the receiver site.
REI See remote error indication
remote defect
indication
A signal transmitted at the first opportunity in the outgoing direction when a terminal
detects specific defects in the incoming signal.
remote error indication A remote error indication (REI) is sent upstream to signal an error condition. There are
two types of REI alarms: Remote error indication line (REI-L) is sent to the upstream
LTE when errors are detected in the B2 byte. Remote error indication path (REI-P) is
sent to the upstream PTE when errors are detected in the B3 byte.
Request For Comments A document in which a standard, a protocol, or other information pertaining to the
operation of the Internet is published. The RFC is actually issued, under the control of
the IAB, after discussion and serves as the standard. RFCs can be obtained from sources
such as InterNIC.
E-25
Resource Reservation
Protocol
The Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) is designed for Integrated Service and is
used to reserve resources on every node along a path. RSVP operates on the transport
layer; however, RSVP does not transport application data. RSVP is a network control
protocol like Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP).
reverse pressure A traffic control method. In telecommunication, when detecting that the transmit end
transmits a large volume of traffic, the receive end sends signals to ask the transmit end
to slow down the transmission rate.
RF See radio frequency
RFC See Request For Comments
RIP See Routing Information Protocol
RMON remote network monitoring
RMON remote network monitoring
RNC See radio network controller
Root alarm An alarm directly caused by anomaly events or faults in the network. Some lower-level
alarms always accompany a root alarm.
route A route is the path that network traffic takes from its source to its destination. In a TCP/
IP network, each IP packet is routed independently. Routes can change dynamically.
route table A mapping table that stores the relationship between the original address, destination
address, short message (SM) protocol type and account. The SMSC delivers an SM to
the designated account according to the information set in the route table.
Routing Information
Protocol
A simple routing protocol that is part of the TCP/IP protocol suite. It determines a route
based on the smallest hop count between source and destination. RIP is a distance vector
protocol that routinely broadcasts routing information to its neighboring routers and is
known to waste bandwidth.
routing table A table that stores and updates the locations (addresses) of network devices. Routers
regularly share routing table information to be up to date. A router relies on the
destination address and on the information in the table that gives the possible routes--in
hops or in number of jumps--between itself, intervening routers, and the destination.
Routing tables are updated frequently as new information is available.
RSL See received signal level
RSSI See Received Signal Strength Indicator
RSTP See Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
RSVP See Resource Reservation Protocol
RTN radio transmission node
S
SD See space diversity
SDH See synchronous digital hierarchy
SEMF See synchronous equipment management function
E Glossary
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
service level agreement A service contract between a customer and a service provider that specifies the
forwarding service a customer should receive. A customer may be a user organization
(source domain) or another differentiated services domain (upstream domain). A SLA
may include traffic conditioning rules which constitute a traffic conditioning agreement
as a whole or partially.
Service Level
Agreement *
A management-documented agreement that defines the relationship between service
provider and its customer. It also provides specific, quantifiable information about
measuring and evaluating the delivery of services. The SLA details the specific operating
and support requirements for each service provided. It protects the service provider and
customer and allows the service provider to provide evidence that it has achieved the
documented target measure.
SES See severely errored second
Setup Priority The priority of the tunnel with respect to obtaining resources, ranging from 0 (indicates
the highest priority) to 7. It is used to determine whether the tunnel can preempt the
resources required by other backup tunnels.
severely errored second A one-second period which has a bit error ratio X 10-3 or at least one defect. Time
interval of one second during which a given digital signal is received with an error ratio
greater than 1 X 10 -3 (Rec. ITU R F. 592 needs correction).
SF See signal fail
SFP See small form-factor pluggable
side trough The trough on the side of the cable rack, which is used to place nuts so as to fix the
cabinet.
signal cable Common signal cables cover the E1 cable, network cable, and other non-subscriber
signal cable.
signal fail A signal that indicates the associated data has failed in the sense that a near-end defect
condition (non-degrade defect) is active.
signal to noise ratio The ratio of the amplitude of the desired signal to the amplitude of noise signals at a
given point in time. SNR is expressed as 10 times the logarithm of the power ratio and
is usually expressed in dB (Decibel).
Simple Network
Management Protocol
A network management protocol of TCP/IP. It enables remote users to view and modify
the management information of a network element. This protocol ensures the
transmission of management information between any two points. The polling
mechanism is adopted to provide basic function sets. According to SNMP, agents, which
can be hardware as well as software, can monitor the activities of various devices on the
network and report these activities to the network console workstation. Control
information about each device is maintained by a management information block.
simplex Designating or pertaining to a method of operation in which information can be
transmitted in either direction, but not simultaneously, between two points.
SLA See service level agreement
SLA* See Service Level Agreement *
Slicing To divide data into the information units proper for transmission.
small form-factor
pluggable
A specification for a new generation of optical modular transceivers.
SNC See subnetwork connection
E-27
SNCP See subnetwork connection protection
SNMP See Simple Network Management Protocol
SNR See signal to noise ratio
space diversity A diversity scheme that enables two or more antennas separated by a specific distance
to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is then performed between the two
signals to ease the impact of fading. Currently, only receive SD is used.
Spanning Tree Protocol STP is a protocol that is used in the LAN to remove the loop. STP applies to the redundant
network to block some undesirable redundant paths through certain algorithms and prune
a loop network into a loop-free tree network.
SSM See Synchronization Status Message
static virtual circuit Static virtual circuit. A static implementation of MPLS L2VPN that transfers L2VPN
information by manual configuration of VC labels, instead of by a signaling protocol.
Statistical multiplexing A multiplexing technique whereby information from multiple logical channels can be
transmitted across a single physical channel. It dynamically allocates bandwidth only to
active input channels, to make better use of available bandwidth and allow more devices
to be connected than with other multiplexing techniques. Compare with TDM.
STM See Synchronous Transport Module
STM-1 See synchronous transport mode-1
STM-N See synchronous transport module of order N
STP See Spanning Tree Protocol
sub-network Sub-network is the logical entity in the transmission network and comprises a group of
network management objects. The network that consists of a group of interconnected or
correlated NEs, according to different functions. For example, protection subnet, clock
subnet and so on. A sub-network can contain NEs and other sub-networks. Generally, a
sub-network is used to contain the equipments which are located in adjacent regions and
closely related with one another, and it is indicated with a sub-network icon on a
topological view. The U2000 supports multilevels of sub-networks. A sub-network
planning can better the organization of a network view. On the one hand, the view space
can be saved, on the other hand, it helps the network management personnel focus on
the equipments under their management.
subnet mask The technique used by the IP protocol to determine which network segment packets are
destined for. The subnet mask is a binary pattern that is stored in the client machine,
server or router and is matched with the IP address.
subnetwork connection A "transport entity" that transfers information across a subnetwork, it is formed by the
association of "ports" on the boundary of the subnetwork.
subnetwork connection
protection
A function, which allows a working subnetwork connection to be replaced by a protection
subnetwork connection if the working subnetwork connection fails, or if its performance
falls below a required level.
SVC See static virtual circuit
switch To filter, forward frames based on label or the destination address of each frame. This
behavior operates at the data link layer of the OSI model.
E Glossary
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
Synchronization Status
Message
A message that carries quality levels of timing signals on a synchronous timing link.
Nodes on an SDH network and a synchronization network acquire upstream clock
information through this message. Then the nodes can perform proper operations on their
clocks, such as tracing, switching, or converting to holdoff), and forward the
synchronization information to downstream nodes.
synchronous digital
hierarchy
A transmission scheme that follows ITU-T G.707, G.708, and G.709. It defines the
transmission features of digital signals such as frame structure, multiplexing mode,
transmission rate level, and interface code. SDH is an important part of ISDN and B-
ISDN. It interleaves the bytes of low-speed signals to multiplex the signals to high-speed
counterparts, and the line coding of scrambling is used only for signals. SDH is suitable
for the fiber communication system with high speed and a large capacity since it uses
synchronous multiplexing and flexible mapping structure.
synchronous
equipment
management function
The SEMF converts performance data and implementation specific hardware alarms into
object-oriented messages for transmission over DCCs and/or a Q interface.
synchronous transport
mode-1
Synchronous Transfer Mode at 155 Mbit/s.
Synchronous
Transport Module
An STM is the information structure used to support section layer connections in the
SDH. It consists of information payload and Section Overhead (SOH) information fields
organized in a block frame structure which repeats every 125. The information is suitably
conditioned for serial transmission on the selected media at a rate which is synchronized
to the network. A basic STM is defined at 155 520 kbit/s. This is termed STM-1. Higher
capacity STMs are formed at rates equivalent to N times this basic rate. STM capacities
for N = 4, N = 16 and N = 64 are defined; higher values are under consideration.
synchronous transport
module of order N
A STM-N is the information structure used to support section layer connections in SDH.
See ITU-T Recommendation G. 707 for STM modules of order 1, 4, 16 and 64.
T
tail drop A type of QoS. When a queue within a network router reaches its maximum length,
packet drops can occur. When a packet drop occurs, connection-based protocols such as
TCP slow down their transmission rates in an attempt to let queued packets be serviced,
thereby letting the queue empty. This is also known as tail drop because packets are
dropped from the input end (tail) of the queue.
Tail drop A congestion management mechanism, in which packets arrive later are discarded when
the queue is full. This policy of discarding packets may result in network-wide
synchronization due to the TCP slow startup mechanism.
TCI tag control information
TCP See Transmission Control Protocol
TDM See time division multiplexing
TE See traffic engineering
TEDB See traffic engineering database
Telecommunication
Management Network
A protocol model defined by ITU-T for managing open systems in a communications
network. An architecture for management, including planning, provisioning, installation,
maintenance, operation and administration of telecommunications equipment, networks
and services.
E-29
TIM trace identifier mismatch
time division
multiplexing
A multiplexing technology. TDM divides the sampling cycle of a channel into time slots
(TSn, n=0, 1, 2, 3), and the sampling value codes of multiple signals engross time slots
in a certain order, forming multiple multiplexing digital signals to be transmitted over
one channel.
time to live A technique used in best-effort delivery systems to prevent packets that loop endlessly.
The TTL is set by the sender to the maximum time the packet is allowed to be in the
network. Each router in the network decrements the TTL field when the packet arrives,
and discards any packet if the TTL counter reaches zero.
TMN See Telecommunication Management Network
ToS priority A ToS sub-field (the bits 0 to 2 in the ToS field) in the ToS field of the IP packet header.
TPS See tributary protection switch
traffic engineering A technology that is used to dynamically monitor the traffic of the network and the load
of the network elements, to adjust in real time the parameters such as traffic management
parameters, route parameters and resource restriction parameters, and to optimize the
utilization of network resources. The purpose is to prevent the congestion caused by
unbalanced loads.
traffic engineering
database
TEDB is the abbreviation of the traffic engineering database. MPLS TE needs to know
the features of the dynamic TE of every links by expanding the current IGP, which uses
the link state algorithm, such as OSPF and IS-IS. The expanded OSPF and IS-IS contain
some TE features, such as the link bandwidth and color. The maximum reserved
bandwidth of the link and the unreserved bandwidth of every link with priority are rather
important. Every router collects the information about TE of every links in its area and
generates TE DataBase. TEDB is the base of forming the dynamic TE path in the MPLS
TE network.
Traffic shaping It is a way of controlling the network traffic from a computer to optimize or guarantee
the performance and minimize the delay. It actively adjusts the output speed of traffic
in the scenario that the traffic matches network resources provided by the lower layer
devices, avoiding packet loss and congestion.
Transmission Control
Protocol
The protocol within TCP/IP that governs the breakup of data messages into packets to
be sent via IP (Internet Protocol), and the reassembly and verification of the complete
messages from packets received by IP. A connection-oriented, reliable protocol (reliable
in the sense of ensuring error-free delivery), TCP corresponds to the transport layer in
the ISO/OSI reference model.
tributary protection
switch
Tributary protection switching, a function provided by the equipment, is intended to
protect N tributary processing boards through a standby tributary processing board.
trTCM See two rate three color marker
TTL See time to live
TU tributary unit
Tunnel A channel on the packet switching network that transmits service traffic between PEs.
In VPN, a tunnel is an information transmission channel between two entities. The tunnel
ensures secure and transparent transmission of VPN information. In most cases, a tunnel
is an MPLS tunnel.
E Glossary
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
two rate three color
marker
The trTCM meters an IP packet stream and marks its packets based on two rates, Peak
Information Rate (PIR) and Committed Information Rate (CIR), and their associated
burst sizes to be either green, yellow, or red. A packet is marked red if it exceeds the
PIR. Otherwise it is marked either yellow or green depending on whether it exceeds or
doesn't exceed the CIR.
E.6 U-Z
This section provides the terms starting with letters U to Z.
U
U-VLAN A VLAN attribute indicating that the current VLAN is a user VLAN of an M-VLAN.
Multicast services are copied from the M-VLAN to the user VLAN.
UAS unavailable second
UBR See unspecified bit rate
UDP See User Datagram Protocol
underfloor cabling The cables connected cabinets and other devices are routed underfloor.
UNI See user network interface
unicast The process of sending data from a source to a single recipient.
unspecified bit rate No commitment to transmission. No feedback to congestion. This type of service is ideal
for the transmission of IP datagrams. In case of congestion, UBR cells are discarded,
and no feedback or request for slowing down the data rate is delivered to the sender.
upload An operation to report some or all configuration data of an NE to the NMS(Network
Management system). The configuration data then covers the configuration data stored
at the NMS side.
User Datagram
Protocol
A TCP/IP standard protocol that allows an application program on one device to send a
datagram to an application program on another. User Datagram Protocol (UDP) uses IP
to deliver datagrams. UDP provides application programs with the unreliable
connectionless packet delivery service. Thus, UDP messages can be lost, duplicated,
delayed, or delivered out of order. UDP is used to try to transmit the data packet, that is,
the destination device does not actively confirm whether the correct data packet is
received.
user network interface The interface between user equipment and private or public network equipment (for
example, ATM switches).
V
V-UNI See virtual user-network interface
variable bit rate One of the traffic classes used by ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode). Unlike a
permanent CBR (Constant Bit Rate) channel, a VBR data stream varies in bandwidth
and is better suited to non real time transfers than to real-time streams such as voice calls.
VBR See variable bit rate
VC See virtual container
E-31
VCC See virtual channel connection
VCG See virtual concatenation group
VCI See virtual channel identifier
VCTRUNK A virtual concatenation group applied in data service mapping, also called the internal
port of a data service processing board
virtual channel
connection
The VC logical trail that carries data between two end points in an ATM network. A
logical grouping of multiple virtual channel connections into one virtual connection.
virtual channel
identifier
A 16-bit field in the header of an ATM cell. The VCI, together with the VPI, is used to
identify the next destination of a cell as it passes through a series of ATM switches on
its way to its destination.
virtual concatenation
group
A group of co-located member trail termination functions that are connected to the same
virtual concatenation link
virtual container The information structure used to support path layer connections in the SDH. It consists
of information payload and path Overhead (POH) information fields organized in a block
frame structure which repeats every 125 or 500 s.
virtual local area
network
A logical grouping of two or more nodes which are not necessarily on the same physical
network segment but which share the same IP network number. This is often associated
with switched Ethernet.
virtual path identifier The field in the Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) cell header that identifies to which
virtual path the cell belongs.
virtual private LAN
service
A type of point-to-multipoint L2VPN service provided over the public network. VPLS
enables geographically isolated user sites to communicate with each other through the
MAN/WAN as if they are on the same LAN.
virtual private network A system configuration, where the subscriber is able to build a private network via
connections to different network switches that may include private network capabilities.
virtual route forward VRF performs the function of establishing multiple virtual routing devices on one actual
routing device. That is, the L3 interfaces of the device are distributed to different VRFs,
performing the function of establishing multiple virtual route forwarding instances on
the device.
virtual user-network
interface
A virtual user-network interface, works as an action point to perform service
classification and traffic control in HQoS.
VLAN See virtual local area network
voice over IP An IP telephony term for a set of facilities used to manage the delivery of voice
information over the Internet. VoIP involves sending voice information in a digital form
in discrete packets rather than by using the traditional circuit-committed protocols of the
public switched telephone network (PSTN).
VoIP See voice over IP
VPI See virtual path identifier
VPLS See virtual private LAN service
VPN See virtual private network
VRF See virtual route forward
E Glossary
Issue 03 (2011-04-10)
W
wait to restore The number of minutes to wait before services are switched back to the working line.
WAN See wide area network
Web LCT The local maintenance terminal of a transport network, which is located on the NE
management layer of the transport network
weighted fair queuing A fair queue scheduling algorithm based on bandwidth allocation weights. This
scheduling algorithm allocates the total bandwidth of an interface to queues, according
to their weights and schedules the queues cyclically. In this manner, packets of all priority
queues can be scheduled.
weighted random early
detection
A packet loss algorithm used for congestion avoidance. It can prevent the global TCP
synchronization caused by traditional tail-drop. WRED is favorable for the high-priority
packet when calculating the packet loss ratio.
weighted round Robin N/A
WFQ See weighted fair queuing
wide area network A network composed of computers which are far away from each other which are
physically connected through specific protocols. WAN covers a broad area, such as a
province, a state or even a country.
winding pipe A tool for fiber routing, which acts as the corrugated pipe.
WRED See weighted random early detection
WRR See weighted round Robin
WTR See wait to restore
X
XPIC See cross polarization interference cancellation
E-33

RTN 950 IDU Hardware Description PDF

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originalbeschreibung:

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

RTN 950 IDU Hardware Description PDF

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

OptiX RTN 950 Radio Transmission System

Das könnte Ihnen auch gefallen